You are on page 1of 492

Introduction

Introduction
This introductory chapter outlines the structure of the ArchiCAD
Reference Guide and highlights the new features found in
ArchiCAD 6.0.

Chapter 1: The ArchiCAD Workplace presents each of the


interface components with respect to the role they play in your
overall work environment.
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts examines the implementation of basic
architectural concepts in ArchiCAD’s Virtual Building.
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques concentrates on the
construction aids, techniques and tips available for constructing
Virtual Building elements.
Chapter 4: The Tools explores the ArchiCAD Toolbox. It reviews
the general settings available for each tool and provides a detailed
description of specific options and techniques for getting the most
out of the tool.
Chapter 5: The Menus discusses ArchiCAD’s pulldown menus.
Each menu item is described, including details on how that menu
item is used.
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library introduces element types
stored in outside files, including Doors, Windows, Lamps, general
Objects and calculation database components such as Zone
stamps and Property Objects.
Wrapping up the ArchiCAD Reference Guide is a powerful and
comprehensive Index organized by function as well as by name.
See also...
Throughout this Guide you’ll find the See also... reference header,
which guide you to related topics.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


1
Introduction

New Features in Version 6.0


Architectural Modeling
New Wall types
Two new wall types are available as Wall Construction Methods of
the Wall. The Trapezoid Wall, with non-parallel wall surfaces, is
defined by a starting and ending point of the reference line and a
starting and final thickness. The Polygon Wall can be defined by
its cornerpoints. The width, offset and direction parameters do not
apply here. Polygonal walls are edited the same way as other
polygonal elements.
For more info see: The Wall tool in Chapter 4 and Editing
Polygons under Construction Techniques in Chapter 3.
Mesh Tool
The new Mesh tool creates irregular polygonal surfaces based on
3D vertices. A mesh can be edited like any other polygonal
element, and may contain holes. Elevation of vertices can be
defined separately. An optional vertical “skirt” can be defined as
well. Hip Roofs from previous ArchiCAD versions are converted
into Mesh elements.
For more info see: The Mesh tool in Chapter 4 and Editing
Polygons under Construction Techniques in Chapter 3.
Composites for Roofs
In addition to Walls and Slabs, composite structures can now be
assigned to Roofs. The clean intersection of such elements is
ensured even if their thickness (i.e. the type of the composite
structure) has been modified.
For more info see: The Roof tool in Chapter 4 and the
Composites… command description in the Options menu
section of Chapter 5.
Trimming Elements to Roof
In version 6.0, trimmimg of elements with an individual roof
surface is not limited to walls and columns. Apart from these two
types of elements it is also possible to trim the top or the bottom of
slabs, windows, doors and even library parts to a roof surface. If
walls are cut with a complex roof shape, no splitting of the wall is

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


2
Introduction

necessary. Even concave wall shapes are possible, as the walls are
now cut by the roof polygon instead of an infinite plane.
For more info see: The Trim to Roof… command
description in the Options menu section of Chapter 5 and the
Roof tool in Chapter 4.

3D Editing and Navigation


Direct editing is now possible in the 3D Window in both
axonometric and perspective view. Selected elements can be
graphically dragged and elevated, library parts can be stretched,
and wall heights and slab thicknesses can be modified. New
elements can also be created or placed in the 3D Window.
Interactive navigation is also possible.

For more info see: Working in the 3D Window under


Construction Techniques in Chapter 3.

2D Productivity
New Relative Construction Methods
In the modified Control Box, Relative Construction Methods
enables the use of perpendicular, parallel, bisectrix, offset and
multiple offset construction methods.
For more info see: The Control Box under Construction
Techniques in Chapter 3.
New Snap Points
New and enhanced snap controls make it possible to find any kind
of division points of elements in the Floor Plan. Elements can be
halved, divided into any number of equal parts, or divided
according to a ratio or a distance. Temporary hotspots appear at
the division points, vanishing after a few seconds or after
completing construction.
For more info see: The Control Box under Construction
Techniques in Chapter 3.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


3
Introduction

Magic Wand Tool


The Magic Wand tool transforms shapes into any other element
types. When clicking into empty space, it will look around for
surrounding construction elements.
For more info see: The Control Box under Construction
Techniques in Chapter 3.
Ellipse Generation
Three new geometry methods for the Arc/Circle tool allow you to
draw ellipses by defining either the bounding box, the center
point and one corner of the bounding box, or the two axes. An
Ellipse can also be transformed into any 3D element.
For more info see: The Arc/Circle tool in Chapter 4.
Exploding Elements
Elements including objects, doors or windows can be exploded
into 2D lines and arcs. These elements are grouped after
explosion, so they can still be handled like single elements, but
can also be modified with 2D tools.

For more info see: The Tools menu commands in Chapter 5.


Boolean Operations for Polygons
Polygon-type elements (slabs, roofs, fills, zones) can be merged
into or extracted from each other using the new icons of the pet
palette.
For more info see: Editing Polygons under Construction
Techniques in Chapter 3.
Creating Patches
A Patch is a new type of library part with only 2D information. It
inherits the content of a marquee area in the form of an opaque
2D symbol. This symbol can be edited and made parametric as a
library part. When placed, the Patch is inserted in the drawing

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


4
Introduction

order so that it covers all the elements below. This type of work is
ideal for detailing drawings.

For more info see: The Tools menu commands in Chapter 5.


Symbol Hatch
Custom-made vectorial symbol hatches can be created, similarly to
the concept of Symbol Lines, by copying 2D elements drawn on
the Floor Plan that can be stretched parametrically.
For more info see: The Fill types command under Options
in Chapter 5.
Resize
A new command in the Edit menu makes it possible to resize the
base geometry of elements by a ratio that can be defined with
numbers (there are three different ways to choose from) or
graphically. The command can affect certain types of elements
optionally.
For more info see: The Resize command under Edit in
Chapter 5.
Updating Zones
Zones can now be updated so that if walls are moved, the zone
element automatically finds the new outline of the room. Some of
the contour segments can be made static, while other segments
behave dynamically.
For more info see: The Update Zones… command
description in the Tools menu section of Chapter 5.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


5
Introduction

Rotated Grid System


The Coordinate Box contains two new tools. One tool rotates the
Infinite Grid System and Mouse Constraints and position
feedbacks appear according to this new angle. With another tool
you can switch between the original and the rotated Grid System.
For more info see: The description of the Grid options
under the Coordinate Box in Chapter 2.
Elevation and Gravity Controls
The Coordinate Box now contains the current Z coordinates of
elements on the Floor Plan as well as the Gravity control buttons
that allow the placement of newly created elements on top of
existing ones..
For more info see: The description of the Grid options
under the Coordinate Box in Chapter 2.

Advanced Listing Features


The renewed Calculate Menu allows you to view numeric data and
descriptive or even graphical information about your project. At
the core of the property data structure is the Property Object type
Library part which stores details such as manufacturer, price,
schedule symbol, and other properties. Basic numeric
(Component) and descriptive (Descriptor) data is stored in single
text type databases, whose records can be referred to from within
Library Parts. Lists can be laid out either as raw text or in a
formatted graphical content using templates.
For more info see: The Calculate Menu in Chapter 5 and
Performing Calculations in Chapter 6.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


6
Chapter 1: The ArchiCAD Workplace

Chapter 1
The ArchiCAD Workplace
This chapter introduces the visible elements of the Ar chiCAD
working environment. It will help you find your way around the
ArchiCAD Workplace and understand the role each component
plays in using ArchiCAD.

Beyond the Drafting Table:


the Virtual Construction Site
In many respects the ArchiCAD workplace is similar to
conventional design and drafting environments. We like to think
that ArchiCAD begins where your drafting table leaves off: you can
work with actual construction elements and create a virtual
building.
The ArchiCAD workplace is designed to provide you with tools
that look and feel comfortable, but have all the power and
precision available to a computerized system.
Once you have started the program you will see the ArchiCAD
Workplace on your screen, complete with a Floor Plan Worksheet,
Menubar, floating palettes, and other windows displaying various
aspects of the project. These elements are introduced in the next
few sections of this chapter. Detailed discussions of these items are
presented in Chapter 2: Basic Concepts, Chapter 3: Construction
Techniques, Chapter 4: The Tools, and Chapter 5: The Menu
Commands.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


7
Chapter 1: The ArchiCAD Workplace

Startup Dialog Box


On first starting ArchiCAD, a dialog box is displayed, asking you to
identify yourself and choose the next job for the program.

The options are as follows:


- Create a new Solo Project;
- Open the last saved Solo Project or Draft file (in TeamWork-
capable copies);
- Sign In to an existing Team Project (in TeamWork-capable
copies);
- Open any Solo Project or Draft file (in TeamWork-capable
copies) by going to the Directory dialog box.
This dialog box is displayed every time you launch ArchiCAD. If
you don't wish to see it, check the Don't display this dialog box
next time checkbox. To see it again, select Display Startup Dialog
Box in the Options/Preferences/Miscellaneous dialog box.

Construction and Display Windows


You can construct your model in ArchiCAD's main windows
displaying different views of the project.
- The Floor Plan worksheet is the basic construction area
where most editing operations take place.
- The 3D Window gives you instant feedback on the
construction operations performed in other views and at the
same time allows you to directly edit your model in either
perspective or axonometric view.
- Any number of Section/Elevation windows can defined by a
dedicated tool at any moment, at any location.
- Model Pictures are photorealistic images generated from the
current view displayed in the 3D Window.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


8
Chapter 1: The ArchiCAD Workplace

The Floor Plan Window


The center of the ArchiCAD workplace is the Floor Plan
Worksheet. This window simultaneously plays two key roles:
- It displays a representation of the current project as a
traditional architectural drawing;
- It is a 2D/3D modeling environment in which all the designing
editing of the project are performed.
Though the Floor Plan is a 2D view, special 3D relations between
building components can be defined here.

The Floor Plan window is also a starting point for exporting


drawings originating from the floor plan into various file formats.
The Floor Plan Worksheet is a window into an arbitrarily large
drawing space. You can pan and zoom the window within the full
drawing space to obtain the best view of the work you are
currently doing.
Although the ArchiCAD worksheet is infinite, by using the scroll
box or by clicking in the grey area beside it in the scroll bar, you
can only move in the empty space beyond the actual model by
about one third of the size of the model. If you wish to go further,
you can do so using the scrolling arrows or the Pan command or
button.
When working in the Floor Plan window, you can use all or most
of the functions offered by the floating palettes and other interface
components.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


9
Chapter 1: The ArchiCAD Workplace

The 3D Window
The 3D Window is used both for three dimensional visualization
of an architectural project and for refining the design directly in
3D. It is directly linked to the Floor Plan Worksheet and to the
Section/Elevation Windows.
Either the complete project or just the parts you select can be
displayed in the 3D Window. Block, wireframe, hidden line or
shaded views are available in all types of parallel and perspective
projections.
- In the design phase, the 3D Window will serve as a source of
visual feedback for your work in 2D and for constructing and
modifying building components directly in 3D.
- In the production phase of your project, accurate 3D images
optimized for plotter output are also generated in this
window.

The model displayed in the 3D Window can be post-processed by


the PhotoRendering feature, or exported in a variety of 2D or 3D
file formats for other applications.
Existing construction elements can be edited and modified in the
3D Window and new ones can be created. Any changes made on
the Floor Plan or in any of the Section/Elevation windows will be
visible in the 3D window and vice versa.
Most construction aids are available in the 3D Window.
See also…
The Working in the 3D Window section of Chapter 3, as well as
the Image menu and Window menu sections in Chapter 5.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


10
Chapter 1: The ArchiCAD Workplace

Section/Elevation Windows
The Section/Elevation tool in the Toolbox allows you to generate
any number of sections or elevations of your project in separate
windows.
There are two types of Sections/Elevations:
- Models consist of construction elements and any changes
made in these windows will automatically be updated in the
Floor Plan window. This means working in a Model window is
another way to access the digital building.

- Drawings are made up of 2D fills and lines only. Thus,


changes made in this type of Section window do not appear
on the Floor Plan.

See also…
Working in Section/Elevation in Chapter 3, the Section/Elevation
tool in Chapter 4, and the Display menu commands in Chapter 5.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


11
Chapter 1: The ArchiCAD Workplace

Model Picture Windows


Any number of photorealistic images of the model in the 3D
Window can be generated using the PhotoRendering feature.
A PhotoRendered image is a “snapshot”. When finished, you can
keep it as a separate file, independent from the model, by using
the Save or Save as… command under File. The projection type or
the image size cannot be changed afterwards.
Model Pictures are not editable. You can copy a part of the picture
with the Marquee tool and paste it as a Figure into the Floor Plan
or Section/Elevation window.

PhotoRendered images can be exported to image-processing


applications for retouching.
Model Pictures are listed in a hierarchical menu of the Window
menu, together with picture files in GIF, PICT, BMP, WMF, EMF,
TIFF, JPEG opened with the File/Open command.
Note: Neither Model Pictures generated by ArchiCAD nor
external files opened with File/Open are kept as part of the
project when saving it. You will have to save the individual
windows as separate files if you wish to keep them.
See also…
For a more detailed explanation of the PhotoRendering feature,
see Chapter 5.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


12
Chapter 1: The ArchiCAD Workplace

Library Part Windows


Library parts are parametric prefabricated complex elements
created either by ArchiCAD or a third party application and used
as units in Projects. Library parts are opened in separate windows.
See also…
The complete description of Library Part windows can be found in
Chapter 6, the ArchiCAD Library.

Calculation Windows
ArchiCAD provides different options for viewing on screen the
quantity calculations for either the whole project, selected sets of
elements, or zones.
Element and Component List windows will display a detailed list
of quantities of either the whole project or any desired part or
subset of it. ArchiCAD combines the building components of the
project with the Properties descriptions residing in the Object
Library to provide a detailed list of the elements and their user-
defined components.

Zone List windows display a detailed list of quantities of either all


the zones of a project or selected ones. Zones are Floor Plan
spatial units including rooms, groups of rooms or even larger parts
of the project defined with the Zone tool.
The lists displayed in these windows can be exported into a
variety of file formats for further processing.
See also…
The Calculate menu commands and the Save command
description in the File menu section of Chapter 5, as well as
Performing Calculations in Chapter 6.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


13
Chapter 1: The ArchiCAD Workplace

Auxiliary Windows
A number of secondary windows are available at any time for
displaying information about the current state of the project. These
include the Project Notes, the Project Preview, the imaging and
listing Report and the Missing Library Parts windows.

The Project Notes Window


This window works like a note pad. You can use it to enter written
notes about the project, comments for fellow designers, or to keep
track of the time spent on a particular job. You can access it at any
time, no matter which window you are currently working on, by
simply choosing the Project Notes command from the Window
menu.

Whenever you open the Project Notes window, the date and time
will be updated and a blinking insertion point marker will appear
next to the current date and time. Any text entered here is saved
with your Project.

The Project Preview Window


You can paste in this window a photorendered image of your
project. This preview is shown in the dialog box in order to make
the identification of files easier.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


14
Chapter 1: The ArchiCAD Workplace

The Report Window


This window displays information about the imaging and listing
process, provided that you have checked the Write Report option
in Options/Preferences/Imaging and Listing (Chapter 5).

The Missing Library Parts Window


The Missing Library Parts window displays the list of external files
that currently used elements or attributes refer to but are missing
from the library chosen for loading with the project.
Note: In order to ensure that no library parts are missing from
your project, choose the Save Special/Archive command from
the File menu.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


15
Chapter 1: The ArchiCAD Workplace

Other Interface Components


The Menubar
The Menubar is a familiar sight in most Macintosh and Windows
applications. It provides an entry point to additional functions
provided by ArchiCAD.
When you select a menu title, a list of related menu commands is
displayed for your selection. Depending on which window is at
the front, menu commands not available for the contents of the
open window will become dimmed.
Note: In a Windows environment, a customizable Toolbar can also
be displayed under the Menubar, hosting a wide range of shortcuts
for frequently used commands and actions.
See also…
ArchiCAD menu commands are described in detail in Chapter 5.

Display Bar Shortcut Icons


All graphic windows contain, next to their bottom scroll bar, a set
of icons allowing you easy access to a number of Display menu
commands and other viewing options.

- Clicking the Scale button is a shortcut for choosing the Floor


Plan Scale (or Section Scale) command from the Options
menu.
- The Zoom Level button continuously displays the current
zoom level (in percent of the Actual Size). Double-clicking this
area has the same effect as choosing the Actual Size command
(Display menu).
- Clicking the QuickViews button brings the QuickViews palette
to the front. This is equivalent to clicking on the QuickViews
palette’s title bar or choosing the Show QuickViews item in
the Window menu’s Floating Palettes submenu.
- The last set of buttons, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Pan, Fit in
Window, Next View and Previous View, are basically the
equivalents of the commands of the same name on the
Display menu. Moreover, double-clicking on the Zoom In or
Zoom Out icons results in a 200% magnification or a 50%
reduction respectively.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


16
Chapter 1: The ArchiCAD Workplace

Floating Palettes
A large number of floating palettes are available when working in
ArchiCAD. The following sections provide a description of the
individual boxes and palettes and sum up their availability for the
different window types.

The Toolbox
The Toolbox on the left edge of the screen shows a variety of tools
for selection, 3D construction. 2D drawing and visualization.
See also…
The description of the tools with their common and specific
features in Chapter 4.

The Coordinate Box


The Coordinate Box shows you the precise location of the
ArchiCAD cursor within both the Cartesian and polar coordinate
system for your drawing.

In addition to allowing you to position the mouse accurately, the


Coordinate Box enables you to enter numeric drawing coordinates
for greater precision.
The Coordinate Box also houses the Origin, Grid and Gravity
control icons.
The Coordinate Box is available when working in any construction
window.
See also…
The use of the Coordinate Box is discussed in detail in Chapter 2.

The Control Box


The Control Box contains a number of highly sophisticated and
often-used drawing aids in the form of icons.

Available options include Relative Construction Methods, Cursor


Snap and Special Point Snap controls, the Suspend Groups switch
and the Magic Wand tool for conversion between element types.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


17
Chapter 1: The ArchiCAD Workplace

When maximizing the Control Box, it also includes a Prompt Box


displaying messages on what action is next expected from you.
The Control Box is only available when working in any of the
construction windows.
See also…
More detailed information on using the Control Box is presented
in Chapter 3.

The Info Box


The Info Box floating palette gives you instant feedback on
construction elements. It also allows you to reach the settings of
any element and directly modify their parameters.

The Info Box displays the icon of the active tool together with its
current construction and geometry method, the current elevation
or font size values, the name of the currently set library part,
fillpattern, font or line type, the current fillpattern and layer name.
When several elements are selected, the displayed information
concerns the last selected element.
If several elements overlap, successive clicking with the
Checkmark cursor (in Arrow mode) will cycle through the
selection markers of the available elements.
Elevation values are always measured from the Project Zero Level,
except for Doors and Windows where they are measured from the
bottom of the wall.
The Info Box is only available when working in any of the
construction windows.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


18
Chapter 1: The ArchiCAD Workplace

The QuickViews Palette


The QuickViews palette allows you to move around different
preset and user-defined views at various zoom levels and
locations, both on the floor plan worksheet and in Section/
Elevation windows.

It can also help you keep track of and easily access the Stories and
Sections/Elevations you create in the course of your work.
See also…
A detailed description of the way QuickViews work is given in
Chapter 2.

The 3D Navigation Palette


The 3D Navigation Palette helps you to create and display real
time fly-throughs of your project and to switch among views of the
construction elements you wish to edit. The 3D Navigation palette
also coordinates the different camera movements and paths.

This palette is only available when working in the 3D Window.


See also ...
An exhaustive description of the 3D Navigation palette's
functionality is given in Chapter 3 under Working with elements in
3D.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


19
Chapter 1: The ArchiCAD Workplace

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


20
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

Chapter 2
Basic Concepts
Before you start your project, you need to know how ar chitectural
concepts are managed in ArchiCAD, including Scales, Grids,
Coordinates, Stories and Layers. You will also find it useful to
learn how existing elements can be selected, gr ouped and locked
for optimal management.

Scale
Traditional concepts of architectural scale do not apply to the
ArchiCAD worksheet, because you are building a real size digital
building.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


21
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

Normally, you will vary the size of the worksheet and the area it
displays based on what you are drawing at the time.
You can change the magnification of this window or move freely
over the working area using the Display menu commands, for
example Zoom, Pan and Fit in Window (or their Display Bar
equivalents), as well as the horizontal and vertical scroll bars.

The scale you set is only important when you wish to preview
your printout on the screen.
The current scale and zoom levels are shown on the Display bar.
Double-clicking the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons results in a
200% magnification and a 50% reduction respectively, while
clicking the Zoom Level button displays the Project at its Actual
Size (100%).
A set of structural grid lines (the ArchiCAD Grid System) on the
worksheet provides a visual clue as to the current zoom level. The
ArchiCAD Grid System is described in a later section of this
chapter.
The Coordinate Box (shown below) always displays the actual size
and location of the element you are drawing, regardless of the
current zoom level and project scale.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


22
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

The values shown in the Coordinate Box can be displayed in


various units. To change measurement units, use the Preferences/
Drawing Units command in the Options menu.
See also...
The descriptions of the Display bar in Chapter 1, the Display menu
commands and the available measurement units from Options/
Preferences in Chapter 5 offer additional insight.

Scale & Output


Traditional concepts of architectural scale (for example 1:1000, or
1/4" =1') become important only when you are creating a scaled
hard copy of your project, or exporting the project into either
PlotMaker or bitmap picture formats for post-processing in another
application.

Setting a Drawing Scale


ArchiCAD can output your project to a printer or plotter at any
scale you select.
To set a scale factor for the project:
1) Access the Floor Plan Scale command (Options menu) or click
in the Scale button on the Display bar of the Floor Plan
window.
2) Type your scale selection into the entry field in the following
dialog box or choose one of the preset scale factors in the
pop-up menu.

The current scale factor and zoom level (a percentage of the actual
size) are shown in the Display Bar.
Note: Once you have set a scale for a project, it is maintained
if you export the project using the DXF or DWG format.
Specifying an Output Scale
The ArchiCAD Print and Plot dialog boxes allow you to specify an
output scale each time you print or plot your work. See the Print
and Plot commands in Chapter 5.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


23
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

Actual Size
In addition to these scaling options, you can display your project
at actual size on screen by using the Actual Size command in the
Display menu or by clicking the Zoom level button on the Display
bar.
The Actual Size option displays a scaled image of your project on
the screen, as indicated by the “100%” zoom level in the Display
Bar.
See also…
The Display menu section in Chapter 5.
Scaled vs. Fixed Size Elements
According to their behavior at different scales, there are two types
of elements in ArchiCAD.
Scaled elements are rescaled according to their real size
whenever you change the project scale. Scaled elements include
all construction elements such as Walls, Objects, Slabs etc.
Fixed Size elements are printed or displayed on the screen at the
size you specify regardless of the scale selected for the project. For
elements that do not have any real size such as text blocks,
dimensions and arrowheads, you can specify a fixed size defined
in either points or millimeters.
When printing, ArchiCAD allows you to choose whether or not
you want the program to reduce or enlarge this type of element as
the drawing is reduced or enlarged according to the ratio of
drawing scale and printing scale. In order to avoid problems, Scale
is the recommended choice.
Dashed and symbol line types as well as vectorial and symbol fill
types can be defined as optionally fixed or scaled. You can set this
characteristic for each line type or fill pattern in the Line Types and
Fill Types dialog boxes (Options menu). This setting is valid for
the whole project and cannot be changed for individual
construction elements.
Changing the Project Scale
If you change the Project scale, the current view will change
accordingly, while the magnification will remain constant, i. e.,
fixed size elements will appear unchanged on screen.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


24
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

The Coordinate Box


The ArchiCAD Coordinate Box provides you with information
about your location in the worksheet window, about the Origin
and the states of the Grid.
The controls available from the Coordinate Box include, from left
to right:

- the User Origin button allows you to relocate the origin


anywhere in the Project;
- the Skewed Grid button defines the angle of the skewed grid;
- the Grid Switch icons allows you to toggle between the
normal and skewed grids;
- the Cartesian and Polar Coordinate fields display and
allow you to numerically enter coordinates while drafting;
- the Gravity icons place elements relative to existing Slabs or
Roofs;
- the Elevation (z coordinate) field displays and allows you to
edit the height or elevation of elements;
- the Elevation pop-up menu allows you to choose whether
the Elevation coordinate field will display absolute or relative
values.
All of these controls will be discussed in the following paragraphs,
grouped under four major themes: Origins, Coordinates, Grids
and Gravity/Elevation.

Origins
All ArchiCAD drawing is performed in an invisible two-
dimensional coordinate system. Like in any coordinate system, all
measurements are made in reference to an origin.
ArchiCAD defines three coordinate system origins:
- The Project Origin is a constant location which remains
fixed for the life of your project.
- The User Origin is an aid to drafting and measurements. The
User Origin can be moved to any location, allowing you to
“reset the zero point” to any location. This is often helpful
when you need to draw elements with respect to existing
walls, slabs or other components.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


25
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

- The Edit Origin appears only during drafting and editing


operations and is used to display the distance and angle of a
rubberband line from the startpoint of a drawing operation.
In Floor Plan and other 2D views, the origin is always marked by a
bold X called the Origin Indicator, while in 3D, the three
coordinate axes appear as a visual clue to the reference planes
along which editing can be performed.
When you move the origin by specifying a User Origin or drawing
a new element, the Origin Indicator is relocated to show the new
origin.
See also…
The Working in the 3D Window section of Chapter 3.

Creating a User Origin


By default, the Project Origin of the coordinate system is close to
the lower left corner of the startup screen.
There are two ways to create a User Origin:
- at any construction node by using the Alt-Shift key
combination;
- at any location by using the User Origin button from the
Coordinate Box.
When using the Alt-Shift method:
Hold down both the Alt (or Option) and Shift keys while moving
the cursor to the construction node where you want the origin
located.

When using the User Origin button:


In addition to being able to place the origin at any construction
node, this method allows you to move the origin where nothing is
currently drawn.
1) Click the User Origin button.
2) Click at any point in the Floor Plan. The Origin is instantly
relocated there.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


26
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

The user origin cannot be moved to preceding nodes of an


element presently being constructed.
To return the origin to the Project Origin, double-click the User
Origin button. Alternately, you can also select the current User
Origin with the Arrow tool (or by shift-clicking it when any other
tool is active) and press the Delete key.

The Coordinate Value Fields


The Coordinate Box displays the Cartesian and Polar coordinates
of the current cursor position. You can toggle between Absolute
and Relative coordinate value display during drafting or editing by
clicking its Delta (∆) icons:
- Absolute values show the horizontal, vertical, radial and
angular distance of the cursor from the Project Origin or a
User Origin but never from an Edit Origin.
- Relative values show the horizontal, vertical, radial and
angular position of the cursor relative either to the Project
Origin, to a User Origin before any element is begun, or to an
Edit Origin once a drafting or editing process is under way.
In general, viewing Absolute Cartesian and Relative Polar
coordinates provides the most information, and is the most useful
under normal circumstances.
With a well chosen User Origin, Absolute Cartesian displays your
position relative to important locations in your project, while
Relative Polar values show the direction and length of elements as
you draw them.

Measuring Distances
To measure the distance between two nodes:
1) Move the User Origin to the first node.
2) Position the cursor over the second node.
3) Read the x, y and r values in the Coordinate Box.
Either absolute or relative coordinates may be used for measuring.
If you do not want to move the User Origin, start drawing a line
between the two points, read the coordinates, and then cancel the
line.

Entering Numeric Coordinates


As an alternative to positioning the cursor with the mouse, you can
enter numeric coordinates directly from the keyboard, or use a

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


27
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

combination of the mouse and the keyboard. This technique may


be useful when you are entering a list of coordinate pairs, or when
you need more precision than the mouse permits.
- To enter numeric coordinates, type the name of the coordinate
(x, y, a, z or r) immediately followed by the value you intend
to assign to it, for example x3 or y-4. The prefix + is optional
for positive values.
- You can type coordinate values in any order, completing the
action with the Enter key or a mouse click.
- Coordinates can be copied and pasted using the clipboard.
The Cut, Copy and Paste menu items are inactive during
numeric input, so you must use the standard shortcuts.
- You can also perform additions or subtractions from the
current value by typing a “+” or “-” mark after the value. For
example, typing x3+ will add 3 to the x value shown in the
coordinate window. Two dashes are required for subtraction
of whole feet because the first dash is interpreted as an
indication that inches are to follow.
- If you work in inches and feet, notice that when “3” is
entered, ArchiCAD assumes you mean three feet. Conversely,
typing 3’6, 3’6", or 3-6 will enter three feet, six inches.
Previewing Numeric Input
You can preview numerically entered coordinates prior to
completing an element by typing a coordinate name again. If you
type the same coordinate name, be careful not to move the mouse,
or you will return to graphic input.
Completing Numeric Input
Once you have started numeric input by typing x, y, a, z or r, the
selected value is highlighted. At this point, you have several
options:
- To enter other coordinate values, type the name of
another coordinate, and then enter a value.
- To return to graphic input mode, click in the Toolbox,
Control Box or Menu Bar, or type the name of the selected
coordinate once again.
- To complete the element you are drawing, press Enter or
Return, or click anywhere on the worksheet.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


28
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

- To cancel the entire operation, click the Cancel button in


the Control box, or return to graphic input by clicking with the
mouse anywhere in the worksheet window.
To illustrate the difference between absolute and relative values,
let us start a line at x2, y2 (the grid is one foot by one foot).

Now type x+3, y-3 (absolute values) for the second point of the
line.

Note what happens when you type the same values as relative
values (x3+, y3-) from the original starting point.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


29
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

The Grid System


The high level of precision that ArchiCAD provides can be difficult
to control. The Coordinate Box can report the position of the
cursor within four decimal points of precision. Without some
assistance, however, you may find it difficult to hold the mouse
steady enough to connect walls or position objects exactly where
you want them.
Two grid systems are provided to help you put ArchiCAD’s
accuracy to work: the Snap Grid and the Construction Grid.
Like the printed grids on traditional graph paper, these ArchiCAD
grid systems add a visual orientation and sense of scale to the
worksheet.
- The grids are set up to reflect the layout and level of precision
that is meaningful to your project.
- The grids can easily be turned on and off as you draw, so you
can use them as the situation requires.
- The Coordinate Box provides controls for setting up and using
a rotated or skewed grid.

Grid Snap
The Grid Snap function allows precise graphic alignment of
elements at consistent lengths and distances. When the grids are
active, the cursor can only draw from one grid intersection to
another. This allows you to position the cursor accurately, even at
low zoom levels.
When Grid Snap is active, a small black dot will follow the
movement of the cursor, jumping from one grid node to the next.
This visual cue shows you where the next drawing action will take
place.
Note: When you are drawing an element with Grid Snap
active, you will notice the black rubberband line jumping
between grid nodes as you move the cursor.
Grid Snap is not available in the 3D Window.

Defining the Grids


To define the Snap and Construction Grids, choose the Home
View & Grids command in the Options menu (shown below).

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


30
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

Construction Grid
The Construction Grid is used to reflect any characteristic spacing
of your project. For example, if you were designing a traditional
Japanese home, you might define the construction grid around the
dimensions of a Tatami mat. The Construction Grid could also be
used to define the foundation footings or the column grid of a
building.
Auxiliary Grid
The Construction Grid can be enhanced with an auxiliary grid,
which is also visible on the screen. The auxiliary grid is often used
to indicate the thickness of concrete walls or foundation footings.

Grid Display
The Construction Grid is normally visible on the Floor Plan
worksheet. The grid lines can be turned off through the Grid
Display command in the Options menu.
Printing Options
The Construction Grid can be printed with the floor plan by
selecting the Yes radio button at Print Grid in the Print… dialog
box.
Note: If Grid Display is turned off in the Options menu, the
Construction Grid option will be invisible in the Home View
and Grids dialog box.

Snap Grid
The Snap Grid is an invisible grid that defines the smallest unit of
measurement relevant to your project. This may be inches, if you

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


31
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

are drawing a small house, or meters, if you are creating a large-


scale site plan.
You can set the horizontal and vertical Snap Grid increments
independently, allowing you to reflect the unique geometry of
your project.
An offset from the coordinate system origin may also be specified
as a starting point for the grid.

Setting Up a Skewed Grid


Two controls are included in the Coordinate Box to help you set
up and use a rotated or skewed grid.
Click the second button from the left to enable it. You can now
draw a vector on the Floor Plan which will serve you to define the
angle of the skewed grid relative to the horizontal axis. You can
use all construction aids to do this, including coordinate
constraint, as below.

The skewed grid is defined and instantly displayed.

The next two Grid Switch buttons allow you to toggle at any
moment between the “normal” and rotated grid.
Note: When using a transformed grid, mouse constraints are
coordinate values are calculated according to this coordinate
system.
The Skewed Grid is not available in the 3D Window.
See also…
The Mouse constraints explained later in this chapter and the
corresponding Preferences dialog box in Chapter 5 offer additional
help.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


32
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

Controlling the Grids


When either Grid System is activated, the cursor moves from one
grid intersection to another. Since there may be times when you
need to disable this feature (for example, to position a piece of
furniture at a non-grid location), it is easily turned on or off.
Three mechanisms are available to control the Grid System. The
one you choose will vary based on what you are working on at the
time.
- The Coordinate Box allows you to activate either of the grids
or turn off the snap feature altogether. It also holds controls
for displaying a skewed grid.
- The Grid Snap command (Options menu) allows you to turn
the grid system on and off, but not to change which grid will
be active when it is on.
- The Home View & Grids dialog box allows you to select
which grid system the cursor will snap to when the grid
system is active.
In addition to the above controls, Snap On can be temporarily
toggled by pressing the Escape key on the keyboard. Snap On will
be activated or suspended as long as you keep the key pressed.
This shortcut is useful when you are drawing many elements that
are partially off-grid because you can switch between Snap On/
Snap Off quickly, without moving the cursor from your work area.
See also...
For more information on Grid Snap, see Chapter 5 for details in
the Options menu.

Drawing Without the Grid System


Even when the grid system is inactive, you can still work very
accurately using the following ArchiCAD features:
- Numeric coordinate Input - Allows keyboard entry of drawing
activity positions vs. using the mouse
- Mouse Constraints - Allow you to draw in specific orientations
(e.g. vertical, horizontal, etc.)
- Relative Construction Methods - Allow you to draw lines
oriented with reference to a particular element (e.g.
perpendicular or parallel)
These items are discussed in greater detail in subsequent sections
of this chapter.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


33
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

Elevation Values and Gravity


In ArchiCAD, you can check the elevation of the element to be
placed in several ways:
- In the Coordinate Box, you can choose whether to display
elevation values from the Project Zero or from the Active
Story.
- While dragging the pointer over a slab or roof (provided that
the corresponding Gravity icon is active, see below), you can
monitor the changes in elevation (z) values in the Coordinate
Box. When several Slabs or Roofs overlap, the highest
elevation value is displayed.
- The elevation of the element to be placed is displayed in the
Info Box. If there is an offset elevation defined, the elevation
is automatically calculated in the Info Box. The element will
be placed at the displayed elevation.
Gravity is an aid that helps you place elements relatively to the
elevation of a Slab or a Roof.
- When clicking the first button, newly created elements will be
placed relative to the current Story’s 0 level.
- When clicking the second button, newly created elements will
be placed relative to the Slab beneath them.
- When clicking the third button, newly created elements will
be placed relative to the Roof beneath them.
Note: Gravity only affects newly created elements and cannot
be used for editing existing ones.
There are two possible ways of enabling Gravity:
- from the settings dialog box of an element before creating it;
- from the Coordinate Box before starting the input.
When enabling Gravity in a tool’s settings dialog box, the
Elevation values from the Project Zero and the Active Story will be
dimmed, and you will be able to define an offset elevation relative
to the element beneath in the corresponding edit field.
See also…
Working in the 3D Window in Chapter 3 and Drag and Drop later
in this chapter.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


34
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

Views and Windows


A large variety of possibilities exist in ArchiCAD for viewing
different parts of the virtual building, and powerful shortcuts help
you recall stored combinations of elements and views.

Stories and Layers


Stories provide a “physical” separation for elements according to
the vertical level to which they belong. Each story has a unique
Floor Plan window in which you place elements.
Because you change levels to reach them, only the current Story’s
plan view is displayed for editing, printing or saving to a file
format. Regardless of which Story is displayed, all stories are
projected in 3D views (unless you choose to limit the projection).
Stories are typically used for drawing each floor plan of multistory
structures separately. They can also be used for separating site
plans, roof plans, etc. that have vertical 3D relationships.
You can navigate between stories through the commands and
shortcuts of the Options/Stories hierarchical menu. Moreover, the
QuickViews window allows you to see a preview of all of the
existing stories and to go to any story you choose (see below).
While plans are drawn on Stories, each element of the plan is
placed in a particular Layer. Layers are global, which means that
the same layers are available on all stories, as well as in every
Worksheet window (Floor Plans and Sections/Elevations).
Layers are analogous to pin-registered overlay drafting and
provide a “logical” separation of elements. Related groups of
elements, such as dimensions, furniture, electrical symbols and so
on, are placed on common Layers.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


35
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

You can also show or hide each Layer depending on what you
want displayed, saved to a file format, printed or projected in 3D.
Layers can also be locked in order to prevent certain elements
from being selected or modified.
To automate the process of showing, hiding and locking layers,
you can store various setups in Layer Combinations and then
choose any of these by name from the Options/Layers hierarchical
menu.
Because each Tool maintains a default Layer assignment, elements
are automatically placed on separate Layers by using the Tool.
See also…
The Stories and Layers hierarchical menus are explained in the
Options menu section of Chapter 5.

The QuickViews Palette


The QuickViews palette allows you to move around Stories,
Section/Elevation Windows, as well as different preset and user-
defined views at various zoom levels and locations on the floor
plan worksheet and in Section/Elevation windows.
Clicking the Go button will immediately display the chosen view
in the Floor Plan or the appropriate Section/Elevation window.
Double-clicking inside the framed view has the same effect.
The QuickViews palette holds three buttons that will help you
navigate between Stories, Sections/Elevations and predefined
QuickViews of both.
- QuickViews is the default mode when you start ArchiCAD.
You can define views on the Floor Plan of the current story or
in the currently active Section/Elevation window. In both
cases, the QuickViews button must be enabled.
- The Stories and Sections/Elevations buttons only show view
lists for navigation, no new view can be created when either is
on.
Note: Clicking the QuickViews button will only show the
QuickViews of the previously selected Story or Section/
Elevation.
Stories
When the Stories button is active, the list of the project’s current
stories is displayed on the right, and the view of the currently
active story appears on the left. You can choose any story in the

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


36
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

list and either click the Go button to display it in the Floor Plan
window, or double-click its name in the list. This is the equivalent
of choosing Options/Stories/Go to story…

Note: Going to a Story will also automatically switch to


QuickViews mode and show the QuickViews list of the
selected Story. For creating new views, see detailed
instructions later.
Sections/Elevations
When the Sections/Elevations button is active, the list of defined
Sections/Elevations is displayed on the right. You can choose any
section in the list and then and either click the Go button to
display corresponding Section/Elevation window, or double-click
its name in the list. This is the equivalent of choosing the Section/
Elevation window’s name in the Sections/Elevations hierarchical
menu from the Window menu.

Note: Going to a Section/Elevation will also automatically


switch to QuickViews mode and show the QuickViews list of
the selected Section/Elevation window. For creating new
views, see detailed instructions later.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


37
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

QuickViews
The QuickViews feature is available both for the Floor Plan and
the Section/Elevation windows.

The left side of the QuickViews palette displays all elements of the
current story or section, as well as the limits of the view whose
name is highlighted in the list to the right.
The view indicated by the frame when you activate QuickViews
will be the one you see in the worksheet, and the highlighted item
on the list will be the Current View. Update the overview to
reflect changes you have made on the worksheet by double-
clicking the overview area outside the frame.
Note: You can also update all overviews by using the Redraw
All Overviews command from the local menu opened by the
small arrow in the upper right corner of the palette.
You can change the content and extent of the view which will be
displayed in the worksheet window by adjusting the frame size
and location.
- To change the shape or size of the frame, drag its sides or
corners.
- To change the location of the frame, drag its enclosed area
with the Small Hand cursor.
- To use the framed drawing detail in the worksheet window,
double-click inside the frame or click the Go button.
These operations work like Zoom and Pan to let you construct
useful views of your work.
Note that the view is optimized so that if the shape of your frame
does not match the shape of the worksheet, the QuickView will be
resized to fit the screen without distortion.
The right side of the QuickViews palette lists views of the model
which can be recalled. The default names on this list are Current
View and Home (which corresponds to the Home View you set

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


38
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

for your project in the Home View and Grids dialog box or by
choosing Display/Set Home View). You can also add views of
your own to this list and display any of them on the worksheet
simply by double-clicking the name of the view you desire. Thus,
a particularly useful partial view is at your fingertips, without
requiring you to reproduce the right combination of Zoom and
Pan operations to get it.
A view name can relate to a variety of settings, indicated by the
appearance of small icons after the name:
- The view stores the current Zoom settings.
- The view stores the current state of Layers (visible/invisible,
locked/unlocked).
- The view stores all the attributes currently set in the Display
Options dialog box (Options menu).
- The view stores the Scale the view was recorded at.
These options can be set separately for each newly saved view
(see below).
The View List Editing Menu
The pop-up at the upper right corner of the palette allows you to
add or delete views from the list and update the current view.
To add a view, choose Save Current View…, and you will be
prompted to name the view described by the frame in the
overview area. You can also modify the names of existing views
by choosing Rename View.
A dialog box will appear, and you can choose which of the current
attributes (Zoom Level, Layers, Display Options, Scale) should be
saved with the view. It is also possible to define views that are
only visible on the current story or available across all stories.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


39
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

Delete View removes the highlighted name from the list. With the
commands below, you can delete either all views or the views
shown for Stories and Sections.
Redraw Story/Section Overviews and Redraw All Overviews
update the information to include all modifications which you
have made. For single QuickViews, you can also this by double-
clicking the overview area outside the view frame.
Using the QuickViews Palette
The QuickViews palette is displayed whenever you click the
QuickViews button on the Display bar of the plan worksheet or by
choosing the Show QuickViews command in the Window menu
(when the palette is hidden).
You can choose to keep the palette displayed at all times by
enabling the small Pin button near the top of the palette.
With the Pin button’s disabled state, every time you go to a view
selected in the QuickViews palette, the palette will be hidden.
The appearance of the QuickViews palette can be modified with
the shape change control located just below its top left corner. You
can choose to display the full palette, the view listing only or the
overview window only (in this case, stored views and story/
section names are listed and accessible in the View List Editing
Menu).
Note: All these shape options are also available from the
Window menu if you choose Floating Palettes/Palette Shapes.
In addition, you can opt to see a magnified version of the
palette.
Saving QuickViews
QuickViews are saved together with your project.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


40
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

Drag & Drop


The Drag & Drop technique is familiar for both MacOS and
Windows users as a shortcut for opening files or for copying and
pasting elements of different types inside or between windows of
the same application or even between applications.
Since ArchiCAD has many different window types, the smart
implementation of Drag & Drop allows you to copy elements from
windows by pasting data that makes sense in the receiving
window.
Note: The Drag & Drop feature can be disabled or enabled
again by the corresponding checkbox in the Options/
Preferences/Miscellaneous dialog box.

Data Transfer between Different


Window Types
Data can only be dropped into a window on the condition that the
receiving window can accommodate the dragged data type.

Dragging and Dropping Text


The following possibilities exist when transferring text:
- from any ArchiCAD text window or from a text window of any
other Drag and Drop-capable application to any other
ArchiCAD text window;
- from any text window to any 2D Window (Floor Plan, Section,
Library Part 2D Symbol) with the default parameters;
- moving or copying text within the same text window;
- creating text type clipping files in the MacOS Finder or the
Windows Desktop;
- pasting clipping files into a text type window;
- dropping text from a text type window into the Trash (MacOS)
or the Recycle Bin (Windows) to delete the text;
- dropping plain text files into a text type window (with some
restrictions).

Dragging and Dropping Pictures


The following possibilities exist when transferring picture type
data:

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


41
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

- dragging a whole picture or the selected part of it from the 3D


Window, a Model picture window or the Project Preview
window;
- dropping a picture file of PICT, BMP, TIFF, GIF or JPEG type
into a Library Part Preview window;
- dropping a picture file into a 2D window to paste it as a
Figure;
- creating picture type clipping files in the MacOS Finder;
- pasting clipping files into the 2D Preview window.

Dragging and Dropping ArchiCAD Library


Part Files
You can drag and drop ArchiCAD Library Part files from the
MacOS Finder or the Windows Explorer into a Floor Plan.
Windows and Doors can only be dropped into an existing wall.
Dropping a Library Part into the Floor Plan activates the
corresponding tool in the Toolbox and the newly placed element
becomes the default element for the given Library Part type.
It is possible to place several Library Parts at the same time
through Drag & Drop.

Dragging and Dropping Floor Plan Elements


If there is a selection on the Floor Plan defined either with a
marquee area or through individual selection with the Arrow,
pressing the mouse button and dragging the cursor out of the
ArchiCAD Floor Plan window will initiate a Drag and Drop
operation.
The following can be copied:
- floor plan elements (in module format),
- selected elements on the floor plan in picture format (for
example, into the Project Preview window);
- and the 2D and/or the 3D script of the selected elements in
text format.
3D GDL script is generated only when a drop is made into the
symbol 3D script window. The 2D script of the selected elements
appears in any other text type window.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


42
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

Selection
Many ArchiCAD menus and dialog boxes operate on selected
elements, so you will often need to carefully control currently
selected elements. ArchiCAD provides several powerful methods
for selecting elements in your project.
Editing commands operate on:
- Selected elements if any, or
- None of the elements.
3D visualization and calculations operate on:
- Selected elements if any, or
- All of the elements.
See also…
Window-specific selection features in the Working in Section/
Elevation Windows and Working in the 3D Window sections of
Chapter 3.

Selection Methods
There are several methods of selecting drawing elements in
ArchiCAD:
- The Arrow tool, a specialized and powerful selection device.
- The Marquee, another specialized selection tool which
complements the Arrow tool.
- Shift-clicking, a keyboard selection shortcut which works
regardless of the active tool.
- Clicking with the right mouse button (Windows) or with the
Control key down (MacOS) regardless of the active tool (this
will also pop up the context menu appropriate for the clicked
element).
- The Select All command, a method which selects entire classes
of elements based on which tool is active (or all elements if
the Arrow tool is active).
- The Find & Select command, which allows you to select and
deselect elements based on a wide variety of criteria.
See also…
The Arrow and Marquee tools’ description in Chapter 4 and the
Select All and Find & Select commands (Edit menu) in Chapter 5
offer additional guidance.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


43
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

Selection & Hotspots


Each type of element has specific hotspots which are marked with
selection dots when the element is selected.
If you are using the Marquee tool, no selection dots will be
displayed as this tool selects an area rather than individual
elements.

Selection & Layers


The selection methods described above operate on the elements
in the active layer. ArchiCAD’s layers allow you to place drawing
elements on different, transparent planes, grouping them for
display, editing and printing.
- If a layer is hidden, you cannot select any element on it.
- If a layer is visible but locked, the elements may be clicked
with the cursor, but no selection will take place.
Systematic layering can help to exclude unwanted elements from
selections and unintended editing actions.
See also…
For more information on the Layers command, see the Options
menu in Chapter 5.

Selection and Locked Elements


Locked elements can be selected, but they cannot be edited. When
selecting such an element, a yellow box appears, informing you
that the element is locked. Locked elements’ selection dots appear
in grey.

You can open the settings dialog boxes of these elements, but you
cannot edit their parameters. The OK button that would allow the
validation of such changes will appear in grey.
Note for TeamWork users: Elements outside your own
workspace behave the same way as locked elements. The
appearing yellow box informs you whether the element is
locked, reserved by another teammate, or just not in your
workspace.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


44
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

Grouping Elements
Groups can be created by selecting elements of similar or
dissimilar type and choosing the Tools/Group command. Grouped
elements can then be selected and modified together.
The following operations can be performed simultaneously on all
the elements constituting the group:
- selection;
- some of the Edit menu functions (e.g. Drag, Rotate, Mirror,
Multiply);
- attribute assignment.
You can even create elements in groups by activating the
Autogroup command in the Tools menu. If this option is on,
rectangular Wall elements and Polyroofs, etc. will automatically be
created as a group.
The following element types cannot be grouped: any of the
Dimension types, Zones, Labels, Section/Elevation lines, Cameras.
Doors and Windows can only be grouped as part of the Wall they
are placed into.
Elements belonging to other Stories and whose outline appears on
the current Story cannot be part of a group on this Story.
Note: Grouped elements' selection marks are small circles,
while ungrouped ones are marked by black dots. Individually
selected elements that belong to a group are marked with
empty selection dots.
Grouping and ungrouping are not available in the 3D Window,
you can only Suspend Groups.

Disabling Groups
To make all elements constituting a group independent again,
choose Tools/Ungroup.
You may, however, need to perform only a single operation on a
particular element or element type of the group. In this case,
suppressing the group assignment altogether is rather
burdensome, since you will have to select all the elements one by
one again to recreate the group.
The solution is to temporarily suspend groups by choosing Tools/
Suspend Groups. If this toggle command is preceded by a
checkmark, elements that have been assigned to a group can be

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


45
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

selected and modified separately. If the name of the command is


not preceded by a checkmark, groups are activated once again.
The Suspend Groups switch is also available in the Control Box.

Group Hierarchy
Groups can be grouped into higher level groups. When
ungrouping a selection consisting of two or more lower level
groups, it will first be divided into the groups it comprises. You
may need to repeat the Tools/Ungroup command several times
before an element can be selected and edited individually.
When choosing Tools/Suspend Groups, ALL groups are
temporarily rendered inactivate, which means that single elements
can at once be selected and edited individually, even if they are
part of a complex group hierarchy.

Groups and Layers


Grouping elements does not change their Attribute assignment,
which means that each element remains on its own Layer.
If some elements of a Group are in an invisible Layer:
- Elements on the hidden Layer will be invisible.
- When selecting the group, invisible elements will not be
selected.
- When editing the group (by drag, rotate, mirror, multiply)
invisible elements will also change their position.
- When modifying the Attributes or parameters of the elements,
the Attributes of the invisible elements will also change.
If some elements of a Group are in a locked Layer:
- Elements on the locked Layer will be visible on the floor plan,
but they will cause the entire group to be locked. The group
will not be affected by drag, rotate, mirror and multiply.
- When selecting the group, all of its elements will be selected,
but with grey dots. Use the Suspend groups command to edit
those grouped items that are not in a locked layer.
Note for TeamWork users: Elements of a group may be
reserved by different signed in team members, but groups still
remain active. Attributes and parameters of reserved elements
only can be modified by first suspending the groups.
Important: If you save the project in ArchiCAD 5.0 format, all
group information will be lost.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


46
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

Drawing Order of Elements


When drawing a project with ArchiCAD, overlapping elements
according to a specified stacking order. By default, elements are
stacked in an order typically used in architectural drawings.

Default Stacking Order


By default, stacking order is determined by element classes, of
which there are six. Regardless of the sequence in which elements
are placed, theose in the first class will be placed in the
foreground, second class in the level behind it, and so on.
The element classes are:
1) Annotation (Text, Labels, all Dimension types, Zone stamps)
2) 2D Artwork (Lines, Circles, Splines, Hotspots)
3) Library Parts (Objects, Lamps, Elements of Add-Ons like
StairMaker or ArchiSITE)
4) 3D structures (Walls, Slabs, Doors, Windows, Columns, Roofs,
Meshes)
5) 2D Polygons (Fills, Zone polygons)
6) Figures

Overlappingwithin the same class depends on the order in which


you place the elements. For instance, if you have walls that cross
each other, the last one placed will always overlap the others. If
you change an attribute of a previously placed wall, it will become
“more recent” and will overlap all the others.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


47
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

Custom Stacking Order


ArchiCAD’s default stacking order is appropriate in most cases, but
you may wish to place elements in a different overlapping
position. For instance, for a Fill to overlap a 2D element or an
object, a set of commands in the Tools menu lets you override the
default stacking order element by element.
On newly placed elements, the commands work as follows:
- Bring Forward: On this command, selected element(s) will
overlap all the unchanged elements of their own and any
lower classes, but will still stay below the elements of higher
classes.
- Bring to Front: On this command, selected element(s) will
overlap all other elements.
- Send Backward: On this command, selected element(s) will
be overlapped by (sent behind) all the unchanged elements of
their own and higher classes, but will overlap the elements of
lower classes.
- Send to Back: On this command, selected element(s) will
become overlapped by all other elements.
- Reset Default Order: This command restores the default
overlapping order described above.
Note: Using these commands forces ArchiCAD to redraw the
contents of the window. With very large drawings, this may
take some time. To reduce redraw time, zoom in on the
elements you are editing.
Mechanism of the Stacking Order
Both the default stacking order and the customization commands
are based on two ordering mechanisms: classes and stack levels.
ArchiCAD places elements in 14 stack levels. Each level can
contain any of the element types. The final stacking order you see
on screen and on printouts is based on stack level and element
class. All elements on a level will overlap elements on lower stack
levels, regardless of class.
New elements are always placed into the preferred stack level of
their own class. Stack level preference is as follows:
1-4) void by default
5) Annotation
6) 2D Artwork
7) Library Parts

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


48
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

8) 3D Structures
9) 2D Polygons
10) Figures
11-14) void by default
By default, the upper and lower 4-4 stack levels are empty. You
can bring or send elements of any type into these stack levels with
the Tools menu commands detailed above.
For example, bringing a Fill forward from level 9 to level 8, which
is the default level of structures, means that the Fill will overlap all
the unchanged fills remaining on level 9, but will still be
overlapped by all the unchanged structures on level 8.

If you bring it forward again, it will overlap all the remaining


structures. However, it will still stay below all of the unchanged
library parts on level 7. This way, you can move it forward until it
overlaps the higher levels.

Of course you can bring other elements forward as well, which


will again overlap the changed Fill.

The Bring to Front and Send to Back commands move the


selected elements until they overlap (or are overlapped by) all of
the existing elements. This is not necessarily the 1st or the 14th

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


49
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts

level, which means that in most cases it will still be possible to


place other elements above or below them.
Text or Dimensions brought up to the top stack level cannot be
overlapped. For example, if you want a Fill to overlap them, you
will have to send the Text one level backwards.
If you attempt to move elements forward that are already placed
on the top level, or to move elements backward from the bottom
of the stack, you will be alerted.
When moving several elements placed at different stack levels
forward or backward, each element will only move one level.
When bringing to front or sending to back elements of different
types, they will overlap (or be overlapped by) all existing
elements, and will retain their stacking order in relation to each
other.
Compound Elements (Zones, Fills)
Zones and fills are compound elements consisting of components
of two different classes (zone polygons and zone stamps, fills and
their area texts). These two components always keep their order
according to their classes, for instance area texts always overlap
their fills. Although you can change their overlapping order
separately, Fills and Zone fills can never overlap their own area
texts and zone stamps and vice versa, forcing the other component
to move with them if necessary.
Note: The stacking order of Fills and Zones can be set in a
pop-up menu in the Display Options dialog box, but this
setting is effective only on elements within the same stack
level. For example, if Fills are set to overlap Zones but a
particular zone is in a higher level than a particular fill, it will
overlap that fill.

Display Order and Outputs


The stacking order will be preserved on printer or raster plotter
output, as well as on PlotMaker drawings.
On pen plotters and in DXF/DWG output, all elements will be
transparent, meaning that hidden or partially overlapped elements
will be entirely visible. To see a preview of this, set Construction
Fills and Polygon Fills in the Display Options dialog box to
Vectorial, and set all Fills to Transparent in Preferences/
Miscellaneous.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


50
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Chapter 3
Construction Techniques
This chapter concentrates on the different construction aids,
techniques and tips available for constructing Virtual Building
elements. First, concepts and techniques available in the Floor
Plan worksheet are presented, followed by possibilities specific to
the Section/Elevations windows and to the 3D W indow.

Floor Plan Construction


Once the layout of your ArchiCAD project has been determined,
you can begin creating walls, slabs and other architectural
elements. Making these items the size and location you want is
made easier by a variety of ArchiCAD drawing aids:
- The Info Box lets you adjust several drawing parameters
quickly and easily.
- The Control Box offers you options for quickly creating new
elements with special relationships with exising ones.
- The Cursor Snap Tolerance Range is a permanent
“homing device” relating to the grids and existing elements.
- Mouse Constraints help draw elements in a specific
relationship to existing elements and preset directions. They
are similar to traditional rulers and triangles.
The Construction Aids are completely integrated into the drawing
process. You can set a drawing parameter in the Control Box,
zoom in on a detail or turn on the Snap Grid without interrupting
the current drawing action. This dynamic quality allows all of the
ArchiCAD Construction Aids to interact seamlessly.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


51
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Info Box Functions


It is possible to change a number of settings and parameters for
elements by using the Info Box.
- Clicking the tool icon brings up the corresponding tool’s
settings dialog box, just as if accessed through the Toolbox.
Here you can make any changes you wish.
- For eligible tools, the displayed fillpattern name acts as a pop-
up menu allowing you to change the fillpattern associated to
the element.
- Clicking in the numeric fields displaying the elevation
information allows you to modify this data.
Note: For 3D elements, both the top and bottom elevation
values are displayed. You can quickly access them by pressing
the t and b keys on the keyboard.
- By clicking the layer icon , you can access the Layer Settings
dialog box, if no element is selected, or the Edit Selection Set
dialog box when elements are selected.
- Choosing a layer name from the pop-up menu near the layer
icon allows you to modify element assignment.
In addition to allowing quick access to current element settings, a
number of additional functions are provided by the Info Box:
- Construction Methods, which provide quick access to
editable tool options before drafting.
- Geometry Methods, which provide quick access to
convenient geometric element configurations.

Construction Methods
Construction Methods create special alignments, orientations and
styles for eligible elements. Construction Methods allow you to
determine important characteristics about the element you are
drawing or editing.
In the example shown below, the Reference Line characteristic for
the Wall tool is active.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


52
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

If, for instance, the Text tool were active, the icons would change
and you could select the text justification settings.
Construction Methods are saved as a part of each element you
draw. They appear in the element’s Settings dialog box and may
be modified there after the element is created.
Selecting a tool will cause its corresponding Construction Methods
(if any) to be displayed in the Info Box. Click on the desired
Method icon to select it.
You can modify the construction method of several elements of
the same type at the same time by selecting them and explicitly
changing the construction method either in the Info Box or in the
appropriate Settings dialog box.
See also…
For more information, see the descriptions of the individual tool
construction methods in Chapter 4.

Geometry Methods
Geometry Methods are automated input techniques that create
special geometric configurations for individual elements. By using
Geometry Methods you can create Circles using a three-point
definition, as shown below, or Rotated Rectangle Fill polygons
when using the Fill Tool.

Geometry Methods are only input options, and are not stored as a
part of the element when you have finished drawing it.
Selecting a tool will cause its corresponding Geometry Methods (if
any) to be displayed in the Info Box. Click on the desired Method
icon to select it.
See also…
For more information on the Geometry Methods available for each
tool, see Chapter 4.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


53
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

The Control Box


A large number of functions are provided by the Control Box:
- Relative Construction Methods constrain the cursor to a
defined angle or distance during drafting or editing.
- Cursor Snap Variants control the way the current position
of the cursor is projected.
- The Suspend Groups switch allows you to choose between
editing grouped elements together or on their own.
- The Magic Wand tool traces the contours of existing
elements in order to create new elements of other types.
- The Special Snap Point definition controls automatically
generate temporary snap points on different parts of edges.
- In the Control Box’ maximized state, the Prompt Box
provides point-by-point instructions during drafting or editing.

Relative Construction Method Icons

The Relative Construction Methods control geometric input by


constraining the cursor’s movement to a constant angle or distance
as you draft or edit elements.
- The Parallel, Perpendicular and Angle Bisector methods
constrain the cursor’s movement to a constant angle.
- The Offset and the Repetitive Offset methods help polygon
or polyline input by giving graphical feedback while drafting.
- The Special Snap Point method helps you find special snap
points on edge in order to place the intelligent cursor exactly
on a geometrically defined point.
Only one of the six modifiers can be active at the same time. You
can activate it by clicking its icon in the Control Box.
Note: In the extended form of the Control Box, all six icons
are visible at the same time. Otherwise, you can choose
methods from a pop-up menu by clicking the icon
representing the last chosen one.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


54
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

The current Relative Construction Method can be enabled or


disabled by clicking its icon. Using the method automatically
disables it.
Parallel and Perpendicular Constraint
The first two methods, Parallel and Perpendicular, function
identically. They help geometric input with any tool, differing only
in the geometric modifications they produce:
1) Choose the Parallel or Perpendicular icon.
2) Select an existing edge for a reference line by clicking on it, or
draw a new reference line (oriented as needed) using the
cursor.
3) Draw the new element.
The new element you draw will be perpendicular or parallel to the
reference line (depending on the method selected). You can also
select a Relative Construction Method after you have started
drawing an element. In this case, the drawing operation is frozen
until you have either drawn or selected a reference line.
The following figures illustrate the process using an existing
reference edge.
1) After beginning the Wall, click the Perpendicular constraint
icon.

2) Click the reference edge with the Mercedes cursor.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


55
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

3) The cursor will be constrained perpendicularly to the wall.

Drawing Repetitive Parallels or Perpendiculars:


Any angle you define by clicking on a reference edge or drawing a
reference vector can be reused through the Mouse Constraints
mechanism. You can define an angle once and draw multiple lines
that are parallel or perpendicular to it any number of times by
holding down the Shift key while drawing.
The angle that you defined is stored in Preferences/Mouse
Constraints as the Custom Angle.

When you have constrained the cursor with the Relative


Construction Method, the constraint angle value is displayed in the
Polar Angle position in the Coordinate Box. The Polar Angle value
is also locked, as indicated by a small box surrounding the “a:”
icon.

The angle lock/constraint can be terminated by pressing the


Option-A (MacOS) or the Alt-A(Windows) key combination if you
want to redefine the value before proceeding.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


56
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

None of these actions will interrupt the element input process, so


you can experiment with as many different solutions as you like
before continuing.
Angle Bisector Constraint
There are two ways to define a bisector angle. Either you can start
drawing the new element and choose the Angle Bisector method
on the fly, or you can first choose the input method and then draw
the new element.
When first starting to draw the element:
1) Start drawing the new element.
2) Choose or activate the Angle Bisector icon in the Control Box.
3) Define reference vectors using the same process as with angle
dimensioning.
4) The mouse is constrained to the bisectorial angle.
5) Click to finish drawing the new element.
When first choosing the constraint:
1) Choose or activate the Angle Bisector icon in the Control Box.
2) Define reference vectors; use the same process as with angle
dimensioning.
3) Click to start drawing the new element. The mouse is
constrained to the bisectorial angle.
Note: If you hold down the Shift key while the mouse is
constrained, it will be released and the preset mouse
constraints will be used.
See also…
Drawing Angle Dimensions is detailed in Chapter 4.
Offset and Repetitive Offset
The Offset and Repetitive Offset methods create polylines with a
given offset to a drawn polygon.
These methods cannot be activated during the element input
process and have no effect on elements defined by a single click.
To draw an offset polygonal element:
1) Choose or activate the Offset method. (If the currently active
tool does not support polygon shapes, ArchiCAD will inform
you of this with a beep.)

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


57
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

2) Draw an open or closed polyline. You can even use the Magic
Wand to trace an existing element’s contour to define the
polyline (see later in this chapter).
3) As usual, the base polyline can be completed by a double-
click or by hitting the OK button in the Control Box. When it is
completed, a rubberband outline will appear, starting from the
endpoint of the polyline and running perpendicular to its last
entered segment.

4) Click once to place the element.


When using the Repetitive Offset method, the same steps can be
used, except that the process is not completed when placing the
element with a click. You can continue placing offset copies until
you choose to terminate input.
- With a double-click, you terminate input by drawing a last
offset element.
- When hitting the Cancel button in the Control Box, you
terminate input by omitting the last drawn offset element.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


58
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Special Point Constraint


With this method, you can place a node at the division point of a
temporary vector defined on the fly. Division point(s) will be
calculated based on the current Special Snap Point settings (see
later in this chapter).
The constraint can be activated either before or during input, and
has the different effects depending on the type of special point
chosen.
- With the Half (Midpoint) and Percentage options, only one
snap point will appear.
- With the Divisions or Distance options, several snap points
may appear.
To use Special Point Constraint:
1) Choose or activate the Special Point icon.
2) Click to enter the vector’s starting point.
3a) When only one snap point appears, click to enter the
endpoint of the vector. The cursor snaps to the special point.
Input is performed immediately.
3b) When several snap points appear, click to enter the endpoint
of the vector. The cursor toggles between the possible special
point. Click again at the appropriate snap point to perform the
input.
Note: Percentage is always calculated from the vector’s
starting point.
This feature is not available in the 3D Window.

Cursor Snap Variants


This set of icons controls the way the current position of the cursor
is projected on the rubberband line constrained to a predefined
direction.
Cursor Snap becomes active when you start drawing a vector. If
you hold down the Shift key and the vector is locked at a
predefined angle, by default the cursor is projected
perpendicularly to the constrained angle.
At any time during input, you can switch to vertical or
horizontal cursor snap. This will cause the cursor to be projected
vertically or horizontally, while the vector is still locked at the
same angle.
On completing the vector, Cursor Snap automatically switches
back to the default perpendicular direction.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


59
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Note: Pressing the Q key toggles between variants during


input.

The Suspend Groups Switch


These icons act as a toggle and have the same effect as the
Suspend Groups toggle command.
- With the left icon active, grouped elements can be selected
and edited together.

- With the right icon active, grouped elements can be selected


and edited one by one.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


60
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

The Magic Wand Tool


With the Magic Wand feature, ArchiCAD allows you to trace the
outline of shapes for creating elements. This feature is particularly
useful if, for example, you want to create circular or polygonal
elements which would otherwise be tedious or impossible to
construct line-by-line, or to quickly generate various types of
elements with identical plan shapes.
You make the transformation by first selecting the new type of
shape or element in the Toolbox and then clicking the original
shape or element when the Magic Wand cursor appears.
Note: Magic Wand prefers selection when clicking
overlapping edges.
There is one exception to this rule: when transforming another
type of element into a single Roof, you have to go through the
usual process of first drawing a pivot line and defining the
direction of the slope.
As an example of the process: draw a shape on the plan using the
Fill tool. Next, select the Wall tool. The construction method you
have chosen will determine the orientation of the wall relative to
the perimeter.
Click the Magic Wand tool’s icon in the Control Box and place the
cursor on the 2D shape, then click. Four Walls will be constructed
on the outline of the Fill.

Note: As a keyboard shortcut, you can place the Mercedes or


Checkmark cursor on the 2D shape and then click while
holding down the spacebar. The cursor takes on the Magic
Wand shape and the new Walls are constructed.
All these elements are now part of your project, and they can be
manipulated independently. (For example, you could select the
walls and drag them away from the fill.)
Other characteristics of the new element are determined by the
contents of its Settings dialog box. You should always check that
these are correct either before or after the transformation,
especially if the elements are intended to have a specific
relationship to each other, such as a roof resting on a wall.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


61
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Similarly, you can trace shapes for making holes in any polygonal
element.
Note: ArchiCAD cannot transform elements into trapezoid or
polygonal walls. If you choose the Polygon Wall geometry
method when selecting a spline, arc or polygon type element,
this element will be transformed into a polygonal series of
walls. If the created polygon intersects itself, an alert will
appear to warn you about this.
Note for TeamWork users: When working on a Team
Project, the outline of elements that are locked, reserved by
others or outside your workspace can also be traced in order
to create new elements of different types.
The Magic Wand feature is not available in the 3D Window, except
for the creation of Slabs along Slabs or Roofs.
See also…
Magic Wand Settings are described in the Tools menu in Chapter 5.

Special Snap Points


When the cursor changes to the Mercedes form on edges and
Special Snap Point snap is on, special snap points are
automatically generated. They behave as hotspots, meaning that
the cursor will change to a Checkmark when held above them.
Special points only appear temporarily and will disappear after 4-5
seconds.
Special Snap Points can appear on several edges at the same time
when you enter the edges.
There are four options available in the pop-up menu opened by
the small arrow in the bottom right corner of the Special Snap
Point Control.

- Half: Divides an edge into two equal parts.


- Division: Divides an edge into the set number of segments.
(Range: 3-20)
- Percentage: Divides an edge into two parts according to the
set percentage. (0% is always the closest endpoint of the
element to the location of the pointer.)

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


62
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

- Distance: Divides an edge into two parts according to the set


distance. The distance is always measured from the nearest
endpoint of the element to the location of the pointer.

The Prompt Box


By clicking the Maximize box on the right end of the Control Box
(just beside the Cancel button), the Control Box is expanded to
include step-by-step instructions for the drafting operations
ArchiCAD expects from you.

Cursor Snap Range


The Cursor Snap Range feature is another mechanism designed to
help you utilize the high level of precision built into ArchiCAD.
To help locate existing construction elements on the screen, the
cursor gravitates toward edges and corners when you place it near
them. The strength of this effect (the distance over which gravity is
felt) can be set using the Preferences/Miscellaneous command in
the Options menu (see Chapter 5).

Cursor Snap Range will also help you to automatically snap to


special points including the section points of existing lines or
edges, perpendicular projections from the Edit Origin to existing
lines or edges and tangential points of the rubberband line along
existing arcs, splines and curved edges. The cursor’s shape
informs you about the type of special point ArchiCAD has found.
See also…
The Appendix for the list of cursor forms.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


63
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Automatic Hotspot Generation


Section Points on Remote Intersections
There is no direct way to snap to remote intersection points of
elements. You can automatically generate hotspots at intersection
points on the imaginary extensions of elements.
1) Select a line, edge or arc and place the cursor on top of
another (it becomes an Arrow with a Mercedes if the Arrow
tool is active, a simple Mercedes if another tool is active).

2) Command-click (Macintosh) or control-click (Windows) to


generate a section point.

Note: There is one exception to this feature. Cmd/Ctrl-clicking


the edge of a Roof while another one is selected will fit the
clicked edge to the common ridge (if any) of the two roof
planes. See the Roof tool techniques in Chapter 4.
Hotspots at Remote Tangential Points
There is no direct way to snap to remote Tangential points.
Select the arc(s) and command-click (Macintosh) or control-click
(Windows) with the Checkmark cursor on any element (hotspot or
node).
Tangential hotspots will be generated on the imaginary extensions
of arcs or curved edges.
Parallel and Perpendicular Projection Points
It is also possible to add hotspots with a Command-
click(Macintosh)/Control-click (Windows) to:

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


64
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

- A parallel projection of a wall, a line or the edge of a roof, a


fill or a slab from a selected hotspot.

- A perpendicular projection from any element hotspot


(Checkmark cursor location) or any empty space (Crosshair
cursor location) to a selected wall, slab, roof, fill edge or line.

Mouse Constraints
ArchiCAD’s Mouse Constraints are like having a computerized T-
square and triangle available while drafting in the Floor Plan.
Two Mouse Constraint mechanisms are available:
- Coordinate Constraints are used to lock any of the
Coordinate Box parameters.
- Angle Pairs are used to lock the cursor at a particular
drawing angle.
These features extend the power of ArchiCAD’s drawing
capabilities by making it possible to lock in a specific drawing
angle or position. These techniques facilitate the use of all the 2D/
3D Drafting tools.

Coordinate Constraints
You can constrain the movement of the cursor by pressing Option
(Macintosh) or Alt (Windows) and either x, y, a, or r on the
keyboard. The appropriate coordinate in one of the coordinate
windows will become framed, indicating its constrained status.
Having defined a direction with the cursor constraint, you can
even find outside reference points with the cursor.
By constraining x you get a vertical ruler. By constraining y you
will get a horizontal one.
Locking a (having defined it numerically or drawing in a sample
direction) will provide a slanted ruler. With r locked, you draw
radial lines of a length determined numerically or graphically.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


65
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

You can release the coordinate constraint by pressing Option


(Macintosh) or Alt (Windows) and any character other than the
above four (x, y, a, r) and the Spacebar (Mac only), or by clicking
in the small frame around the locked coordinate box.
Note: Cursor Snap Tolerance, Mouse Constraints and Grid
Snapping are independent of one another, so occasional
conflicts between them may occur. To avoid this possibility,
Grid Snapping has precedence over the rest of the aids, and
Mouse Constraint utilizes or overrides Cursor Snap Tolerance.

Angle Pairs
To fully utilize the Angle Pair mechanism, you must become
familiar with two important concepts:
- A rubberband line is a thick line that tracks the cursor while
you are drawing or editing an element. Angle Pair Mouse
Constraints can only be engaged while you are defining the
endpoint of a rubberband line.
- The Angle Pair mechanism temporarily locks the cursor’s
Coordinate Box Polar Angle value using one of the three
angle pairs or the internal angle of an edited element. The
three angle pairs are set using the Preferences/Mouse
Constraints command (Options menu), and are explained in
detail later in this section.
Using the Angle Pair Mechanism
Constraining the drawing angle helps you precisely align or
connect new elements by maintaining a consistent drawing angle.
To use the Angle Pair mechanism:
1) Position the cursor close to the desired node from where you
wish to get the direction of constraint as you complete any
rubberband line.
2) Press the Shift key to lock in the desired angle. This will also
relocate the User Origin to the nearest node of the edited
element.
With the angle locked, you can move the cursor anywhere on the
screen and snap to any element without losing the orientation of
the line you draw. As opposed to most drawing programs, the
fixed angle will not jump from one predefined angle to the other
as you move around, but will remain steady at the angle it was
locked at.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


66
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

To constrain the editing vector to another angle:


1) Release the Shift key and move close to the other desired
angle.
2) Press Shift again.
Defining the Angle Pairs
ArchiCAD’s Mouse Constraints are based on the angle pairs that
can be defined through the Preferences/Mouse Constraints
command in the Options menu as shown here:

Four angle pairs are defined in ArchiCAD:


- The Horizontal-vertical angle pair used for normal X-Y
orientations.
- The Horizontal-vertical angle pair used for X-Y
orientations with a skewed grid.
- The Fixed angle pair, which is typically used for projects
that consistently use a specific angle in their layout. An
example would be a structure which is oriented at a fixed
angle relative to an adjacent roadway.
This angle can be defined numerically relative to either the
“normal” or the skewed grid.
- The Custom angle pair works like the Fixed angle pair,
except that it can be redefined without interrupting a drawing
procedure by clicking the Parallel or Perpendicular relative
construction icon and a reference edge. It can also be
redefined by drawing a reference vector as described in the

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


67
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Relative Construction Methods section in this chapter. The


Custom angle is not influenced by the use of a skewed grid, it
is always defined in relation with the “normal” horizontal axis.
All four angle pairs are defined by a primary angle, a secondary
angle and both of their reverse angles.
- The primary angle of each pair is entered into the Mouse
Constraints dialog field.
- The secondary angle automatically lies in the transverse
position (rotated exactly 90°) from it.
The following figure shows each of the angle pairs with their
default values.

The two examples given below use the Wall tool to demonstrate
what the Mouse Constraints mechanism does if you press the Shift
key during a drafting or editing process.
Drafting a New Element with Mouse Constraints
After you select the wall tool, click to set the element’s rubberband
line startpoint, move the cursor away from the startpoint, and
press the Shift key.
ArchiCAD will:
1) Move the Edit Origin to the startpoint of the rubberband line
(it appears as a heavy “X”),
2) Search for the enabled Angle Pair whose value is closest to the
position of the cursor,
3) Lock the rubberband line at the selected angle, and
4) Lock the Coordinate Box Polar Angle Value field at the
selected angle and display a box around the “a” icon as a
visual feedback.
On the figure below, you can see a normal and a constrained
rubberband line (note that the cursor is remote from the line and

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


68
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

that the line end is defined by the projection of the cursor’s


position onto the line).

Editing an Element with Mouse Constraints


After selecting an element by clicking it with the Arrow tool (or
Shift-clicking it when another tool is active), click the element’s
reference line or edit node and press the Shift key.
ArchiCAD will:
1) Search for node proximity. The closest eligible node on the
element becomes the Edit Origin.
2) Move the Edit Origin to the closest eligible node (the origin
will appear as a heavy “X”).
- If the origin is moved to the original place of the moved node,
the constraint mechanism will work on the movement vector
of the node. This means that you can move the endpoint
horizontally, vertically or at the other constraint angles.
- If the origin is moved to the opposite endpoint of the edited
element or edge, the constraint angles will be applied to the
element or edge as a whole. This allows you to make the
whole element horizontal, vertical or slanted at the other
constraint angles.
- If the origin is moved to the wrong node, release the Shift key,
move closer to the desired node, and press Shift again.

Selected element, click Selected element, click


reference line edit node

Rubberband drag line Stretch/rotate rubberband line before


before pressing Shift pressing Shift

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


69
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Rubberband drag line Endpoint of stretch/rotate


constrained rubberband line constrained by
by pressing Shift pressing Shift

Eligible Nodes
While Editing a Linear Element:
ArchiCAD searches for the closest node to the cursor’s position
from the edit node or the opposite node (e.g., a Line’s other
endpoint).
While Editing Polygonal Elements:
ArchiCAD searches for the closest node to the cursor’s position
from among the edit node or the neighboring nodes (e.g., the two
nodes adjacent to a Slab polygon’s node).
ArchiCAD will also:
- Search for angle pair proximity to the cursor and find the
closest constraint angle using the Edit Origin as the center.
Depending on which checkboxes are enabled in the Preferences/
Mouse Constraints dialog box, ArchiCAD selects from the active
angles and an additional one ,the Edit Edge’s own internal angle.
Hint: At a vertex where n edit edges meet at the Edit Origin,
ArchiCAD may also select from n possible internal angles
(e.g., where two adjacent edit edges meet at a Slab polygon
node).
ArchiCAD will also:
- Lock the editing vector’s direction at the nearest enabled
constraint angle possible
- Lock the Coordinate Box Polar Angle Value field at the
selected angle and display a box around the “a:” icon as a
source for visual feedback.

Choosing Between Angle Pairs & Coordinate


Constraint
In most cases, Angle Pairs are easier, faster and more versatile than
Coordinate Constraints; however, they do have some limitations.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


70
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

The following two examples describe situations where Coordinate


Constraints are the best way to get the job done.
Locking a Constraint Prior to Drawing
When you want to lock a particular coordinate prior to drawing,
Coordinate Constraints are your only option. Angle Pairs can only
be applied to a rubberband line, which means that you must be
drawing or editing an element before you can constrain an angle.
Angle of cursor’s movement constrained:

Radial distance of cursor from Edit Origin constrained:

Horizonal location of cursor constrained:

Constructing Aligned Elements


If you need to construct angled elements that are horizontally or
vertically aligned with an existing element, you can combine
Coordinate Constraints and Numeric Input as follows:
1) Start drawing the element.
2) Touch the desired point of an existing element for alignment.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


71
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

3) Lock the x or y coordinate.

4) Type a and enter the desired angle (note that angle constraint
cannot be invoked when a coordinate is already constrained).

5) Type a again to preview the change


6) Press Enter or Return to confirm the action.

Editing Polygons
There are six polygon type elements in ArchiCAD with similar
behavior in creation and editing: Slabs, Roofs, Meshes, Fills, Zones
and polygon-type Walls. These tools share many editing
techniques that will be described below.
See also…
The additional possibilities available in the 3D Window under
Working in the 3D Window, later in this chapter.

Drafting a Polygon’s Contour


There are two basic ways in which polygon contours can be
created:
- By drawing them manually using one of the geometry
methods available for that tool;
- By using the Magic Wand tool (or the space-click shortcut) on
any of the edges or nodes of another existing polygon or
chain of linear elements (Walls, Lines, Arcs, Splines)
If the chain of linear elements is not closed, ArchiCAD will still
create the polygon by closing it automatically with a straight
line segment.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


72
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Fill polygon created from a chain consisting of a Line, an Arc and


two Splines
Tracing the inside or outside surface of a wall chain regardless of
the reference line orientation is possible by using the Magic Wand
on one of the inside or outside wall corners.
The result you get when tracing elements with the Magic Wand
depends on the current settings made for the given tool.
This is particularly important for when tracing a polygon’s contour
with the Wall tool. Depending on the currently active geometry
method, you can either place walls on the outline of the polygon
or create a polygonal wall mass matching the contour of the
polygon.
When tracing polygons or chains of elements, circular and spline
segments will be matched or approximated with linear or curved
segments according to the settings made in the Magic Wand
Settings dialog box.
Direct input (drafting) of arced outline segments is not possible.
You can bend straight segments by using the techniques under
Modifying a Polygon’s Contour later in this chapter.
Note: Zone polygons can also be created by simply clicking
inside a closed area (room). ArchiCAD will automatically
identify its borders.
See also…
The description of the Magic Wand Settings dialog box in Chapter
5 (Tools menu).

Placing Holes in Polygons


You may need to make holes in polygons to accommodate objects
such as staircases, or for an open atrium space.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


73
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

If you have selected a polygon and then are drawing a new


polygon-contour within its boundaries, this new contour will be
interpreted as a hole in the polygon.

Note: If you forgot to select a polygon before starting to create


a hole in it, the new contour will be interpreted as a new
polygon, even if it lies inside another polygon. To check for
this, select the polygon in the Floor Plan view. If you have
made a hole, selection dots will be displayed around both the
external and internal contours of the polygon. You can then
select and delete any accidentally created polygon.
You can create holes of any shape by using the Magic Wand tool
as seen above.
A hole is neutral to such an extent that you can use its area as any
other empty part of the worksheet - for deselecting the polygon, or
for constructing a new, independent polygon within the hole.
Note: Creating a hole whose outline intersects the host
polygon’s contour or the outline of other holes in the same
polygon, ArchiCAD will display a warning message, but the
outline of the hole will still be created.

Moving Holes inside Polygons


Holes created in Slabs, Roofs, Meshes or Fills can be edited with
all Edit menu commands, without affecting the host element.
When using the Arrow tool or shift-clicking the outline of the hole
with the Mercedes cursor the hole only will be selected without
the host element. You can then freely drag, rotate, mirror or
multiply it.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


74
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Clicking the hole with the Checkmark, on the other hand, will
select the host element with all the holes it contains.
You can also move holes with the Marquee tool. Draw a Marquee
area around the ENTIRE hole, and then define the vector by
which you wish to move the hole.
Warning: If a part only of the hole is inside the Marquee area,
its shape will be distorted when stretched.
Zones are special polygons, you cannot select and edit individual
holes placed in them. Moving or modifying holes is only possible
with the Marquee tool.

Modifying a Polygon’s Contour


You can modify polygons’ (including holes) outlines either at their
edges or at their nodes.
Any polygon’s shape (or hole placed in a polygon) can only be
modified when the tool that has created it is selected in the
Toolbox.
If you click a selected polygon’s edge or node and hold down the
mouse button, a pet palette appears. Releasing the mouse button
at the chosen icon allows you to execute the appropriate action.

Editing Polygon Edges


By clicking an edge of a selected polygon when the tool that has
created it is active and choosing an option in the appearing pop-
up palette, you can:
- insert a new node on an edge and drag it to a new position.
Double-clicking will insert a new node without moving it.
Note: You cannot insert a node on a bent segment. Clicking a
bent segment will replace it with its chord.
- bend a straight segment by dragging one of its points. The
resulting arc will cross the two endpoints of the clicked edge
and the point that has been dragged.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


75
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Note: If the bent segment intersects any of the other polygon


edges, ArchiCAD will regularize the polygon’s shape, which
may result in cutting the polygon into several parts.

- graphically resize the polygon at an edge. The endpoints of


the chosen edge will be replaced by stretching both
neighboring edges in their own direction. If the action results
in a self-intersecting polygon, ArchiCAD will regularize the
polygon’s shape.

Note: If you try to resize a polygon at one of its bent


segments, ArchiCAD will minimize the radius of the clicked
arc segment so that the resulting arc intersects or becomes
tangential with one of the neighboring edges.
- extend the existing polygon by defining a new polygon or by
using the Magic Wand tool on an existing one. The new
polygon must intersect with the selected one or at least they
should have a common edge.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


76
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

- substract edges from an existing polygon. This operation is


the inverse of the previous one. Here, the intersected area of
the new polygon will be substracted from the existing selected
one.

Note: When working different element types, the pet palette


will contain other icons which do not appear for any of the
other polygon type elements. These allow transformations that
are specific to the given tool. See the description of the
techniques specific to tool types in Chapter 4.
Editing Polygon Nodes
By clicking a node of a polygon when the tool that has created it is
active and choosing an option in the appearing pet palette, you
can:
- pick up a node and reposition it. The connected edges will
follow. You can eliminate a node by merging it into one of its
neighbors.
If you merge a node to a remote node, the smaller part of the
polygon will be deleted.
If you reposition a node so that the polygon edges intersect each
other, automatic regularization occurs.

When repositioning a bent edge’s endpoint, the arc segment will


be stretched in a way that its central angle (the arc-chord ratio)
remains the same.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


77
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

- fillet a polygon vertex. The radius of the resulting tangential


arc can be set in the Fillet/Chamfer Radius dialog box. You
can only fillet corners one by one, but once you have set the
radius, you can perform further filleting actions by just
clicking at any vertex and validating the radius in the dialog
box.

If filleting the arc with the current radius would extend any of the
neighboring vertices, the radius will be limited automatically so
that the filleting arc contains the closer neighboring vertex.
Filleting at intersections of bent polygon segments works the same
way.
- graphically resize the whole polygon. The edges will be
replaced and stretched. If the action would result in a self-
intersecting polygon, automatic regularization occurs.

- extend or substract edges (see above, Editing Polygon Edges)


Note: When working on a Wall or a Mesh, the pet palette will
contain an additional icon which is specific to those type of
elements, allowing you, respectively, to shorten the length of
the polygon wall’s reference line, and to modify the height of
mesh points. See the Wall and Mesh tool techniques in
Chapter 4.

Polygons and Marquee Areas


Polygon nodes which fall within a Marquee area can be
collectively translated to a new location.
See an illustration of this technique at the Marquee tool
description in Chapter 4.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


78
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Splitting Polygons
Polygons can be split by using the Split command in the Edit menu
(see description in Chapter 5.)
You can only use straight lines or edges for splitting polygons.

Cursor Forms
As you work in ArchiCAD, you will see that in different locations
or situations the cursor will change its shape, informing you about
its relation to existing elements or actions expected from you.
In the Appendix at the end of this book, you can find a detailed
chart of ArchiCAD cursor forms.

Correcting Mistakes
The Cancel Button
If you change your mind before completing an operation, use the
Cancel button in the Control Box.
If you hit the Cancel button during a sequence of operations, your
actions will be reversed one by one with each pressing of the
Cancel button. If you change the active tool during such a
sequence the entire operation will be canceled.
Undo
Completed operations can be revoked by choosing the Undo
command (Edit menu). A virtually unlimited number of previous
steps can be undone by repeatedly choosing the undo command.
Accidental erasures are prevented through the Redo function. See
more about this function in Chapter 5.
Clear
Unwanted elements can be deleted by selecting them and
activating Clear from the Edit menu or hitting the Delete key on
the keyboard. Double-check that no elements other than the ones
to be deleted have been selected. Accidental or mistaken deletions
can be revoked by choosing the Undo command.
Other Methods
You can also stop a drawing operation by:
- Pressing the Delete key while drawing,
- Changing tools during the operation,
- Pressing the up, down or right arrow keys.
ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide
79
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Working in the Section/


Elevation Windows
Section/Elevation windows are generated through the placement
of section lines on the Floor Plan with the Section/Elevation tool.
Once a section line has been defined, the name of the
corresponding Section/Elevation appears in the corresponding
hierarchical menu in the Window menu and can be opened by
choosing its name.
There are two types of Sections/Elevations: dynamic Models that
are linked to the model and can be edited interactively with the
Floor Plan, and static Drawings that are unlinked, editable
drawings.

Model Type Windows


Models are sections or elevations of the digital building. They
consist of construction elements and any change made in one of
the Section/Elevation windows will automatically be updated in
the Floor Plan window, and, when activated, in any other Section/
Elevation window.

The Model type Section/Elevation windows are editable, but no


new construction elements can be created in them, with the
exception of duplicating existing Doors and Windows.
Note: Even by copying construction elements and pasting
them back you can only obtain plain, additional drawing
elements.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


80
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Changes made on construction elements in the 3D Window or in


other Section/Elevations windows will appear when next
activating the Section/Elevation window or on choosing Display/
Rebuild Model. The update process works on construction
elements only, additional 2D elements will remain unchanged.
You can modify construction elements in their tool's Settings
dialog boxes or in the Info Box.
Warning: Clearing a construction element in a Model window
will also clear it from both the Floor Plan and the 3D model.

Drawing Type Windows


Models can be converted to simple Drawings by choosing
Display/Unlink Section/Elevation. All construction elements will
then be converted to lines and fills. You can add drawing elements
to this window by using the 2D drafting tools, by placing 2D
objects and text blocks, and even through copy-paste.

Changes made on construction elements can be displayed in the


Drawing window by choosing Display/Renew Section-Elevation.
In this case, additional elements will remain unchanged, except for
associative Dimensions.

Selection
The contents of the Section/Elevation window depends on the
settings chosen for the corresponding section line in the Section/
Elevation Settings dialog box, not on what’s currently selected on

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


81
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

the Floor Plan. Selections made on the Floor Plan do not affect the
Section/Elevation windows in any way.
Selection made in a Section/Elevation window is totally
independent from any other selection made in other windows
(Floor Plan, 3D Window, other Sections/Elevations).

Editing in Section/Elevation
When working in a Section/Elevation window, you can use many
of the functions offered by the Menubar, the Toolbox, the Control
Box, the Coordinate Box, and the QuickViews palette, as well as
the options offered by the scroll bars and the Display bar.

Saving Sections/Elevations
Sections/Elevations are saved together with the project, but it is
also possible to save the contents of these windows as separate
files in a variety of drawing formats by choosing File/Save as...
See also...
The Section/Elevation tool in Chapter 4 and the Display menu
commands in Chapter 5.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


82
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Working in the 3D Window


The 3D Window in ArchiCAD 6.0 is an interactive environment
where you can:
- create and edit 3D construction elements;
- change the viewpoint and projection, i.e. move around in the
Virtual Building.
When the 3D Window is active, an additional 3D Navigation
Palette appears to control editing and navigation.
The sections that follow will concentrate on the concepts and
techniques that are different from those prevailing in Floor Plan or
Section/Elevation editing.

Basic Editing Rules


In the 3D Window, the position of the pointer is interpreted in 3D
space even though the input device and the screen are 2D. To
compensate for this “lost dimension” and avoid ambiguous
situations, several constraints and rules are used.

The Toolbox and the 3D Window


When the 3D Window is active, the Toolbox dims all the 2D
element types. 3D tools are all available.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


83
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

The User Origin in 3D


Within the 3D Window, the User Origin and the X, Y and Z axes
are displayed with bold black lines. The lines are 1 m (approx. 3
ft) long.
To move the User Origin in the 3D space, do one of the following:
- press Alt-Shift and touch any element node with the pointer
without clicking;
- click the Origin button in the Coordinate box and click an
element node, any surface or anywhere in blank space. This
moves the origin without changing its elevation.
Note: Moving the origin to a surface is only possible in
Hidden Line or Shading mode. Clicking in blank space moves
the origin without changing its elevation.
The User Origin is more significant than on the Floor Plan:
- If Gravity is Off, its elevation determines the elevation of new
elements.
- In the Coordinate Box, the Z values can be measured either
from Project Zero or the User Origin..
- In the Settings dialog boxes, elevation values refer to the User
Origin instead of the current story.

Editing Controls in the 3D Navigation Palette


The 3D Navigation palette helps you find your way in 3D. The
navigation controls it contains are described in detail later.

It also holds a number of aids for editing in 3D, including the


Editing Mode button and the Intelligent Cursor switch.
Editing Mode Button
To edit elements, first click the Editing Mode Button (which has an
Arrow icon) in the Editing-Motion area of the 3D Navigation
Palette. This activates Editing mode. In the Toolbox, all 3D
construction element types will be available.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


84
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Intelligent Cursor Switch


Of the two switches located under the Editing Mode button, this
one is on the right and it controls the snapping mode of the cursor.
- If the switch is off, the cursor always moves on the current
editing plane and only snaps to element nodes and edges
within this plane.
- If this switch is on, you are able to find all the edges, reference
lines, etc. of all the construction elements, which are displayed
in the 3D Window. In the process of creating or editing an
element, the position of snapped nodes is always projected to
the current reference plane. This way you can align elements
to other elements above or below them. However when
snapping to nodes out of the reference plane, you will notice
that the ghosted element you are moving will “jump” this is
natural when the position of a node is projected on the
reference plane.
Pointer Lines Switch
Of the two switches below the editing mode Arrow, this one is on
the left.
If it is switched on, the cursor and the coordinate axes are
connected with dotted pointer lines to enhance your perception of
space and pointer location.

Cursor Snapping and Selection


The behaviour of the cursor in relation to existing elements and
the methods for selecting them have been described in detail in
earlier sections. The following paragraphs concentrate on 3D-
specific features.
Snap Nodes and Edges
In the 3D Window, the intelligent cursor snaps to the following
nodes of construction elements:
- Plain Walls: reference line and nodes at the bottom, nodes at
the top;
- Polygonal Walls: edges and nodes at the bottom, nodes at the
top;
- Wall Openings: nodes of the rough opening on both sides of
the wall;

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


85
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

- Objects and Lamps: the same nodes at the bottom of the


element as on the floor plan. ArchiCAD 6.0-smart elements
have also nodes at the top;
- Slabs: all nodes and the top edges;
- Roofs: the nodes and edges of the top surface. If selected, the
pivot line endpoints are added;
- Meshes: nodes and edges of the base polygon; nodes of the
ridges.
In addition, the cursor will indicate intersections, tangential and
perpendicular relations just like on the Floor Plan. However, this
works only for real 3D intersections of edges in the 3D Window.
Finding Hidden Nodes or Edges
In hidden line or shaded views, the cursor does not snap to
invisible nodes and edges. To find those:
- Select an element. Then its hidden nodes will get marked and
the cursor can snap to them and to its hidden edges.
- Switch to Wireframe mode. All the nodes and edges of all
elements will be available.

Selection Methods
- Selection by nodes or edges:
Works the same as on the Floor Plan.
- Selection by surfaces:
You can select any element by clicking anywhere with the Arrow
tool on its visible surfaces, without finding any of its nodes with
the intelligent cursor. This works also in Wireframe, but in this
case you have no visual clue of which surface is visible.
This method only works with the Arrow tool. Shift-clicking with
other tools requires that you click on a node or edge, just like on
the Floor Plan.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


86
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

- Selection by area:
With the Arrow tool, press the mouse button anywhere but on a
node or edge, and move the mouse while keeping it pressed. You
will draw a selection rectangle just like on the Floor Plan. All
elements which have a node within this rectangle will get selected.
No Selection Dots
If all of the selection dots of an element would be outside of the
current view, the element cannot be selected.
This means that in a zoomed view with a wall or slab leaving no
empty background in the image, you can draw selection
rectangles or deselect elements by clicking on the surface of this
element, without the risk of moving it without knowing.
Though it sounds restrictive, this rule is a great help when working
in interiors.
However, if using “automated” selection methods, like the Select
All command or using the Find & Select palette, even these
elements will get selected.
Trimmed Model Views and Selection Dots
In the case of trimmed 3D views, resulting either from a Marquee
area or the use of 3D cutting planes and the 3D Cutaway
command, some elements will be only partially visible.
If selected, selection dots of the whole element will get displayed
and all the nodes and edges can be found with the cursor. If
edited, a temporary ghosted image of the whole element will be
visible.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


87
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

New elements placed or existing elements moved out of the


boundaries of a trimmed model view will disappear from the 3D
Window. Use the Undo command to get back existing elements,
or switch to the Floor Plan to move them into the proper place.
Using the Marquee Tool
The Marquee tool has the following functions in the 3D Window:
- Using the first three methods in the Info Box, you can define
3D boxes or prisms. With a box or prism, the Select All
command will select all element types within if the Arrow tool
is active. Click another tool in the Toolbox and use Select All
to select all elements of that type.
- Using the last method, you can draw a plain rectangle which
can be used to copy the 3D image in the Clipboard. On Copy,
a dialog box opens with lots of special options for the
contents of the Clipboard.
The Marquee cannot be used to move or stretch elements in the
3D Window.
Note: To fine tune the position of the Marquee, move it by its
nodes with the Arrow tool. (On the Foor Plan, moving a
Marquee requires using the Marquee tool.)

Constructing New Elements in 3D


In ArchiCAD 6.0, construction elements can be directly created in
the 3D Window.

Elevation Control
Before you start drawing an element, set the controls and settings
to make sure that the element will be inserted at the right
elevation.
First, set Gravity as required.
Gravity On:
With Gravity, walls, columns, and library parts will be positioned
to the slab or roof surface you click. Existing elements of other
types will have a “transparent” behavior, i.e. the click will poke
through walls or objects and find the first slab or roof surface.
To keep an offset from the clicked slab or roof, open the Settings
dialog box of the tool you want to use and set the “To Element
Beneath” value as desired. If you specify an offset, the pointer will
still move on the slab or roof surface, and a small triangle that

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


88
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

moves with the cursor will mark the initial position of the element
you would create.
The Z field in the Coordinate box will display the elevation of the
surface at the cursor, while the Info Box displays the top and
bottom elevation values of the element you would create. All these
values change automatically as you move the pointer on slabs or
roofs of different elevation.
Gravity Off:
In this mode, the elevation of the User Origin is the principal
factor. Move the User Origin as discussed above to the proper
position, and in the Settings dialog box of the tools, set the “To
User Origin” or “To Project Zero” elevation values as desired.
If you specify an offset from the User Origin, the pointer will still
move on the horizontal plane defined by the User Origin, and a
small triangle that moves with the cursor will mark the initial
position of the element you would create.
The Z field in the Coordinate box will display the elevation of the
User Origin, while the Info Box displays the top and bottom
elevation values of the element you would create.
This applies also to element types which cannot use Gravity: Slabs
and Meshes.
Elevation of Doors and Windows
The elevation of wall openings is strictly determined by the
current values in the Door and Window Settings dialog boxes, and
is always measured from the bottom of the clicked wall.
Elevation and Stories
The 3D Window always displays a certain range of stories.
However there is no visual clue of which elements belong to
which story.
New elements are always added to the story within this range that
best matches their elevation. This means the following:
- If the contents of the 3D Window was defined either by
individual selection or a single-story Marquee area, then all
new elements will be added to the current story regardless of
elevation.
- If multiple stories are displayed as set in the Select Image
Items dialog box, then new elements within the range of a
displayed story will be added to that story, while elements

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


89
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

placed very high or very low will be added to the top or


bottom story of the displayed range.
Note that this only applies to new elements. Existing elements will
always keep their story, regardless of the vertical adjustments
made in the 3D Window. To move them to another story, you
need to activate the Floor Plan window, cut them from one story
and paste them to another.

Creating Elements
In most cases, creating a new element requires one more step than
on the Floor Plan. After you define the position of the element on
the current horizontal plane, draw a vector for its height.
In all cases, double-clicking instead of drawing the height vector
will place an element with the default height or thickness set in the
Settings dialog box of the tool.
When drawing, use the Intelligent Cursor Switch and snap to
existing elements as required.
Walls, Columns, Objects and Lamps:
- Enter the floor plan geometry of the bottom of the element(s)
as you would on floor plan.
- Click the height. Note that the height of objects from older
libraries cannot be set graphically.
Doors and Windows:
- Click on a wall surface or reference line, or at an intersection
point of two wall reference lines.
- Click the position of the opening if placed by the edge or
placed on an intersection point.
- Elevation values come from the Door/Window Settings dialog
box.
- Click the orientation of the opening. A small stick will give a
visual clue of the clicked side.
Slabs:
- Enter the floor plan geometry of the top surface as you would
on floor plan.
- Click the slab thickness.
Roofs:
- Roof type elements cannot be created in the 3D Window.
Draw them on the Floor Plan and edit them in the 3D
Window.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


90
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Meshes:
- Enter the floor plan geometry of the base polygon as you
would on floor plan.
- Click the elevation of the bottom plane.

Editing Existing Elements


First, select the elements you wish to edit.

Editing with the Arrow Tool


Clicking any edge or node of selected elements with the Arrow
tool, a Pet Palette will open with four basic editing operations:
Drag, Elevate, Horizontal Stretch and Vertical Stretch. Except for
the last one, all these actions are also available as commands in
the Edit menu.
Drag in 3D
With the Drag icon or command, you can move the selected
construction element into a different position. First, move the
selected element in the horizontal editing plane, and click. Then
you determine the vertical displacement. The intelligent cursor is
sensitive to the nodes of other elements, so you can move the
selected element in relation to its environment.
Openings can be dragged in 3D too. The main difference
compared to the Floor Plan is that the spans of selected doors and
windows can be moved simultaneously in different walls, if they
have a parallel or concentric position.
Elevate in 3D
With the Elevate icon or command, you can change the vertical
position of the selected construction elements graphically, in
relation to its environment. The horizontal position of the
elements remain unchanged.
Horizontal Stretch in 3D
The Horizontal Stretch icon or the Stretch command allows you to
stretch or shrink the construction elements. This operation takes
place in the horizontal plane, the z coordinate remains unchanged.
The following can be stretched horizontally:
- the endpoints of straight walls by moving the nodes of the
reference line at the bottom of the wall;

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


91
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

- the radius of curved walls by the moving reference line at the


bottom of the wall;
- the angle of curved walls by moving the nodes of the
reference line at the bottom of the wall;
- the width and depth (A and B parameters) of objects by
moving any node of the bounding box.
Vertical Stretch in 3D
Vertical stretching is unique to the 3D Window.
The following can be stretched vertically:
- the height of walls and columns;
- the thickness of slabs and roofs;
- the height of doors, windows and ArchiCAD 6.0-savvy objects;
- the distance between the base polygon and the bottom surface
of meshes.

Editing with Menu Commands


While working in the 3D Window, some of the Edit menu
commands are dimmed. The rest can be used just like on the Floor
Plan.
The Multiply command works a bit different: instead of a numeric
value for vertical displacement, an On/Off switch is displayed.
With the switch Off, the steps of the process are the same as on
the Floor Plan and all copies will be placed at the same elevation
as the original. With the switch On, an extra step is added at the
end to define vertical displacement graphically.
The reference vector required by most menu commands can be
started either on an element node or a surface. To start the editing
operation on a surface, use Hidden Line or Shading mode.
Clicking in blank space starts editing at the current elevation of the
User Origin.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


92
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Editing Polygonal Elements with their Tool


Active
Just like on Floor Plan, editing a Slab, Roof or Mesh while the
corresponding tool is active, will open a Pet Palette with tool
specific editing options. These work the same as on the Floor Plan,
with the following extras:
- When clicking on Roof nodes, the Roof Slant icon is added.
Choose this to interactively change the slant of the roof. Note
that the real thickness of the roof will remain constant.
- When clicking on Mesh nodes, and choosing the Node
Elevation icon also available on the Floor Plan, you can move
the node up and down graphically instead of setting a numeric
value in a dialog box.

The 3D Navigation Palette


The 3D Navigation Palette has tools and controls to:
- change a 3D projection interactively;
- explore 3D spaces in real time (if model size and computer
performance allow);
- edit the keyframes of animation paths.
The Perspective and Axonometric views have specific controls.

The projection mode switch in the top right part of the palette
toggles between view types like a similar control button in the 3D
Projection Settings dialog box.
The Editing-Motion controls include:
The Edit mode icon represented by an Arrow; with this mode on,
3D construction tools can be used and the elements edited.
The Motion tools that allow you to move around in the 3D
window by changing the 3D projection.
These tools are different for perspective and axonometric views
and are also modified by the Motion mode chosen (Camera or
Locked target). See details below.
The Undo button bottom right for undoing the last single view
change.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


93
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Navigation Basics
Navigation is controlled by Motion Tools and Motion Modes.
There are different options for perspective and axonometric views.
Each combination of Tools and Modes results in a different kind of
movement.
Regardless of Tools and Modes, you need to click in the 3D
Window to begin moving. Click first in the center of the image. A
simplified image of the model will be displayed. ArchiCAD will
ignore contours, at first then switch to rough shading, wireframe
or block modes. (Smaller models on fast computers produce the
best results for movement.)
In the middle of the image, a rectangle will appear. This is the
“neutral area”.
If you click anywhere between the rectangle and the window
border, you will begin moving. Click at the top or bottom for one
kind of movement, to the left or right for another, and in the
corner areas for a combination of the two.
Click close to the rectangle to move slowly, close to the window
border to move fast. To move at a constant speed, keep the mouse
pressed. Drag the pointer around to increase or decrease speed
and change directions. For extreme speed, drag out of the 3D
Window as far as your screen size permits.

When you stop moving, the simplified image will be displayed


until you use any of the Look To, Reset, Undo or Edit Mode
buttons. Then it will rebuild the image with the current 3D

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


94
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

Window Settings. In Axonometric views, it will also fit the new


view of the model to the window.
With the Motion tools, you can double-click the Zoom controls at
the bottom of the 3D Window and use the Fit in Window, Next
and Previous View buttons. However, you cannot pan or draw a
zoom rectangle within the window.

Navigation in Perspective
Navigation in perspective view is defined by the combination of
Motion tools and modes.
Motion Tools
There are three Motion tools in perspective views.
1) Walk
- Top-Bottom: moves forward and backward horizontally
- Left-Right: turns around
2) Lateral Move
- Top-Bottom: moves up and down.
- Left-Right: moves laterally to the left or right.
3) Turn
- Top-Bottom: looks or turns up and down. Range is ±90
degrees; cannot turn upside down.
- Left-Right: turns around.
Motion Modes
The two perspective Motion modes are as follows:
- Camera: Keeps the physical distance between camera and
target constant.
- Target Lock: Keeps the current target at the center of the
image. (See also the “Look to” buttons later.)
Motion Tool and Mode Combinations
The following Motion tool/mode combinations exist in perspective
views (note that the tool icon changes in the Edit-Motion area
according to the mode chosen):
- Walk - Camera: Walk within a building, look around in
rooms.
- Walk - Target Lock: Move around in external views, move
closer and farther away.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


95
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

- Lateral Move - Camera: Go up, down and sideways but keep


looking in the same direction (like an elevator or subway
ride).
- Lateral Move - Target Lock: Go up, down and sideways but
keep looking at the same spot of the building.
- Turn - Camera: Stand n one place and look in all directions
as if in the centerpoint of a globe.
- Turn - Target Lock: Move on the surface of a “glass dome”
up, down and sideways but keep looking at the center.
Shortcuts and Tricks
With the Walk or Lateral Move tools, press Shift to switch
temporarily to the opposite tool.
When using the Turn tool, press Shift and click to the left or right
to change the Roll Angle.
Other Controls
Click the Look to buttons then a surface in the 3D Window to
interactively set the target point.
- With the left button, you will actually “face” the clicked
surface as the axis of the camera will become perpendicular to
it and point to the clicked location. The current distance
between camera and target will remain constant.
- With the right button, the clicked point will become the target
while your standpoint remains constant.
It is recommended that before using the Target Lock mode, you
set a proper target either using these buttons or in the 3D
Projection Settings dialog box for reliable movement.
Please note that you can only move the target point to visible
surfaces in the 3D Window. To place the target in blank space or
into a place hidden inside the building, use the graphic and
numeric controls of the 3D Projection Settings dialog box.
Click the Reset buttons to quickly normalize strange views if you
get lost.
- The left button will reset the Roll Angle to zero, i.e., to make
the horizon horizontal again.
- The right button will bring your viewpoint to the same
elevation as that of the target point, i.e., to look in a horizontal
direction again, return ingto “2-point” or “architectural”
perspective.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


96
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

The View Cone sliding switch is the only view control which can
also be used in 3D Editing mode. Drag the sliding switch to
change the view from wide-angle to telephoto.

Navigation in Axonometric Views


In axonometric views, the number of options is somewhat smaller.
Motion Tool
The Turn tool is the only motion tool in Axonometric views.
Clicking anywhere will commence rotation.
Motion Modes
There are two Motion modes in axonometric views.
1) Model
- Rotates the model around the Project X, Y and Z axes.
- Top-Bottom: rotation around X.
- Left-Right: rotation around Z. This kind of motion keeps
vertical edges vertical. Press Shift to rotate around Y.
2) Image
- Rotates the model around the Screen X, Y and Z axes.
- Top-Bottom: rotates the model around a horizontal axis. This
kind of motion also keeps vertical edges vertical.
- Left-Right: rotates the model around a vertical axis. Press Shift
to rotate around an axis which is perpendicular to the screen.
Other Controls
Click the left Look to button to “face” the clicked surface as the
axis of the camera will become perpendicular to it. This affords
undistorted views of roof planes or other skewed element
surfaces.
Click one of the Reset buttons to quickly normalize strange views
if you get lost.
- The left button will make vertical edges vertical again.
- The right button will generate a standard side view, keeping
the current azimuth constant.

Animation Controls
To fine tune the keyframes of fly-through animations, use the
small pop-up button at the top right of the palette.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


97
Chapter 3: Construction Techniques

With no or several cameras selected on the floor plan, you get the
following menu:

Choosing this single command will place a camera on the floor


plan that matches your current viewpoint in the 3D Window. If
you have cameras on the floor plan already that define an
animation path, the new camera will be added after the active
camera, which is marked by its view cone on the floor plan.
With a single camera selected, you get this menu:

- Go to the previous: steps one keyframe back on the


animation path and selects the corresponding camera on the
plan.
- Go to the next: steps one keyframe forward on the animation
path and selects the corresponding camera on the plan.
- Modify the selected: updates selected camera to match the
current projection. Use this when you have changed the view
in the 3D Window.
- Revert view to the selected one: discards all changes you
made manually and shows the 3D model as the selected
camera sees it.
- Insert a new camera after the selected one: in addition to
inserting the new camera, this will also select the new camera
on the plan.
In axonometric views, you get this menu:

- Edit pre-set projections: opens the same dialog box as


available from the 3D Projection Settings dialog box.
- Add current projection: saves the current axonometric view in
the list of pre-set projections.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


98
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Chapter 4
The ArchiCAD Tools
This chapter provides a general discussion of the ArchiCAD
Toolbox as well as detailed instructions for the use, settings and
editing techniques available with each ArchiCAD tool. Where
possible, the procedures for drawing with the tool and editing its
output are expanded to include special tricks and tips that you
may find useful.

The Toolbox
The ArchiCAD toolbox includes a large number of highly
specialized architectural tools. These drawing tools are used in
almost every aspect of creating your projects. Some of the tools are
similar to those used in manual drafting, while others provide
capabilities far beyond what is manually possible. Once you
become familiar with the ArchiCAD toolbox, the tools will become
a natural extension of your drafting and architectural expertise.
Since many of the settings are common to most of the tools, they
are presented once and the description is referenced in
subsequent sections.
In the Toolbox’ default shape, related tools are grouped under a
single icon and the specific tools appear when this icon is flushed
out. To see all the tools at the same time, go to the Window menu,
choose Floating Palettes/Palette Shapes… and check the Extended
option.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


99
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Tool Groups
The tools are organized into functional groups.
Arrow, Marquee - The first two tools are used to select and
manipulate construction elements.
Wall, Column, Window/Door, Object/Lamp, Slab, Roof, Mesh
- The next series of tools combine actual 2D drafting and 3D
modeling capabilities. Elements created with these tools are
displayed on the Floor Plan as 2D construction elements, and in
the 3D Window as solid building components. Their textual
descriptions and components appear in the Component or
Element List.
Dimension/Radial Dimension/Level Dimension/Elevation
Dimension/Angular Dimension, Text/Label, Zone - These
dimensioning and labeling tools allow you to place a large variety
of textual information about the construction elements into the
Floor Plan, onto Sections/Elevations and into Zone Lists.
Fill, Line/Arc/Circle/Ellipse/Spline, Hotspot - These drafting
tools create elements seen in 2D views only. They can serve as
drawing aids, reference points or templates for generating
complex 3D elements.
Section/Elevation and Camera/VR - These two tools allow you
to define elevations and sections, parallel and perspective views,
sun studies, fly-through paths and VR camera positions on the
Floor Plan.
In addition, a sixth, optional group of tools may appear in the
Toolbox, provided that you have installed third party library part
editors (see Appendix).

Tool Availability
Depending on which window is active, all, some or none of the
tools are available:
- when working on the Floor Plan, all tools are available;
- when working on a Section/Elevation window, the Elevation
Dimension, Zone, Section/Elevation and Camera tools are
grayed. Construction tools can only be used for selecting and
editing elements, but not for creating new ones;
- in the Library Part 2D Symbol window, only the selection and
2D drawing tools (including the Text tool) are available;

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


100
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

- when viewing the 3D Window, only the selection and 3D


construction tools are available;
- when viewing the Area list window or a Model Picture
window, the Marquee is the only tool available for selecting
parts of the window to be copied. The Toolbox is always
hidden when any of these windows is active.

Activating Tools
There are several ways to select a tool from the toolbox:
- Click its icon in the Toolbox.
- Press the up or down arrow keys on the keyboard to move
between tool icons.
- Press the right arrow key to toggle between the currently
active tool and the Arrow tool. This is useful when you need
to drag or stretch an element, and then return to drawing.
- Click an existing construction element while holding the
Option key (Macintosh) or the Alt key (Windows) to select the
tool which created the element. This action also loads the
element’s parameters for later use (see the Parameter Transfer
section later in this chapter).

Tool Settings Dialog Boxes


Each tool uses a group of settings to define the appearance and
parameters of the elements it draws. These settings are defined or
modified in tool-specific dialog boxes. Some of the tool settings
dialog boxes are composed of a part that changes according to the
type of attribute that you define, while others have a simpler
arrangement. Both types of dialog boxes share a number of
functions.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


101
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Within the dialog boxes, you can:


- Set default settings for successive elements (if the dialog box
was opened while nothing was selected); or
- Modify the settings of existing elements, if they were selected
when the dialog box was opened.

Opening Dialog Boxes


There are several ways to open the tool settings dialog boxes:
- Double-click on the icon for that tool ;
- Press the left arrow key on the keyboard;
- Select Edit/(Tool) Settings while the desired tool icon is
highlighted;
- Click the appropriate items in the Info Box;
- Click an element with the right mouse button (Windows) or by
holding down the Control key (Macintosh) and choose the
Element Settings command.

Default Tool Settings


When you select a tool and begin to draw, the elements you create
will have all of the characteristics currently set for that tool.
ArchiCAD loads these default values when you use it for the first
time.
You can observe the current default values for any tool by opening
the settings dialog box for the tool when no elements are selected.
When you are viewing the Default settings, the word “Default” is
displayed in the upper right hand corner of the settings dialog
box. When you change the default settings for a tool, the new
values will be the used for all new elements drawn by that tool.
All the settings are saved within a project document, so the next
time it is opened, the last values and settings used will be
effective, and you can continue working in the same environment
as when you stopped.
In addition, all current settings are saved into a Preferences file
every time you quit ArchiCAD. The next time you start ArchiCAD
without opening a particular document, a blank worksheet will
appear and the last used settings will be used as defaults.
Note: When ArchiCAD is launched for the first time after
installation, or if the Preferences file is missing, all dialog
boxes will be reset to the default settings. These settings will
provide a satisfactory result in the learning phase of

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


102
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

ArchiCAD. To return to these factory settings, keep the Option


key (Macintosh) or the Alt key (Windows) pressed and choose
New and Reset from the File menu.

Settings for Existing Elements


The settings for every existing element are always available for
review and modification. To see the settings for an existing
construction element, select the element and open the dialog box
of the associated tool. The settings will then be displayed.
The effects of changing the values in a Tool Settings dialog box
depend on the number of elements that are currently selected:
- If no elements are selected, the default settings are displayed
in the Tool Settings, and the word “Default” is displayed in the
upper right corner of the dialog box. These default settings
may be modified to become the new defaults for that tool.
- If a single element is selected, the changes are applied to that
element, and the default settings are left unchanged.
- If multiple elements are selected, several rules are applied:
1) The number of selected and editable elements is displayed in
the upper right hand corner of the dialog box.
2) Changes are only applied to the selected elements which are
of the same type as the active tool. This means, for example,
that the pencolor of a line cannot be changed from the Slab
Settings dialog box.
Note: Layer and pencolor assignment for elements of different
types can be changed in a single step in a dedicated dialog
box. See Chapter 5, Edit menu, Edit Selection Set… command.
3) If the selected elements are not all alike, the settings of the last
element selected are displayed.
Note: If you draw a selection rectangle with the Arrow tool,
you can see the settings of one particular element by
deselecting and reselecting it before opening the Settings
dialog box.
4) Only the modified settings are applied to the selection set. You
must actively select and change each characteristic you want
applied to the selection set, even if the value appears correct
in the Settings dialog box. This means that you may have to
select and retype numbers, change to another fillpattern and
then change back.
Editing selected elements through the Settings dialog boxes will
not change the default values used for the tools. After deselecting

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


103
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

all elements and reopening the dialog boxes, you will find your
previous default settings untouched.
The selected element(s) will be modified in both the Floor Plan
and the 3D Window, as well as in subsequent quantity
calculations.

Parameter Transfer
ArchiCAD allows you to pick certain settings of one construction
element and pass them to another with two simple keyboard
shortcuts. This facilitates the modification of either the default
values in a Settings dialog box, or the settings of existing elements,
without having to select tools and open dialog boxes.
Picking up the settings of an existint element:
Press the Option key (Macintosh) or the Alt key (Windows) on the
keyboard and at the same time click on an element. Now the
parameters of the element will have become the default settings
for the tool. (You can open the dialog box to check this.)
The settings will then be loaded and the tool activated. With the
next click, you can start drawing a clone of a clicked element.
This feature can be a real time-saver as the project is developed
and more and more of the elements used in the project are already
on-screen on the worksheet. Instead of opening dialog boxes and
setting all the characteristics repeatedly, the project itself can be
used as a graphic library of parametrized elements, which can all
be cloned with this simple technique.
Transferring a dialog box’s settings to an element:
Press the Option and Command keys (Macintosh) or the Alt and
Control keys (Windows) simultaneously while clicking on an
existing element. This will transfer the current default values.

Note: In the case of overlapping elements of different type,


you can check in the Info Box which element has been
selected.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


104
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Text Fields & Numeric Fields


Values in these fields can be entered or modified using the mouse
and keyboard. ArchiCAD provides extensive error checking on the
input values so that invalid values cannot be entered. When
invalid values are entered, (for example a negative wall height) the
system will beep when you try to leave the field.
Linked values, like window header and sill heights, or even
graphics like the preview of an object, are updated concurrently.
When one is changed, the other is revised accordingly. This
update takes place about a second after the modification is made,
when you leave the field or when you press the OK button.
In addition to selecting the whole or partial contents of fields with
the mouse, you can use the Tab key to select the contents of
successive fields in a dialog box.
The keyboard equivalents of the Cut, Copy, Paste and Clear
commands are also effective on the selected contents of editable
fields.

Tool Settings Common


Elements
The Settings dialog boxes of the various tools have many functions
in common.
These functions are presented here together. Only differences and
tool-specific settings will be discussed in the sections dedicated to
particular tools.
Some tools with a large number of settings have dialog boxes
whose contents change according to the selected attribute type
(Parameters, Floor Plan, Model, Listing).

General Controls and Attributes


General Tool Settings controls are always displayed in these dialog
boxes, even in those whose content changes according to the
selected attribute type. They include geometry data, elevation
values, the preview of Library Part type elements, layer assignment
and the OK and Cancel buttons allowing you to validate or nullify
modifications.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


105
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Vertical Elevation Fields


The elevation fields, in conjunction with the Story Settings
command in the Options menu, define the vertical structure of
your project.

The Story Settings determine one or more vertical baselines for


construction elements. The Elevation fields determine the vertical
placement of construction elements relative to the current active
story, to the project zero or to another element.
The selected Gravity icon will determine whether a newly created
construction element can be placed according to its default vertical
position or relative to an existing element’s surface at its insertion
location.
The “to Story n” and the “to Project Zero” fields are linked: if you
change one, the other will be automatically updated.
See also…
Stories in Chapter 5 (Options menu) and Gravity in Chapter 2
(Control Box).

Gravity
Walls, Columns, Objects and Lamps can be placed in relation
either to the current story’s zero level, to a slab or to a roof
beneath.
See also…
The description of the Gravity feature under the discussion of the
Coordinate Box in Chapter 3.

Construction Methods
Most tools have construction methods or types that you can
choose either from the Info Box or from within their own Settings
dialog box. See the discussion of individual tools for their specific
methods available.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


106
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Preview Area
Library Part elements (Doors, Windows, Objects, Lamps and
Zones) can be previewed in the General controls part of their
respective dialog boxes.

On the right hand side of the dialog box, the Preview area displays
the 2D Symbol, the hidden line side view or axonometry, the 3D
view shaded axonometry, the predefined preview picture or the
information notes of the selected or default Library part. If more
than one Library Part has been selected, it is the one selected last
that appears.
On the right, next to the Preview Area, one or two buttons allow
you to flip the 2D Symbol or the 3D View, and the button below
opens the Preview pop-up menu.
Use the Preview pop-up menu to display the symbol, the 3D view,
the preview pictures or even the info notes.
See also…
For information on how to assign a preview picture and
information notes to a Library Part, see the ArchiCAD Library
section in Chapter 6.
Outlines on Other Stories
The display of Objects, Lamps, Slabs, Roofs and Meshes on other
stories is controlled by three checkboxes, allowing you to display
these elements’ outlines on all stories in a Project or on the story
directly above or below.
If any of the checkboxes is active, you can edit the given element
on the stories where it is visible and not only on its own story.
This option can be set and unset for individual elementsand made
into the default setting for subsequent ones.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


107
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

You can select a line type for this option in Options/Preferences/


Remote Elements.

Layer Selection Pop-Up Menu


Whatever element you draw in ArchiCAD will be placed onto one
of the available layers. The layer you assign to an element can be
selected in the pop-up shown to the left. The layers are listed
alphabetically, with the exception of the first item in the list, called
‘ArchiCAD layer‘.
Any layer in the list can be assigned to an element. The only
exception to this rule is Doors and Windows which are always
placed on the same layer as the Walls they are housed in.
Visible layers are indicated by an open eye and hidden ones by a
shut eye. The llock symbol in front of the layer’s name shows
whether the given layer is locked in order to prevent it from being
modified or not.
Even invisible layers can be selected. However, if you try to draw
to an invisible layer, an alert will remind you that the default layer
for the given tool is hidden. You can then opt to either show the
default layer, cancel the drawing process altogether or go to the
given tool’s Settings dialog box and select another layer for your
element.
Locked layers are not available for construction. Their names are
dimmed in the pop-up list. Alternately, you can choose not to
display them at all in the pop-up list by going to Options/
Preferences/Miscellaneous and enabling the appropriate
checkmar.

See also…
Chapter 5, Options menu, Layers hierarchical menu items.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


108
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The OK & Cancel Buttons


Clicking OK will accept the modifications you made. Clicking
Cancel means that everything you have done in the dialog box will
be disregarded.

Parameters
Library Part type tools’ settings dialog boxes share a first button
giving access to Parameters that affect the overall appearance and
behaviour of these elements.

See also…
The Door/Window, Object/Lamp and Zone tool descriptions later
in this chapter, as well as the ArchiCAD Library section in Chapter
6.

Floor Plan and Section Attributes


Pencolor Palette & Field
This control is shared by all tools. Most of them require two or
more Pencolor palettes for their components. On the left side you
can set the pencolor numerically from a set of 99; clicking on the
right side opens the palette of the current pencolors.

Between the pencolor and the numeric pen setting the


approximate Pen Weight is displayed.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


109
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The number will automatically be updated as you scroll the


selection marker in the palette.
The palette is a 10 by 10 grid of pencolors. Numbers translate
easily to the palette fields: 23 means two complete rows plus the
third field in the next row.
Note: Pen no. 100 in the bottom right corner of the palette is
only used for fill background pens. In any other instances, it is
dimmed.
See also…
Chapter 5, Options menu, Pens & Colors… command.

Line Type Palette & Name


This control is shared by most tools. Some of them allow the
definition of several Line types for their components.
Standard built-in line types can be specified from the pop-up
palette. You can also create your own line types with the Options/
Line Types command. See Chapter 5 for more information on this.

Fill pattern Palette & Name


This control is used by the Wall, Column, Slab, Roof, Mesh, Fill
and Library part type tools. It works the same way as the Pencolor
pop-up palette.
Fill patterns are listed alphabetically. In contrast to the editable
field of the pencolor number, the fill pattern name is a static field
which only displays the name of the fill patterns as you scroll in
the palette.
The set of fill patterns is not the same for the different tools.
For walls, slabs and roofs, in addition to the fill patterns, the
palette displays the available composite structures in the bottom
rows. These can be selected the same way as fill patterns.
Wall fill patterns are visible both on the Floor Plan and in Sections.
Slab and Roof fill patterns appear only on the exposed surfaces in
Sections.
Note: You can redefine both the fill color and the fill
background color in the appropriate pencolor fields.
Hint: Additional fill options are available in the Preferences/
Miscellaneous dialog box. You can choose a global setting by
clicking one of the three radio buttons (All Fills
Transparent, Use Fill’s Background Color or Use
Drawing Background Color). They all affect the appearance

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


110
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

of the fill’s background color, which may help you in


integrating into your project plan files created with earlier
versions of ArchiCAD.
See also…
Working in Section/Elevation in Chapter 3, and the Fill Types…
and Composites… commands (Options menu) in Chapter 5.

Model Attributes
The Model Attributes controls are common to all construction
tools. Most of the options will be described here, but see the
individual tools’ description for tool-specific information.

Material Pop-up Menus


These controls are available for all 3D construction tools. Some
tools, like the Wall or Slab tools, have multiple controls for the
different surfaces. To select a material for the surface indicated by
the icon on the left, click-and-drag to the desired material name.
Surface finishes can be selected separately when different aspects
are desired, or linked together using the Chain icon to choose
identical aspects.
Surface colors are shown in the boxes together with the 3D
Hatching and the Texture (if any) assigned to the material.
The materials are listed alphabetically except for the first item,
GENERAL. If you choose this item for any surface, it will be
painted in 3D images using the same pencolor as the element’s
edges.
Library parts may also have additional material settings included in
the Parameter Listing.
See also…
Chapter 5, Options menu, Materials… command.

Roof Trimming
If any construction elements (Walls, Slabs, Library Parts) have been
trimmed to Roofs by using the Trim to Roof command, a button
appears in this part of the dialog box, allowing you to undo the
trimming and to return the selected elements to their original state.
See also…
The trimming process is described in Chapter 5, under the Trim to
Roof command (Edit menu).

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


111
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Listing Attributes
The Listing Attributes tab page is shared by all construction tools
and the Fill and Zone tools, that is, all elements that can appear in
calculations.
See also…
The Calculate menu commands in Chapter 5 and Performing
Calculations in Chapter 6.

ID Field
Within this field, you can define an identifier for any element. This
identifier can then be listed in quantity calculations, and is also
included if either the project or a part of the project is saved as a
GDL script.
The text string within this field cannot exceed 15 characters. Any
characters can be used.
If a number is included anywhere in the 15 characters, drawing
successive elements will add one to this number for each new
element., provided that the Auto ID Increase checkbox is
enabled the Options/Preferences/Miscellaneous dialog box. Each
new element will have a unique ID.
If elements are duplicated or multiplied, the IDs of the replicas will
remain the same as those of the originals.
If you paste elements into a project, you may have elements with
conflicting IDs. ArchiCAD does not automatically exclude ID
conflicts. It is up to the user to designate different IDs for elements
which may be in conflict.
Note: All construction elements also have a unique,
automatically generated, internal ID which is conserved
throughout the life of the project. You can also use this
identifier for labeling or in lists.
Properties
Properties consist of components and descriptors. Construction
elements may be built of several components such as bricks,
insulation and mortar that are listed by code, name, quantity and
unit. Descriptors store extra information about the construction of
elements, including the period of construction, the quality of the
workforce and the area of formwork.
There are two ways to assign components and descriptors to
construction elements: by criteria or by assignment. You can

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


112
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

assign variables to a combination of conditions such as fills, pen


color and element types. To do this, apply Criteria by choosing
the first radio button.
However, you may need to assign additional information (e.g.
strengthened reinforcement) to selected items, or to create an
assignment that deviates from the standard criteria. If that is the
case,click the Properties by Assignment radio button.
If you need to merge an assignment with a criterion, choose the
third radio button, Criteria & Assignment.
If you plan to create an assignment, you can start by defining it
directly from this dialog box by clicking the Assign Properties
button. The name of the criteria or assignment will be displayed
below this button. You may then remove the current assignment of
the element by clicking the Detach button.
Choosing only Criteria will dim the two buttons.

Editing Tool Attributes


Attributes are global collections of layers, pencolors, surface
materials, fill patterns, etc. that are available to all eligible tools.
These attribute sets are editable, and the lists and palettes in the
Tool Settings dialog boxes display their current settings.
Note: Changes to an attribute (for example changing the color
assigned to a certain pen number) affect every element that
uses that attribute. This is in contrast to the tool settings which
affect the characteristics of a single element.
You can take advantage of this if, for example, you want to change
the pencolor of all red lines. One option would be to select all of
them and change the pencolor assignment in the Line Settings
dialog box, across all stories, one after the other. Another
approach would be to make the modification in a single step by
changing the pencolor attribute to red.
Note: Global attribute changes such as pencolor will not be
maintained when elements are copied from one project to
another. This may be important when working in a group that
has its own set of internal standards.
See also..
Attributes can be accessed through the Options menu, which is
discussed in detail in Chapter 5.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


113
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Arrow Tool


The Arrow tool is used for several important functions:
- Selecting and deselecting construction elements
- Stretching and moving construction elements
Since the Arrow tool can simultaneously select and edit an item, it
is often the quickest and easiest way to edit elements in your
project.

Arrow Tool Techniques


Selecting Elements
Move the Arrow cursor close to a corner or edge of any
construction element and click. Hotspots will appear around the
selected element indicating that it has been selected.

You can also click and drag to draw a selection rectangle around
those items you want to select.

ArchiCA D 6.0 Reference Guide


114
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Any element that has one of its nodes in the rectangle will become
selected, and selection hotspots will appear on each of the
elements. You can quickly select a series of different construction
elements this way, and then deselect unwanted ones individually.
Note: Walls, Lines and Arcs will be selected if the selection
rectangle crosses their reference lines.
When several elements overlap, successive clicking with the
Checkmark cursor will cycle through the selection markers of the
available elements. The Info Box gives you visual feedback about
the last selected element.
In the 3D Window, you can also select elements by simple clicking
one of their surfaces. See also the Editing in 3D section of Chapter
3.
Deselecting Elements
To deselect one or more elements, click or draw a selection
rectangle around the selected elements you want to deselect with
the Arrow tool while pressing the Shift key. Any number of
elements can be deselected this way, either individually or as a
group.
Click with any tool (including the Arrow) on an empty part of the
ArchiCAD worksheet if you intend to deselect all the selected
elements at once.

Stretching & Shrinking Elements


After selecting a line or wall, move the Arrow cursor to the
endpoint of the element, or to the endpoint of the reference line.
Click, and then move the Arrow cursor. The wall or line will
stretch or shrink as you move the cursor.
1) Click on the endpoint of the wall.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


115
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

2) Stretch and reposition the wall by dragging the cursor to a


new location.

3) The wall will stretch and rotate to meet the new endpoint
location.

Note: You can stretch more than one selected wall or line at
the same time if you click-and-drag their common endpoint.
Objects and Lamps can be stretched by picking up and moving
their hotspots.
To stretch an object, select it and try to pick up one of its nodes to
graphically change its shape and size. This is only possible if the
hotspots were appropriately defined, i.e. the projected distance
between hotspots is identical with the object’s nominal size.
See also…
Editing in 3D in Chapter 3.

Moving Elements
To move an element, click on a node or edge of a selected
element. When you move the arrow cursor, the element will be
dragged by the vector the cursor has defined.

ArchiCA D 6.0 Reference Guide


116
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

This function will also work when several elements have been
simultaneously selected. All of the selected elements will be
dragged along the same vector.

See also…
Editing in 3D in Chapter 3.

Arrow Key Shortcut


Pressing the right arrow key toggles ArchiCAD between the tool
you were last using and the Arrow tool. This shortcut allows you
to quickly access the Arrow tool or an editing action, and then
return to the tool you were using.

Marquee Tool
The Marquee tool is used to define areas for editing and
visualization purposes. The capabilities of the Marquee tool
overlap those of the Arrow tool, and are particularly useful in
selecting and moving groups of ArchiCAD elements.

Construction Methods
When working on the Floor Plan, the Marquee tool has two
construction methods available in the Info Box.
The Single Floor construction method allows you to edit, clear
and cut/copy/paste elements both onto and off of the floor you
are currently working on.
The All Floors construction method allows you to edit, clear and
cut/copy/paste elements both onto and off of all the floors of your
project.
Note: These controls are dimmed when viewing the 3D
window, since physical limitation is controlled by selection.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


117
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Drawing Marquees
To use the Marquee tool for selection and editing, you must first
define a rectangular or polygonal selection area by choosing one
of the Geometry Methods below. All construction aids are
available, including numeric input and drafting modifiers.
If you inadvertently start to draw the selection area at an
unintended point, either finish and start again, or click the Cancel
button and start anew.
- If you click a node or an edge inside the selection area, the
cursor will assume the Checkmark or Mercedes shape. If you
then move the cursor, the selection area will be moved with
all the nodes or edges included in it. (See Marquee
Techniques later.)
- If you click inside the selection area without touching a node
or an edge, the cursor will assume the Trident ( ) shape. In
this case, moving the cursor will only move the selection area,
leaving all enclosed elements unchanged.

Geometry Methods
There are three shape options for Marquees available as icons in
the Info Box when viewing the Floor Plan or a Section/Elevation
window.
The Polygonal method defines a selection area by any number of
points. You draw the contour lines individually. Completing a line
simultaneously begins the next one. You can close a Polygonal
Marquee by double-clicking the last endpoint, clicking OK in the
Control Box or by drawing the last endpoint on top of the first one
and clicking once when the Hammer cursor appears. When the
selection area is completed, it will appear as a dashed contour.

ArchiCA D 6.0 Reference Guide


118
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Rectangle method defines a selection rectangle that is


orthogonally aligned with the grid. After the first click, a
rubberband line rectangle will follow the cursor, allowing you to
see the selection area. After the second click at the diagonally
opposed corner, the selection rectangle will appear as a dashed
contour line.
The Rotated Rectangle method allows you to define a selection
rectangle at any angle. With this method, you first draw one side
of the rectangle with two clicks, and then, with a third click, you
define the length of the perpendicular sides. The selection
rectangle will appear as a dashed contour line.

In the 3D Window only, the Marquee tool has four Geometry


methods. The first three are extensions of the Polygonal, Rectangle
and Rotated Rectangle methods. First the basis of the marquee
area is defined with the same steps as on the Floor Plan, and then
you define the height of the selected space. The coordinate axes
are continuously present on screen to help you.

The fourth Geometry Method allows you to draw a 2D marquee in


order to copy/drag elements from the 3D window in the form of
pictures.
See also…
Working in 3D in Chapter 3, and Copy/Paste in the Edit menu
description in Chapter 5.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


119
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Selection Criteria
Selection by a Marquee area has different criteria depending on
what you intend to do with selected elements and which window
you are working in.
In the Floor Plan window:
- If you wish to cut, copy, clear, drag, mirror, rotate or duplicate
elements, they must have at least one node inside the
Marquee area in order to be selected. The edit operations will
act on the whole element.
- If you wish to stretch/shrink elements, the Marquee area
should include only those nodes of the linear, polygonal and
circular elements that you wish to move, otherwise the whole
element will be displaced. See details and example below.
- If you opt to view elements in 3D, any part of an element that
falls inside the Marquee area will be included (or excluded) in
the 3D view, even if there is no selection node or hotspot on
this part of the element. (See also Select Image Items in the
Image menu in Chapter 5.)
Note: If you have selected a concave area boundary with the
Polygonal method, the marquee polygon will be completed to
form a convex shape for the 3D view.
- If you wish to perform individual selection restricted to a
specific area by using the Select All... or Find & Select...
commands, elements that have at least one node inside the
marquee area will be selected.
In Section/Elevation windows:
- If you wish to cut or copy elements, they must have at least
one node inside the Marquee area in order to be selected. The
edit operations will act on the whole element, but in case of
construction elements, only a copy exploded into 2D drawing
elements will be actually copied.
- If you wish to drag or stretch/shrink elements, the marquee
can be used the same way as on the Floor Plan, but will only
affect 2D drafting elements. See also the Working in Section/
Elevation section in Chapter 3 for details.
- If you wish to perform individual selection, the marquee can
be used the same way as on the Floor Plan.

ArchiCA D 6.0 Reference Guide


120
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

In the 3D Window:
- If you wish to perform individual selection, the extended 3D
marquee can be used the same way as on the Floor Plan. This is
the only function of the 3D marquee.
- If you wish to take a snapshot from the 3D drawing, you will get
a picture cropped by the 2D marquee.

Deselection
Deselection occurs when you either begin a new selection
rectangle or double-click on the worksheet outside the marquee
area with the Marquee tool selected.
If you choose another tool, the marquee area will be preserved in
order to save the recent selection area for further use.
When you remove the box, all the elements touched by it will be
deselected.

Marquee Tool Techniques


A large number of editing techniques are available with the
Marquee tool on the Floor Plan. In the 3D Window, however,
editing operations with the Marquee are limited to selection and
copying (with the 2D Marquee method).

Stretching/Shrinking Polygons
Nodes of polygon type elements (Slabs, Roofs, Fills, holes, Zones)
which fall within a Marquee area can be moved to a new location
by using the Edit/Stretch command relative to the vector defined
by both a Stretch reference point and a Stretch-to point.

Stretching without the Stretch command is also possible by picking


up an element node inside the selection area.
If all the nodes of a polygon are inside the Marquee area,
stretching will have the same effect as dragging.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


121
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

If none of the nodes of an element fall inside the Marquee area,


stretching has no effect on it.
Stretching/Shrinking Other Element Types
Columns, Objects and Lamps cannot be stretched with the
Marquee. If any of their hotspots fall inside the Marquee area, they
will be dragged when repositioning the Marquee area.
Walls, Arcs, Lines and Splines can also be stretched with the
Marquee. All nodes inside the selection area will be moved to a
new position, while nodes outside the marquee will remain in
their original position.

When stretching Arcs or curved Walls with the Marquee, their


central angle (i.e. the arc/chord ratio) will remain unchanged.

Stretching with a Marquee area has no effect on Cameras.

Using Other Edit Commands with a Marquee


Area
With the exception of Split and Adjust, all Edit menu commands
can be performed on selections made with the Marquee tool.
- Polygon type elements, Columns, Objects, Splines and Figures
must have at least one node inside the selection area.
- Walls, Arcs and Lines can be edited if any part of the element
is inside the selection area.

ArchiCA D 6.0 Reference Guide


122
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Copying 3D and Elevation Views to the Floor Plan


You can use the Marquee tool to copy an area of the 3D window,
a Section/Elevation window or a Model Picture window. This
allows you, for instance, to insert elevations onto the same page as
the floor plan for fast feedback.
1) Generate the view you need.
2) Use the Marquee tool to select the area you wish to move.
3) Choose the Copy command (Edit menu) to place a copy of the
selected image on the Clipboard.
4) Move to the Floor Plan and choose the Edit/Paste command.
5) Position the image on your Floor Plan using the Trident cursor.
6) Click outside the selection rectangle to complete the
operation.
- Elevations are pasted to the Floor Plan as full size 2D
elements.
- Parts of Model Pictures are pasted as screenshots (Figures).
- Parts of the 3D Window are pasted to the Floor Plan either as
2D elements (full size or scaled), or as unified pictures
(Figures), according to the choice you made when copying
them.

See also…
The Copy and Paste commands under File in Chapter 5.

3D Details with the Marquee Tool


You can use the Marquee to view only specific parts of the 3D
model by drawing a marquee area around the details you wish to
either include or exclude from the 3D image. This technique can
be applied to either the current story or to all stories, depending
on the construction method chosen.
See also…
The Select Image Items command in the Image menu (Chapter 5).

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


123
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Working with Figures


The Figures feature of ArchiCAD enables you to place two-
dimensional graphics on the Floor Plan worksheet. You can use
either graphics generated within ArchiCAD (see above) or import
files from other sources.
When pasting the contents of the 3D Window as a screenshot or
importing (merging) a bitmap image, the only option available is
pasting it as a Figure, that is, a single entity.
The graphics you place this way normally appear in the Floor Plan
in a Marquee area at the figure’s default size and location. You can,
however, draw a marquee area on the Floor Plan before pasting
the Figure. In this case, the Figure will be resized and distorted to
fit the Marquee area.
The only setting available for Figures is the Layer, which you can
choose by selecting the Figure and opening the Figure Settings
dialog box (Options menu).

All Figures are by default placed on the Figures layer.


Once you have placed the Figure, you can manipulate it like any
other element with Edit menu transformation commands such as
Drag, Stretch and Rotate. You can select Figures with the Arrow
tool by their bounding box apices, or you can select all the Figures
when the Marquee tool is active by choosing the Select All Figures
command from the Edit menu.

ArchiCA D 6.0 Reference Guide


124
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Wall Tool


The wall is a fundamental element in the practice of architecture.
When you create a wall in ArchiCAD, you create:
- The outline and hatching of a wall in 2D, and
- A solid wall body in 3D.
Because walls are such important elements of your project, they
form special relationships with other ArchiCAD elements:
- Other Walls: Automatic L and T intersections are formed
between walls. Overlapping vertical edge segments for
tangential walls.
- Doors and Windows: A wall is the only placeholder of these
elements. They become part of the wall.
- Slabs: Overlapping wall and slab edges are eliminated in 3D:
façades will be clean on elevations and other 3D views.
- Roofs: Walls can be trimmed to roofs.
- Columns: Automatic wall-column connections, optional wall
wrapping around columns.

Drawing Walls
There are a number of characteristics associated with ArchiCAD
walls which are set in the Info Box and the Wall Settings dialog
box. Before examining these wall parameters in detail, let us
consider how walls are drawn.

Geometry Methods
There are ten Geometry Methods available from the Info Box for
drawing simple and special wall configurations.
The icons in the top row allow you to draw straight walls:
The Single Wall method produces one Wall element at a time.
Each one is defined by drafting its Reference Line’s startpoint and
endpoint.
The PolyWall method produces a sequence of connected Wall
elements with automatically coincident Reference Line endpoints.
The first Wall is defined in the same way as a Single Wall, except
that as you define its Reference Line endpoint, you also
simultaneously define the next Wall’s Reference Line startpoint.
Double-click to complete (or click the Control Box’ Cancel button
to stop) drafting the last Wall element.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


125
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Rectangle Wall method produces four Wall elements with


coincident nodes by defining the diagonal line of a rectangle.
The Rectangle Wall’s four sides are always aligned orthogonally
with the normal grid. It is not affected by the use of a skewed grid.
The Rotated Rectangle Wall method produces four Wall
elements as with the previous method, except that you first define
a rotation vector for the Rectangle’s Base Reference Line (shown
below).
The rotation vector also defines the length of the two walls parallel
to it. However, you can unlock the length component constraint
and use only the rotation angle component of the rotation angle
by pressing the Shift key.

Note: The Polywall, Rectangle and Rotated Rectangle methods


generate several independent elements in one step. After the
polywall or rectangle is completed, each wall can be
individually edited. However, if the Autogroup feature was
active when creating the walls, they will be automatically
grouped and can be edited together.
The icons in the second row allow you to draw curved walls. The
four available methods work the same as for Arcs/Circles. You can
find a complete description at the Arc/Circle tool section of the
Reference Guide.

Note: You cannot create Walls in 3D with the PolyArc or


Tangential Construction Methods.
The last two icons allow you to create special wall constructions.
The Trapezoid or Non-Parallel method allows you to draw walls
whose thickness is not constant. The values at both ends of the

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


126
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

wall can be entered in the corresponding fields of the Wall Settings


dialog box.
Note: When choosing a composite fill for the trapezoid wall,
you will see that only the core skins’ thickness changes along
the wall’s length.
The Wall Polygon method can be chosen if you wish to draw
walls of irregular shapes. This method simply converts a polygon
to a wall and fills it with the default fill pattern.
There are some restrictions for polygonal walls:
- you cannot place any Doors or Windows into them;
- they cannot have composite structures;
- they must have at least four sides, which means that splitting
polygonal walls may give some strange results.

The Reference Line


After you have begun a line with the first click, a heavy black line
follows the cursor like a rubberband. This rubberband line is the
reference line for your wall. The reference line is used to connect
walls smoothly and to help you locate walls with the cursor.
The position of the wall body with respect to the reference line is
determined using the Wall Construction Methods described later in
this section.
As you move the cursor over a wall’s reference line, it will change
shape to the Mercedes cursor, indicating that a wall has been
identified.
As you draw the reference line, the thickness of the wall is shown
by a dotted outline. This shows you how the wall will be drawn
with respect to the reference line. The reference line endpoints are
stored in the document itself. The reference line stays in place if
the orientation, thickness or offset of the wall is modified.
- The cursor will be sensitive to the reference line, but not to the
physical wall surface.
- Doors and windows can be inserted at any wall corner point
and at the reference line.
- Connected reference lines make connected walls.
- You can flip a wall from one side of the reference line to the
other or offset it relative to its reference line, but you cannot
move the reference line while keeping the wall at the same
location.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


127
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Wall Polygons and the Reference Line


ArchiCAD allows you to redefine the reference line of polygon
type walls.
When you have finished drawing the polygonal wall, disable
Clean Wall Intersections (Options menu), and you will notice
several reference lines joined along its perimeter.
Choose the Wall tool and select the polygonal wall. Click a node
on either end of the reference line.
The pet palette appears with an additional icon at its end, allowing
you ro shorten the length of the reference line. However, you
always have to have three neighboring nodes even with the
shorter reference line.

Construction Methods
The wall construction methods in the Info Box (see Chapter 3) and
the Wall Settings dialog box determine where the physical
thickness of the wall will be located with respect to the reference
line.
The reference line is used to connect walls precisely for clean
intersections, and to establish hotspots and edges for selecting,
moving or stretching walls.
Choosing one of the wall orientation icons will establish a default
orientation for the reference line, or change the orientation for any
selected walls.
You can modify the orientation of several walls with respect to
their reference lines at the same time by selecting them and
explicitly changing the construction method either in the Info Box
or in the Wall Settings dialog box.
Hint: While drawing a wall, if the gray outline of the wall is
not on the desired side of the rubberband line, you can
change the orientation in the control box on the fly and
continue drawing.

The Wall Settings Dialog Box


The Wall Settings dialog box allows you to define the parameters
of selected walls or to set default values for future walls. The
dialog box is displayed by double-clicking the Wall tool in the
Toolbox, by simple clicking it in the Info Box or by pressing the
left arrow key when the Wall tool is selected.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


128
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The dialog box consists of two parts. On the right, the available
settings define the geometry of the wall and is visible at all times
when the dialog box is open. On the left, three large buttons allow
you to define the various aspects of your walls.
Many of the settings are common to all or most tools. The
description of these settings was given in the Common Tool
Settings section of this chapter. Only differences and specific
settings are discussed here in detail.

General Settings
Elevation
In the right hand part of the dialog box, the first setting is the
actual height of the wall.
The next three fields show the base elevation of the wall relatively
to a number of reference planes. These settings are interrelated,
and you cannot set contradictory values.
Walls adhere to their active story more strongly than to the
absolute zero level. This means that if you change the elevation of
a story (see the Stories section of Chapter 5), any walls linked to
that story will change their elevation with it. The wall’s elevation
relative to the absolute zero level will automatically be updated.
The “to Element beneath” field will become active if the
appropriate Gravity state has been selected. See later for details.
Note: You have fast access to the absolute values of the Wall’s
elevation through the Info Box.
Wall Thickness
To set the thickness of the walls, type the desired value into the
appropriate edit box. You can also copy and paste values to and
from this box using the usual keyboard shortcuts.
Non-Parallel walls have two thickness fields for the starting and
end thickness values.
Thickness is not editable if a Composite Wall is selected in the fill
pattern pop-up palette. The thickness of these walls can only be
edited in a dedicated dialog box, by choosing Options/
Composites.
Hint: Select the composite wall you wish to edit, and click
OK. Open the Compositess… dialog box, and this type will
automatically be selected for editing.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


129
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Wall Offset
The distance of the Reference Line from the surface of a wall can
be set using the Offset edit box.
Walls with an offset can be used to trace the outline of a slab with
one of the internal contours of composite wall skins. An offset can
also help keep the reference line at either the center or border of a
wall structure skin.
Note: The offset parameter is not available (dimmed) when
you are drawing axial walls.

Floor Plan Attributes

Composite Wall Parameters


ArchiCAD’s composite wall feature allows you to create walls
which are composed of several skins with different fill patterns.
For example, you may want your exterior walls to be composed of
a brick veneer, wood stud center and drywall interior.

By creating a composite wall, you can represent the wall


graphically on your Floor Plans. You can also track the quantities
of each skin used in the project with ArchiCAD’s quantity
calculations.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


130
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

There are several predefined composite walls in the fills list of the
main Wall Settings dialog box, and these structures can be handled
with the same ease as single-skin walls.
Note: In Clean Wall Intersections mode, the cursor can snap to
the nodes of each skin at wall endings or intersections.
You can choose from the predefined composite walls by clicking
on the Fill pattern pop-up palette and choosing one of the
composite walls in the lower part of the box.
The pop-up control of the fillpatterns displays the active fillpattern
so that it reflects the current pencolor settings.
You can draw Composite Walls with multiple colors. The pencolor
definition of the walls is similar to those of library parts. You can
either use pencolors defined in the Composite Structures dialog
box or you can override these pencolors using a uniform pencolor
setting.
Marking the Use Line and Fill Color of Composite checkbox
will choose the multicolor definition of the chosen structure and
apply it to the wall. The checkbox is dimmed if the current wall fill
is a simple fill. Switching to a simple fill from a composite will
force the checkbox to be active.
Note: The overall thickness of Composite Walls cannot be
edited in Wall Settings, only skin by skin using the Composite
Structures command.
See also…
The Fill Types and Composite Structures commands in Chapter 5
(Options menu).
Pen Colors
The color (pen number) for the contours, the fill pattern and the
fill background of your walls can be independently set using the
pen number edit boxes. To set the pen number you can either
enter a pen number or click on the color pop-up menu and select
a color.
- The first pen number controls the contours of the wall.
- The second pen number controls the fill pattern’s color and
the internal contours of composite wall skins.
- The third pen number controls the fill background color.
See also…
The Pens & Colors command in Chapter 5 (Options menu).

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


131
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Model Attributes

Surface Materials
Walls are displayed in the 3D Window or in a Photorendering
Window as solid objects.
You can choose either different or identical materials for the three
surfaces (reference line side, edges, opposite side) of your walls
from three pop-up menus.

You can select one of the predefined surface materials by clicking


on the box for that surface, and then selecting the desired material
from the pop-up menu or combo box.
You can create your own surface materials through the Materials
dialog box accessed from the Options menu. Moreover, in this
same dialog box, you can associate 3D hatches and textures to any
material (see Chapter 5). Both the 3D hatching and the texture will
appear in the pop-up menus of the Wall Surface Materials.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


132
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

By activating the Chain icon, you can define the same material for
all three surfaces.
Note: There is an important difference between surface
materials and fills. Materials affect only 3D renderings and
shadings, whereas fills affect only the Floor Plan and the Bill
of Materials.
See also…
The Materials command in Chapter 5 (Options menu). For more
about the Material settings, see the Common Settings section in
this chapter.
Section Pens
The Pen Color control in this tab page allows you to choose a
color for displaying the cut edges of walls in Section/Elevation
windows.
Log Details
Log construction is supported in ArchiCAD 6.0 for straight walls
only. Log walls will appear both in Sections/Elevations and the 3D
Window with some texture options that you can set in the Log
Details… dialog box.

- Apply External Side Material To Horizontal Edges: If you


enable this checkbox, the top and bottom edges as well as the
opening reveals will have the same log texture as the external
side (if it has any).
- Align Texture to Wall Edges: By enabling this checkbox, Wall
texture mapping will be aligned to the wall in order to avoid
having a fragmented log texture.
- Start with half log: If this checkbox is active, the wall will start
with a half-height log at the bottom.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


133
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

- Square Logs: If this checkbox is enabled, the wall is built from


slightly chamfered square logs. If it isn’t, the wall is built from
round logs.
- Log Height: In this edit field, you can enter the height of a log.

Note: When determing the log’s height, remember that if you


enter a value that is larger than the wall’s width parameter, the
logs will not rest on each other.

Wall Techniques
Joining Walls Together
The way your walls are joined determines whether or not clean
intersections will be available. Clean intersections can only be
created between walls which are correctly joined.
The Reference Line is the focal point when you join walls, and the
reference lines of the walls to be joined must fit precisely. Simple
X crossings of these lines are not enough: Your lines should either
join by their endpoints or create precise T or L junctions as shown
below.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


134
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Selecting the Clean Wall Intersections option allows you to


automatically create seamless walls.
Hint: When you are faced with a complex joining situation, it
may help to switch off Clean Wall Intersections in the Options
menu (Chapter 5). With Clean Wall Intersections off, the
reference lines will be clearly visible, helping you to construct
your walls precisely.
Intersection Problems
Connection of Walls with Different Fill Patterns
If different walls are connected, in the case of L intersections, the
wall patterns will be separated by the diagonal of the intersection
(figure). In the case of T intersections, the outline of the running
wall will remain continuous.

If you need a more elaborate drawing detail at wall intersections,


you need to “retouch” the drawing in PlotMaker before plotting or
printing.
Priorities at Triple Wall Connections
Triple wall connections are based on priorities, and generated in
two steps. First, the two thickest walls are connected, second, the
third wall will be fitted to the above two.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


135
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

If all walls are of identical thickness, composite walls will be


prioritized over homogeneous ones.
If a triple intersection does not look as you expect, move a wall
endpoint by a very small distance away so that you get two double
intersections instead of a triple.
Intersections of Walls with a Vertical Displacement
If two walls are connected by their horizontal position but do not
connect vertically or just touch each other, they will not intersect
in either the Floor Plan or in 3D images.
Smart T Connection of Composite Walls
Connecting walls are automatically matched and the fill
compositions are analyzed. The connection is set up accordingly.

Creating Intersections from Wall Crossings


To transform a wall crossing into a proper intersection:
1) Draw two Walls across each other.
2) Select one of the Walls.
3) Choose the Split command from the Edit menu.
4) Click the other Wall with the Arrow with Mercedes (Arrow tool
active) or Striped pencil (any other tool active) cursor. The
Eyeball cursor appears, prompting you to choose which part
of the split Wall should remain selected. Click on either side.
5) The selected Wall is split. Choose Rebuild to see the
intersection cleaned up.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


136
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Note: This technique also works on several walls selected at


the same time.

Splitting Walls
If you find it necessary to split a wall into two or more parts for
reasons other than to create a wall intersection, the technique is
similar to the one described above (Creating Intersections from
Wall Crossings).
1) Select the Wall(s) you want to divide.
2) Choose the Edit/Split command.
2a) If you want to split the wall at an intersection with an existing
linear or circular element or element edge: Click a linear or
circular element or element edge with the Mercedes cursor.
2b) If you want to split one or more walls along the same
imaginary line: Just draw a line between two empty spots of
the Floor Plan.
3) When the Eyeball cursor appears, click on either side of the
line/arc to choose which wall segments should remain
selected.
4) The selected Walls are split.

Note: Splitting walls is also possible at any location by using


the Click Wall to Split... command under Edit.

Adjusting Walls
If you want to lengthen or shorten walls you have already drawn
to meet another existing element or an imaginary line:
1) Select the wall(s) that you want to extend or trim.
2) Choose the Adjust command from the Edit menu.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


137
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

3) Click the element edge or arc to which you want to adjust the
wall(s) or draw a line between two empty spots on the Plan.
4) All the selected walls that have either a real or a projected
intersection point with the clicked edge/arc or with the line
you just drew are either lengthened or shortened to meet the
defined edge/arc/line.

Note: If you wish to extend a wall to a point defined by an


element which is parallel to the wall, you should use the Edit/
Stretch command in combination with coordinate constraints
to accomplish the operation.
See also…
Chapter 5 for information on the Stretch command (Edit menu)
and Chapter 3 for information on coordinate constraints.

Creating Holes in Walls


You can produce unique wall shapes by placing several
contiguous Door or Window holes in the wall as shown below.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


138
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Curved Walls
When using any of the Curved Wall Geometry Methods, the walls
created are always true arcs, and not made up of straight wall
segments.
You can also trace the contours of any curved elements by walls
with the element transformation method detailed in Chapter 3. In
this case, whether you get real curved walls or a series of straight
wall segments depends on the current settings of the Magic Wand
Settings dialog box.
See also…
Element transformation in Chapter 3.

Creating Tapered Walls


When you need walls to fit a roof or you want walls with cutoff
corners, you can obtain them by cutting regular rectangular walls
with appropriate roof pitches as shown below.

Walls are fitted to overlying roofs using the Edit/Trim to Roof


command. This command is fully described in Chapter 5.
1) Walls which are to be trimmed should initially be taller than
the roof overlying them.
2) The Trim to Roof command is then used to cut the top edge of
the wall to match the bottom surface of the overlying roof, or
the bottom edge of the wall to match the top surface of the
roof.
This operation can be performed on all affected walls, or
selectively, based on the walls or roof pitches currently selected.
Note: Trimming Walls to Roof is not available in the 3D
Window.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


139
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Column Tool


The Column is a tool for easy definition of columnar structures.
Columns in ArchiCAD are made up of two components: a core,
and a veneer section. Both have independent fillpattern and
pencolor settings. The core is the load bearing structure, while the
optional veneer can be used to simulate fire proofing or any kind
of sheathing around the core.

All elements created with the Column tool are rectangular.


Columns can stand free or they can be connected to walls. The
connection between columns and walls is smart (see Column and
Walls section below).

Drawing Columns
You may position columns by nine hotspots in any of the
geometry methods: by centerpoint, cornerpoints and four lateral
points. Centerpoint is the default but you can select any other
Anchor Point of the Core in the General Settings section of the
Column Settings dialog box.

Geometry Methods
There are two Geometry Methods available in the Info Box.
The Right-Angle method produces a column with a single
mouseclick that has sides aligned with the main grid.
The Rotated method produces a column that is not constrained in
its alignment at the time of placement, but can be freely rotated.
Click to define the centerpoint of the column, then click again to
set the angle.
- To place a column in any of the geometry methods by any of
the corners or middle sidepoints of the core, you have to set a
new anchor point for the column in the Column Settings
dialog box.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


140
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

- A veneered column is always placed by the anchor point of


the core set in the Column Settings. You do not need to
remove the veneer to do so.

Construction Methods
There are two Construction Methods available in the Info Box.
Columns created with the Plain method are simply inserted into
any kind of wall by cutting a place for themselves.
These columns will always keep their own surface material set in
the Column Settings dialog box.
Columns created with the Wrapped method are smarter. If they
intersect with composite walls, they will be wrapped around by
specific composite wall skins. This means that the interior or
exterior sheathing of a wall can go around the structural column,
providing a uniform interior or exterior surface.

Columns placed with this method always inherit the surface


materials of any connected walls. If standing free, they are
displayed with their own surface material.
For details, see the Wall Intersections and Wall Wrapping sections
later in this chapter.
Note: The Wrapped method works only with normal and
trapezoid walls but does not support curved or polygon walls.

Column Settings
The Column Settings dialog box allows you to define the
parameters of selected columns, or to set default values for future
ones.
Many of the available settings are the same as for the Wall tool. See
the description of that tool, as well as the Common Tool Settings
section at the beginning of the chapter.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


141
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

General Settings
Controls that are specific to Columns include:
- dimensions for the two sides of the rectangular core;
- veneer thickness;
- the Anchor point the Column is placed with.
Note: The thickness of the veneer is uniform around the core.
Zero thickness is used for columns without a veneer.

Floor Plan and Section Attributes

Core Symbol
Three options are available for displaying the Column Core’s
symbol on the Floor Plan: Plain, Slash and X.
Pen Colors
Different pen colors can be defined for the column’s contour, the
core’s fill pattern and fill background, and the veneer’s fillpattern
and fill background.
Fill Patterns
Different fill patterns (and backgrounds) can be defined for both
the column’s core and veneer.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


142
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Columns and Walls


If the column was placed with the Wrapped Method and intersects
any walls, then it will inherit the surface materials of these walls.

Unwrapped Columns
Unwrapped columns do not modify the shape of the wall, just cut
out a place for themselves, breaking through all wall skins. The
connection line between wall skins and column are removed
where their fillpatterns match.
The contour of column cores with a slash or an X is always fully
drawn, regardless of any other factors.
Below, the same column variations are shown in three different
situations:
1) The column stands free of any walls
2) The column is placed in a composite wall
3) The column is placed in a plain well.

Wrapped Columns
Wrapped columns can only break through the core skins of
composite walls. The other wall skins wrap around the column
keeping their thickness all along.
Wrapping will only occur if:
- the column was placed using the Wrapped Method,
- it intersects a composite wall,
- the composite wall type has wrapping skins,

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


143
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

- the column touches or intersects the core skin(s) of the


composite wall.
In the illustration below, you can see that the core of the wall
works as with non-wrapped columns, and the intersection lines
are cleaned like in the previous illustration. However, the other
skins of the composite wall go around the column.

Note: Wrapping is not available for curved walls.


See also:
The Options/Composites menu command in Chapter 5, for the
definition of core and wrapping skins of composite walls.

Columns in 3D Views
Free standing columns are modeled as single rectangular blocks.
Columns intersecting with walls are modeled in a special way.
Walls run through continuously, and the protruding parts of the
columns are added as prisms, stuck to the wall surface. This
method gives perfect results in both shaded or wireframe views.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


144
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Please note that all columns placed with the Wrapped construction
method will inherit the surface material of the connecting walls,
even if there are no wall skins configured to actually wrap around
the columns.
If a column goes beyond the base or the top of the connected
walls, you need to model it from separate pieces placed on top of
each other.

The above view was created using six columns, as shown below.

If column surfaces are connected to wall or slab surfaces or other


column surfaces within the same 3D plane, the connection lines
are eliminated in 3D.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


145
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Door & Window Tools


The Door and Window tools are represented by a single icon in
the Toolbox’ default shape. The icon always shows the currently
active one. To see the other tool, click and hold the small arrow in
the bottom left corner of the icon and flush it out. Alternately, you
can choose Window/Floating Palettes/Palette Shapes and check
the Expanded checkbox for the Toolbox in order to see both tools
at the same time.
Both windows and doors are library items, meaning that they are
stored in libraries of objects which can be used on many projects.
Windows and doors can only be added to an ArchiCAD project by
placing them into an existing wall. They cannot be independently
placed into a project. Once a window or door has been placed in a
wall, it becomes an integral part of that wall and stays with the
wall when it is moved or stretched.
Note: This dependency prevents you from converting an
opening into a 3D view by itself (except for the browsers in
the Door & Window Setting dialog boxes); you must convert it
together with its host wall.
Doors and windows cut real, see-through openings into the wall,
so that 3D visualizations are more accurate and lifelike. However,
glass panes are represented as solid shapes, allowing opaque
openings for standard elevations.
Note: Since Doors and Windows cannot be placed
independently, they are automatically placed on the same
layer as their host walls.
Doors/Windows cannot be placed into Walls drawn with the
Polygon Wall method.

Drawing Doors and Windows


When you activate the Window or Door icon in the Toolbox and
click on the reference line of a wall, the default door or window is
inserted in the clicked wall. If you click somewhere else on the
wall or simply on the worksheet (where the cursor does not
assume its Mercedes form), ArchiCAD will not allow you to
position the door or window.
Two types of openings are available in ArchiCAD:
- Empty Holes: Often used to provide a quick sense of how an
opening will look in a project. Empty holes are the simplest

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


146
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

examples of windows and doors — they are shapes punched


in a wall and have no details.
- Library Doors and Windows: Complex elements with a 3D
model, a property description for the Bill of Materials and a 2D
Symbol for the Floor Plan, specifying a variety of detailed
information about the opening. See also the section on
Creating Shaped Openings.

Simple Openings
1) Open the appropriate tool (Door or Window) settings dialog
box by double-clicking on the tool.
2) Click on the Empty Hole button in the Preview area.
3) Adjust the size parameter edit boxes by typing in a new height
or width if desired.
4) Click along the reference line of an existing wall.

5) The opening will appear in the selected wall.

Placing Doors and Windows into a Wall


To place openings from the ArchiCAD Library in your projects,
you must select them in the appropriate Settings dialog box
instead of the empty hole specified in the above procedure.
To produce more detailed and realistic doors and windows, you
will need to access items stored in libraries.
Note: Your floor plan is saved with reference to the active
library. If you want to get direct access to placed in other
folders, you will have to either load these as active libraries
with the Load Libraries command (File menu), or save the
floor plan as an Archive (see the Save Archive command in
Chapter 5). Without these precautions, outside elements will
not automatically appear the next time you open the floor
plan.
Warning: If you open a project and an alert informs you that
items are missing from the active library, those items cannot
be displayed on the worksheet, in the 3D Window or in the
Bill of Materials.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


147
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

See also…
Options for accessing Library Parts in the ArchiCAD Library section
of Chapter 6.

Geometry Methods
You have a choice of two Door and Window Geometry Methods
to facilitate placing your openings.
Doors and Windows can be placed either by their centers or their
corners. These options are selected using the Geometry Methods
in the Info Box when either the Door or the Window tool is active.
When placing a door or a window by its corner, the special
Double Eyeball cursor appears and, as you move the mouse, it will
flip the outline of the opening from one side (1) to the other (2),
prompting you to click (3) when you are satisfied with the
opening’s position.
This works the same way at wall corners.

Note: The placement mode you have chosen is valid for both
types of openings until you explicitly change it.

Opening Locations
You can place a Window or Door opening at any Checkmark or
Mercedes cursor position on a wall’s outline, rather than being
limited to a point along its Reference Line.
By turning on the Clean Wall Intersections mode from the Options
menu, any point where two or more Wall outlines meet becomes
available as a placement position for openings.
Note: In some cases the cursor takes on the Mercedes shape
although the opening cannot be placed. The reason is that an
edge of another drawing element (slab, roof, fill or line)
coincides with the outline of the wall. Switch off the Clean
Wall Intersection option on the Options menu to make sure
that you find the reference line of the wall.
Dislocated Openings
If you attempt to place a window or door near the end or top of a
wall, where there is not enough room to accommodate it, a dialog

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


148
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

box will be displayed to warn you and give you the option of
discarding the opening.

Construction Methods
By selecting any of the three Door or Window Construction
Methods in the Info Box you can define how the default or
selected Door/Window will be positioned in the opening.
- The Edge method will place the Window or Door at either
edge of the opening in the wall. Clicking with the Eyeball
cursor decides which edge is chosen.
If this method is selected, the sill depth is automatically set to zero.

- The Sill method will place the Window or Door within the
opening with a sill of the depth currently defined in the
Window/Door Settings dialog box at the selected side of the
opening. The Eyeball cursor will prompt you to choose a side.

- The Reveal method creates a revealed opening according to


the values currently defined in the Window/Door Settings
dialog box. Use the Eyeball cursor to select the side of the wall
on which you want the reveal to be placed.

Orienting the Opening


Since doors and windows have a complete 3D representation, you
need to tell ArchiCAD which way they open.
A single click is required to place and orient the opening:
- Windows: the click defines the external side of the window.
Sill depth is always measured from this side.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


149
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

- Doors: the click defines the swing direction of the door. For
doors without a German type reveal, sill depth will be
measured from this side. For doors with a German reveal, sill
depth will be measured from the opposite side.
To place a door or window with a different orientation than the
above, place, then select it and check the Flip checkbox in its
Settings dialog box. The door/window will change its orientation
to the other side of the wall while it will maintain its sill/reveal
depth from the originally clicked side.

The 3D model of your project will reflect these changes when


viewed in the 3D Window. The following illustration shows
ArchiCAD’s treatment of door orientation. Operable windows will
be treated in the same manner.

Window and Door Settings


The Window/Doors Settings dialog box is rather similar to the
other tools’ dialog box. Dialog box items shared by several tools
are presented in the Common Tool Settings section. Only
differences and specific settings will be discussed here.

General Settings
In the right hand part of the dialog box, in addition to the Preview
area discussed in the Common Tool Settings section, controls are

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


150
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

providing for defining the opening’s reveal and dimensioning


options.
Reveal
In the Reveal area of the Door and Window Settings dialog box,
you can find the same construction method icons as in the Info
Box (see above), as well as the Setup button which allows you to
define dimensions of the opening surround, the sill width edit
box, and the Flip checkbox.
The construction method icons affect the positioning of the
opening as described earlier.
The Setup button activates the Reveal Setup dialog box:

Here you can enter values in the edit boxes for head depth, sill/
threshold depth, left and right jamb depth and reveal depth.
Note: For composite walls ArchiCAD does not turn the skin
opposite the reveal inside the opening, if the reveal depth is
less than the remainder of the wall’s thickness.
The sill width specifies an offset for the opening away from the
face of the wall in the direction you have defined by clicking with
the Eyeball cursor. (This has no effect if you choose the edge
positioning construction method.)
Use the Flip checkbox if you want to change the opening side of
the door/window while keeping the frame in place.
Opening Dimensioning Options
The Window and Door tools feature customizable Dimensioning
options formatted in a subdialog of their Settings dialog boxes.
The dialog box is displayed by clicking the Setup button.
The following options are parameters unique to an individual
Window or Door and include:
- A user-selectable dimension font and font size (plotter fonts
include italicization angle).

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


151
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

- A centerline with custom extension lengths.


- An optional circular Schedule Marker symbol with custom
Text and diameter.
- Optional Window/Door Frame Nominal Dimensions.
- An optional Sill/Threshold Height,
- A fully customizable text offset distance.
- An interior/exterior orientation.

Checking the Use Custom checkbox, you can assign predefined


dimensioning options and may set the reference level and prefix
text of the custom sill.

Parameters
Clicking the first large button in the left part of the Door/Window
Settings dialog box will show the first tab page.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


152
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Nominal Dimensions
The dimensions for your openings are defined in four edit boxes
under Parameters.
The width and height of openings can be modified by changing
the first two parameters. The sill and header heights are linked: if
you change one, the other will be updated. If you change the
height of the opening, the header will be revised automatically
The physical size of Wall holes can be larger than their nominal
size, depending on local standards.
See Dislocated Openings earlier.
Additional Parameters
Additional parameters in the dialog box affect not only 3D
visualizations, but also the floor plan representation (GDL
description of windows/doors with parametric 2D script).

Floor Plan and Section Attributes


Clicking the second large button in the Window/Door Settings
dialog box displays the second tab page, displaying choices for the
opening’s Floor Plan and Section appearance.

Pen Colors and Line Types


The Use Symbol Colors and Use Symbol Linetypes options allow
you, when checked, to use the same pens and line types for the
opening that were used when its 2D symbol was created. When it
is switched off, you can use any single pen and line type for the
2D symbol of your item.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


153
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

2D Wall Framing
Automatic 2D Wall Framing causes ArchiCAD to provide default
door and window framing details when you add openings to your
project.
You can switch automatic 2D wall framing on or off around an
opening on a floor plan by clicking on the wall framing radio
buttons.
If you omit automatic wall framing, you can manually add any
kind of reveal or inner or outer sills to the 2D representation of
your doors and windows.
Note: To see these 2D manipulations reflected in the 3D
model, you must add true 3D elements to the incomplete hole,
or modify the GDL macro of the door or window in question.

Model Attributes
Clicking the third button from the left in the Window/Door
Settings dialog box allows you to define attributes for the 3D view.

Surface Materials
In addition to the Surface Material options for the door or window
defined in the pop-up menu, several different materials for
individual parts of the door or window can be specified in the
GDL description using the additional parameters of the opening
(see ArchiCAD Library section in Chapter 6).
Checking the Use Object’s Materials checkbox will ignore the set
material and will apply the same material that was used when
creating the library part.

Displaying Doors and Windows


There is a setting in Display Options (Options menu) allowing you
to either show or hide Doors and Windows on the Floor Plan, to
show or hide their dimensions, or simply by clicking Reflected
Ceiling, to show the edge of door lintel in the same way as the sill
of a window

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


154
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Door and Window Techniques


The techniques described below provide additional detail for
creating and modifying openings.
Dragging
You can change the location of Doors and Windows inside a wall
through the Drag command under Edit.

1) Select the opening and choose the Drag command.

2) Move the opening in the direction of its new location. A


rubberband outline of the opening follows the movements of
the cursor. Release the mouse button.

3) The opening is placed at its new location.


Note: You cannot drag an opening entirely out of its host wall.
When dragging a curved wall, the rubberband outline of the
opening always moves along the wall, no matter where you place
the cursor. In any other respect, the process is the same as for
openings in straight walls.

Stretching and Shrinking Openings


You can stretch or shrink doors and windows like any other
construction element. The change in the size of the opening will
be reflected in the Settings dialog box and on the Floor Plan.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


155
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Note: Stretch will always effect the overall size that can be
different from the nominal size.

Mirroring and Rotating Openings


The Mirror and Rotate commands affect the opening direction of
the window or door as shown below.

Mirror

Rotate

Multiplying Openings
You can create copies of your openings by using the Drag a Copy,
Mirror a Copy and Multiply/Drag or Elevate commands on the Edit
menu.
All of the above commands are useful when you need to change
the opening direction of an existing opening or place several
identical openings in a wall. A complete description of the way
these commands work is provided in Chapter 5.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


156
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Object and Lamp Tools


The Object and Lamp tools are represented by a single icon in the
Toolbox’ default shape. The icon always shows the currently
active one. To see the other tool, click and hold the small arrow in
the bottom left corner of the icon and flush it out. Alternately, you
can choose Window/Floating Palettes/Palette Shapes and check
the Expanded checkbox for the Toolbox in order to see both tools
at the same time.
The Object tool is used to place and edit Object type library parts
into the project, which add a floor plan symbol to the plan, appear
in Sections/Elevations and 3D visualizations (if they have a 3D
description) and appear in quantity calculations.
The Lamp tool is used to place in the form of special Objects
additional lightsources into the Project.
Many of the rules and settings for objects and lamps are identical
to those for windows and doors. Therefore, this section highlights
only the unique features of ArchiCAD objects and lamps.
Lamps have a number of very specific additional controls.

Positioning Objects
To position an object, click on the desired position in the floor
plan. You can use numerical input, gravity, rulers or the grids to
assist you in positioning objects accurately. This allows you to fit
fixtures or furniture to corners, specific positions, or to each other
with great accuracy. Fitting an object to a specific position (a chair
to a table for instance) is further helped by the object’s hotspots
because the cursor is sensitive to these points.

Object Hotspots
Unlike walls or other elements constructed on the fly, object
symbols have a predefined geometry and the cursor can only snap
to predefined hotspots of the symbol. The cursor is not sensitive to
edges within symbols.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


157
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Objects can be placed, selected, and fitted to other elements by


these hotspots.
Object hotspots are defined in the 2D symbol of the library part.
One hotspot is initially defined as the primary hotspot. This
hotspot is marked with a highlighted rectangle whenever the
object appears in the Object Settings… dialog box. It will act as the
default positioning handle for the object.
The other hotspots are displayed in the dialog box as an X. Click
any of them to use as a positioning handle. This allows you to
choose the most appropriate handle for your purpose and
facilitates swift and accurate object positioning.
If you wish to change the primary hotspot, make sure that you
have set up the Preview pop-up menu to show the 2D Symbol by
selecting Top View.
See also…
You can learn more about the use, creation and modification of
Library parts in Chapter 6 in the ArchiCAD Library section, as well
as in the GDL Reference manual also included with the ArchiCAD
package.

Geometry Methods
Four geometry methods are available in the Info Box for placing
Object and Lamp type Library Parts.
- The Orthogonal method automatically places Library Parts in
alignment with the grid lines unless you specify a rotation
angle in the Settings dialog box before placement. The Object
can later be rotated with the Edit/Rotate command or by
modifying the rotation angle parameter value in its Settings
dialog box.
- To place a Rotated Library part, first define an Object
Reference Point by clicking any point. Use the resulting
rubberband line to place the Object Rotation Vector. This
rubberband line can be constrained using any of the Drafting
Modifiers or enabled Mouse Constraint angles.
- The Diagonal geometry or input method works like the
rectangle geometry method used for walls, slabs, etc.
- The Rotated diagonal geometry or input method works like
the rotated rectangle method used for walls, slabs, etc.
These methods let you define the A and B parameters of the
Object or Lamp graphically on the Floor Plan.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


158
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The result of using these methods depends on the positioning


hotspot selected in the element’s Settings dialog box.
As a rule of thumb, if a hotspot at the corner of the object is
selected, you can define both the A and B parameters graphically.
If the hotspot is along a side of the object, you can define only one
of the parameters graphically and the other parameter will be
taken from the Settings dialog box. When choosing a hotspot
within the bounding box of the symbol, none of the parameters
can be set graphically and the element will be placed as if using
the simple orthogonal or rotated methods.

Note: When the Rotated Method is used, opening the Object


Settings dialog and modifying the rotation angle parameter
before the Rotation Vector has been completed is ineffective.
If you decide to specify an angle with the keyboard instead,
choose the Orthogonal method and use the Polar Angle value
in the Coordinate Box.

The Object Settings Dialog Box

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


159
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Object and Lamp settings shared by all other tools are discussed in
the Tool Settings Common Elements section.
Only differences and specific settings are discussed here.

Parameters
Dimension and Position Parameters
In addition to the length and width of objects and lamps, you can
set here a horizontal rotation angle.
Activating the Chain icon to the right of the length and width edit
fields allows you to link the horizontal and vertical parameters of
your objects and keep their original proportions.
Mirrored Objects
Below the horizontal angle field, a checkbox can be used to place
Mirrored Library Parts or to mirror them after placement. This
option reflects the entire 3D description of the Library Part across
the Y-axis defined by the Object Hotspot you entered in the Object
Settings dialog box.
Note: In addition, the Mirror parameter is included in any
parameter transfer through the Settings dialog box (see
Parameter transfer earlier in this Chapter).
Lamp Parameters
Some parameters related to are unique to Lamp type Library Parts.

You can set the lightsource’s color by double-clicking the Light


Color box. You can choose the color you like in the standard
Macintosh or Windows color editing dialog box.
The switch to the left of the brightness sliding switch allows you to
turn the lamp on and off in PhotoRendering.
The brightness of the light can be set with the sliding switch right
below the Light Color box. Maximum brightness is at the right end.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


160
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Object Techniques
Stretching Objects
Object stretching is based on the same rules as the diagonal input
methods.
To find out whether an object can be defined graphically (or
stretched with the Arrow tool) at a given hotspot, ArchiCAD
checks for the presence of other hotspots in the symbol which
could possibly be the counterside of the stretched rectangle. This
stretched rectangle is a theoretical A*B sized one. The
stretchability of the object depends on the presence of such
hotspots.

Warning: Inaccurate objects with hotspots placed almost (but


not exactly) on the corners or edges of their symbol cannot be
stretched using these hotspots.
Please note that you define/stretch the A and B parameters of the
symbol, and not of its bounding box. Using parametric 2D scripts,
you can easily create objects whose symbol size will not match the
A and B parameters. If you make such a symbol, make sure that
you define hotspots at the corner of an A*B sized rectangle. These
will enable you to stretch that symbol.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


161
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Slab Tool


Slabs are the basic horizontal building blocks in ArchiCAD. Slabs
are drawn on the Floor Plan as polygons, allowing them to
accommodate any design. Existing slabs are easily modified on the
Floor Plan or through the Slab Settings dialog box.

Geometry Methods
Polygon - You can draw the contour of the slab by clicking its
outline on the screen, using the mouse or keyboard. All the
construction aids (including numeric input) are at your disposal.
To close the contour polygon, double-click the last point or click
on the starting point of the contour a second time. You can also
click on the OK button in the Control Box.
The OK button becomes active after you define the third node of
the slab contour. Clicking the button will automatically return you
to the starting point of the polygon from the penultimate node.
This removes the need to zoom in when the starting point is
extremely close to some other sensitive points on your floor plan.
You can abort the construction of the slab by clicking the Cancel
button in the Control box.
Rectangle method - a single Slab element with four rectilinear
Slab polygon edges. The rectangle is defined by placing two
opposing corner nodes (the startvertex and endvertex). The
startvertex defines one corner of the rectangle and the endvertex
defines the opposing corner. A Rectangle Slab is always aligned
orthogonally with the grid.
Rotated Rectangle method - a rectangular Slab with a rotation
vector defined for the Rectangle’s Base Reference Line. This vector
also defines the length of the two edges parallel to it.
Hint: You can unlock the length component constraint and
use only the rotation angle component of the rotation vector
by hitting the Shift key.

Slab Settings
The Slab Settings dialog box’ contents is similar in many respects
that of the Wall Settings dialog box. Only settings specific to Slabs
will be discussed here.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


162
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

General Settings
Thickness and Height
The thickness and elevation of each slab can independently be
defined. The elevation, relative to the top of the slab, can be
defined relative to the zero level of the active story or to the
absolute zero level prevailing in the design. The elevation
references are interrelated so that when you change one, the other
is automatically updated. The slab elevation relative to the active
story has priority. If you change the elevation of the active story
using the Stories command on the Options menu, your Slab will
go with it, and the elevation relative to absolute zero will
automatically be updated.

Floor Plan and Section Attributes


Pen Colors and Fill Patterns
You can define multicolor composite structures for displaying
slabs in the Section windows.

When choosing a composite structure, you can either set a new fill
color, fill background and section outline color for the strucure or
apply the predefined colors of the composites. In the latter case,
check in the Use Fill Colors of Composite and Use Background
Colors of Composite checkboxes. Both of these checkboxes
become automatically dimmed if you choose a simple fill.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


163
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Slab Techniques
Integrating Slabs with Walls
If you build a wall on top of a slab and an edge of the wall
coincides with any part of the contour of the slab, the coinciding
line between them will be automatically omitted in 3D
visualizations. This feature ensures correct hidden-line exterior
views as shown in the following figure.

See also…
Editing Polygons in Chapter 3.

The Roof Tool


ArchiCAD’s sophisticated Roof tool has extremely flexible
characteristics. In addition to its normal use in creating roofs, it can
be used to create abstract 3D shapes meeting a wide variety of
needs.

Geometry Methods
The Roof tool has six geometry methods, allowing you to create
both simple and complex roof shapes. The detailed description of
the steps needed with the different methods is given in the next
few sections.
- Polygon method: Creates a polygon shaped roof. See detailed
description under Drawing Simple Roofs.
- Rectangle method: Creates an orthogonal rectangular roof.
See detailed description under Drawing Simple Roofs.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


164
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

- Rotated Rectangle method: Similar to the Rectangle method,


but you can define the pivot line at any angle. See detailed
description under Drawing Simple Roofs.
- Polyroof method: Creates equally sloped roofs on any
polygonal or curved base. See detailed description under
Drawing Complex Roofs.
- Dome method: Creates a semispherical dome-shaped roof.
See detailed description under Drawing Dome Shaped Roofs.
- Barrel Vaulted method: This method allows you to model
any form of roof structure, including the most complex ones.
See detailed description under Drawing Barrel Vaulted Roofs.

Drawing Simple Roofs


The simplest roof shape is the rectangle roof.
1) Select the Roof tool in the Toolbox and choose one of the first
three geometry methods in the Info Box.
2) Define with two clicks the position of the pivot line. With the
Rectangle method, the roof will always be orthogonal.
In most cases, you will want the pivot line of the roof to coincide
with a wall reference line or a slab edge. The change of the cursor
form serves as a visual cue for accurate placement.
3) After defining the pivot line, a new cursor in the form of an
Eyeball will appear. Use this cursor to click on the side of the
pivot line where you want the roof plane to rise.
4) You can now draw the contour of the roof by clicking on each
of the new roof’s nodes.

Pivot Line
The pivot line is the most critical element of designing simple
roofs. This is a horizontal non-printing element which is part of
the lower surface of the roof.
The roof pitch is interpreted as a pivoting angle around this line
and the elevation of the roof’s bottom edge is defined by the
elevation of the pivot line.
Note: The pivot line of the roof, being an abstract construction
aid, will be displayed only if you turn on Show Pivot Lines
in Display Options (Options menu).

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


165
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Drawing Complex Roofs


By choosing the Polyroof geometry method, you can create
equally sloped roofs on any polygonal or curved base.

The outline on which the roof will be constructed can be defined


in either of two ways.
- You can draw the outline after selecting the Roof tool from the
Toolbox and the Polyroof method in the Info Box. This way,
you can automatically build roofs on polygon bases.
- You can also use the Magic Wand tool in the Control Box or
simply space-click an outline with the Mercedes cursor when
the Roof tool is active and transform it into a roof. Outlines
may also contain curved segments. Only closed outlines are
eligible for this operation. If constructing a roof on a curved
base, the number of roof planes (divisions) generated
depends on the current settings of the Magic Wand Settings
dialog box in the Tools menu.
Note: For complex Roofs, the Magic Wand tool will always
use the Linear segments option, even if the Best Match radio
button is active.
Once the outline has been defined, the Polyroof Settings dialog
box appears.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


166
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Polyroofs can be made up of a maximum of four levels. The


inclination and maximum height of each segment can be
independently defined.
ArchiCAD uses a crystal growth algorithm to calculate the best
solution for any particular polygon base. The height defined in the
settings dialog box is the maximum limit. If the roof meets another
roofplane before it reaches that particular height, it will not go
higher. If the roof has reached the maximum level allowed, and
the roofplanes have not met, a horizontal plane will be placed on
top. Once the structure is completed, its parts are individually
editable.

Drawing Dome Shaped Roofs


To create a Dome shaped roof, select the Dome geometry method
in the Info Box.
With the first click, you define the center of the arc; the second
click marks the beginning and the third, the end of the outline.
Double-clicking the beginning of the arc will create a full circular
dome.
Once you have defined the outline, the Dome Roof Settings dialog
box appears.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


167
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The edit field at top left in the dialog box contains the height of
the Dome roof as measured from its centerpoint. This value is set
by default to the maximum allowed, i.e. the height of a semi-
sphere structure. By entering a smaller number, you can flatten
your dome. The next edit field contains the elevation of the
dome’s base.
The number of strips and segments that make up the dome can
also be defined in this dialog box: they are limited to 90 and 360
respectively.
The roof thickness measured perpendicular to the roof’s elevation
can also be set, while the roof edge’s trimming is controlled by the
radio buttons on the right. The three options available are
perpendicular, vertical and horizontal trimming.
Once the dome is created, its parts can be edited as individual
pitched roofs, but not as a whole.

Drawing Barrel Vaulted Roofs


A curve drawn on the Floor Plan is interpreted as the cross-section
of the roof. There are two ways for defining the curve that you
wish your roof to follow:
- You can either use an existing Arc, Spline or Wall outline to
define the curvature of your roof and use the Magic Wand tool
from the Control Box with the Barrel Vaulted method selected,
or
- Draw a series of arcs and hit the Cancel button when finished.

Once the curve has been defined, you will have to define the
length of the curved roof by defining the startpoint and the
endpoint of the roof. At the same time, you will be able to specify
in which direction the cross-section curve should be interpreted
and which side should be the top.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


168
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

When you have defined the curve, you will see a rubberband
boundary, whose ends are connected to those of the cross-section
curve. One of the sides of this boundary is the imaginary “floor”
and, at the same time, the side of the barrel roof. With a first click,
you define the starting point and the shape, and with the second,
the length of the barrel roof. The resulting roofplanes are
individually editable.
The number of roofplanes generated depends on the settings of
the Magic Wand Settings dialog box (Tools menu).
Only linear segments are applicable for Roofs, even if you choose
Best Match.
Note: ArchiCAD only allows the construction of curved roofs
that can be hit by vertical rainfall. This avoids the construction
of self-intersecting or reclinate roofs. This also means that the
same curve may be valid for the generation of a roof from one
angle of the boundary box, and invalid from another angle.
This is because the shape of the roof is determined not only
by the curve that it is constructed from, but also by the angle
of the boundary box that it is associated to.

Boundary OK Boundary creates reclinate roof


The start and end points of the roof must be defined in such a way
that the heavy line side of the rubberband boundary does not
intersect the original cross-section curve.

Roof Settings
Most of the settings for Roofs are identical to those of the other
construction tools. Only specific settings will be discussed here.

General Settings
Elevation
As shown in the figure, the elevation of the pivot line can be set
relatively to the zero level of the active story or to the absolute
zero level for the project. The two settings are interrelated and, as
for slabs or hip roofs, the active story reference has priority.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


169
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

This means that if you move the active story vertically, the roof
will move with it and will maintain its relation to it. Its elevation
relative to the absolute zero level will automatically be updated.
Roof Pitch
The pitch unit depends in the setting you choose in the pop-up
menu near the Roof Pitch edit field.
You can define the pitch either in degrees, in percentages, or in
the amount of roof rise per 12 feet or 12 inches of horizontal run.
The roof pitch is typically positive, but it can also be a negative
value, in which case the resulting roof is “reversed”: the side
defined with the Eyeball cursor going upward will instead go
downward.
Thickness
You can set the thickness of the roof, either vertically or normally
using the edit boxes shown left.

Floor Plan and Section Attributes


Pen Colors and Fill Patterns
You can define multicolor composite structures for displaying
roofs in the Section windows.

When choosing a composite structure, you can either set a new fill
color, fill background and section outline color for the structure or
apply the predefined colors of the composites. In the latter case,
check in the Use Fill Colors of Composite and Use Background
Colors of Composite checkboxes. Both of these checkboxes
become automatically dimmed if you choose a simple fill.

Model Attributes
Roof Edge Angle
This setting defines in fact the base and fascia boards of a roof.
They can be set to either be perpendicular to the elevation or the

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


170
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

roofplane or vertical. The Custom option is dimmed, unless the


Eave or Rake has been set to a custom angle (see later). If the
Custom radio button is selected, you have the option of changing
this setting to vertical or perpendicular.

Custom roof edges are not defined in this dialog box.

Roof Techniques
Roofs are complex objects, and can be manipulated with several
powerful ArchiCAD techniques.
Note: You can only create Roofs in the Floor Plan, but it is
possible to edit existing ones in either Section/Elevation or 3D
view.

Selecting Roofs
Roofs can be selected by their reference lines, contours and nodes.

Determining Roof Elevations


The vertical elevation of a pitched roof changes continuously
along its slope. You can monitor the elevation of the reference line
and the roof pitch in the Roof Settings dialog box.
To obtain the elevation of any point on a roof face, select the roof
and Command-click (Macintosh) or Control-click (Windows) the
point whose elevation you want to know. A dialog box will be
opened, displaying the bottom and top surface elevations of the
roof.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


171
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

You can edit any of the values in this dialog box, causing the roof
to pivot around the pivot line so that its pitch will be modified.
Hint: If you Command-click/Control-click on an endpoint of
the reference line, you can edit the elevation of the whole roof
without changing its pitch.
Note: Command-clicking/Control-clicking on a roof edge does
not open the elevation dialog box, since this action is reserved
for making roof intersections, as discussed later in this section.

3D Roof Intersections
In addition to the floor plan contour flexibility of the roof,
ArchiCAD facilitates the three-dimensional fitting as well, through
its 3D intersection capability.
Consider the two roof faces below:

To have these two roofplanes intersect:


1) Select the lower one on the Floor Plan, and Command-click
(Macintosh) or Control-click (Windows) the ridge line of the
other.
2) Now select the other roofplane and Command-click
(Macintosh) or Control-click (Windows) on the ridge line of
the lower one.
3) The two faces have been adjusted to each other.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


172
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

When the two ridge lines meet on the Floor Plan, this means that
they are in fact intersected in 3D.

For more complex intersections, when more than two roofplanes


meet (e.g. when a barrel vaulted roof meets a simple pitched
roof), additional nodes should be added to accommodate the
shape. However, the intersection process itself is similar.
ArchiCAD allows fascia and barge boards to be at unique angles.
For this reason, it is possible for two roofs to not be properly
joined, even though they meet on the Floor Plan. You can create
mortared joints at these intersections, or have the roofplanes
connect with vertical ridges.

This is done by selecting all roofplanes that you would like to


intersect, positioning the cursor at the common ridge and keeping
the mouse button down. Select the Roof edge edit option from
the pet palette that appears. This opens a dialog box.

The setting you make in this dialog box apply to all selected
roofplanes that meet the common ridge line on the Floor Plan.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


173
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Trimming Construction Elements to Roofs


Roofs have the unique ability to trim either the top or the bottom
of walls, columns, slabs, doors, windows and objects to fit the
desired surface of roofs. The Trim to Roof command in the Edit
menu along with several shortcuts is provided for this purpose.
The elements in the active story can be trimmed in groups or
individually.
For trimming all elements under a given roof:
1) Select either the roof or any of the elements eligible for
trimming.
2) Choose Edit/Trim to Roof. A dialog box will appear listing the
element types that the given roof can trim.

3) Make your choice of trimmed elements by checking the


appropriate checkbox, decide whether you want to trim the
top or the bottom of the elements and click the Trim button.
Only intersecting elements can be trimmed to a roof. The roof will
only cut elements that are placed underneath its polygon shape.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


174
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

You can also use remote roofs and even roofs on other stories
whose outline is shown on the given story for trimming elements
to the plane of that particular roof.
Just select the walls and/or columns you intend to cut, then
Command-click (Macintosh) or Control-click (Windows) on an
edge or node of the roof you want to cut them with. The reverse
procedure will also work: select the roof you want to cut with and
Command-click (Macintosh) or Control-click (Windows) on the
individual walls/columns you want to be cut.

Note: Trimming with Roofs is not available in the 3D Window.


See also…
Editing Polygons in Chapter 3 and Trim to Roof (Edit menu) in
Chapter 5.

The Mesh Tool


The Mesh Tool is a powerful feature for creating superficies of any
form by defining the elevation of its characteristic points and
interpolating between them. With the help of this tool you can
create superficies, skirted superficies and solid bodies.

Geometry Methods
Meshes can be constructed using four different Geometry
Methods:
- Polygon method;
- Rectangle method;
- Rotated Rectangle method;
- Regular Sloped Mesh method.
The first three methods work the same as in the Slab and Fill tools.
See the sections about the Geometry Methods of those tools for
details and Construction Aids in Chapter 3.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


175
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Regular Sloped Mesh method helps you create regular meshes
with plane surfaces quickly. After defining the rectangle contour of
the mesh, the Regular Sloped Mesh dialog box opens
automatically.

In the first part of the dialog box you can set the number of
divisions in either coordinate direction. Then must then set the
elevation of three mesh corners; the fourth one is generated
automatically.
On confirming the settings, ArchiCAD will draw the mesh.

Construction Methods
The three options available in the Info Box and the Mesh Settings
dialog box give a choice between meshes created as superficies,
meshes created with vertical sides (skirt) and meshes created as
solid bodies. Your choice may constrain the options of Materials in
Model Attributes and Elevation.

Drawing Meshes
There are two phases in the drawing of a mesh.
Firstly, draw a polygon with any of the geometry methods, set in
the elevation of the basis plane that you defined previously in the
Settings dialog box.
You can edit the polygon after selecting it and resetting the Mesh
tool as described in Chapter 3, Editing Polygons. Clicking the
border-line of the polygon will open the pet palette. By clicking
one of its nodes, you can edit the elevation of nodes if you choose
the last icon of the pet palette as shown here.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


176
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

This action opens the Mesh Point Height dialog box where you
can apply your new setting to all the nodes of the mesh by
checking the Apply to All checkbox.

Changing the elevation of a single point will not affect the


elevation of the neighbouring points.

Second, with your mesh still selected, choose the Mesh tool.
Draw an open line or a closed polygon by clicking twice at the last
node or clicking the OK button in the Control Box. Confirming a
closed polygon, the New Mesh Points dialog box opens where
you can define the new nodes as the points of a hole or of the
superficies.

If you draw outside of the contour of the first polygon, only nodes
within the contour will constitute the mesh.
You may continue developing your mesh later by adding new
nodes, polygons and editing elevations later as well.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


177
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Basis Plane & Ridges


A mesh is created on the foundation of the Basis Plane and the
Ridges of the Mesh.
You draw the main contours of the mesh projected to the Basis
Plane. You can then raise the characteristic points of the mesh’s
superficies out of this plane.
There are two types of ridges in a mesh: user defined and
generated.

User Defined Ridges are always visible as they form the


characteristic outline of the mesh.
When the polygons or nodes are at different elevations and the
Show All Ridges option is selected, ArchiCAD will show the
ridges generated through the connecting the mesh nodes.
Each of the ridges generated by ArchiCAD connect two nodes at
different heights that are not already connected by a User Defined
Ridge yet. Therefore, they are not shown if nodes do not differ in
elevation.
Note: Adding Ridges to Meshes is not available in the 3D
Window.

Mesh Settings
The Mesh Settings dialog box allows you to specify the parameters
for selected or default meshes.
The composition of the dialog box is in many ways similar to that
of the other tools. See the Common Tool Settings section at the
beginning of this chapter for general details.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


178
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

General Settings
Elevation
In addition to the elevation of the mesh’s basis plane, you can set
the depth of the mesh body or sides below the basis plane.
Show Ridges
With the two radio buttons you can set whether to show all ridges
or only those that you have defined when drawing the mesh.

Floor Plan and Section Attributes


Line Types and Pen Colors
You can choose a line type for the ridges of the mesh. ArchiCAD
uses the same line type for user defined and generated ridges. You
can make a distinction between the two kinds of ridges by setting
their color in the pencolor pop-up palette.

If you create your mesh as a solid body, you can define section
outline, fill and fill background colors.

Model Attributes
Materials and Smooth Ridges
According to the Construction Method applied, you can assign
materials to different sides of the mesh block.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


179
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The radio buttons beneath control the appearance of the


generated ridges in the 3D model. If you choose Smooth Ridges,
only user defined ridges will appear in 3D view.

Mesh Techniques
Meshes are complex objects that can be manipulated with several
ArchiCAD techniques. See polygon editing in Chapter 3.

Editing Node Elevations


If you wish to edit the elevation of nodes in an existing mesh, first
select the mesh or one of its ridges (subolygons), choose the Mesh
tool and click one of its nodes or edges. A pet palette appears.
Click the last icon on the palette to open the Mesh Point Height
dialog box where you can edit the elevation of either the selected
node or both nodes of the selected edge.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


180
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Dimension Tool


In the Toolbox’ default appearance, ArchiCAD’s various
dimensioning tools are merged into one pop-up icon in the
Toolbox. In order to see all dimensioning tools at the same time,
choose Window/Floating Palettes/Palette Shapes and choose the
Extended option.
The linear Dimension tool is a powerful and sophisticated feature
which allows you to add customized dimension lines to your
projects. Dimensioning in ArchiCAD provides the following
features:
- Semi-Automatic - ArchiCAD assists you in accurately tagging
your dimension lines to the nodes and edges of project
elements. All the normal construction aids (gravity, snap grids
etc.) are available for your use.
- Fully Associative - When you modify dimensioned elements
(for example stretching a wall) the change is reflected in the
dimension line and value.
- Various Measurement Units and Standards - ArchiCAD
allows you to quickly and easily convert your project to metric
measurement units for clients.

Components of a Dimension Chain


The following terms are used to describe dimensioning
operations:
- Reference Points are nodes on ArchiCAD elements which
you have selected to be dimensioned.

- Dimension Points occur at the intersection of the dimension


line and the witness line according to the previously defined
reference points. They can be selected as shown below.

10'-9" 6' 7'-5"

- Dimension Units are the basic components of the dimension


chain. A dimension unit connects two adjacent dimensioning

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


181
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

points and includes the written value of its length. To select it


you have to click the midpoint of the line with the Checkmark
cursor.

10'-9" 6' 7'-5"

6'
- Dimension Values are the text blocks containing the length
of the dimension unit. To select a dimension value by itself,
click on the lower left corner of the text.

10'-9" 6' 7'-5"


7'-5"
- Dimension Chains are the sum total of the connected
dimension units. You can select a dimension chain by clicking
at a “free spot” on the dimension line with the Mercedes
cursor.

10'-9" 6' 7'-5"

- Associativity means that any dimension point you create will


adhere to its reference point until you delete one or the other.
For example, stretching the window in the wall of the
previous example causes the entire dimension chain to
automatically be updated as shown below.

10'-9" 9'-5" 4'

Note: When you stretch a wall, reposition, modify or delete its


openings, or modify its thickness, or when you, distort the
original outline of slabs, roofs, and hatches, your dimension
chains will update themselves automatically.

Drawing Dimensions
Let us first examine the power of the Dimension tool with a simple
example:

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


182
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

1) Construct a wall with an empty hole (window) in it.

2) Select the Dimension tool by clicking on its icon. Once you


mark the first reference point, the Cancel button in the Control
Box will become active.
3) Click on each endnode of the wall and window, then double-
click to close the dimension chain. Hitting the Delete key
once, or pressing the OK button in the Control Box, will also
display the Hammer cursor.
4) When the Hammer cursor appears, click at the location where
you want the dimension chain to be positioned.

5) The dimension chain will automatically be calculated and


displayed.

10'-9" 6' 7'-5"

Elements that Can Be Dimensioned


The following elements can be dimensioned by placing reference
points on them:
- Construction elements: walls, columns, windows and doors
(opening edges and midpoint only), objects, lamps, slabs,
roofs (the slope pointer cannot be dimensioned), mesh
- Drawing elements: fills (the fill orientation pointer cannot be
dimensioned), lines, arcs, circles, splines, hotspots.

Geometry Methods
Once the Dimension tool has been selected, there are three
Dimension Geometry Methods available in the Info Box that allow
you to specify the orientation of the dimension chain:
The Vertical method creates Dimension chains that are always
vertical, regardless of the angle of the nodes or element being
dimensioned.
The Horizontal method creates Dimension chains that are always
horizontal, regardless of the angle of the nodes or element being
dimensioned.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


183
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Skew method creates Dimension chains parallel to the first


two Dimension Location Markers placed, regardless of the angle of
any element(s) being dimensioned.
Dimension Geometry settings refer to the entire dimension chain,
and cannot be set unit by unit. Once you complete the chain, its
geometry cannot be modified.

Construction Methods
There are three construction methods, or types, available for
Dimensions. These are available as icons in both the Info Box and
the Dimension tool's settings dialog box.
With the Linear method, distances between two adjacent
reference points are measured and displayed.
With the Cumulative method, the first reference point is
considered the zero point of the dimension chain. All dimension
values of the chain will give you the distance between any
reference point and the zero point.
With the Base-line method, measuring the dimensioning distances
is the same as with the Cumulative method, but only pointers are
shown on the screen instead of whole lines and the zero point is
not marked.

Canceling & Confirming


Once you mark the first reference point, the Cancel button in the
Control Box will become active, offering an alternate way to
cancel the dimensioning process.

After you have marked your second reference point, the OK key in
the Control Box will also be activated, indicating that you can
create a valid dimension chain from now on.

Revoking Reference Points


You can revoke any reference point once it is marked by clicking
it again.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


184
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Dimension Settings

The options available in this dialog box depend on which part of a


dimension chain is selected.
- If the whole chain is selected, all options are available.
- If a single unit of a complex chain is selected, the Layer,
Arrowhead, and Positioning options, as well as the Pen setting
for the dimension lines and markers are dimmed.
- If a single dimension point is selected, only the witness line
options are accessible.
- If only the value of one or several dimension unit(s) is
selected and you choose the last command on the Edit menu
or click the appropriate icons in the Info Box, the Dimension
Text Settings dialog box is displayed instead of this one (but
not if you double-click the Dimension tool’s icon in the
Toolbox).
Many of the settings available for Dimensions are the same as for
the other tools. See the Common Tool Settings section earlier in
this chapter. Only controls specific to Dimensions will be
discussed here.
Pens
You can specify different pens for the dimension values, lines and
markers.
Number Formats
The Dimension number format is taken from Preferences/
Dimensions. The format can be changed globally for the whole
project but not chain by chain.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


185
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Markers
Using a pop-up menu, you can set the desired marker form. The
last marker type is special, as it results in a double dimension line
enclosing the values. With this marker, value position settings are
not effective.
Number Style
These controls allow you to set the look of the dimensioning texts.
The Size and Italic settings are available for dimension chains as
well as for individual dimension units.
The Italic option appears in the dialog box if you use bitmap/
TrueType fonts. If you select vector fonts, the slant option appears
instead, allowing you to set the angle of the slant. Italic used for
bitmap/TrueType fonts translates to a 75° slant if the font is
changed to vector fonts.
With the radio buttons, you can determine the position of the
dimension values in relation to the dimension lines.
Witness Lines
You can set the format options for witness lines in this section.
Witness lines can be applied to the entire dimension chain, to
selected dimension units or to individual dimension points.
You can also create dimensions without any witness lines or with
predetermined, short witness lines by clicking on the appropriate
radio buttons.
Using the short witness line option, the witness line length will
automatically be fitted to the marker (and thus implicitly to the
appropriate text size).
To draw longer witness lines you have two options:
1) Use a Custom Width witness line.
2) Keep a uniform clearance between the reference point and the
end of the witness line using the Dynamic Witness line option.
Both the length and the clearance of witness lines can be defined
by using the Options button as explained later in this section.
Static Dimensions
By clicking the Static Dimension checkbox you can create non-
associative static dimensions. These are purely graphic forms
which are not associated with any of the 2D or 3D elements in the
project.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


186
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Once a dimension has been made static, it cannot be made


associative again. If none of a dimension chain’s markers are
attached to construction nodes, the dimension chain will become
static. Static dimensions behave like other dimensions in two
ways:
1) If rotated or mirrored, the value is always turned so that you
can read it from the bottom.
2) If the dimension unit is modified in Preferences, all values will
be updated.

Dimension Options
Clicking the Options button, under the Static Dimensions
checkbox, displays the Dimension Options dialog box.

This dialog box allows you to:


- Define the marker size. This setting will be in effect until you
modify the dimension text size.
- Define the clearance between the reference point and the end
of the witness line. This setting is scaled relative to your
project rather than as an absolute value.
- Define the uniform length of the witness lines. This setting is
scaled relative to your project rather than as an absolute value.
It is only available when Uniform Length witness lines are
selected.
- Display detailed door and window dimensions. This option
adds the opening’s height below the Dimension Line on any
Dimension chain with reference points at both corners of an
opening. When this checkbox is checked, the second
checkbox below constrains dimensions to nominal height.
The Height Text option is associative and will be updated if

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


187
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

the opening’s size is modified. These options can be enabled


as the default settings for all Dimension chains or set for only
the existing ones.
Note: This feature is in addition to the Centerline and
Schedule Marker options made available through the
Dimension Setup subdialog box of the Door/Window Settings
dialog boxes and works for both smaller and larger sizes for
German type reveals.
- Dimension the Core only of Column type elements.

Dimension Text Settings


The Dimension Text Settings is available when only the value of a
dimension unit is selected. The name of the last command of the
Edit menu then changes to Dimension Text Settings. You can also
access the dialog box when clicking the appropriate icons in the
Info Box.
When one or more dimension chains are selected, double-clicking
the Text tool’s icon in the Toolbox also opens this dialog box.

In this dialog box, you can modify the font, size, style and
pencolor of the dimension text and define a custom angle for it.
You can edit the value field, but it is updated if you modify the
dimensioned element or change units in Preferences/Dimensions.
Note: The same feature is available for all dimensioning tools,
including area texts placed with the Fill tool.

Dimensioning Techniques
Dimensioning Wall Thickness
If you click on the reference line of a wall perpendicular to the
direction of the dimension chain, both of its sides will be marked.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


188
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

When you complete the dimension chain, only those markers


which have been placed on walls perpendicular to the dimension
chain will be displayed.
If you start dimensioning with the Skew Geometry Method by
placing double markers on both sides of a wall, these markers will
define the chain angle to be perpendicular to this wall.

Overlapping Points
The associativity of dimensioning requires a refined marking
procedure for the overlapping points of different elements.
To determine which overlapping node the reference point will be
assigned to, follow these steps.
1) It will be evident that you have arrived at an overlapping
element if the dimension markers are accompanied by
selection dots on one of the overlapping structural elements.
2) If the selected element is correct, simply click on the next
node. Clicking the OK button will confirm the element
without activating the Hammer cursor.
3) If you want the dimension point to refer to another
overlapping element, successive clicks at the same node will
cycle the selection dots across them.
Note: In everyday use, just place the markers, regardless of
the selection dots. In most cases, you will not know which of
the overlapping elements will be modified later.
4) To accept this second structure, click on the next point or
complete the dimension. If you need yet another element,
click on the point again. Repeat these steps if you cannot
decide which element you want in the first cycle.

Editing a Dimension Chain


Dimensions can be dragged, rotated and mirrored, like any other
ArchiCAD element.
- If you edit all of the elements a dimension chain refers to, the
chain will be transformed along with the elements.
- If only some of the elements are edited, the dimension line
will keep its place and angle, and only the markers, witness
lines and values involved will change.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


189
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

- If dimensioned elements are multiplied, you need to also


select the dimensions. The copies of the dimensions will be
associative to the copies of the elements.
Note: Units or points cannot be dragged, rotated or mirrored
away from the parent dimension chain.
The following figures illustrate each of these processes.
Dragging Dimension Chains
The dimension chain can be dragged to a new location, but
associative dimension chains can be dragged only along the
direction of their witness lines. You can move the cursor anywhere
when dragging, but only the perpendicular component of the
movement will be applied to the chain.

Rotating Dimension Chains


To change the orientation of a dimension chain after it is
completed, use the Rotate command. Rotated dimension chains
will remain associated to the same nodes, so you will see the
length and the values change along with the witness lines.
Rotation is the only way to change the orientation of a dimension
chain once it has been completed.

"
-9
2' 0"
-1
6'
" "
-9 -6
2' 5'
0" 1"
-1 '-
9' 22

After a rotation, all the reference points will automatically be


redimensioned and projected along the new direction, with the
original hierarchy maintained.
Mirroring Dimension Chains
The dimension chain can be moved to the opposite side of a wall.
The same rules apply for mirroring as for rotating.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


190
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Note: The value positions are always automatically


recalculated by ArchiCAD so that you can read them from the
bottom or from the right.
24'-2"
10'-9" 6'-0" 7'-5"
3'-0" 3'-0"

See also…
These transformations are described in further detail in Chapter 5.

Inserting Dimension Chain Elements


You can insert any number of new dimension points into the chain
by selecting the chain and Command-clicking (Macintosh) or
Control-clicking (Windows) on the desired new reference point.
The new point can be located between existing chain points or
anywhere outside the dimension chain.

24'-2"

The result:

10'-9" 10'-5"

The existing dimension units will be divided into the necessary


number of units.

10'-9" 6'

The result:

10'-9" 6' 7'-5"

The dimension chain becomes longer as needed. You cannot


insert points by selecting the dimension units directly. You must
select the chain.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


191
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Note: You can insert one node at a time into a single


dimension chain. When you insert a node, you have no
control over overlapping elements.

Deleting Dimension Chain Elements


If you select and delete a dimension point in the middle of a
chain, the adjoining two dimension units are merged.

delete

10'-9" 6' 7'-5"

the result:

10'-9" 13'-5"

If the deleted point was at the end of the chain, the last unit
disappears and the chain becomes shorter.
delete
10'-9" 13'-5"

The result:

13'-5"

If you select and delete a dimension unit in the middle of a


dimension chain, the chain will be broken into two separate parts.
delete
10'-9" 6' 7'-5"

The result:

10'-9" 7'-5"

Finally, you can eliminate a complex dimension chain by selecting


and deleting it.

Merging Dimension Chains


Separate dimension chains can be merged by selecting one of the
chains and Command-clicking (Macintosh) or Control-clicking
(Windows) on the other one.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


192
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

13'-5"

16'-9"

The result:

10'-9" 6' 7'-5"

The second chain will be deleted and its reference points added
to, and dimensioned by, the first (selected) chain.
You can use this technique even with dimension chains that are
not parallel with one another and/or have no overlapping parts at
all.

12'-11" 12'-11" 5'-6"


8'
-3
"

Automatic Wall Thickness Dimensioning


Command-clicking (Macintosh) or Control-clicking (Windows) the
reference line of a perpendicular wall - once the dimension chain
is selected - will automatically insert the thickness of the key wall
into the chain.

24'-2
"

The result:

16'-9" 1'-6" 5'-11"

Setting the Witness Line Length Manually


The length of custom and dynamic witness lines can manually be
set:
- for a single witness line;
- for both witness lines of a dimension unit;

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


193
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

- for all the witness lines in the chain.


To manually set the witness lines, select a dimension point, unit,
or chain while the Dimension tool is active. Grab the hotspot or
reference line of the selected part and drag the gray distance
indicator away from the dimensioning line.
Point:

Unit:

Chain:

Clicking at the desired length will cut (or stretch) the witness lines
involved.
Dynamic witness lines will never extend beyond the reference
node of the dimensioned element.
To manually set the nonexistent or short witness lines you must
first change them into one of the long types by resetting them in
the Dimension Settings dialog box.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


194
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Radial Dimension Tool


In the Toolbox’ default appearance, all dimensioning types tools
are represented in a single icon. If the icon currently represents
another dimensioning tool, click and pull the small arrow at the
bottom of the icon to see the Radial Dimension tool, or choose
Window/Floating Palettes/Palette Shapes and click the Expanded
version of the Toolbox.
With the Radial Dimension tool you can place the value of the
radius of a curved element (Wall, Slab, Roof, Mesh, Fill, Circle,
Arc) on the Floor Plan. Radial Dimensions are semi-automatic and
fully associative.
The Radial Dimension tool shares many of the features of the
linear Dimension tool.

Drawing Radial Dimensions


Radial dimensions have two main parts: the dimension line and
the label.
The dimension line is always placed in a radial direction and the
mark at its start always points towards the curved part. By clicking
on a point of the curved element you can start drawing the
dimension line either towards the centerpoint of the curve or in
the opposite direction. You cannot place a radial dimension
anywhere on the plan, as it always has to originate from a curved
element.
The label is connected to the end of the dimension line. It shows
the value of the radius of the dimensioned curve. Its orientation
can be selected in the Radial Dimensioning dialog box.
Note: Deleting the dimensioned element will also delete any
Radial Dimensions associated with it.

Construction Methods
Two Radial Dimension Construction Methods, or types, are
available from either the Info Box or the tool's Settings dialog box.
- With centerpoint: When you select this type, and place a
radial dimension on the plan, the centerpoint of the arc will
automatically be marked by placing a crosshair there.
- Without centerpoint: In this case, no centerpoint mark will
be placed at the centerpoint of the curve.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


195
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Radial Dimension Settings


The Radial Dimension tool's settings dialog box is similar to that of
the linear Dimension tool. Only the differences and additional
options will be discussed here.

Type
You can also select the Radial Dimension type here, as in the
Control Box.
Label Orientation
Three radio buttons allow you to choose the label orientation. It
can be either continuous with the dimension line, always
horizontal or always vertical.
Prefix
This field allows you to define an optional prefix that will appear
before the value of the radius.

Radial Dimension Techniques


Marking Curved Elements' Centerpoints
Placing radial dimensions on a curved element allows you to mark
its centerpoint, making it available for cursor snapping.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


196
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Dragging Radial Dimensions


You cannot drag a Radial Dimension away from the element it
dimensions; you can only move it to another location along the
element's curve.

The Level Dimension Tool


In the Toolbox’ default appearance, all dimensioning types tools
are represented in a single icon. If the icon currently represents
another dimensioning tool, click and pull the small arrow at the
bottom of the icon to see the Level Dimension tool, or choose
Window/Floating Palettes/Palette Shapes and click the Expanded
version of the Toolbox.
The Level Dimension tool allows you to create the point level
elevation markers common to architecture and site planning. This
tool works primarily with ArchiCAD slabs and flat roofs
constructed using the Slab tool. You can place standard and
automatic elevation readings on these elements with the Level
Dimensioning tool.

Drawing Level Dimensions


To place a level dimension in your project, select the Level
Dimension tool from the Toolbox, then click anywhere on the
worksheet. The elevation of the active story is immediately
displayed along with a standard elevation marker as shown below.

'
+8

Placing Level Dimensions


To attach a level dimension to an individual slab or roof rather
than the active story:
1) Select any individual slab with an elevation value different
from the base elevation of the active story.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


197
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

2) Click with the Level Dimension tool at the location you want
the marker placed
The elevation reading of the selected slab will be displayed at the
indicated location, complete with a standard elevation marker. The
marker may be placed away from a remote selected slab and still
remain associative.

Associativity
Level dimensioning is associative: when you change the elevation
of dimensioned stories, the dimension value will automatically be
updated.
With slabs, level dimensions will only be associative when placed
on selected slabs.

Level Dimensions Settings


ArchiCAD provides several specific settings for defining your level
dimensions.

These settings are rather similar to those of the other dimensioning


tools. Only differences and specific options will be discussed here.
Marker Rotation
You can rotate the marker symbol by entering a value in the
rotation edit box. When you rotate a marker symbol, the text will
rotate with it, maintaining the original relationship.
Marker Style
You can select from a variety of marker styles using the selection
box.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


198
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Level Dimension Text Framing


The Level Dimension Text Frame option places a box frame
around the Level text for emphasis. The frame is automatically
sized to fit the text and cannot be independently edited.
Text Plus Sign Option
The Plus Sign Option places a plus or minus sign in front of each
level dimension text to indicate its position relative to the zero
level of the project.

Level Dimension Techniques


You can edit the elevation text separately as well as drag, rotate,
and otherwise modify the text independently of the marker. The
Level Dimension markers are individual elements, and each one
can be individually edited. They can be dragged, rotated and
mirrored, with or without copies, as any other element.
If multiplied together with the reference slab, the copies of the
markers will be associated with the copies of the slabs. If
multiplied alone, the copies will be associative with the same slab
(or the story) as the original.

The Elevation Dimension


Tool
In the Toolbox’ default appearance, all dimensioning types tools
are represented in a single icon. If the icon currently represents
another dimensioning tool, click and pull the small arrow at the
bottom of the icon to see the Elevation Dimension tool, or choose
Window/Floating Palettes/Palette Shapes and click the Expanded
version of the Toolbox.
The Elevation Dimension tool places height markers in Section/
Elevation windows. It can also be used on the Floor Plan, but
there are two important differences from the markers placed by
the Level Dimension tool:
- The Elevation Dimension tool only measures the distance
along the floor plan’s Y-axis from the current Project/User
Origin. This is not the same as the element’s vertical height
along the Z-axis, which the Level Dimension tool measures.
- The Elevation Dimension markers are not associative. They
are purely graphic elements.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


199
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Geometry Methods
Two Geometry Methods are available for the Elevation Dimension
tool through the Info box.
- The Point method places an elevation dimension in your
project. Select the Elevation Dimension tool from the Toolbox,
then click anywhere on the worksheet. The distance from the
current User Origin along the Y axis to the place you have
clicked will be displayed, along with a standard elevation
marker.
- The Series method places a vertical stack of markers aligned
to an invisible vertical line.
To place a Series Elevation Dimension:
1) Select the Series Method icon from the Info box.
2) Click at the vertical positions on the elevation elements you
want dimensioned.
3) Double-click to finish placing elevation points.
4) Click with the Hammer cursor to define the position you want
the markers aligned to.

Elevation Dimension Settings


The Elevation Dimension Settings dialog box provides several
controls for creating and formatting the elevation dimensions.

The Elevation Dimension tool shares many of the settings of the


other dimensioning tools. Only the differences and specific
settings will be discussed here.
Marker Specifications
The marker specification edit boxes allow you to adjust the size of
the marker and the length of the witness lines. These values can

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


200
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

be applied to individually selected Elevation Dimensions, or set at


as the default for future markers.
Marker Style
You can select from a variety of marker styles using the selection
box.
Additionally, you can specify the shape of the markers and
whether they should be placed above or below the dimension
line.
A further control allows you to toggle between solid or outline
markers.
Elevation Text Plus Sign Option
The Elevation Dimension Text Plus Sign Option places a plus or
minus sign in front of each elevation text to indicate its position
relative to the zero point of the project origin along the Y axis.

Elevation Dimension Techniques


A variety of techniques are available for placing and formatting
Elevation dimensions on your project plan.

Editing Elevation Dimensions


The Elevation Dimension markers are individual elements, each
one can be edited separately. They can be dragged, rotated and
mirrored, with or without copies, as any other element. Since the
markers are non-associative, the text values will not be updated
when they are moved.
The witness line endpoints can be extended or shortened by
dragging away from the hotspot of the element where the marker
meets the witness line with the Elevation Dimension tool.
Note: Even though they can be rotated, the symbol and the
value will always keep their horizontal orientations. Rotation
is applied only to the location of the elevation dimension. The
text can be dragged away from the marker by its hotspot.

Placing Elevation Dimension Markers


The easiest way of placing Elevation Dimension markers is as
follows:
1) Define the desired view on the Floor Plan with the Section/
Elevation tool.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


201
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

2) Open the corresponding Section/Elevation Window from the


Window menu.
3) Place the Elevation Dimension markers in this window.
See also…
The Section/Elevation tool later in this chapter.
There are two other ways to get an editable 2D copy of the 3D
model view, which can be enhanced with Elevation Dimensions
and other 2D drafting elements: using the Save as 2D Elements
command, and using the Copy and Paste functions as described
below.
Save as…
To place an Elevation Dimension element on a 2D Element
elevation generated in the 3D Window using Save as.…, perform
the following steps:
1) Generate a 3D Projection in Wireframe or Hidden-Line mode.
The Projection may be of any type, including Perspectives and
Axonometrics. For best results, an orthogonal view type such
as a Side view from one of the four cardinal compass points is
recommended (compass direction/azimuth: North/90°, East/
0°, South/270° or West/180°).
2) Save the 3D Window as an ArchiCAD 2D Elements document.
3) Close the current project and open the new document to add
elevation dimensions. The Project Origin will be placed at the
Project Zero level of the source project model so that you will
get the correct values right away.
4) Activate the Elevation Dimension tool and click using one of
the Geometry Methods to place the Markers.
This method is recommended if you want a separate drawing of
the elevation or section.
Copy & Paste
To place an Elevation Dimension element on a 2D Elements
elevation generated in the 3D Window using Copy and Paste,
perform the following steps:
1) Activate the Marque tool and choose the last of its geometry
methods from the Info Box. Draw a 2D Marquee selection
rectangle around the section of the 3D Window you wish to
copy.
2) Use the Edit/Copy command to copy the elements as 2D
Elements onto the Clipboard.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


202
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

3) Click on the Floor Plan (or choose Window/Floor Plan) and


use Edit/Paste to place the elements.
In this case, you have to place the elevation or section somewhere
in the worksheet. To get the right values when placing elevation
dimensions, move the user origin to an appropriate location.
Use this method if you want to keep the floor plan and the
elevation or section on the same worksheet and in the same
document.

The Angle Dimension Tool


In the Toolbox’ default appearance, all dimensioning types tools
are represented in a single icon. If the icon currently represents
another dimensioning tool, click and pull the small arrow at the
bottom of the icon to see the Angle Dimension tool, or choose
Window/Floating Palettes/Palette Shapes and click the Expanded
version of the Toolbox.
The Angle Dimension tool allows you to place angle values
between line and/or linear element edge pairs. As with linear and
radial dimensions, angular dimensions are semi-automatic and
fully associative. Various measurement units and standards are
available for angular dimensions.

Drawing Angle Dimensions


You need to define exactly four reference points in order to show
angle values on the Floor Plan.
You can define these points the following ways:
- Clicking any existing line or edge (wall, slab, roof, mesh, fill).
This will immediately place two reference points on the
clicked line/edge.
- Clicking the hotspots of existing elements.
- Clicking anywhere on the plan (in this case, the angular
dimensions will not be associative).
- Clicking an existing edge will immediately result in four
hotspots.
The four points you defined will determine two infinite lines that
ArchiCAD will use in the calculation of the angle. Depending on
which geometry method is selected in the Info Box or in the
Settings dialog box, and on where you click after the Hammer

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


203
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

cursor appears, angle values are measured differently and can be


placed in different locations.
The two infinite lines divide the space into four quarters.
ArchiCAD will place the angle dimension in the quarter you click
after the Hammer cursor appears. The arc of the angle dimension
will pass through the point you click.
The angle dimension value, however, will automatically be placed
next to the middle of the dimensioning curve. It can then be
dragged to another location by the hotspot of the dimension value.

Geometry Methods
You can choose between two Geometry Methods, either from the
Angular Dimension Settings dialog box or from the Info Box: acute
and obtuse angles.
- When you place angle dimensions using the Acute method,
only the quarter of the space in which you click with the
Hammer cursor will be dimensioned.
The following examples, wherein we dimensioned the same two
edges of a general shape quadrangle, show the different
variations.
141.57
°

38.43°
38.43°

- When you place angle dimensions in the Obtuse method,


ArchiCAD will calculate the angle of the specified quarter
together with the other two quarters adjacent to the one that
was clicked. The hammers on the arcs indicate points that,
when clicked, would give you the same result

218.43°
321.57°

321.57°

218.43°

Note: You cannot dimension 180 degrees. If you want to mark


it, use the Arc tool with the Double Arrow method and place
the value as text on top of the half-circle.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


204
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Angle Dimension Settings

The same settings are available here as for the Dimension and
Radial Dimension tools in regard to the numbers’ style, pen color
and types of witness lines. Here you can also select dimensioning
for either acute or obtuse angles.
Number Placement
The first radio button will always place the dimension value
outside the dimensioning curve, while the last will place it inside
of it.
Number Orientation
If the first radio button is switched on, then the angle’s
dimensioning value will always be horizontal. With the second
button active, the dimensioning value is always in radial direction
while with the third one, it will be parallel with the tangent of the
curve next to it.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


205
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Text Tool


This sophisticated tool offers multiline texts, full scale font options,
multiple styles and justification in any direction.
Note: In the default shape of the dialog box, the Text tool and
the Label tool have been grouped in a single icon. If you do
not see the Text tool, either go to the Label tool and click and
hold the small arrow in the lower left corner of the icon and
flush out the Text tool’s icon, or Choose Window/Floating
Palettes/Palette Shapes and select the Expanded version of the
Toolbox.

Placing Text Blocks


There are two types of text blocks in ArchiCAD: breaking and non-
breaking.

Creating a Breaking Text Block


click
To start a line of text, simply draw a rubberband rectangle by
clicking twice with at its corners the Text tool on the worksheet. A
one-line block with the defined width remains on the screen,
click including a flashing text cursor indicating your position in the text
block.
Start your text here! New lines of text will be automatically started as soon as you reach
the predefined width of your text block. You can start a new line
at any time by hitting the Return key on your keyboard. Words will
flow from one line to the other automatically as soon as you reach
the predefined width of your text block. Click OK or hit the Enter
key when you are finished, or alternately, click Cancel if you want
to start all over again.

Creating a Non-Breaking Text Block


Non-breaking text blocks are especially useful if you are not sure
in advance how long your text block’s lines will be.
To create a non-breaking text block, double-click with the Text
tool active. You can immediately start typing your text. You can
type as many characters in the same line as you wish.
Hitting Return will automatically start a new line. The width of the
text block will be determined by the width of the longest line of
the block.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


206
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Text Settings
The Text Settings dialog box gives you complete control over the
orientation and typography of your text elements.

Font, Style & Size


These controls allow you to define the font, style and size of your
text blocks.
The Style and Size settings are available for selected text elements
or as defaults for future elements. Italic used for TrueType fonts
translates to a 75° slant if the font is changed to a vector font.
Text size is defined in absolute values, so its on-screen size will
vary when you shift between different scales by choosing
Options/Floor Plan Scale. This is illustrated in the following
figures.

See also…
For more information about scaled and fixed size elements, see
Chapter 2 as well as the description of the commands related to
printing and plotting in Chapter 5 (File menu).

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


207
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Text Direction
The Angle of the text block can be set in the text angle edit box. A
separate slant value can also be set if you are using plotter fonts.
The slant box is only visible when a plotter font has been selected.

Text blocks are always readable from the bottom or from the right
after a rotation or a mirroring.

Leading
Leading can be set either relative to letter size or in absolute
values.
Justification & Anchor Point
These settings will help you place your text blocks in the most
pleasing or practical arrangement. Just click on the left, right or
centered justification, and then click the location where you want
to position your text block.
The anchor point is useful when you are editing text elements.
When you change font sizes or other text characteristics, the
anchor point will remain fixed, keeping the position of your text
fixed relative to the surrounding elements.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


208
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Display Options
Text blocks can be framed with brackets at each corner handle.
This makes the text blocks easy to locate and edit, while keeping
the text readable. Another option (Greek) is available for
displaying a text block with the text illegible but with uniform gray
patterns substituted for the actual text. Greek text can also be
displayed with handles.
These options are available in the Display Options dialog box
under Options.
Note: Text will automatically be displayed as Greek when the
size of the letters relative to the drawing scale or zoom level
becomes too small. When editing text blocks, all Greek texts
are temporarily enlarged.

Text Techniques
A large number of techniques are available in ArchiCAD for
selecting, formatting or editing Text Blocks.

Selecting Text Blocks


To select the completed text block, click the original rectangle’s
corner points or center. The text’s hotspots will appear.

Living Room - vaulted


21'-3" / 17'-6"
wall to wall carpet

When selected, the text block can be respecified or repositioned


like any other construction or drawing element. When the text
itself is selected, it becomes editable.
Hint: Since the corners of the text blocks are not easy to find
unless you make them visible in Display Options, the fastest
way to select them is to draw a selection rectangle with the
Arrow tool roughly around the first characters.

Reshaping Text Blocks


To reshape an existing text block, select the text block, activate the
Stretch command from the Edit menu, and grab one of the text
block’s perimeter hotspots. The text block will rubberband as you
move that node and the text in the block will automatically

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


209
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

rearrange itself according to the new outline, as shown in the


following example.

Living Room - vaulted

21'-3" / 17'-6"

wall to wall carpet

Living Room - vaulted

21'-3" / 17'-6"

wall to wall carpet

Living Room -

vaulted

21'-3" / 17'-6"

wall to wall carpet

Editing Text within Text Blocks


The quickest way to edit text is to activate the Text tool, choose
the Select all Texts command on the Edit menu, and click in the
text block that you want to edit. This way, you do not need to find
a hotspot of the text block to select it.
To change the contents of a specific text block, select it first.
1) With the Text tool active, clicking in a selected text block will
open the text for editing in a gray frame. Rotated text blocks
will turn horizontal while you edit them.
2) You can cut, copy, paste and clear text while working in the
frame.
3) When you are finished with this block, click in another text
block to continue editing.
4) When you are through editing text, click anywhere on the
worksheet or click the OK button in the Control Box.
Note: If you hit Enter or click the Cancel button, the editing
process will be canceled but the text block will remain
selected.
While editing Text within text blocks, all screen functions are
available.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


210
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Label Tool


Labels are text blocks optionally linked to construction elements
allowing you to identify or comment elements or parts of your
design. Labels can be framed or unframed, with leader and
arrowhead. The available labeling options allow you to label or
unlabel manually selected elements with either custom
specification, ID or Internal ID, or to use automatic labeling for
selected classes of construction elements.
Note: In the default shape of the dialog box, the Text tool and
the Label tool have been grouped in a single icon. If you do
not see the Label tool, either go to the Text tool and click and
hold the small arrow in the lower left corner of the icon and
flush out the Label tool’s icon, or Choose Window/Floating
Palettes/Palette Shapes and select the Expanded version of the
Toolbox.

Placing Labels
You can use two types of Labels in ArchiCAD:
- Custom Labels are manually drawn on the Floor Plan, and
cannot be linked to elements.
- Auto-Labels linked to elements are generated through the
commands of the Tools/Labels submenu. There you can
choose either to automatically label every newly created
element of the classes selected in the Automatic Labeling
dialog box, or to add labels to selected items only. Auto-Labels
can be included in Bill of Material listings with the elements
they are linked to. See also the Calculate/List Setup command
in Chapter 5.
Notes: Auto-Labels are linked to elements: if you delete the
element, the Auto-Label is deleted with it. On the other hand,
deleting the Auto-Label does not affect the element it is linked
to.
Auto-Labels can be placed in any layer regardless of the linked
element’s layer. However, if the element’s layer is hidden, linked
auto-labels will not be displayed even if residing in a visible layer.

Auto-Labels
If you choose Automatic Labeling in the Tools/Labels menu, any
newly created element of the selected classes will appear with its

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


211
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

ID or internal ID label according to the settings you make in the


Automatic Labeling dialog box.

Selecting elements and choosing the Label selected elements


command will add labels as defined in the Automatic Labeling
dialog box.
See also…
The description of the Automatic Labeling dialog box is given
under the Labels command (Tools menu) in Chapter 5.

Custom Labels
To draw a custom label:
1) Click where you want to place the arrowhead to point on the
floor plan.
2) Draw a rubberband line from your starting point and click
where you want the first section of your leader to end.
3) Draw another rubberband line in the direction set by the Label
Settings dialog box for the label handle. Clicking where you
want the end of the handle will open the label text box
automatically.
4) Type the label text you desire (up to 25 characters) in the text
box and click the OK button or type Enter to complete the
operation. A label with the default settings will be placed.

Label Settings
The Label Settings dialog box gives you control over the
orientation, typography and text of your label elements.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


212
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Only settings specific to Labels will be discussed here.


Framing
Next to the font settings, you can assign frames to your labels by
simply switching to the lower radio button with the framed text
symbol. The frame is automatically sized to fit the text and cannot
be independently edited. Text blocks are displayed on the floor
plan as transparent whether they are framed or not.
Pens
You can set different pens for label text, arrow and pointer line.
Marker Size
In this edit field you can set the marker’s size, in points (imperial
units) or mm (metric units).
Text Direction
This field allows you to set a custom angle for the second section
of the pointer line and the label’s text block.
Label Type
If you open the dialog box with an Auto Label selected, you can
choose a type of label for Auto-Labels using the radio buttons in
the bottom center section of the dialog box.
- Custom allows you to enter any string up to 25 characters in
the text field.
- Choosing ID will place the ID Number of the labeled element
into the Label’s text field.
- Choosing Internal ID places the internal unique ID of the
labeled element into the Label’s text field. This internal ID is

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


213
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

automatically generated and is conserved throughout the life


of the Project.
Auto-Label Orientation
Four orientation options are available for Auto-Labels:
- The Parallel method always places the Auto-Labels parallel to
the labeled elements.

- The Vertical method always places the Auto-Labels vertically.


The text can be read from bottom to top.

- The Horizontal method always places the Auto-Labels


horizontally.

- The Custom method places the Auto-Labels at the angle you


define in the Text Direction edit field.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


214
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Label Text
You can define here the text of both Auto-Labels and Custom
Labels.
- The text appearing on Auto-Labels can be either their ID code
or the automatically generated internal ID. If you edit this text,
the label type control (see below) is automatically set to
Custom.
- Custom Labels can only have Custom texts which you can
modify at will.

Label Techniques
You can change a selected label’s leader length and direction as
well as the text block handle’s length by repositioning the
selection nodes with the cursor when the Label tool is selected in
the Toolbox.
You can select a label by any of its three selection nodes (arrow,
leader elbow or leader end).
A selected label can be manipulated as a whole with all Edit
commands.
Note: To drag a Label text, you must select it with the Label
tool active.

The Zone Tool


With the Zone tool, you can define spatial units in your project
referred to as zones. Zones can be assigned to rooms, groups of
rooms or even larger parts of a project.
Zones appear on the Floor Plan as fills and zone stamps linked to
the zone fills. The zone fill designates the zone space in the
project, while the zone stamp contains textual information about
the zone, including its name, number, area, and other optional
parameters such as the material of the subfloor, materials of the
walls, surface of the walls (with or without their openings), etc.
ArchiCAD zone stamps are Library Part elements. The predefined
zone stamps reside in the ArchiCAD library, but in many respects
their behavior differs from that of other library part types like
objects, doors or windows, as they are 2D-only elements: they
have a 2D symbol, a 2D GDL script and a Properties script.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


215
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Zone stamps are intelligent parametric library parts whose look,


contents and behavior can be fitted to local architectural practice.

In ArchiCAD, zones are grouped into categories. Zone categories


are defined according to similar usage or purpose, e.g. public
areas, laboratories, office space, etc. Some Zone categories are
predefined in ArchiCAD and you can define your own categories
at will by using the Zone categories command in the Options
menu.
Zones of different categories can be marked with different colors
and zone stamp library parts can be assigned to them.
ArchiCAD projects can be evaluated according to the information
stored in the zones by choosing the List Zones command in the
Calculate menu. The Zone List displays additional valuable
information which is the result of the zone property script
calculations.
See also…
Zone Categories (Options menu) and the Calculate menu items in
Chapter 5.

Zone Definition Methods


There are two zone definition methods: you can either manually
draw the contour of a zone, or let ArchiCAD automatically
recognize a zone surrounded by walls.
Once the zone fill is defined, its zone stamp automatically appears
on the Floor Plan.
The Polyline method is your best choice when your zone’s
boundary is not clearly surrounded by walls, or your zone
encompasses several rooms separated by walls. With this method,
you simply draw a polyline (as you would for any other polygon)
by clicking at every corner of the zone. Mouse constraints are

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


216
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

available for defining the zone. You can finish drawing the
polyline either by clicking again at the starting point, by double-
clicking the last point, or by clicking the OK button in the Control
Box: in this case, the contour will automatically be completed.
Both Automatic Zone Recognition methods are based on the
fact that most zones are surrounded by walls and the only
openings in them are doors and windows. Click with the cursor
inside an area completely surrounded by walls and ArchiCAD will
automatically recognize it as a zone space by placing a zone fill
and a zone stamp in it.
The two optional methods controls this recognition. If you choose
the first icon of Automatic Zone Recognition, ArchiCAD will
always define the zone area by the inner edges of walls.
Clicking the icon of the other method, ArchiCAD considers the
reference lines of the walls as the boundaries of the zone. Even if
you constructed walls with inner reference lines, the zone fill does
not overlap the wall symbols until you command Bring to Front in
the Tools menu.
If the zone has openings that are not doors or windows, ArchiCAD
will continue searching for boundaries outside the spatial unit that
you wished to identify as a zone. In this case, the result may not
be what you expect (figure on right below). In this case, using the
Polygon method is recommended.

With stand-alone zones, i.e. zones that are not connected to any
other, automatic recognition may produce the desired result even
if the zone is open. ArchiCAD will search around the walls
surrounding the zone and when it fails to find one, it automatically
closes the zone.

Zone Settings
Zones are Library Parts, and their settings dialog box has very
much the same look as the Object or Door/Window settings dialog
box.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


217
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Categories and Stamp Preview


In the Preview area, the zone stamp is displayed. Zone stamps are
assigned to zone categories, which means that by changing
categories in the Parameters, the displayed preview will be
replaced by the new one.

Next to the Preview area, a scrollable list allows you to choose a


zone category. Zones sharing the same function can be described
as a category, e.g. lavatories, kitchens, residential areas, etc. Zone
categories are defined by name, code, color and zone stamp,
together with a set of parameters. There is a set of predefined zone
categories in ArchiCAD, but you can edit it and add new ones
through the Zone Categories dialog box in the Options menu.
Zone Name and Number
These edit fields allow you to identify the zone stamp on the Floor
Plan. The zone name and number have to be individually defined
for every zone.
When a zone is defined and the zone stamp is placed on the Floor
Plan, several pieces of additional geometric information (zone
area, zone outline, outline of holes, outline with walls,
surrounding wall area, etc.) are automatically calculated. These
parameters are listed in the zone.
Zone Stamp Text Size and Color
You can define the zone stamp’s text size in absolute values, so
that its size on the screen changes when you change the scale. For
more information about fixed and scaled elements, see Scale in
Chapter 2.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


218
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

You can set the desired color for your zone in the pen number edit
box or you can use predefined stamp colors by checking the Use
Zone Stamp Colors checkbox at the bottom.
Height, Elevation and Subfloor Thickness
Zones are defined by the whole volume of a space above the level
of the actual story. However, you may wish to exclude the volume
of floor structure in the entire zone. Then, you type the subfloor
thickness in the appropriate edit box and it will reduce the height
of the room.

Parameters
With the additional parameters of the zone stamp, you can adjust
the 2D appearance and contents of the zone stamp, as well as the
appearance and contents of the zone list.
An unlimited variety of zone stamps can be scripted in 2D GDL
and, accordingly, the contents of the parameter list may vary from
zone stamp to zone stamp. These parameters have an effect both
on the appearance and the contents of the zone stamp.
Measured Area
In the case of selected zones, you can find the area of the last
selected zone appearing in this box. When creating a default zone,
the box is dimmed.

Zone Techniques
Most of the techniques described under Editing Polygons in
Chapter 3 are available for Zones.
The most important exceptions are:
- Holes in zones can be stretched with the Marquee tool, but
otherwise they cannot be selected or deleted separate from
the zone.
- Zones cannot be dimensioned, since they already contain
dimensioning data.
See also…
Update Zones command in the Tools menu section of Chapter 5.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


219
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Fill Tool


The Fill tool enables you to mark different surfaces shown on your
floor plans and 2D representations with a wide range of ready-
made or customized fill patterns. The Fill tool is especially useful
in section drawings or in detail drawing.
Marking floor tiling or carpeting on floor plans and adding a
graphic touch to elevations are examples of utilizing the Fill tool.
The Fill tool is also used to measure the area of polygons in your
floor plans. This feature produces a text element which is fully
associative and follows any changes in the associated fill polygon.
Fills are listed in quantity calculations with associated properties
descriptions and components. Such descriptions can be linked to
the pencolor, the fill pattern or both of a Fill polygon.

Geometry Methods
Drawing Fills is similar to creating Slabs or Roofs. There are three
Geometry Methods available for the Fill tool, each of which is
covered in its own section below.
Cursor Snap and the other construction aids are available to help
you fit your pattern to existing structures.
Polygon method - you draw the contours of an area with the
mouse.
1) Choose the Polygon geometry method from the Info box.
2) Define the contour polygon of the area you intend to fill by
clicking on each node of the area.
Rectangle method - the rectangle shape is drawn with reference
to opposing vertices and the active grid.
1) Choose the Rectangle geometry method from the Info box.
2) Define the contour rectangle of the area you intend to fill by
drawing a diagonal line across the area.
Rotated Rectangle method - the rectangle is drawn with
reference to two vertices and a reference line.
1) Choose the Rotated Rectangle geometry method in the Info
box.
2) Define the rotation vector of the fill by drawing the line that
will form the fill’s base reference line.
3) Define the contour rectangle of the area you intend to cover
with the fill by moving away from the baseline to the intended

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


220
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

length of the fill. Note that the rotation vector normally defines
the length of the two edges parallel to it. You can override this
constraint by pressing the Shift key when you draw the
rotation vector.

Adding Area Text


If the Show Text Area checkbox has been marked in the Fill
Settings dialog box (described below), the Hammer Cursor will
appear, prompting you to position the text with a click, giving the
calculated area of the fill. This procedure is the same regardless of
the geometry method used to draw the fill.
Area value labels are always readable from the bottom or from the
right after a rotation or a mirroring.
When selecting only the text of a Fill, choosing the last command
of the Edit menu opens the Dimension Text Settings dialog box
allowing you to edit the font and pen characteristics of the
selected area text. Clicking the Text icon in the Info Box has the
same effect.
This dialog box is shown earlier, in the Dimension section.

Fill Settings
The Fill Settings dialog box allows you to set the characteristics of
selected fill elements, or to set the defaults for future fills.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


221
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Most of the Fill tool’s settings have already been discussed in the
Common Tool Settings section. Only differences and specific
options will be presented here.

Fill Patterns
To select a fill pattern, choose one from the fill pattern pop-up
menu shown below. The fill patterns are displayed in alphabetical
order from left to right and top to bottom.
The pop-up control of the fill patterns displays with the current
pencolor settings: both fill color and fill background.

Two types of fill representations are available in ArchiCAD:


- Vector fills are composed of simple lines or line segments, so
they can be used for plotter output. To see the vectorial form
of each fill type on the screen, activate the vectorial fill button
in the Display Options dialog box (Options menu).
- Bitmap fills can be more intricate than vector fills, because they
are composed of pixels.
These two types of fills are associated with each other, so that each
bitmap fill pattern has a vector fill counterpart.
In addition to these two types of fills you can select Solid Fill
under Polygon Fills in the Display Options in Options menu.
The fill patterns shown in the pop-up menu are the bitmapped
screen representation of each fill pattern. Each pattern also has a
default name, which can be changed through the Fill types dialog
box in the Options menu.
You can also choose the All Fills Transparent setting in the
Options/Preferences/Miscellaneous dialog box
See also…
To learn more about the editing, the difference and the use of the
bitmapped and vectorial patterns, see the Fill Types… and
Display Options menu commands in Chapter 5.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


222
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Framed & Unframed Fills


The fill frame radio buttons determine whether your fills will be
drawn with a framing line around their borders.
The fill frame line type pop-up menu allows you to choose
between different line types for the frame. Line types can be
edited in the Line Type dialog box of the Options menu.
The pen number edit box shows the current pencolor of the fill
frame.

Fill Orientation
Two fill orientations are available in the Fill Settings dialog box
and as Construction Methods in the Info Box. These options are
only applied to fill patterns if displayed in vectorized form.
- Link to Project Origin begins the fill pattern at the project
origin and displays that portion of the pattern which falls
within your fill boundaries.
- Link to Fill Origin begins the fill pattern at the origin of the fill
element. When drawing with this option the first click
determines the Fill Origin and the second one the endpoint of
the orientation vector.
You can also set fill orientation as a display option under Fill
Handles in Options menu, Display Options.

Fill Techniques
All editing techniques described in Chapter 3 under Editing
Polygons are available for Fills.

Adding a Blank Fill


You may find it useful to create an invisible fill pattern in order to
measure an area of your floor plan. To accomplish this:
1) Make sure that the Show Area Text checkbox is enabled in the
Fill Settings dialog box.
2) Select the Empty Fill pattern in Fill Settings.
3) Draw the fill element on top of your existing project.
4) Place the area text with the Hammer Cursor.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


223
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Line Tool


Lines are the simplest construction element in ArchiCAD. They can
also be one of the most useful in that you can use them to create
any 2D shape without utilizing constraints.
In the Toolbox’ default shape, the Line, Arc/Circle and Spline tools
are represented by a single icon. If you do not see the Line tool’s
icon in the Toolbox, click the Arc/Circle or Spline tool’s icon and
press the small arrow in the bottom right corner of the icon and
flush out the Line tool. Another solution is to choose Window/
Floating Palettes/Palette Shapes and check the Extended option
for the Toolbox.

Geometry Methods
Four Geometry Methods are provided for drawing lines.
The Single Line method produces a single straight Line defined
by a startpoint and endpoint.
The PolyLine method produces a series of straight Lines joined at
their endpoints. As you click to complete one Line, you
simultaneously begin the next one. Clicking the Cancel button in
the Control Box or double-clicking the last endpoint completes the
PolyLine. Each of the Lines in the PolyLine is an individual
element that can be edited separately.
The Rectangle method produces a PolyLine consisting of four
Line elements with coincident endpoints. The Rectangle is defined
by placing two opposing corner nodes (the startvertex and
endvertex). The startvertex defines the Y coordinate of the Base
Reference Line of the Rectangle and the endvertex defines both
the X and Y coordinates of the opposing corner. The Rectangle
Method’s four Lines are always aligned orthogonally with the grid.
The Rotated Rectangle method produces four PolyLines as with
the previous method, except that you first define a rotation vector
for the Rectangle’s Base Reference Line. The rotation vector also
defines the length of the two Lines parallel to it. By hitting the Shift
key once, you can unlock the length component constraint and
use only the rotation angle component of the rotation vector.

Line Settings
The controls of the Line Settings dialog box are similar to those of
the other tools, discussed in the Common Tool Settings section of

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


224
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

this chapter. Only differences and specific controls will be


presented here.

Arrowhead Settings
The line tool shares the same arrowhead selections as the
Dimension tool. You can modify the Arrowhead style of existing
lines by selecting them and opening the Line Settings dialog box
wherein you have to click in the selection box. In this box, you
can also choose a default style - without selecting lines - for
subsequent lines. Note that the size, pencolor and penweight for
arrowheads can independently be specified.

The last arrowhead type is special, as it doubles the line with


arrows at both ends. Using a line like this, the cursor will snap to
the invisible axis line between the two visible lines.

Construction Methods
Four Line Construction Methods are provided:

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


225
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The No Arrows method produces a simple line with no


arrowheads.
The Start Arrow method produces a line with the current
arrowhead style at the startpoint of the line.
The End Arrow method produces a line with the current
arrowhead style at the endpoint of the line.
The Double Arrow method produces a line with the current
arrowhead style at both ends of the line.

Line Techniques
A variety of techniques are available for modifying and editing
lines.

Midpoint of a Line
To find the midpoint of a line element, move the cursor close to
the area and watch for the Checkmark cursor to appear. This
technique can help you to locate midpoints between elements.

Intersect, Fillet, Chamfer


These commands are used to modify the intersections of lines. See
the corresponding menu commands in Chapter 5 for details.

The Arc/Circle Tool


The Arc/Circle tool is used to draw any circular or elliptic element
needed in your floor plan. It is particularly useful for defining arcs
which will later be converted to construction elements using the
Magic Wand (see Element Transformation in Chapter 3).
In the Toolbox’ default shape, the Line, Arc/Circle and Spline tools
are represented by a single icon. If you do not see the Arc/Circle
tool’s icon in the Toolbox, click the Line or Spline tool’s icon and
press the small arrow in the bottom right corner of the icon and
flush out the Arc/Circle tool. Another solution is to choose
Window/Floating Palettes/Palette Shapes and check the Extended
option for the Toolbox.

Geometry Methods
The Info Box houses seven Geometry Methods available to assist
you in drawing Arcs, Circles or Ellipses.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


226
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Centerpoint method defines an Arc or Circle with three


clicks:
1) The centerpoint, which places the Arc or Circle’s origin in the
Floor Plan.
2) The startpoint, which defines the radius.
3) The endpoint, which for an Arc may be any point along the
perimeter. For a Circle, you must either drag the endpoint all
the way around the circumference or, as a shortcut, just
double-click at the startpoint.
You can complete an Arc by dragging the angle component to the
desired degree and double-clicking. To draw an arc of a different
angle than defined by the third point, activate the Arrow tool,
select the arc, click once at the third point and move on to the
desired angle. Complete the arc with one more click. To draw a
complete circle, click once at the third point then move around the
center of the circle and click again at the first point.
The Three-Point method constructs the circumference of the Arc
or Circle so that it passes through any three points that you enter
on the floor plan. You then complete the Arc or Circle by dragging
the angle component to the desired degree and clicking.
1) Click the first point with the Checkmark or Crosshair cursor.
2) Click the second point with the Empty Pencil cursor.
3) Click the third point for the circumference.
4) Drag the Arc. Click to complete.

The Tangent Point method creates only Circles. However, any


Circle may be edited into an Arc afterwards.
This is the most complex and powerful of the four Circle tool
methods. The Tangent Point Method may require a mouse
movement to complete the desired Circle, depending on how
many of the three possible tangent edges you define.
The process requires the selection of three initial points like the
Three-Point Method, but any of the three points may either be a
tangent edge indicated by the Mercedes Cursor, a node indicated

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


227
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

by the Checkmark Cursor or a free-floating point indicated by the


Crosshair Cursor.
An endpoint cannot qualify as a tangent edge when using this
method, so a maximum of two endpoints are allowed. If more
than two are selected, the process will revert to the Three-Point
Method described above.
This method is restricted to linear tangency. All tangent points
must be on the straight edges of Slabs, Lines, or Walls, etc. If you
click on a radial edge with the Mercedes Cursor, the resulting
Circle will pass through that point rather than being a tangent of
the curve.
When making the definition, you may define from one to three
tangent edges:
- One tangent edge/two points
- Two tangent edges/one point
- Three tangent edges
In the first two cases, any sequence of tangent edge and point
definitions will be accepted.
Depending on the geometric situation, one to four solutions may
be available for the circle.
After clicking the third edge or point, you have to make a gesture
with the Eyeball cursor towards the desired circle position. A gray
circle will flip from one position to the other as you move around
the cursor. Click when it is at the right place to complete the circle.
If there is no solution, (for example, if you define three parallel
edges for tangency), no circle will be made.
Three tangent edges require a gesture with the Eyeball Cursor to
indicate which of four possible solutions is desired.
1) Click the tangent edge with the Mercedes cursor.
2) Click the second tangent edge with the Striped Pencil.
3) Click the free point with the Empty Pencil.

4) Gesture with the Eyeball to indicate the desired orientation.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


228
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

5) Click to complete.

The PolyArc method creates a continuous curve built of


consecutive Arcs.
The method is really based on the one tangent edge/two points
definition for each arc in the curve. You freely define the first
tangent edge, as well as the starting and end point of the first arc.
Each successive arc uses the tangent edge of the preceding arc’s
end point and the end point itself as the new starting point, while
you freely define the end point of the new arc.

When you want to select or edit the curve, each arc is handled
independently.
The Diagonal Ellipse method creates an Ellipse constrained into
a rectangle.
The method stretches the inellipse of an invisible rectangle held by
the two points of its diagonal.
1) Click the starting point of the imaginary rectangle.
2) By stretching the imaginary diagonal, you get ellipses of
different sizes drawn into the invisible rectangle.
3) With the second click you choose the ellipse of the
appropriate size.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


229
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Semi-Diagonal Ellipse method works in the same way as


the Diagonal method but here you define the imaginary rectangle
by its centerpoint and the endpoint of its semi-diagonal.

The Ellipse Radii method defines an elliptical arc by the major


and another radius of an ellipse and the angle of the arc.
1) Click the centerpoint of the ellipse.
2) Choose the orientation of the major radius by clicking again.
3) You get the rubberband line of the second radius that you can
stretch to different sizes and angles. Doing this, you can notice
the accompanying ellipse that fits the length of the two radii. If
you stretch the minor radius too far away or right in line with
the major radius, you cannot draw the ellipse.

4) In the final phase ArchiCAD holds the ellipse while you define
the sides of angle of the arc. Firstly you define with a
rubberband line the side where the angle starts from. Then a
different side that closes angle while ArchiCAD follows the
angle with the Elliptical Arc. Neither sides of the angle remains
visible when the final arc is drawn.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


230
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Arc/Circle Settings

The controls of the Arc/Circle Settings dialog box are similar to


those of the other tools, discussed in the Common Tool Settings
section of this chapter. Only differences and specific controls will
be presented here.

Arrowhead Settings
The Arc/Circle tool shares the same arrowhead selections as the
Dimension and Line tools, except for the double-line style. Note
that the size, pencolor and penweight for arrowheads can be
independently specified.
Only Arcs drafted with this tool may retain Arrowheads: Circles are
closed elements with no startpoint or endpoint to receive an
Arrowhead, and therefore do not support them.
- If you begin to draft an Arc with Arrowheads and decide to
close it either while drafting or later, the Arrowheads will
simply disappear.
- If you convert a Circle to an Arc by opening it as described
below, you must add Arrowheads to it using the Arc/Circle
Settings dialog controls.

Construction Methods
Four Arrowhead Construction Methods are available for Arcs.
These are identical to those available for Lines.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


231
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

After constructing an Arc, the Arrowhead Style can be modified to


any of the other 12 styles in the Arc/Circle Settings dialog box.
The No Arrows method produces a simple Arc with no
arrowheads.
The Start Arrow method produces an Arc with the current
arrowhead style at the start of the Arc.
The End Arrow method produces an Arc with the current
arrowhead style at the start of the Arc.
The Double Arrow method produces an Arc with the current
arrowhead style at both ends of the Arc.

Arc/Circle Techniques
The following techniques can be used to define and modify arcs
and circles.

Drag-Editing Arcs & Circles


You can use the Arrow tool to drag a corresponding endpoint,
quadrant node or perimeter to:
- Change an Arc’s Length by dragging an Arc’s endpoint node
with the Checkmark Cursor.
- Close an Arc (transforming it into a Circle) by dragging an Arc’s
endpoint nodes together with the Checkmark Cursor.
- Open a Circle’s Circumference (transforming it into an Arc) by
dragging any of its quadrant nodes with the Checkmark
Cursor.
- Increase or decrease an Arc or Circle’s Radius by dragging on
the element’s perimeter with the Mercedes Cursor.
- Move (translate) a Circle’s Center coordinates by dragging the
center node with the Checkmark Cursor.

The Spline Tool


The Spline tool is ideal for generating and defining custom curves
with both precision and ease. The tool is capable of generating an
infinitely variable series of custom curves. These curves are
commonly defined as Natural splines or Bézier curves. The tool
gives greater freedom in defining free-form structures and objects
without the constraint of the circular Arc tool.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


232
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

In the Toolbox’ default shape, the Line, Arc/Circle and Spline tools
are represented by a single icon. If you do not see the Spline tool’s
icon in the Toolbox, click the Line or Arc/Circle tool’s icon and
press the small arrow in the bottom right corner of the icon and
flush out the Spline tool. Another solution is to choose Window/
Floating Palettes/Palette Shapes and check the Extended option
for the Toolbox.

Geometry Methods
There are two ways in which splines can be defined within
ArchiCAD. Each of them results in a different type of spline:
Natural and Bézier. The switch allowing you to choose the spline
type is located in the Spline Settings dialog box and in the Info
Box.
Natural splines can be defined by placing nodes, which the
program automatically connects, thereby generating a smooth
custom curve. The angle of the tangent and the shape of the spline
generated with it is affected by each subsequent node defined.
You can conclude this operation either by double-clicking on the
last node, or by clicking the OK button in the Control Box.
Clicking OK always results in a closed spline.

Bézier splines are somewhat more complex in nature, but they


allow more accurate reproduction of specific custom shapes.
Bézier splines are defined by nodes, just like natural splines, but
they also have editable tangent handles on each side of these
points. The shape of the Bézier spline is affected by the direction
of the tangent, and the length of each tangent handle.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


233
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

When defining Bézier splines, click the mouse once to place a


node, and keep the button depressed. By moving away from the
node in any direction, you are in effect defining the initial tangent,
and the length of the handle. If you release the mouse button,
ArchiCAD will assume that you wish to jump to the definition of
the next node with your next click. Keep the mouse button
depressed, and then define the next tangent and node as above.
You can conclude this operation either by double-clicking the last
node, by hitting the Enter key twice or by clicking the OK button
in the Control Box.
You can edit Bézier splines by varying the length of each handle
separately. Note that there is only one angle associated with both
handles of a node, but the length of each handle may be different.
The longer the editing handle, the smoother the curve will be at
the control point.
Note: A Bézier spline's editing handles are visible on the Floor
Plan if it is selected. If several Bézier splines are selected at the
same time, only the editing handles of the spline last selected
will be visible.

Selected Splines can be converted from one type to another by


clicking the appropriate icon either in the Control Box or in the
Spline Settings dialog box.

Construction Methods
Four Spline Construction Methods are available from both the Info
Box and the Spline Settings dialog box. These are identical to
those available for Lines: No Arrows, Start Arrow, End Arrow and
Double Arrow.
The Arrowhead style can be set to any of the 14 styles available in
the Spline Settings dialog box.

Spline Settings
The controls of the Spline Settings dialog box are similar to those
of the other tools, discussed in the Common Tool Settings section

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


234
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

of this chapter. Only differences and specific controls will be


presented here.

Open and Closed Splines


Splines can either be open-ended or closed. You can select a type
in the Floor Plan Attributes section of the Spline Settings dialog
box.
Note: If you conclude the drawing of a Spline by clicking the
OK button in the Control Box, you will always get a Closed
Spline.

Arrowhead Settings
The Spline tool shares the same arrowhead settings as the
Dimension, Line and Arc/Circle tools. Note that the size,
penweight and pencolor of arrowheads can be independently
specified.
Only open splines may retain arrowheads: closed splines are not
open elements with start and end points, hence no arrowhead is
available. If you begin to draft a spline with arrowheads, and
decide to close it later, the arrowheads will simply disappear.

Spline Techniques
Dragging Splines
You can use the Arrow tool to drag a spline by its endpoint, nodes,
or perimeter.
When the Spline tool is active and a Spline is selected, you must
use the Drag command to move the entire spline.

Editing Splines
When the Spline tool is selected in the Toolbox, you can freely
edit selected splines in the following ways:
- You can reposition nodes by clicking and dragging either
spline nodes (including the endpoints) or spline editing
handles (Bézier splines only).
- By clicking on the perimeter of a spline, you can create a new
node which is then ready to be edited by dragging.
Notes: To reposition several nodes at the same time, use the
Marquee tool.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


235
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Hotspot Tool


Drawing Hotspots
To add hotspots to your floor plan, follow the steps outlined
below:
1) Select the Hotspot tool by clicking on it.
2) Click at the location where you want to add a hotspot. All of
the usual construction aids will be available to assist you in
accurate positioning.
Note: Hotspots do not appear on the printed and plotted
outputs.

Hotspot Settings

Layers & Pens


These settings work the same for this tool as they do for other Tool
Settings. See the Common Tool Settings section for complete
descriptions.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


236
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

The Section/Elevation Tool


This tool is used to generate elevations and sections from the
model by placing section symbols on the Floor Plan.
The Section/Elevation tool places standard section/elevation
symbols on the floor plan with optional breakpoints, including
markers with identifiers and a section line. Every section symbol is
automatically linked to a new window in which the section/
elevation model can be displayed.
Section/Elevation symbols appear on all stories of your Project.

Placing Section Lines


Follow these steps to place a section line on the plan:
1) To start a section line, click with the mouse to begin drawing a
rubberband on the Floor Plan.
2) With the second click you can designate the direction of the
line and the length of the first segment. All the segments of the
Section Line will be parallel to this first segment, although you
may include perpendicular offsets as you extend the line.
3) To finish drawing the section line, either click twice at its
endpoint or click the OK button in the Control Box.
4) By clicking with the Eyeball cursor you can set both the
orientation and the depth for limited sections.
5) The arrowheads and IDs are automatically placed after the
section line is completed.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


237
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Section/Elevation Settings
The Section/Elevation Settings dialog box provides several
controls for creating and formatting the floor plan appearance of
the section line.

Pens
You can select different pens for the section line and the ID.

Line Types
You can choose any line type from the scrollable pop-up list to
represent the Section on the Floor Plan. You can also create
custom line types through the Line Types command in the Options
menu.
Note: If you want to have a Section Line that appears only at
the section segment points, define a dashed Line Type with a
5 mm Dash and a Gap as long as possible, and assign this new
line type to the selection Section.
See also…
The Line Types command (Options menu) in Chapter 5.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


238
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Arrowheads
You can select the desired arrowhead type to mark the orientation
of the section. You can then define the size of the arrowhead and
designate whether it will appear at one or both ends of the line.

Font & Size


With these controls, you can set the look of the Section/Elevation
reference ID on the Floor Plan.

Horizontal Range
Section depth can be defined as either limited or infinite. If the
depth is set to Limited, the view will not show any element
beyond the limit line.

Vertical Range
The resulting view can optionally be delimited by two horizontal
planes. Limitations can be useful for detail drawings.

Name & Reference ID


Using the text blocks in the bottom part of the dialog box you can
define a name for the current section using up to 31 characters.
This name will then appear in both the Window/Sections/
Elevations submenu and the title bar of the window displaying the
section/elevation.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


239
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

You can also define a Reference ID of up to 7 characters in length


for the section which will appear on the floor plan with the
orientation arrowheads.

Cut Elements
These controls define the pencolor of cut elements in the Section/
Elevation window. Uncut, but visible, elements inherit their
respective Floor Plan pencolors.
The fills of walls, slabs roofs and library parts can be set
independently for each element in their Settings dialog boxes. To
see these colors in the Section window, activate the Use
Elements’ Section Colors checkbox.

Section/Elevation Techniques
The following paragraphs concern the editing of section lines on
the Floor Plan. Techniques available in Section/Elevation windows
are detailed in Chapter 3.

Selecting Sections/Elevations
You can select a section line by any of its edit nodes. These can be
found at both ends of the section line, at the midpoint of each of
its segments, at the midpoint of the limit line if present, or at the
section, offset or limit lines where the cursor changes to a
Mercedes.

Adjusting Section Lines


To manipulate a selected section line as a whole, you can use the
Arrow tool, the Marquee tool or any Edit menu command. To
change the length of a section line or the steps of a staggered
section, you need to select it and activate the Section/Elevation
tool. Then you can drag or stretch any of the section’s line
segments by its line or midpoint. For staggered sections, if you
drag a segment beyond the next one, one step will be skipped.
Note that this is a way of making a staggered section more simple.
On the other hand, you cannot add any new steps this way. For
more information about the Edit commands, see Chapter 5.

Adjusting Section Depth


You can change the depth of a selected section by repositioning
the limit line to include either fewer or more objects. Move the line
by clicking it and dragging to the desired position.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


240
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Note: Make sure that the Section/Elevation tool is active


before starting this operation.

Viewing and Editing the Section


You can view your section by choosing its name from the Window
menu’s Sections/Elevations submenu.
The elements displayed are the same as would appear in the 3D
window. In other words, layer visibility, selection and the settings
of the Select Image Items dialog box will all be effective.
Each view you generate with the Section/Elevation tool remains a
part of your project as long as its corresponding section line is on
your plan. Likewise, each view is saved when you save the
project.
You can also save the contents of the Section/Elevation window as
a separate file in a variety of formats. (See the File/Save command
in Chapter 5.)
See also…
Working in the Section/Elevation windows is discussed in Chapter
3. The Marquee tool's description earlier in this chapter includes
instructions on how to place any or all of the contents of a
Section/Elevation into your project. The effect of the different Edit
menu commands in Section/Elevation windows is described in
Chapter 5.

The Camera Tool


The Camera tool is used to define the settings of perspective
views, the Fly-Through path, Virtual Reality panoramic scenes, a
path for VR scenes and navigable VR object movies.

Camera Types
Double-clicking on the Camera tool’s icon in the ArchiCAD
toolbox will open the Camera Settings dialog box.
The contents of the Camera Settings dialog box is different for all
three type of Cameras.
This dialog box and the floor plan are simultaneously active, so
you can alter the settings, the camera locations and orientations
without repeatedly opening and closing the window. However,
the dialog box disappears while the 3D Window is open.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


241
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

You can choose the camera type you want to use either by clicking
the corresponding tab at the top part of the dialog box or as a
Construction Method from the Info Box.

Perspective Views and Fly-Throughs


Placing a Camera
Choose the Camera tool in the Toolbox and make sure that the
simple Camera option is chosen in the Camera Settings dialog box.
Your first click on the floor plan places a camera with default
parameters. Draw a rubberband line to set the view direction, and
the second click defines the target’s position in 2D. The target
elevation becomes a default elevation value. When the operation
is completed, the sun icon appears with default settings.
For more information on 3D projections, see the Image menu in
Chapter 5.

Defining Fly-Throughs
Placing several cameras defines a Fly-Through path whose
parameters you can adjust in the Path dialog box that you can
open by clicking the Path… button to the bottom left of the
Camera Settings dialog box.

target

sun

other cameras
handle

path

active camera

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


242
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

One of the cameras will be active at a time. This is the only camera
displayed with its sun and view angle markers. The active camera
is always the one which was last placed, unless you select another
one. Any cameras placed on the floor plan will be attached to the
current Fly-Through path after the active camera.
Note: Collections of 3D parallel projections can also be linked
to create a Fly-Through, but these are handled differently from
perspectives. Only a single set of parallel projections can exist,
and you edit it in the 3D Projection Settings/Parallel
Projections dialog box, and not through the Camera Settings.
Also, since the viewpoint distance is infinite for parallel
projections, you cannot display them on the Floor Plan
worksheet.
See also…
For more on Fly-Throughs, see the Create Fly-Through command
in Chapter 5 (Image menu).

Camera Settings
The Camera Settings dialog box allows you to make settings for
the default and selected Cameras, create and modify Fly-Through
paths, and set a number of other parameters.

Under the Camera type tabs, a number of controls allow you to


define and modify Fly-Through paths.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


243
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Every new project has a default path named 00: Untitled Path
where the first cameras you place will reside. You can rename this
set, as seen below.
If there is more than one Fly-Through path in your project, you
can switch to any of them by using the path name pop-up list.
You can start a new collection of 3D projections by clicking the
New... button. In the Add New Path dialog box you can type a
name for the new path. The checkbox option lets you duplicate
the current set when you define a new one. This allows you to
keep an original while modifying a copy under a different name.

You can change the name of existing Fly-Through paths by


selecting it in the path list pop-up menu and clicking the Rename
button. Type the new name in the dialog box and click OK.
To delete the current set of projections, click the Delete button.
You will then be prompted to confirm this action. If you do, the
path name will be removed from the list and all the cameras it
contains will be deleted.
If there is a single path remaining, you cannot delete it.
The two numeric edit fields below the path name contain the
sequential number of the Camera inside the current path and the
number of time units (frames) during which the fly-through
motion will remain frozen at the given camera before moving on
to the next one.

You can navigate among the cameras of the current Fly-Through


path by using the arrows besie the Camera number.
Below these two fields, the Smooth Path at Cameras button
allows you to smooth the Bézier camera path at selected Cameras
on the floor plan. This will restore the tangent line defining the
path to its original condition if you have previously modified it.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


244
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Parameters
Using the six boxes in the middle section of the Camera Settings
dialog window you can enter parameter values numerically for
viewpoint height, viewing distance, view cone, azimuth, roll angle
and target height of the selected camera. Just below them, a
couple of further edit boxes allow you to define the sun angle’s
parameters.

See also setting cameras in the 3D Editing section of Chapter 3.


Path Options
A button at the bottom of the Camera Settings dialog box allows
you to open the Path Options dialog box and set a number of
parameters and options. You can define or modify the name of the
current Path, set Motion Controls and Display Options for it, and
choose a pen for showing the path on the floor plan.

Motion Controls
The two Camera Motion Controls define the shape of the camera
path during the Fly-Through animation as follows:

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


245
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

- Choose either Bézier or Polygon to control the method used


to create the path of the Camera. Bézier produces a very
smooth camera movement, while Polygon paths are
somewhat jumpier.
- Open or closed Camera motion controls whether a path will
be completed (closed) from the last defined keyframe back to
the first keyframe in the Path List.
The Target Motion Control defines the target point path shape
during the Fly-Through animation.
- If you choose Polygon, the target points of the in-between
frames will be placed on the straight line that connects two
consecutive target points. Choosing Smooth will make the
path of the target points rounded, but it will always include
the originally set target points in the keyframes. (Smooth is
available only if you have specified Bézier for the camera
motion.)
Hint: Use Polygon target motion if your camera moves a lot
but the target stands stills or moves just a little. This is the case
when you fly around a building but keep the same spot in
sight. In other cases, try both methods to see which one suits
you better.
The following two pictures show you examples of different
Motion Control settings:

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


246
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Motion Resolution
Each 3D Projection you add to the path is considered a keyframe.
ArchiCAD can interpolate between keyframes to create In-
between views which produce a smoother animation.
Increasing the number of In-between frames increases the
smoothness of the apparent motion in the fly-through, but these
additional images require more time to create and more disk
capacity to store.
Display Options
In the Display Options pop-up menu you can select from among
four choices which aspects of the current Path you want to see on
the floor plan.
The Cameras and All radio buttons allow you to specify a range
of keyframe numbers to be displayed, or indicate that all the
frames in the Projection path should be displayed. This setting will
be used as a default in the Create Fly-Through dialog box, so that
only the visible part of the path will be processed.
You can also specify the Pencolor used for displaying the path on
the floor plan.
Sun Options
The Sun dialog box can be opened by clicking this button at the
bottom of the Camera Settings dialog box. For more on these
options, read the Create Sun Study command description (Image
menu) in Chapter 5.
Pens
You can a choose a pencolor for the camera in the bottom right
section of the Camera Settings dialog box.
To modify the color of the path, use the Path… button to go to the
Path Options dialog box.
Applying Camera Settings
To apply the settings made both to the Camera and the Path, click
the Apply button bottom right of the dialog box. You don’t need to
close the dialog box to see your changes appear.

Checking the View of the Camera in 3D


To apply the view defined by a camera on the 3D model, select
the camera and activate the 3D Window.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


247
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Note: If multiple cameras are selected, the active one will be


applied.
Once applied to the 3D Window, the parameters of the
perspective defined by the camera will be copied into the 3D
Projection Settings dialog box. However, modifying the view there
will be effective in the 3D Window only and will not modify the
camera on the Floor Plan. To change the camera, you must edit it
on the Floor Plan and activate the 3D Window again when
finished.
Defining perspectives in the 3D Projection Settings is useful for:
- quickly switching to a perspective without having to change
windows, or
- showing library parts in perspective (you cannot define
cameras when working with a Library Part).
See also…
The 3D Projection Settings command under Image in Chapter 5.

Camera Techniques
Once selected, a camera can be manipulated with most Edit
commands. The edited camera(s) will be made part of the current
Fly-Through path.
If the Camera tool is selected in the Toolbox you can reposition
any selection node to change the camera’s 2D position. To change
the curvature and tangent of the path, move the endpoints of the
arrow.
Note: This applies only to Bézier type paths. If the path is not
visible, activate it in the Path options… dialog box.

VR Objects
ArchiCAD allows you to create navigable objects taking advantage
of Apple’s QTVR technology. You define a spherical path for the
camera along which sphere or part of a sphere the viewpoint can
optionally be positioned and navigated. The navigable object can
be viewed in Apple’s QTVR Player application.
Note: RealVR technology can only create VR Scenes, not VR
Objects.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


248
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Defining a VR Object
First, select VR Object among the Camera Type tabs or in the Info
Box.
With a single click on the floor plan you can place a VR Object
camera with default parameters. Further clicks on the floor plan
will not create new cameras, you can only have one camera active
at a time.
If the corresponding extensions are properly located in the
ArchiCAD Add-Ons folder, you can generate the VR Object movie
using the Create VR Object ... command in the Image menu.
See also...
The Create VR Object ... command (Image menu) in Chapter 5.

VR Object Settings

Most of the controls of the dialog box are the same as for simple
Cameras. Only differences and specific settings will be discussed
here.
Below the New, Rename and Delete buttons, you can find a pop-
up list containing the names of available VR Objects. Each new
project has a default VR Object named 01 Untitled Object whose
name will be used for the first camera you place.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


249
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Parameters
Using the edit boxes in the middle section of the Camera/VR
Settings dialog box, you can enter parameter values numerically
for object radius, center height, view cone, number of parallels
and meridians, start and end angles of default or selected VR
Objects.

The more parallels and meridians you define for the object, the
higher the resolution will be.
With the Lowest View and Highest View values you can define a
full sphere, a hemisphere or a particular section of a sphere for
navigation.
Checking the Sun Moves with Viewer checkbox will always define
the Sun’s position relative to the current viewpoint.
See also…
The Create Sun-Study command (Image menu) in Chapter 5 for
more information about the Sun subdialog box.
View Direction
A couple of radio buttons near the bottom of the dialog box allow
you to define whether the viewing direction will point to or away
from the center of the object.

VR Object Techniques
Once selected, the object can be manipulated using the cursor or
the Drag, Mirror or Rotate commands in the Edit menu. If the
Camera tool is active, you can reposition any of the selection
nodes to change the object’s 2D position. The sun and the camera
can be repositioned by their respective selection nodes.
There is a view cone displayed at one of the object’s nodes. If you
activate the 3D Window with the object selected, ArchiCAD will
create a 3D projection using this view cone. To modify the
location of the view cone, select it, drag its node, and position it
onto another node of the object.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


250
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

VR Scenes
With ArchiCAD you can create navigable panoramic scenes using
the QTVR or RealVR technology. You define one or a series of
cylindrical panoramas to be viewed in the corresponding player
application.
When VR Scene is selected either with the Camera Type tab ob top
of the Camera Settings dialog box or through the Info Box, the
window’s content changes as shown below.

Placing a Panoramic Camera


The first click on the floor plan places a panoramic camera with
default parameters. You draw a rubberband line, and the second
click defines the view direction. (In the VR Scene this camera will
define your starting position and view direction.) When the
operation is completed, the name of the panorama and the sun
icon appears with default settings.
If you don’t add more cameras to the current scene, you can
generate a single node QTVR Scene.
The view direction and the sun position can be changed by
moving their nodes with the checkmark cursor while the Camera
tool is selected.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


251
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Defining VR Scenes
Placing several panoramic cameras defines a multi-node VR Scene.
One of the cameras will be active at a time. This is the only camera
displayed with its sun marker. The active camera is always the one
which was last placed, unless you select another one. Each
panoramic camera is assigned the name Panorama-x (x is the
camera’s sequence number) by default. The name can be changed
in the Panorama name edit box in the middle section of the
Camera Settings dialog window.

Each position has to be connected to at least one other, otherwise


a warning will prompt you to do so when you try to generate the
VR Scene using the Create VR Scene ... command in the Image
menu. The connections will define how you can change your
position in the final VR Scene.
The connecting line between two positions can be drawn when
you place a panoramic camera or after some unconnected cameras
have already been placed. To place a new camera connected to
another one, always start drawing it by clicking the center node of
the camera you want it to be connected to. The second click will
define the position of the new panoramic camera. With simple
clicks on the floor plan you can place freestanding cameras. To
make a connection between any two unconnected cameras simply
click on the center nodes with the checkmark cursor. Any camera
can be connected to any number of other existing cameras within
the VR Scene.
You can break a connection line by pulling its center node
(defined by a circle) with the checkmark cursor while the Camera
tool is active. With the break you can define a connection that
makes sense between two positions on opposite sides of a wall,
for instance. Instead of jumping through the wall, you can get to
the next position through a door, without having to place an extra
camera at the opening.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


252
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

Any connection can be cleared by selecting it by its center node


and deleting it.

Creating VR Scenes
If the appropriate VR extensions are properly installed, you can
generate the VR Scene by using the Create VR Scene… command
in the Image menu. See that command’s description in Chapter 5.

VR Scene Settings
Most of the controls available are the same as for other camera
types. Only differences and specific settings are discussed here.
Only the current VR Scene is displayed on the Floor Plan. Its name
appears in the Scene List pop-up menu below the three control
buttons.
Parameters
You can use the edit box to enter parameter values numerically for
the viewpoint height of the selected camera.

VR Scene Techniques
Once selected, a panoramic camera can be manipulated using the
cursor or most of the Edit menu commands. If the Arrow tool is
active, you can reposition any of the selection nodes to change the
camera’s 2D position. If the Camera tool is active, you can also
change the sun’s position by pulling its node with the Checkmark
cursor.
To define another node as the initial node, just select it (with the
Camera tool active) and drag the circle representing the starting
position on top of another node’s centerpoint.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


253
Chapter 4: The ArchiCAD Tools

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


254
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Chapter 5
The Menu Commands
This chapter reviews all of the commands available through the
ArchiCAD menubar. Each pull-down menu is presented in a
separate section. Within each section, the commands on a pull-
down menu are examined top to bottom, with text and
illustrations describing the capabilities of the individual
command.

The File Menu


The File menu provides access to commands which affect the
global properties of the ArchiCAD environment. File menu
commands are used to:
- Open, close and save all facets of a Project,
- Manage library items,
- Set up printer, plotter and digitizer options,
- Plot & print the documents.
The File menu commands are discussed in the sections that follow.

New
Choosing the New command replaces the currently displayed
project. The new project (named Untitled), adopts the
environment of the previous one, with the active library, default
parameters, grid, etc.
As ArchiCAD keeps only one project open at a time, the current
project will be closed. If you have any modifications not yet saved,
you will be warned to save them.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


255
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

New and Reset


Holding down the Option key (Macintosh) or the Alt key
(Windows) while choosing the New command displays the
alternate New and Reset command. This command opens a new
Project and resets the default settings for all tools and dialog boxes
to the original factory presets (before any user customization of
the Preferences, etc.). This is helpful for anyone who needs to
make sure they are using the default settings. For example:
- Designers demonstrating projects to clients on unfamiliar
computers.
- Anyone opening a demonstration Project and needing to
quickly use the original defaults without quitting.

Open...
The Open command allows you to open existing documents of
the types recognized by ArchiCAD. The Directory dialog box
allows you to navigate in the file system and select the file you
want to open.
Note: The command is not available if any window of a
library part is active.
If the Show Preview checkbox is active, additional pieces of
information appear in the Directory dialog box, including the
Project Preview and the Sign In IDs (TeamWork only).

File Types in ArchiCAD


The following ArchiCAD file types can be opened by choosing the
Open command: Solo Project, Solo Project Archive, Draft, Draft
Archive.
A number of foreign files can also be opened in ArchiCAD
provided that the appropriate extensions have been properly
installed in the Add-Ons folder: AutoCAD DXF and DWG, as well
as Zoom and Wavefront files.
In addition,various types of picture files can be opened in
ArchiCAD as Model Pictures.
The various file types are described in detail below.
Important: Team Project files created by sharing a Solo
Project cannot be opened by choosing the Open… command.
You will have to choose TeamWork/Sign In to work on such
files.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


256
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Solo Project
Files opened with File/Open or created with File/New are Solo
Projects (*.PLN). Solo Projects can later be transformed into Team
Projects by sharing them in TeamWork-capable copies of
ArchiCAD.
This type of document is the main native document type of
ArchiCAD. It includes the model of the building as floor plan
drawings of all stories and all the 3D data belonging to them. This
format provides the elevations, sections and 3D visualizations.
Environment data like default settings, attributes and Library
references are also included.
When opening a Solo Project, all windows of the current project
will be closed, and you will be prompted to save any
modifications if necessary. When opening existing documents,
you must ensure that you still have the Library used when creating
the original plan. If your original library is not available, the
objects you used from it cannot be displayed: an alert appears
informing you that items are missing from the current library.
Activate the Missing Library Items window from the Window menu
to see which items are missing. You can print this window or save
it and then search for place them in the active library set.
To ensure that no items are missing and/or that your files can be
opened with all library parts present even on another computer
platform, save them in Archive format.
Archive File
Archive (*.pla) documents can be opened when the Solo Project
Archive format is selected in the Directory dialog box.
An Archive is similar to a simple Plan, but it includes not only
references to the library, but all the library parts and properties
used in the project.
When opening an Archive, a new library will be created from the
embedded library parts. You will see a new dialog box to name
the library that ArchiCAD creates for this type of document. This
library contains all the items saved with the Archive and it will be
your active library from then on.
When creating this library, ArchiCAD automatically converts
library parts into the format needed by the computer platform you
are working on (Macintosh or Windows).
See also…
The Save Special/Archive… command later.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


257
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Draft
In TeamWork-capable copies, if a Team Member signs in to the
Team Project, his or her own computer will load in a copy of the
project. He or she can then save this copy by choosing File/Save.
A Draft of the Team Project is then created, whose operation is
identical to Solo Projects, but still contains the signing in and
reservation details.
Draft files can be opened in copies of ArchiCAD lacking
TeamWork functionality by choosing File/Open but will be
transformed into plain Solo Projects when saved.
Draft Archive
In case of Off-Line work, it is important for the Team Members to
have at hand all of the Team Project Library Parts as well as the
properties when saving the Local Draft. In this case, the solution is
to save a Local Draft Archive.
AutoCAD DXF and Drawing Files
AutoCAD DXF (Drawing eXchange Format) and DWG files are
opened as 2D drawings from the Directory dialog box when
choosing this file type.
Note: These file formats are only available if the appropriate
extensions have been properly installed in the Add-Ons
folder.
Zoom (Macintosh only) and Wavefront Files
ArchiCAD supports the native file format of some popular
Macintosh programs used in architecture. The icons here will give
you access to Zoom and Wavefront files. The 3D models contained
by these files are interpreted as a set of lines (i.e., as a 2D drawing
only).
Note: These file formats are only available if the appropriate
extensions have been properly installed in the Add-Ons
folder.
Picture Files
A number of additional formats are available for opening through
the Directory dialog box. Unlike Project, Archive, DXF, DWG and
Zoom files, pictures are not opened as projects and they do not
replace the currently open file. They are displayed as Model
Pictures. Within their windows, you can select areas and copy
them to the Clipboard and then paste them either on the Floor
Plan or in a Section/Elevation window.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


258
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Available picture formats are: GIF, TIFF, PICT (Macintosh only),


Bitmap, JPEG & Metafile (Windows only).
See also…
The Merge command below.

Opening Files through a Network


If the file that you wish to open is already in use by someone else
on the local network, ArchiCAD will warn you about this and let
you know the name of the user, that is, the name defined in the
Sharing Setup Control Panel (Macintosh) or as the User Name
(Windows). In this case, you have the following choices:
- cancel opening the file;
- open the file as read-only;
- open the file with full access.

If you choose to open the file as read only, you will be able to see
and modify the whole file, but you can only save it under a
different name or into another location. If you try to overwrite the
original file, you will again be notified that it is in use and that you
cannot replace it with your modified project.
You can also choose to open the file with full access. However,
you should be very careful about using this option.
There are a number of reasons why ArchiCAD may state that a file
is in use although it actually isn't:
- The person who last used the file did not properly open and
close the file in ArchiCAD, e.g. because of a system crash.
- You have made a copy of a file that was in use at the moment,
and the copy of the file also includes the name of the person
who was using it during the copying operation.
Note: If you do open a file with full access while another
person is using it, you will both overwrite each other's work
without getting any further warning message from ArchiCAD.
Therefore, be extremely careful when opening a file with full
access in any case other than the emergencies mentioned
above.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


259
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Merge…
The Merge command allows you to paste the elements of another
Project, a Module or a picture file into either the current Project or
the currently open Section/Elevation window.

Merging another Project


Merging another project is a complex procedure since ArchiCAD
has to match the stories of the merged file to the current one.
When you merge a multistory building into your current plan,
ArchiCAD will ask you to define which story from the imported
file will match the story you are working on, and it will also
suggest a possible match. If you do not have enough stories in
your current plan to accommodate all the merged ones, ArchiCAD
will automatically create the missing stories.
Since attributes are identified by their names,
- If the name of the attribute is the same in the two Projects, the
merged elements will take the current project attributes.
- If the name of an attribute for the merged Project is missing
from the current one, its attribute set is appended to
accommodate the new names.
When merging a Project, you can drag, rotate and mirror it before
placing it to the final location.

Modules
A Module file (*.mod) is a set of ArchiCAD construction elements
that is merged with the current story of your project.
A Module document is an extension of the Clipboard concept.
Instead of copying elements in one project and pasting them into
another, you can use the Module format as a permanent holder of
copied elements.
Modules do not include any information about the story they came
from, so they can be inserted into any story of the current project.
Modules include attributes (layers, pen colors, fill patterns,
materials etc.). If merged, the elements will take the attributes from
the target project, referring to them by an internal index number. If
the source project and the target project carry the same attribute
sets, the module will look just like it did when it was saved in the
source project.
The elements of a Module will become independent of each other
after being placed.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


260
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The contents of the Module will be loaded into the Clipboard and
automatically pasted on the Floor Plan.
The elements will be surrounded by a dashed rectangle. Click
within the rectangle to move the elements to the desired position.
Click outside the rectangle on the worksheet or click OK in the
Control box to place the elements.
You can place the same elements repeatedly with the Paste
command.
See the Save as… command later in this chapter about the creation
of a Module.
Note: When merging a Module into a Section/Elevation
window, only 2D Elements will be pasted.

Merging Picture Files


Choosing the GIF, BMP, PICT, TIFF, WMF, EMF or JPEG file type
gives you access to documents created in a variety of program
types:
- drawing or painting programs;
- ArchiCAD’s own 3D views and elevations saved in picture
format;
- renderings which are saved only in picture format.
Opening these file types adds a new element to your current
document without replacing any existing drawing elements.
PICT/WMF documents created with a drawing program like
MacDraw are displayed in two formats based on your choice
when pasting them onto the Project.

When a PICT/WMF/EMF file is pasted as drawing elements, it is


represented in the form of separately editable ArchiCAD drawing
elements (lines, arcs, texts and fill patterns) which are scaled as set
in the Floor Plan Scale... dialog box (Options menu). For
example, a 10 cm long line of the PICT/WMF/EMF is interpreted as
10 m long by ArchiCAD’s world coordinates if the scale is set to
1:100).

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


261
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

When a PICT/WMF/EMF file is read as a single Figure, the


document is treated as a unified bitmap picture. It appears full size
on the screen (regardless of the ArchiCAD scale or zooming level).
It is selected by its corners, and will be subjected to all ArchiCAD
transformations as a single graphical unit.
Before choosing the Merge… command, you can define the size of
the figure on the worksheet in advance, by choosing the Marquee
tool and drawing a selection rectangle of the desired size and
position. The figure will fit into this rectangle.
Note: Be careful to draw the rectangle with the same
proportions as the original PICT/WMF/EMF figure or the
figure will be distorted.
When PICT/WMF/EMF files are opened in the Figure format, they
are assigned to a special Figures layer. Elements of a PICT/WMF/
EMF opened in the Drawing format are placed into the
appropriate tool’s default layer (i.e., lines to the Lines layer, arcs to
the Arc layer, etc.).
The Drawing format is recommended when importing
architectural drawings or symbols created by other PICT/WMF/
EMF compatible programs. The Figure format is normally used for
illustrations.

Close
This command has the same effect as clicking the Close Box in the
active window on the screen. When the Floor Plan window is
closed, an alert box is displayed prompting you to save changes
before closing.

Closing the Floor Plan window closes the entire document (but
Library Part windows will remain open). Closing any other
window will only close that particular window. The only
exception of the Library Part Master Window: closing it will cause
all other windows belonging to that library part to be closed.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


262
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Note for TeamWork users: If you have signed in to a Team


Project, made some changes to the loaded copy and then
chosen Close, you will be prompted to either sign out and
send your changes to the central project or to save them
locally by creating a Draft.

Save
Choosing the Save command saves the contents of the currently
active window.
If the document has been saved before or has been opened from
an existing file, the Save command saves all changes to that
document.
If the document is new (i.e. if you used the New command to
create it, or started the program directly from the ArchiCAD
program icon), choosing Save opens the same dialog box as the
Save as... command.
Note for TeamWork users: If you have signed in to a Team
Project, choosing the Save command prompts you to save a
simple Draft copy of the project, together with your sign in
options and reservation details. To save a Draft Archive,
including the Library Parts, you have to choose Save Special/
Archive.
Saving aTeam Project
In TeamWork-capable copies, the Administrator first saves the
Team Project by sharing it. Following that, the Team Project will be
saved every time a Team Member makes changes to it by signing
in and out, sending and receiving changes, modifying passwords,
etc.

Save As...
The Save as... command works similarly to the Save command,
except that it allows you to:
- save the project document under a new name, keeping the
new one open, or
- export the contents of different project windows in a variety of
file formats.
After you have chosen the command, select the file format you
want to save your document in.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


263
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

A wide variety of format options are offered for Projects and 3D


models, which differ slightly according to the platform you are
working on (Macintosh or Windows).

Saving Solo Projects and Drafts


When working on the Floor Plan, choosing Save as… allows you
to choose among a large number of options:
- Project file in ArchiCAD 6.0, 5.0 or 5.1 format, or in the special
Clipboard as Module format;
- PlotMaker or topCAD (MacOS only) drawing;
- 3D GDL file;
- picture in PICT (MacOS) or BMP format.
Further options may be available depending on the contents of the
Add-Ons folder (e.g. DXF, DWG, Aperture, etc.).

Saving the 3D Window Contents


When viewing the 3D Window, the following formats are always
available for saving the 3D image:
- picture file in PICT (MacOS), GIF, TIFF, JPEG, BMP, WMF and
EMF (Windows only) format;
- drawing file in 2D Elements, PlotMaker, topCAD (MacOS only)
format;
- ArchiCAD Library Part (MacOS)/Door, Window or Object
(Windows) format.
Moreover, a large number of other formats can be chosen
depending on the contents of the optional Add-Ons folder holding
the export filters for various modeling programs. The contents of
this folder (if any) may vary according to the country where you
purchased ArchiCAD.

Saving the Section/Elevation Window


When working in a Section/Elevation window, the Save as…
command allows you to choose among a number of options.
- The Project file in ArchiCAD 6.0, 5.0 or 5.1 format and the 3D
GDL options are the same as for the Floor Plan. Note that
when choosing either of these formats, the whole Project will
be saved.
All of the other available formats will only include the contents of
the currently active Section/Elevation window:
- Clipboard as Module;

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


264
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

- picture file in PICT (MacOS) or BMP format;


- drawing file in PlotMaker or topCAD (MacOS only).
The availability of further options including DXF and DWG
depends on the current contents of the Add-Ons folder.

Saving Model Pictures


Pictures created through ArchiCAD's photorendering feature can
be saved in PICT (MacOS), TIFF, GIF, JPEG and BMP formats.

Saving Calculations
Basic Component, Element and Zone Lists can be saved as Plain
Text, Tabulated Text or Spreadsheets, while formatted lists
optionally including graphic information can be saved in RTF
(Rich Text Format), ArchiCAD Project or PlotMaker drawing
format.

What's Saved in the Different File Formats?


The contents of the file saved from ArchiCAD depends on the
window type that was active and on the format chosen. In
addition to the basic information given here about the major file
formats, please refer to the ReadMe files provided for all of the
ArchiCAD export filters placed in the Add-Ons folder.
Project (*.pln)
The full contents of your Project are saved, including all the 3D
data and listing specification. This option is available only from the
Floor Plan and Section/Elevation windows. You can open the
resulting document by choosing the Solo Project format through
the Open… command and work on it as if your work had not
been interrupted.
Library Parts, including Property Objects needed for listing, are not
saved with the plan. They reside in the Library. In order to include
them, choose Save Special/Archive.
Neither are any photorendered images saved with the plan. They
have to be manually saved as separate documents.
Project in 5.0/5.1 format
When choosing one of these formats, elements and information
not supported by ArchiCAD 5.0/ArchiCAD for TeamWork (5.1 in
some countries) will be discarded. See the New Features in
ArchiCAD 6.0 section in Chapter 1 for the list of new element types
and features.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


265
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

PlotMaker Drawing File (*.pmk)


The visible layers of the active story or the current image in the 3D
window are stored in the form of 2D lines, arcs, text and fills for
PlotMaker, Graphisoft's dedicated program for arranging and
plotting files created by a variety of CAD programs.
Clipboard as Module (*.mod)
The ArchiCAD Module format saves the contents of the Clipboard
to a proprietary ArchiCAD format called Module. To use this
function, you must first copy the desired elements to the clipboard
using the Copy command. Complex parts of a design can be saved
this way and added to other Projects. Saving kitchen or bath
modules is one common use for this feature.
A module can be freely merged into any story of either the same or
another project.
Note: Elements copied from one project to another using this
method can take on different attributes with identical names in
the target project, which may cause them to look different in
the target location.

See the Module section in the Open… command description for


more information.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


266
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

You can store these modules in special folders, where they are
accessed using the Module format of the Merge... command.
Picture File Formats
The screen representation of both Projects and 3D views are
stored as 2D objects using a variety of picture file formats (PICT/
BMP/TIFF/GIF/JPEG). This is the only format in which you can
save the complete contents of shaded or rendered 3D
representations.
The Floor Plan is saved at the current scale as a drawing, including
lines, circles and other objects.
This format is read into ArchiCAD using the corresponding format
of the Open... command, but the resulting document cannot be
manipulated like an original ArchiCAD Project, since it is just a set
of pixels.
topCAD file (Macintosh only)
This option saves Projects or 3D representations in topCAD
format, and the resulting document can be imported into topCAD,
the powerful 2D technical drafting program also produced by
Graphisoft.
GDL File (*.gdl)
Choosing this file format allows your project to be saved as a GDL
script description. The Geometric Description Language (GDL)
provided with ArchiCAD is used to create or modify elements in
the ArchiCAD Library. It is only available when the Floor Plan
window is active.
The GDL option allows 3D models created in ArchiCAD to be
assigned to a Library part and used in other ArchiCAD plans as
objects.
The saved elements will be the same as those displayed in the 3D
Window. To control which elements to save, use selection, the
Marquee tool, and the Select Image Items command.
Note: For more information about the interpretation of GDL
coordinates for windows and doors, see the ArchiCAD Library
section in Chapter 6 and the Door and Window tools in
Chapter 4.
2D Elements (*.2dl)
Although 3D models are an end product of the program, you can
still modify or touch up selected 3D views (usually elevations and

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


267
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

sections) if you save the model as 2D elements. This will allow


you to work with real working drawings with annotations,
dimensions and other 2D features.
This option creates a stand-alone document, containing lines and
fills, to be edited as an ArchiCAD Floor Plan drawing.
The 2D Elements format is only available when the 3D model
window is active. 2D Elements files can be opened using the
Project file format of the Open… command. Once opened, the 2D
view can be dimensioned and touched up with fill polygons.
Library Part (Macintosh)/Window File, Door File,
Object File (Windows)
These formats allow you to save Library Parts in three different
formats. They can be selected only when the 3D Window is active.
You can choose here between two options: saving the Library Part
description as editable GDL Text or as a coded Binary 3D
description.

You are also offered the option of removing the redundant lines in
the resulting file. Checking this option will remove all overlapping
lines before saving the file.
Warning: In some cases this option may take very long and
consume a lot of memory.

Save Special
This hierarchical menu contains a number of options for saving
your working environment.

Archive…
ArchiCAD Projects may refer to a number of items called Library
Parts, stored as outside files in Library folders or directories. You
need to designate one or more active Libraries when starting a
project. If you then open the project in another environment (for
example on a different computer), these outside files may be
missing.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


268
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

If you want to ensure that all files referenced in the Project are
included, you should use the Save Special/Archive… command.
Documents saved as Archives are stored together with all the
Library parts and properties contained by and defined with the
Project.
Further options allow you to include in the Archive the
Background picture and the linked texture files for photorealistic
rendering, and to save any picture files in a format available only
on either the Macintosh or Windows-based PCs in a format (TIFF)
that can be read by both platforms.
A further checkbox allows you to include in the Archive all items
of the currently active libraries, even those that have no instances
placed on the Floor Plan.

Note: Under Windows, files saved in the Archive format are


normally named using the .pla file extension, which is
automatically appended.
When you open an Archive type document using the Project
format in the Open dialog box, a new Library is automatically
created, which you can rename. This Library contains all the items
and properties used with the Project, but none other. Since it
automatically becomes your active Library, you will have to search
for new items from outside libraries (when needed).
Because of the larger volume of information it stores, an Archive
file is somewhat larger than the corresponding project document.
The Archive format is normally used for long term archival storage
of completed projects. Archives are also used to exchange projects
without data loss.
Warning: If any Library Part of your Project is missing from
the current Library when you save the Project as an Archive, it
will not be included in the Archive document either.
Important: Saving a Project as an Archive makes it possible
to include all information needed to recreate it in another
environment, with one exception. Archives cannot store the
descriptions of fonts used in the Project. This means that if you

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


269
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

wish to display textual information the same way as it appears


in the original environment, you have to install the
appropriate fonts.

Hot Links…
Whenever you save from ArchiCAD a file in PlotMaker format and
place that file into a PlotMaker Layout through the Add Drawing…
command, a direct connection is created between the saved file
and the Layout.

Hot Links help you to further improve this connection and give
you the possibility of updating several files simultaneously.
When choosing Save Special/Hot Links, ArchiCAD prepares and
displays a list of files saved in PlotMaker format from the current
Project's Floor Plan or Section/Elevation windows, containing the
name and destination of the files, as well as the name (if any) of
the layer combination that was active when saving.
By clicking the Save button, the current contents of all listed
windows will be saved again using the same files names, layer
combinations and drawings scales as previously.
By selecting items in the list, you can also delete or update them
individually with the Save button.
Note: Before saving Hot Links, remember to refresh your
Section/Elevation windows in order to save the latest changes.
ArchiCAD Object
Choosing this command saves the Floor plan - or the selected part
of it - into the 2D and 3D Script sections of a new ArchiCAD
Library Part.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


270
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Note: The generated Library Part can be transformed into a


smaller and faster binary element containing binary
information only:
1) Open the Library Part.
2) Choose the 2D Full View window.
3) Choose Select All, and then Copy.
3) Go the 2D Symbol window, and choose Paste.
4) Go to the 2D Script window, choose Select All, and delete the
script.
5) Go to the 3D View to generate the model of the Library Part.
6) Go to the Library Part's Master Window and choose Save as…
7) In the appearing dialog box, check the "In binary format"
checkbox and click Save.
PlanDump
Choosing this command creates a file with a proprietary ASCII
description of the current floor plan. This ASCII output is created
for special post-processing of the ArchiCAD project.

The three checkboxes allow you to customize the output by


selecting the features to save.

Project Info…
Choosing this command displays editable information about the
currently open Project.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


271
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

New Library Part


Choosing an element from this hierarchical menu allows you to
create a new library part.
See also…
The ArchiCAD Library section in Chapter 6.

Open Library Part…


Choosing this command allows you to open an existing library
part for editing. A Directory dialog box appears, including two
pop-up menus with the available file format and opening options.
Note: If you choose Open Library Part... when a single Library
Part is selected in your project, the command will
automatically open the Master Window for that item.
See also…
The complete description of the Open Library command is given
in the ArchiCAD Library section in Chapter 6.

Load Libraries…
Choosing the Load Libraries… command opens a dialog box from
which you can specify Library folders/directories. These folders/
directories are accessed as active Libraries.

Note: The left part of the Load Libraries dialog box is similar to the
Directory dialog box. The major difference is that you choose one
or more Libraries rather than individual documents. To open a
highlighted folder/directory, double-click on its name or click the

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


272
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Open button (Macintosh). To add a folder/directory to the Active


Libraries list on the right side of the dialog box, highlight its name
and click on the Add button, or drag and drop it onto the Active
Libraries area (Windows 95). The name of the folder/directory will
immediately appear in the Active Libraries list.
If you highlight the name of a folder/directory in the Active
Libraries list, you will find the directory path to the highlighted
folder/directory right below the Active Libraries list.
You can remove the highlighted folder/directory from the Active
Libraries list by clicking the Remove button, or by just dragging it
out of the Active Library list (Windows 95).
You can leave the dialog box without making any changes by
clicking the Cancel button. If you want change to take effect, click
the Done button. When you click Done, ArchiCAD will load the
contents of the Active Libraries. A status box will then appear in
the upper right corner of the screen to inform you about the
loading process. By clicking Stop, you can abort loading the
libraries.
If a Project is already on the screen, the original doors, windows
and objects are substituted with items with identical names in the
new Library set. Items which have no namesakes in the new
Library set will not be displayed on the Project.
After you specify a new Library set, a window will appear
including a printable list of items in your project that are missing
from the new Library set (if any).
Note: In TeamWork-capable copies, it is only the Team Leader
with exclusive access who can define the libraries to be
loaded for the Team Project. Teammates can load other
libraries, but only for their own local use.
See also…
The ArchiCAD Library section in Chapter 6.

Digitizer Setup…
After a standard ArchiCAD installation including the Digitware
folder, you will have access to the most commonly used digitizers.
Using a digitizer, you can transfer coordinates quickly and
efficiently from a hard copy to the ArchiCAD Project.
Choosing the Digitizer Setup command displays the Digitizer
Setup dialog box. The controls available in the Digitizer Setup
dialog box are discussed in the following sections.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


273
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Drawing Scale
When the paper drawing to be digitized is absolutely precise (i.e.,
not distorted by a change in humidity or other factor) and is set to
a standard scale, use the Drawing Scale edit box to adjust the
digitizer scale.

Set Distance
Use the Set Distance button to set the scale when the drawing to
be digitized is not of a standard scale, or the paper is distorted for
some reason.
A dialog box appears where you can set the real distance between
two digitizer puck clicks on the paper document.

Note: Before using the Set Distance function, set the Drawing
Scale to 1. If you neglect this step, the digitizer scale will be
improperly set.

Set Origin
This control defines the origin for digitizer input. After clicking the
Set Origin button, click with the digitizer puck on your drawing
paper at the location you want the counterpart of the ArchiCAD
worksheet origin to be set.

Set Azimuth
The Set Azimuth button allows you to define the direction of the
x–axis on the drawing paper. When you choose the command, the
program waits for a digitizer puck click. The line connecting this
point with the previously defined origin corresponds to the
horizontal orientation of the ArchiCAD worksheet.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


274
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Note: The three buttons above are only active if the Digitizer is on.
See the Turn Digitizer On/Off command below.

Graphisoft Driver/Manufacturer’s Driver


On the Macintosh, you can opt to choose the drivers supplied by
the digitizer’s manufacturer instead of the ones supplied by
Graphisoft. You can set them up in the Control Panel connected
either to the serial or to the ADB port.

Configure
At the top of the dialog box you will see the name of the currently
selected digitizer. The Configure function is only available when
the Digitizer is off. See the Turn Digitizer On/Off command below.

The two pop-up menus or combo boxes at the top of the dialog
box allow you to choose the driver for your digitizer by selecting
both the vendor and the type of your digitizer.

Connection Port
This control allows you to define the port which your digitizer is
connected to.
Once you have selected a digitizer, you can set communications
parameters for the digitizer: Baud rate, Data bits, Stop bits,
Parity and Report format. A picture of the current DIP switch
settings for many of the popular digitizers is displayed to assist you
in setting up your digitizer. Refer to your digitizer manual for more
details.
The contents of the driver list depends on the digitizer drivers you
have placed on your computer.
- On the Macintosh, the digitizers drivers must be placed in the
Digitware folder of the Graphisoft folder which can be found
either in the System Folder or in the same folder as ArchiCAD.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


275
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

- For Windows, the digitizer drivers can be found in the


Digitware directory which must be placed either in the same
directory as ArchiCAD, or in the directory pointed to by the
"Graphisoft Shared Folder" Windows Registry item.

Turn Digitizer On/Off


Choosing the Turn Digitizer On/Off command allows you to avoid
inadvertent interference with your digitizer. Use this command to
switch the digitizer on when starting digitizer input and off when
you are finished. The mouse and digitizer can be used together.
The device you move will take the lead and drive the cursor.

Plot Setup…
Choosing the Plot Setup… command enables you to specify the
plotter driver, paper size and other characteristics of your plotter
output. The following sections describe the plotter setup
commands in detail.

Selecting a Plotter
The manufacturer's name and the type of the currently selected
plotter are displayed in the two pop-up menus (combo boxes) at
the top of the dialog box. To change brand names or plotter types,
use these two menus.
The contents of the plotter list depends upon the plotter drivers
you have placed on your computer.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


276
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

- On the Macintosh, the plotter drivers must be placed in the


Plotware folder of the Graphisoft folder which can be found
either in the System Folder or in the same folder as ArchiCAD.
- For Windows, the plotter drivers can be found in the Plotware
directory which must be placed either in the same directory as
ArchiCAD, or in the directory pointed to by the "Graphisoft
Shared Folder" Windows Registry item.
PCI Settings
When choosing a CalComp or Versatec driver, a new button will
become available in the Plot Setup dialog box with which you can
reach the PCI Settings dialog box. These settings are special
features of the CalComp standard language. You should set these
settings to match those of your plotter.
When using the CalComp TechJet series, you will not see the PCI
Settings button, as these drivers use the HPGL language for
communicating with the plotter.
Note: Those users who also use these plotters to plot from
AutoCAD will probably find that the PCI settings of their
plotters are different from the default settings in this dialog
box. For best results, the settings in the dialog box should be
changed to match those of the plotter.
Plotter Model Not Listed
If the manufacturer of your plotter is listed but that particular
model is missing, browse through the other models and select one
with a similar paper size (e.g. E size). If there are more models
with these criteria, experiment with all of them. In this case,
choose the Handshake: Hardware setting only!
Note: Some OCÉ and all Schlumberger models are listed in the
pop-up menu as Benson.
Plotter Manufacturer Not Listed
If the manufacturer is not listed with any model, check the user
manual of the plotter for compatibility and emulation modes. If the
plotter accepts HPGL, HPGL-2, DMPL, BGL or PCI data, there is a
good chance of making it work.
Configure the plotter to one of the graphic languages shown in the
following table (the order of the list below is important. We
recommend using the earliest applicable language for your
plotter):

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


277
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Language Driver
HPGL-2 and RTL (raster plotters) HP DesignJet 750C
(Hewlett-Packard standard)
HPGL-2 (pen plotters) HP DraftPro Plus
(Hewlett-Packard standard)
HPGL Generic HPGL
(Hewlett-Packard standard) (plotter origin: bottom
left)
HP 7885A DraftMaster I
(plotter origin: center)
DMPL DMP 62
(Houston standard)
BGL (Benson/Schlumberger/OCÉ) Benson 18xx series
Benson 1645-R
PCI (pen plotters) 1023
PCI (electrostatic plotters) 5855
(CalComp standard)

In these cases, choose the Handshake: Hardware setting.

Configuring the Plotter


In the lower part of dialog box, you can modify the characteristics
of the plotter you have chosen.
In the Paper area, you can choose a paper size for your plotter.
Invalid paper sizes appear grayed in the menu and are not
selectable. The controls below allow you choose the orientation of
the output.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


278
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Connection
You can specify in this area the connection type you intend to use
with your plotter. The connection options are rather different on
the Macintosh and under Windows, so they will be discussed in
separate sections.
Connection Options (MacOS)
This pop-up menu appears in the MacOS version. The content of
the pop-up depends on the kind of CTB connection tool that has
been installed on your computer.
Standard connection methods:
- Modem Port
- Printer Port
Some of the plotters support only serial connections. In this case,
you have to choose one of these two serial connection ports.
- AppleTalk
To use the standard AppleTalk connection method, Open
Transport (part of the MacOS from System 7.5.2) must be installed
on your system, and your plotter should support the AppleTalk
network protocol.
- Optional communication methods
You can use special 3rd party CTB communication tools with
ArchiCAD and PlotMaker, e.g.:
AppleTalk Printer Tool: To use this third party tool, you need to
install the AppleTalk Printer Tool software from Microspot, and
your plotter should support the AppleTalk network protocol.
TCP/IP CTB tools: To use these tools you need to install MacTCP
and a third party TCP/IP CTB tool (e.g. Outland TCP, TCPack), and
your plotter should support the TCP/IP network protocol.
Note: If your plotter supports any of these network
communication methods, use this rather than any of the much
slower serial connections. We suggest to use AppleTalk
whenever possible. If you can only use a serial connection
with your plotter, set the baud rate to the highest available.
Connection Options (Windows)
This pop-up menu appears in the Windows version. The content
of the pop-up depends on what ports are present on your
computer.
- COM1, COM2...

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


279
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

These options enable you to connect your plotter to a serial port.


- LPT1, LPT2...
These options enable you to connect your plotter to a parallel
port.
- Network
This option enables you to plot on a network plotter, using the
Windows Print Manager.
Note: If your plotter supports parallel plotting, use the parallel
option rather than the much slower serial one.
Connection Setup
By clicking the Setup button below the pop-up menu, you can
access the communication settings in both the Macintosh and
Windows version of the program.
When using a serial connection, these parameters will determine
the speed and other characteristics of communication between
your computer and the plotter. Set these values to match the
settings of your plotter. See your plotter manual for more
information.

If you are using an AppleTalk connection (Macintosh), choose the


zone the plotter is in, and the select the plotter.
If using a CTB tool (Macintosh), you can access specific settings in
their own dialog boxes.
If you have chosen a parallel connection (Windows), you don’t
need to make any settings.
To plot via the Windows Print Manager, you need to install a
printer driver in the Print Manager and assign the communication
port the plotter is connected to. You can select the plotter’s driver,
but you can also use any other driver, since the driver is only used
for enabling Windows to send the data to the plotter. Choose this
driver in the Connection Setup dialog box. This way, you can
either plot to a plotter directly connected to your computer, to a

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


280
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

shared plotter connected to another computer or to a networked


plotter.

DIP Switches
For some plotters, a picture of the DIP switches is displayed to
indicate the current settings.

Spool Folder
In this part of the Plot Setup dialog box, you can define a Folder
for spooling files to be plotted either from your own computer or
anywhere on the network. For details, see the description of the
Plot… command below.

Font Usage
Under the name of the selected plotter, the Font Plotting… button
gives you access to a dialog box where you can define the way
your text blocks will be plotted:

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


281
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The dialog box contains the list of all the fonts placed in the Fonts
folder (Macintosh) or of the system's TrueType fonts (Windows).
Note: ArchiCAD for Windows can only use TrueType fonts.
Bitmap and PostScript fonts are not supported.
The fonts you currently use on your Floor Plan are shown outlined
(Macintosh) or in italics (Windows) in the list.
You can either choose the optimal settings for the given plotter, or
manually override them.
Three are three ways to plot a font type:
- Substitute it with the plotter’s built-in font. This is the fastest
way to plot texts.
- Use the vector fonts contained in the Vector Fonts folder,
placed either in the same folder as ArchiCAD or in the
Graphisoft folder inside the System Folder (Macintosh), or in
the directory pointed to by the "Graphisoft Shared Folder"
Windows Registry item. The vector fonts are a good
compromise between fast output and high quality plots.
- Use bitmap (Macintosh only), TrueType and PostScript fonts
generates the highest quality plotted output.
To change the substitution, select one or more system fonts in the
list, click the Manual Setting button and choose a plot mode from
the first pop-up menu on the list.
- If you choose Plotter, no further options are available.
- If you choose Vector, you can choose a vector font from a
second menu.
- If you choose Bitmap (Macintosh only), you can switch
bitmap smoothing on and off.
- If you choose TrueType or PostScript (Macintosh only), you
can set a limit for the font size to be filled on the output. Font
sizes below the limit will be plotted as outlines only (to save
plotting time and ink).
Notes: TrueType, PostScript and Bitmap are alternatives, only
one of them is available for each font. PostScript fonts can
only be plotted if Adobe Type Manager is set up and running
on your Macintosh. The three buttons at the bottom of the
dialog box allow you to automatically set one of the three
possible options for each font.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


282
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Plot…
When you choose the Plot… command, the Plotters dialog box is
displayed with information on the plotted output’s layout and
scale.

In the upper part of the dialog box, you can choose to either send
the plotter output to the selected plotter through the transmission
port, direct it to a Plot (Data) file or write it into the Spool Folder
you specified beforehand in the Plot Setup dialog box.
You can designate files to be plotted later by plotting them in the
background. You can also send files to a plotter bureau on a disk
or through a modem.
The radio buttons in the middle of the dialog box allow you to
control the plotting process.
- Plot with…: All pen slots uses different plotter pens for the
different logical pens defined for your construction elements,
while Slot 1 only plots all the elements with a single plotter
pen (or in black when using raster plotters).
- Text & Markers: Fix Size will plot all the text blocks and
markers at their exact size in the current paper units regardless
of the plotting scale. Resize to Plotting Scale outputs text
blocks and markers in proportion to the size of other elements
according to the plotting scale. If this button is selected,
plotting at a scale other than the drawing scale will result in
enlargement/reduction as in photography.
- Plot Grid: This option allows you to include the construction
grid on the plotted output and to choose a pencolor for the
grid.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


283
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The lower part of the dialog box affects the way the plotted output
is sized to the paper.
You can resize your drawing by setting a different scale in the
Plotting Scale edit box.
The Sheet Layout area shows you how the drawing will look on
paper.
See also…
Scale and Output in Chapter 2 and the discussion of Text Size for
the Print command.

Plotting through a Spool Folder


Plotting through a specified Spool Folder is a very useful way of
network plotting. Start the PlotFlow application (included in the
ArchiCAD package) first and then specify the plotter to which you
want to plot your files. You also have to specify the Spool Folder
from which PlotFlow picks the files for plotting. This Spool Folder
must be the same as the one you designated as the Spool Folder in
the Plot Setup dialog box of ArchiCAD. Whenever you send a file
to the Spool Folder from ArchiCAD, it will automatically be plotted
from the Spool Folder by PlotFlow.
The Spool Folder does not necessarily have to be placed on the
same computer as the one on which PlotFlow is running: you can
run ArchiCAD, place the Spool Folder, and run PlotFlow on
different computers on the network if you wish.
Using a Spool Folder effectively solves the problem of plotting
from a mixed network including both PCs and Macs. You can
place the Spool Folder on a Windows NT server that can be read
from both Macs and Windows-based machines.
See also…
The ReadMe file of PlotFlow for the latest information about Spool
Folder plotting.

PlotMaker
Although ArchiCAD directly supports high quality plotter output,
Graphisoft recommends the use of PlotMaker for final layouts.
PlotMaker is a utility program developed to facilitate sophisticated
plotter output. The program allows you to arrange different
drawings (plans, elevations, sections, perspectives, etc.) on the
same sheet, aligning them precisely to each other. You can also

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


284
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

isolate and enlarge details, using different scales on the same


sheet.
PlotMaker offers attractive features for heading and framing the
drawing, allowing you to use your company header, and
providing an extensive variety of drawing features for putting the
final touch on the documents.
See also…
For more information, refer to the PlotMaker Reference Guide.

Page Setup…
The Page Setup… command enables you to set the page size,
orientation, and other features of printed documents. The effect of
the command depends on the printer driver selected in the
Chooser (Macintosh) or in the Printers Control Panel (Windows)
See also…
For further information on this feature, refer to your Macintosh,
Windows or printer manuals.

Print…
Use the Print… command to print your Project. The printer should
be selected in advance, using the Chooser (Macintosh) or the
Printers Control Panel (Windows).
When you choose this command, the Print dialog box is displayed,
allowing you to set the printing parameters. The upper half of the
dialog box provides the normal print settings, copies, page range
etc. The lower half displays parameters that are unique to
ArchiCAD.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


285
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Print View & Grids


You can choose to print the entire drawing or only the current
view on your worksheet by clicking the appropriate button. You
can also determine whether or not the ArchiCAD grid lines are
printed.
See also...
Refer to the Fixed Size vs. Scaled Elements section in Chapter 2,
and to the discussion of the Text Size radio buttons in this dialog
box.

Printing Scale
By default, output scale is calculated according to the page size
and orientation established in the Page Setup dialog box. This
results in your document filling up as much of the page as
possible.
You can reset the printing scale using the Printing Scale edit box.
The Sheets to Print window provides a preview of the number of
sheets needed to print your Project, and shows how the images
are tiled if multiple sheets are necessary.

Text Size
The Fix Text Size and Size Text to Scale options offer important
choices if you want optimum Text scaling when printing or
plotting.
These options also affect the output characteristics of other
elements such as arrowheads, scale-independent dashed line
types and fill patterns. These options include:
- Fix Text Size - Outputs text at its exact size in the current
Paper units (inches or millimeters). To keep text at exactly the
same size even when the printed size of the project changes,
choose this option. This is acceptable for enlargements but
can produce unwanted effects with reductions. Text may
overprint other elements as they shrink.
- Size Text to Scale - Outputs text in proportion to the size of
other elements. This method is good for enlargement of a
project for a presentation to be seen from a distance. It

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


286
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

functions like the Enlarge/Reduce options in the Page Setup


dialog box.

Recent Documents
This menu item lists the last opened documents for easier access.

Quit
Choosing the Quit command closes all ArchiCAD windows and
exits the program. The command can be chosen from any display
mode and a warning message is displayed prompting you to save
changes before quitting.
Note: Each time you quit ArchiCAD, all the current
preferences and settings will be saved in the ArchiCAD
Preferences file.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


287
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The Edit Menu


In addition to the standard editing commands (such as Undo/
Redo, Cut, Copy, Paste and Clear), ArchiCAD's Edit menu contains
basic and more sophisticated transformation commands as well as
a large number of options for editing text windows.
The Edit menu is available for all edit window types (Floor Plan,
3D Window, Sections/Elevations, Scripts), but its actual contents
changes according to the type of window you are currently
viewing.
In the first part of the Edit menu discussion basic menu items are
presented, followed by the commands available in drafting
windows. Finally, commands specific to text-type windows are
reviewed.
Note: On the Floor Plan, when clicking an element with the
right mouse button (Windows) or while holding down the
Control key on the keyboard (Macintosh), a local menu
appears, housing most of the Edit commands. You can use this
shortcut to quickly edit selected elements.

Undo/Redo
The Undo and Redo commands allow you to undo (revert to a
previous step) and redo a large number of construction
operations. The name of the command to be undone is displayed
in the menu along with the Undo or Redo command. This
capability also allows you to test tentative solutions by trying them
out until you arrive at the desired result.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


288
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The number of steps which can be undone and redone (from 1 to


99) is set using in the Preferences/Data Safety dialog box in the
Options menu. The default value is 20. After redoing a series of
steps, Undo will only be available when you complete a new
undoable action.
In text type windows, only the last editing step can be undone/
redone.
Note: Each time you save the project, your previously
available Undo steps will be cleared. You do not need to save
repeatedly in order to survive a system crash as in many other
applications, since ArchiCAD’s Autosave will save your project
in case of a crash.
Autosave does not clear the undoable steps.
See also…
Autosave in Options/Preferences later in this chapter.

Repeat (Last Command Name)


Repeats the last editing command, except: Undo, Redo, Repeat,
Clear, Select All and Find & Select.

Cut
The Cut command removes selected elements from a project and
places them on the Clipboard for future use via the Paste
command. It can also be used for dialog box or coordinate box
numeric field contents. Cut can be used in construction or text
editing modes.
The part of the drawing to be cut is determined by the selection
you have made.
Note: The Cut command is not available in the 3D Window.

Cutting Elements from Section/Elevation


Windows
You can cut any element from a Section/Elevation Model window.
The element removed is placed on the Clipboard and the change
can immediately be seen on the Floor Plan. Cut elements can only
be pasted in the form of fills and lines, either on the Floor Plan or
in a Section/Elevation window.
You cannot create new construction elements in Section/Elevation
windows using Cut/Paste.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


289
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Copy
The Copy command is similar to the Cut command. It puts the
selected construction or text elements on the Clipboard, but the
selected elements are not removed from the original document.

Copying from Section/Elevation Windows


You can copy any element from a Section/Elevation Model
window, but you can only paste it in the form of fills and lines,
either on the Floor Plan or in a Section/Elevation window.
You cannot create new construction elements in Section/Elevation
windows using Copy/Paste.

Copying from the 3D Window


Unlike Cut, Copy can be used in the 3D Window. If the 3D
window is active and a 2D selection rectangle is drawn, choosing
Copy will bring up a dialog box in which you can specify which
elements of the selection you want to copy to the Clipboard.

Copy Format Options


Painting Screenshot will copy the contents of the 3D window as a
unified picture (Figure).
When choosing Drawing, the resulting image will consist of the
parts described in the dialog box. The size of the picture obtained
will be equal to the size of the image in the 3D Window. This is
important when pasting the copied parts into another application
such as SuperPaint or Photoshop.
The Scaled drawing option creates an image that keeps the sizes of
the Floor Plan. If you paste a Side view of the Project on the Floor
Plan using the Scaled drawing option, the sizes will match the
sizes of the plan.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


290
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Elements to Copy
With the following pop-up menus you can define which elements
of the 3D View you want to copy to the Clipboard.

Copying the shadows of top views can be useful if you want to


place accurate, measurable shadows on the Floor Plan. Shadows
and 3D hatching of orthogonal views add a further touch of
realism to elevation drawings.
Polygons
In the lower part of the dialog box you can define whether to
save/copy invisible polygons (for example, the polygon elements
of a window behind a wall) or only visible ones. You also have the
option of copying the polygons with or without frames.

Remove Reduntant Lines


You will see this checkbox if you want to copy the selection in
Drawing or Scaled drawing mode from a wireframe or a hidden
line picture. If you check this checkbox, lines exactly on top of
each other will be omitted in the copied file.
Hint: If you want to copy the elements of the 3D window e.g.
for an elevation view, it is recommended to use the Calculate
split polygons and Frameless options. However, split polygons
may require a lot of time and RAM.
See also…
The Save as…/2D Elements section in the File menu.
Note: The Copy command can only be used in the 3D
Window for copying images with the 2D Marquee.

Paste
The Clipboard can be used not only to hold ArchiCAD elements
for pasting, but also to import bitmap graphics and other types of
information. With the Paste command, you can paste the contents
of the Clipboard onto the current Project or a text window.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


291
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Pasting Floor Plan Elements


When pasting Floor Plan elements, the elements keep their
original x-y position. Before choosing the final position of the
pasted elements, you can drag, rotate or mirror them.
- If the pasted elements cannot appear in the window at the
current zoom level, a dialog box opens where you can choose
whether to paste the elements to the original location or to the
current view, and whether to zoom to the pasted elements.
- When you are pasting with a multiple story marquee, an alert
appears asking you to identify the copied story to merge to the
current one.
- Attributes are identified by name. If the elements on the
clipboard refer to attributes that do not exist in the current
project, the necessary attributes will be appended.
Note: If you Cut/Copy and then Paste a selection between
stories at the same zoom level with no Panning operations in
between, the contents of the Clipboard are pasted into the
same position as where they were originally cut or copied
from. You can change stories in ArchiCAD between Copy and
Paste Operations. This feature is very useful when copying a
selection from one story to another.
See also…
The Merge command (File menu).

Pasting Section/Elevation Window Elements


All elements generated from either type of Section/Elevation
window (Model or Drawing) or from the 3D Window will be
pasted as fills and lines, either in the Floor Plan or in Section/
Elevation windows.
You cannot create new construction elements in Section/Elevation
windows or the 3D Window using either Cut/Paste or Copy/Paste.

Pasting from Other Applications


When pasting pictures containing drawing elements from another
application, the following dialog box appears:

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


292
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

You can either paste the picture as a set of drawing elements


which are then interpreted by ArchiCAD as lines, text blocks and
fills, or as a single unit (Figure).
You can paste multi-line texts coming from word-processing
applications into ArchiCAD.

Clear
Selected items are removed from Project or text windows when
you choose the Clear command. As opposed to Cut or Copy, the
cleared elements are not preserved on the Clipboard. They are
easily retrieved by Undo.
The keyboard equivalent of Clear is hitting the Backspace or
Delete key.
Clearing construction elements in any construction
window (Floor Plan, 3D Window, Model type Section/
Elevation) will also delete these elements from all the other
windows.
Note: Clearing any additional (i. e., manually added) elements
from a Section/Elevation Model window or any elements from
a Section/Elevation Drawing window will leave all other
windows unchanged.

Select All...
Choosing the Select All … command selects all the elements of the
currently active window that have been created by the currently
active tool in presently visible layers. The name of the active tool
is added to the Select All ... command’s menu title.
- If the Arrow tool is active when you choose the Select All…
command, all the elements in visible Layers of the active
window of the Project will be selected.
- If the Marquee tool is active, all the Figure type elements on
the active story will be selected.
Note: If you choose the Select All command while a marquee
area is defined, only elements inside this area will be selected.
In this case, polygons, objects, columns and splines should
have at least one hotspot inside the marquee area, and linear
elements should have at least a small part inside the marquee.
See also…
Selection in Chapter 2.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


293
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Find & Select


Choosing the Find & Select command allows you to make multiple
selections based on different characteristics of any elements
placed on visible layers of the currently active window. You can
select any element by Type, Fillpattern, Pencolor, Line Type,
Surface Material, Layer, Elevation, Name, ID or Font, in any
combination.

When you have chosen all the criteria you need, simply click Add
to Selection and all the elements corresponding to the set
characteristics will be selected without having to close the dialog
box.
You can also use this dialog box to deselect selected items. Just
check your choice and click the Deselect button in order to leave
only the desired elements selected.
Example:
Let us assume that you wish to select all exterior walls excluding
those in red.
First, select all walls placed on the Exterior Walls layer whose
bottom elevation is more than 2.7 meters.

Then deselect all walls for which the Pencolor is red.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


294
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Stretch
The Stretch command is used to stretch or shrink any selected
ArchiCAD element. To use the command, select any elements in
the Floor Plan or 3D Window, then choose the Stretch command.
Once the command is active, you can grab an endpoint of the
selected element and move it to a new position.

The element is stretched or shrunk according to the new endpoint.


The other endpoint will remain at its original position. The stretch
vector is determined by two clicks. Use cursor constraint or
numeric coordinate input as aids to positioning.
Note: Multiple walls, lines and arcs with overlapping
endpoints can all be stretched.
In the 3D Window, if the Arrow tool is active, both vertical and
horizontal stretching is possible by using the appropriate icons of
the pet palette when clicking a selected element node.
See also…
Editing elements in the 3D Window in Chapter 3.

Stretching Doors & Windows


An extremely useful trait of stretched windows and doors is that
you can use reference points outside the host wall. The endpoint
of the stretch vector will be projected perpendicularly or
orthogonally to the wall (according to the current Cursor Snap
Variant in the Control Box) to define the new opening edge. This
allows you to position a door or window with respect to an
element within a room, or in another room, as shown below.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


295
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Stretching with the Marquee Tool


It is possible to stretch/shrink polygonal elements (Slabs, Roofs,
Fills and holes) as well as Section Lines with the Marquee tool.
1) Draw a marquee area around the polygons that you want to
stretch.
2a) Define the stretch vector by clicking on a node inside the
marquee area and an external point (in this case, you don't
need to choose the Stretch command) or
2b) Choose the Stretch command, and then define the stretch
vector by clicking any two different points.
3) The shape of all polygonal elements which have nodes inside
the marquee area is modified accordingly. Lines, Walls, etc.
which have one of their endpoints inside the marquee area
will also be stretched.

Note: Stretching with the Marquee is not available in the 3D


Window.
Stretch Operation Limitations:
If a wall is shrunk so that both ends of an opening in it are
overtaken, the opening becomes deleted. As long as only one end
is affected, the opening will keep its integrity.

Resize
Choosing the Resize command allows you to enlarge or reduce
selected elements either through numeric input or graphically.
The dialog box opened by this command offers further options for
resizing the thickness of Walls/Columns, library parts, text
elements, arrowheads and markers

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


296
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

1) Select (with either selection method) the elements you wish to


transform and choose Resize.

2) Select the options you need and click OK.


3) Click anywhere in the worksheet window. The transformation
will be executed.

Note: The Resize command is only available in the Floor Plan


and for construction elements only in Section/Elevation
windows.

Split
This menu command allows you to split walls, lines, slabs, roofs
and fill polygons along a line segment, arc or polygon edge.
1) Select the elements you wish to split.
2) Choose the Split command.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


297
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

3) Draw the splitting line segment, or click an existing line, arc,


wall or polygon edge with the Mercedes cursor.
4) Click on either side of the splitting line/arc/edge with the
Eyeball cursor.
5) Elements on the clicked side will remain selected, elements on
the other side will be deselected. The selected group of
elements can be edited in the usual ways.

Note: The Split command is only available in the Floor Plan


and for construction elements only in Section/Elevation
windows. It is not available in the 3D Window.

Adjust
This menu command adjusts (extends or trims) the endpoints of
Walls and Lines to a line or arc segment or polygon edge.
1) Select the Walls and/or Lines you wish to adjust.
2) Choose the Adjust command.
3) Draw a line segment, or click an existing line, wall, polygon
edge or arc/circle with the Mercedes cursor. The endpoints of
the selected walls and lines will be adjusted (extended or
trimmed) to meet the drawn or clicked line/arc/edge. Only
those elements will be affected which intersect (or would
intersect) with the chosen line/arc/edge.

Note: The Adjust command is only available in the Floor Plan


and for construction elements only in Section/Elevation
windows. It is not available in the 3D Window.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


298
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Click Wall to Split…


With this command you can split a single wall into two wall
segments by clicking on its Reference Line with the Mercedes
cursor. (See the Wall tool in Chapter 4 for ways to split walls at
locations defined by other elements.)
Note: This command is only available in the Floor Plan
window.

Click to Trim
Select Click to Trim and click an element. The clicked part of the
item between the two nearest intersection points will be deleted.
Only displayed intersection points are considered, intersection
points outside of the current view are not taken into account.

You can also use the Cmd/Ctrl-click shortcut to trim non selected
elements. If any element is selected, using this technique will
either split the items or calculate their intersection.
Items that can be trimmed are: walls, lines, circles and arcs.
Note: The Click to Trim command is only available in the
Floor Plan and for construction elements only in Section/
Elevation windows. It is not available in the 3D Window.

Trim to Roof...
You can cut gable shapes from walls, columns, slabs and library
parts (including doors and windows) to fit under roofs with the
Trim to Roof command. For the command to be available, at least
one roof or one element of the above types must be selected.
If walls, columns, slabs and library parts are selected, they will be
trimmed to those roofs that are crossing them. If one or more roofs
are also selected together with these objects, the elements will be
cut only to those roofs that are selected together with the objects.
The objects are cut only if they are partly or wholly under the roof.
You always need to define which elements should be cut in the
appearing dialog box.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


299
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

If only roofs are selected, you will have to define what elements
you want to be cut by the roof by checking the types in the dialog
box. Once you define these, all underlying elements of that types
will be trimmed by the roofs.

Trim Top/Base
The defined elements can be cut by either the upper or lower
slope of the roof depending on the radio button you switch in the
dialog box.
If the Trim Top radio button is active, elements will be cut by the
roof's lower slope.

If the Trim Base radio button is active, elements will be cut by the
roof's upper slope.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


300
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Trimming Walls, Columns and Library Parts


You can cut quite complex shapes into walls and columns using
this command. The wall will always follow the shape of the roof(s)
above them, no matter how many roof segments you have.
However, you have to remember that any roof can only make
parallel cuts into the walls (see example 2 below).

If you trim a wall with a roof that crosses the wall entirely, the wall
will be cut into two parts. One with a cutting at the end, while the
other will be a separate wall without any cut. This second wall will
start from the point where the roof ends.
There is one exception from this. If you have an opening that
would have points in both parts of the wall after the trim, the wall
will remain one piece.

Trimming Slabs
Slabs can also be trimmed by the lower or upper slope of roofs
with the help of this command. However, there is a big difference
between trimming slabs and trimming walls, columns or library
parts. While other elements can be partly trimmed, slabs are
always cut along the whole section line of the roof and the slab,
effectively removing the cut part of the slab.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


301
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Restoring Elements after Trimming


If an element has been trimmed to a roof, an additional button
appears at the bottom of that element’s Settings dialog box (Model
Attributes section) allowing you to undo the trimming.
The only exception is Slabs: their trimming can only be undone
through the Edit/Undo menu item just after the trimming has been
done.
Trimming with a Remote Roof
To trim a wall/column top with a remote roof’s slope:
1) Select either the wall/column or the roof slope.
2) Cmd–click (Macintosh) or Ctrl-click (Windows) the other.

Note: The wall/column is cut whether it is under a roof or not.


Be sure to set a sufficient height for the original rectangular
walls/columns so that they are cut correctly.
This command is only available in the Floor Plan window.

Drag
The Drag command allows you to move any selected construction
element in the Project.
1) Select the element(s) you intend to move.
2) Select the Drag command from the Edit menu.
3) Define the length and direction you intend to move the
selected items by drawing an appropriate line (a drag vector).

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


302
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The drag vector is drawn anywhere on the screen. Normally you


start at a characteristic point of the selected elements. However, it
is possible to connect two entirely independent reference points
as well.

- All selected elements are moved to a new location. Single


elements appear as a grayed image as you move them.
Selections containing multiple elements appear as a grayed
bounding box as you move them.
- If you want to drag an opening within the wall which contains
it without moving the wall itself, select the opening
individually.

In the 3D Window, you can also drag elements by selecting one of


their nodes and choosing the first icon from the appearing pet
palette. (The Arrow tool must be active). See the description of
this technique in Chapter 3, in the Working with Elements in 3D
section.
Drag Operation Limitations:
- You cannot drag an opening entirely out of a wall even if you
define an outside endpoint for the drag vector.
- You cannot use an external drag vector with openings.
Note: If you define a territory on the floor plan to be
visualized in 3D and you drag an element outside this place in
3D, the element will disappear from the 3D window. If you
elevate an element by dragging, you will get the same dialog
box as described under the Elevate command when you drag
the element to another story (see below).

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


303
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Rotate
The Rotate command allows you to rotate any selected element in
the Floor Plan or in the 3D Window or manually added elements
in the Section/Elevation windows.
Even in the 3D Window, rotation is always performed across a
horizontal plane.
Note: Rotated text blocks, labels, dimensions and fill polygon
area labels are always readable from the bottom and the right
side of the drawing.
To use the Rotate command:
1) Select the element(s) you intend to rotate.
2) Choose the Rotate command.
3) Define the Center:
– Click at the center of rotation

4) Define the rotation angle:


– Click at the startpoint of the rotation angle
– Move the cursor
– Click at the desired radius and endpoint

Note: Zone stamps cannot be rotated.

Rotating Openings
Rotating Doors and Windows works differently from other rotation
operations. To rotate an opening:

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


304
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

1) Select the opening to be rotated.


2) Choose the Rotate command. The opening will rotate 180
degrees around its center.

Note: Any number of openings can be rotated at the same


time. Dimension lines will always be kept right side up; if you
rotate them upside down, the numbers will move to the
opposite side.

Mirror
The Mirror command creates a mirror image of any selected
construction element on the Floor Plan or in the 3D Window.
Any number of openings can be mirrored at a time. Text, line
arrows and dimensions will not be mirrored - only their bounding
box will. The characters remain readable.
Mirrored text blocks, labels, dimensions and fill polygon area
labels are always readable from the bottom and the right side of
the drawing.
To use the Mirror command:
1) Choose the element(s) to be mirrored.
2) Define the axis of the mirroring with two clicks, as if you were
constructing a line.

All the selected elements are mirrored.


Note: Zone stamps cannot be mirrored.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


305
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Mirroring Openings
If you click outside the wall that contains the selected opening, the
opening will be mirrored at its central axis.
1) Choose the opening you want to mirror .
2) Choose the Mirror command.
The opening will be mirrored at its central axis. The opening
direction will change laterally, while the opening remains facing
the same side of the wall as shown in the figure below.

If you click on the reference line of the wall that contains the
selected opening, the opening will be mirrored to the line that is
perpendicular to the wall at this point. The mirroring does not
occur if the opening would fall entirely beyond the end of the
wall. However if the opening would fall partly on and partly off
the wall, you are prompted to choose whether or not you wish to
keep the opening.
Note: Any number of openings can be mirrored at the same
time.

Drag a Copy
The Drag a Copy command works like the Drag command, except
that the original element remains intact and selected while a copy
is moved to another location.
Note: If you are making a single copy of an opening, the
easiest way is to option-click (Macintosh) or alt-click
(Windows) the opening to pick up its parameters, and then
place a clone of it with the next click. See Parameter Transfer
in Chapter 4 for details.

Rotate a Copy
The Rotate a Copy command works like the Rotate command,
except that the original element remains intact and selected while
a copy is rotated.
Note: This command is not available for Doors and Windows.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


306
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Mirror a Copy
The Mirror a Copy command works like the Mirror command,
except that the original element remains intact and selected while
a copy is mirrored.
The command works on Doors and Windows too, provided that
you click on the reference line of the wall that contains the
opening and that the mirrored opening would not fall off the wall.

Elevate…
The Elevate… command allows you to move selected elements
vertically along the Z axis.
In the 3D Window, all you need do is either choose Elevate (any
tool can be active) or click one of the element's nodes (Arrow tool
active) and choose the second icon from the appearing pet palette.
You can then graphically or numerically move up and down the
selected elements. See more details in Chapter 3.
In the Floor Plan or Section/Elevation Windows, choosing the
Elevate command displays the Elevate dialog box for specifying a
positive or negative vertical displacement along the Z axis for one
or more elements.

This command is well-suited to changing the elevations of large


numbers of similar elements (i.e. walls, landscaping library parts,
floor tiles, lighting fixtures, etc.). It is the best way to preserve the
vertical relationships between objects while moving them.
1) Select the elements you want to raise or lower.
2) Choose the Elevate… command.
The Elevate dialog box is displayed.
3) Type a value into the edit box and click the OK button.
The elements are moved vertically.
To make vertical copies instead of moving the originals, use the
Multiply command described below.
In case you elevate a selected construction element a way that it
would fall to another story, a dialog box will ask you if you want

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


307
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

to keep the elevated element on the original story, or you want to


move it to another story. However this will happen only if this
other story exists.
Example: you have a two story building, where the hight of both
stories is 3.00 m. If you elevate a chair from the upper floor down
with 2.00m, you will get this dialog, but if you elevate up with 4m,
you will get no dialog, since no sory is specified above the upper
floor.
If you elevate several elements at the same time, and more than
one would meet the above criteria, you will still get the mentioned
dialog box only once. Depending on your answer, none or all of
the elevated elements will be moved to the other story.

If you elevate the objects on the floor plan, by choosing to place


the moved objects to another story, the 2D symbols of the elevated
objects will disappear from the currently active story if they are not
visible outside their own story.

Multiply…
The Multiply… command creates any number of exact copies of
selected elements using the following methods and options:
- Drag the copies along a straight path with a Multiplication
Reference Line.
- Rotate the copies using an angle defined by a Multiplication
Reference Arc.
- Elevate (stack) the copies with a vertical displacement (similar
to the Elevate… command, but it also makes copies).
- Create a matrix of copies along two multiplication reference
lines defined by strokes.
- Elevate and drag or rotate (stagger-stack) the copies, using
both a Multiplication Reference Line or Reference Arc and a
vertical displacement. This is useful for conditions such as
linear or circular stair risers or a sloping landscape’s contours
(stagger-stacked slabs).

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


308
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Note: Rotated text blocks, labels, dimensions and fill polygon


area labels are always readable from the bottom and the right
side of the drawing.
To use the Multiply… command, set up the parameters in the
Multiply dialog box and apply them by setting a reference line or
arc. The specific steps are as follows:
1) Select the element(s) you want to multiply.
2) Choose the Multiply… command from the Edit menu.
The Multiply dialog box is displayed.

3) Choose the parameters desired in the Multiply dialog box. See


the Multiply Options section below for details.
4) Click the OK button to return to the Project.
5) Define a Reference Line or Arc (if you are rotating) to create
the specified number of copies. (For a Matrix, you need to
define two Reference Lines.)
If you decide not to make the copies, click the Cancel button in
the Control Box. However, if you have chosen the Elevate button
in the dialog box, the copies will still be made when you click the
OK button. There is no opportunity to cancel this operation after
leaving the dialog box. Use the Undo command instead.
Note: To simply change the vertical position of an element
without making copies, use the Elevate command instead.

Multiply Options
A set of radio buttons specifies the type of multiply operation to
perform.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


309
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

- Drag multiplies the copies along a straight path defined by the


reference line.
- Rotate multiplies the copies along an arc, using the angle
specified in the reference arc.
- Elevate stacks the copies with a vertical displacement.
- Matrix will place the copies of the selected elemen(s) to a
matrix defined by two perpendicular reference lines. When
choosing the Matrix option, you need to define the number of
copies for both the first and the second stroke of the matrix. It
also needs two parameters for the vertical displacement.

In the lower half of the dialog box, the distribution options


determine how the start and endpoint of the multiply reference
line will be interpreted.
- Increment spaces the copies by an incremental distance
equal to the length of the Reference Line or Reference Arc.
- Distribute spaces the copies evenly between the start and
endpoints of the Multiplication Reference Line or Reference
Arc.
- Distribute-1 will also space the copies evenly between the
startpoint and the endpoint of the Reference Line or Arc, but
the distance is divided by the Number of copies + 1 and no
copy will be placed at the endpoint.
- Spread will place the copies of the multiplied element to
equal distance from each other along the Reference Line or
Arc all the way until the reference is drawn. In this case,
instead of defining the number of copies, you set the spacing
in length or in degrees between two neighboring copies.

Vertical Displacement
Vertical displacement will define the value that is added to the
elevation of each subsequent copy of the multiplied object even
during dragging, rotating or arraying the copies.

In case of multiplying the element(s) in the 3D window, the


vertical displacement have to be defined with a reference vector

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


310
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

and not by a value in the dialog box. In this case you only push a
radio button in the dialog box whether you need vertical
displacement or not.

Note: When multiplying windows or doors, do not forget that


ArchiCAD will place the copies of the openings into the parent
wall on the current story and not to the story above or below
it, even if you have defined an elevation value that extends
beyond that of the current story.

Edit Selection Set…


The Edit Selection Set… command opens a dialog box which
makes it possible to edit specific attributes for a collection of
dissimilar element types simultaneously.

Every element in ArchiCAD shares two basic attributes with all


others: a Layer assignment and a Pencolor or Penweight.
- The Edit Selection Set dialog box controls those two attributes
and can modify them for any number of elements without
losing the selection.
- All of the other attributes and parameters of the selected
elements are left unchanged, and if only one of the attributes
is modified, the other is also left unchanged.
Windows & Doors
There is an additional control for windows and doors. Even if
windows and doors are not explicitly selected, you can optionally
modify their pencolor if the parent wall is included in the selection

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


311
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

set. To modify the pencolor of windows and doors, click the


Modify Associated… checkbox.
Note: Windows and doors are always placed in the layer of
their parent walls.
Auto-Labels
Another checkbox can be used to modify the Pencolor and Layer
Setting of auto-labels that are not explicitly selected if the elements
they are linked to are included in the selection set.
Special Cases
Layer assignments will always be modified, but Pencolor or
Penweights behave differently in one special case:
- Library part Pencolors or Penweights can be modified, but
only if the library part is not set to be displayed with its
Symbol Pens (defined in the 2D symbol of the Library Part).
Even then, when editing the object, the standard Pencolor or
Penweight radio button will be preset to the edited Pencolor
or Penweight.
Compound Elements
All components of compound elements, such as walls, dimension
chains or markers made up of lines, arrowheads and text are
modified together.
Information Matrix
The Edit Selection Set dialog box displays an information matrix
displaying the type and quantities of different elements in the
selection set. This information is often useful for more than just
attribute editing.
The Edit Selection Set command is not available in 3D.

Tool Settings
This is a dynamic menu item, as its name changes based on the
current selection or active tool.
- If no element is currently selected, the command opens the
settings dialog box of the active tool with the default settings.
- If one element is currently selected, the command opens the
dialog box corresponding to that element with the settings of
the selected element.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


312
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

- If multiple elements are selected, the command opens the


dialog box corresponding to the element that was selected last.
See also…
The description of the different tool’s settings dialog boxes in
Chapter 4 and the explanation of the behavior of elements created
by external editors in the Appendix.

Edit Menu Commands for


Text Windows
When working in a text type window, most of the Edit menu
commands change in order to provide you with basic word
processing features.

Text Style…
The Text Style command opens a dialog box determining how
your text will look both on screen and for printing.

Tabs
Here you can define the number of character spaces ArchiCAD
uses when you press the Tab key.

Font & Size


The Font and Size settings allow you choose among the available
fonts in your system. Changing the font type and/or size affects the
whole text window.
Notes: You can define different fonts and sizes for the
different text windows. In a new document, the text windows
will, by default, have the format defined when ArchiCAD was
last used. You can return to the original defaults by pressing
the Option/Alt and choosing New and Reset..

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


313
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Find & Replace


Choosing the Find & Replace command opens the Text Window
Find dialog box which offers the searching options used in most
word processing applications:
- Find all occurrences of a word, phrase or series of characters
in a window or in the selected text.
- Find and replace words exactly as typed.
- Searching and replacing backwards.

Find Selection
This command searches for the selected string in the text
according to the direction set in the Text Window Find dialog box.

Find Again/Replace Again


These commands repeat the last find or replace operation in the
direction set in the Text Window Find dialog box.

Go To Line
This command allows you to go to the desired line by simply
entering a number in the edit box. This feature is especially useful
when editing or checking GDL scripts.

Comment/Uncomment
These commands are available for the Library Part 2D, 3D and
Properties Script windows only. They allow you to change
selected command lines into comment lines and vice versa. The

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


314
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Comment command adds exclamation marks (!) in front of


selected lines, while the Uncomment command removes them.
This feature can come in handy when you wish to visualize only a
part of your script.
Hint: You can comment or uncomment the whole contents of
the window by first choosing the Select All command from the
Edit menu.
Note: These commands are also available as shortcuts at the
bottom of the text window.

Increase Indent/Decrease Indent


This command will place/remove the number of spaces defined in
the Text Window Format dialog box for tabs at the beginning of
the paragraph.
Note: These commands are also available as shortcuts at the
bottom of the text window.

Check Script
With this command, you can check whether the syntax of the GDL
script in the active window is correct.
If you wish to check all the scripts of the current library part,
activate its master window before choose the command.
Note: This command is also available as a shortcut at the
bottom of the text window.

Open Debugger
This command is only active when a GDL Script window is in front
and allows you to debug GDL Scripts. See the description of the
GDL Debugger window in the ArchiCAD Library section of
Chapter 6.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


315
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The Tools Menu


The Tools menu’s elements allow you to:
- group and ungroup elements;
- modify the order in which overlapping elements are drawn on
top of each other;
- lock elements in order to prevent accidental modification or
suppression of important elements;
- define element transformation modes;
- add automatic or custom labels to elements;
- update zone information;
- add external functions defined as ArchiCAD Add-Ons.

Group
Creates a new group with the selected items. Elements of different
type can be grouped together and you can even group existing
groups.
See the description of ArchiCAD's basic concepts in Chapter 2
about the behavior of groups.
Important: If you save the project in ArchiCAD 5.0 format, all
group information will be lost.
Grouping/Ungrouping is not available in the 3D Window.

Ungroup
Deletes the group information from the selected items. They
become single elements again.
Group information is hierarchical, which means that if two groups
have been grouped into a higher level group, choosing Ungroup
will first separate the two groups and you will have to choose
Ungroup again to see single elements.

Suspend Groups
Temporarily switches off all group information. Any grouped item
will be treated as ungrouped. This allows you to easily and swiftly
modify any single element of the group without affecting the
others. By choosing the command again, groups will be resumed.
A checkmark in front of the command's name indicates whether it
is active or not.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


316
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Note: There are two icons in the Control Box that have the
same effect as choosing Suspend Groups.
Suspend Groups is also available when working in the 3D
Window.

Autogroup
This toggle command allows you to automatically create elements
in groups. If autogroup is on, items that are generated at the same
time (rectangular walls, polyroofs, etc.) will be grouped together.

Bring to Front
On this command, selected element(s) will overlap all other
elements.

Bring Forward
On this command, selected element(s) will overlap all the
unchanged elements of their own and any lower classes, but it will
still stay below the elements of higher classes.

Send Backward
On this command, selected element(s) will be overlapped by (sent
behind) all the unchanged elements of their own and higher
classes, but it will still overlap the elements of lower classes.

Send to Back
On this command, selected element(s) will become overlapped by
all other elements.

Reset Default Order


This option puts all the changed elements back into the default
overlapping order.
See Chapter 2 for the description of ArchiCAD's basic concepts
about the drawing order of overlapping elements.

Lock
Choosing the command locks the selected items to prevent them
from accidental modification. Locked elements can still be selected

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


317
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

and used for relative construction, and you can even pick up their
settings through parameter transfer.
Note for TeamWork users: You can only lock items that you
have reserved. Locked items cannot be reserved by others.
The locking information is kept even after you have signed
out from the Team Project.

Unlock
Choosing this command will unlock the selected item(s).
Note for TeamWork users: You can only unlock items
locked by you.

Unlock All Elements


This hierarchical menu allows you to unlock all locked elements.
Mine
Unlocks all of your previously locked items.
Others…
This TeamWork-specific menu item is only available when signed
in to a Team Project as the Team Leader. It allows you to unlock all
the elements locked by any single teammate by choosing a name
in the appearing dialog box.
Whole Team
This TeamWork-specific menu item is only available when signed
in to a Team Project as the Team Leader. He or she can unlock all
the elements locked by any teammate.

Create Patch…
With this command, you can save the area enclosed by the 2D
Marquee as a parametric 2D Library element. You can later use this
to “sticker” your plans in order to provide the necessary detail in
Plan and Section views while saving time on modeling.
To create a Patch, enclose any area of the Plan or the Section/
Elevation window within a Marquee, and select the Create Patch…
command from the Tools menu. The dialog box that appears will
let you specify the location and name of the created element.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


318
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

You can easily navigate between the loaded libraries, using the
pop-up list at the bottom of the dialog box.
If you check the Place Patch Now checkbox, you can place the
created element immediately after it has been saved.

Note: Objects created this way will be enhanced with


parametric behavior, specified by a special template in the
ArchiCAD library. If this template is missing from the loaded
libraries ,you will still be able to save patches, but they will be
plain stickers with no special intelligence. If ArchiCAD fails to
locate the Patch Template, it will notify you, and you will have
the option to either proceed, or cancel the operation.

Magic Wand Settings…


This command affects the transformation of Arcs, Circles and
Splines into curved Walls or polygon-type elements.
The transformation itself is described in Chapter 3 under
Construction Techniques. During the transformation, curves are
drawn or approximated according to the settings made in the
dialog box below.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


319
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Tracing Method
With the two radio buttons on the right, you can choose between
two transformation methods.
- With Best Match, transformation is made by curved segments
following as best possible the natural form of Circles, Arcs and
Splines.
- With Prefer Linear Segments , only linear segments are used.

Note: When transforming curved elements into Meshes or


Lines, only linear segments will be used.
Options for Linear Segments
The four radio buttons on the left allow you to choose from a set
of options for approximating curves with linear segments.
- The first option allows you to define the maximum deviation
of the polygon from the original curved element.
- The two buttons in the middle allow you to define the number
of segments along an Arc or an entire Circle. In the second
case, arcs will be transformed into a number of segments
corresponding to the part of the circle they represent.
- The fourth button allows you to make the transformation with
segments of uniform length.
Note: If you choose the Best Match method and real curves
cannot be created, ArchiCAD will try to approximate curves in
the hierarchical order represented in this dialog box.

Explode
Choosing this command will turn elements selected on the current
Story or in the current Section Window into basic elements (lines
without arrowheads, circles, arcs, elliptic arcs, splines, unframed
fills, single-line texts). Original elements are deleted from that
location.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


320
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Exceptions:
- In Section/Elevation windows, cut construction elements
cannot be exploded, since these cannot be deleted in Section
view;
- Zone polygons and stamps;
- Section lines and Cameras;
- Basic 2D elements.
Some examples:
- Slabs, Roofs and Meshes are decomposed into lines.
- Walls and Columns are decomposed into lines and fills. (Doors
and Windows inserted into Walls are also exploded.)
- Doors and Windows (if selected without the Wall they're
placed into) are decomposed as library parts and are replaced
by empty hole type openings.
- Dimensions are decomposed into lines and the basic elements
of arrowheads (lines, circles, arcs, fills).
- Library parts are decomposed into the basic elements of
library parts.

Note: If Autogroup is on, the exploded elements will be


created in grouped mode.

Line Extras
The Line Extras submenu contains three menu items acting on
selected lines. Lines are stretched or trimmed by the commands
depending on whether or not they intersect; if they do not, a new
length is determined in order to make an intersection or to meet
the fillet or chamfer.

Fillet
Joins two line endpoints with an arc.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


321
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

On choosing this command, a dialog box will appear, prompting


you to set the radius for the filleting.

Chamfer
Joins two line endpoints with a line segment.
On choosing this command, a dialog box will appear, prompting
you to set the radius for the chamfering.

Intersect
Causes two lines to meet at a point.

Three ways of connecting the same two lines

Roof Level Lines


Choosing this command will place lines on selected roofs at the
height values you specify in the appearing dialog box.

You can define whether the level lines should be placed on the
top or bottom level(s) of the selected roof(s) by selecting the
appropriate radio button in the top part of the dialog box.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


322
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

In the fields in the middle, you can specify the height level where
you want the level lines to be placed. The height can be relative to
the Story's own level or to the Project Zero.
When the Omit Lines Outside Roofs checkbox is enabled, level
lines which fall outside the floor plan polygon of the roof they
belong to will not be drawn. If the checkbox is disabled, all
resulting lines will be drawn. In this case, lines which fall outside
the roof polygon will be drawn to be of equal length to the pivot
line of the roof they belong to.
When the Group with Roof checkbox is activated, level lines will
be grouped with the roofs they belong to.
Note: This option is greyed if the Suspend Groups toggle is
active.

Labels
Choosing the Labels menu item opens a submenu allowing you to
control the way automatic labels are placed on construction
elements.

Automatic Labeling
On choosing this command, a dialog box appears:

The controls on the left side of the dialog box allow you to enable
or disable automatic labeling for different element types.
You can also choose between two label text options: the labeled
element’s ID number or its internal, unique ID.
The Auto-Label orientation icons are available both here and in
the Label Settings dialog box after being placed (see their
description under the Label tool).

Label/Unlabel Selected Elements


These two commands allow you to add auto-labels to selected
elements or to remove them entirely.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


323
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The auto-labels placed will have their settings defined in the


Automatic Labeling dialog box.
See also…
The Label tool’s is described in Chapter 4.

Update Zones…
When you modify your design, associative zones do not
automatically adjust themselves to the changes. Choosing the
Update Zones… command will adjust the Zones to your updated
design and alert you about any problematic Zones that might have
been created. The dialog box that appears also provides you with
feedback on how each Zone has changed.

The dialog box shows Zones that have been updated. Zones that
present problems will be preselected

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


324
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The dialog box contains the following columns:


Status: This is where ArchiCAD tells you if the Zone could be
updated, and if not, what the nature of the problem is. The Icons
appearing in this field represent the following:
All is well, ArchiCAD has successfully updated your Zone.
The Zone was created manually and cannot be automatically
adjusted.
The layer on which the Zone resides is locked. Unlock the layer in
the Layer Settings dialog box and repeat the update process.
The Zone is self-intersecting. Just as in the case of polygons, you
may have to adjust the Zone to have valid geometry, or split it into
two Zones. You can examine the Zone by selecting it, and
pressing the Zoom to Selected Zones button. Repeat the update
process.
The reference point of the Zone is outside of its boundary. Each
associative Zone has a reference point that must lie inside the
Zone. If you get this error message, move the reference point
inside the Zone and repeat the update process.
The Zone you are trying to update is not in your workspace. This
error can only occur if you are working in a shared project in
ArchiCAD for TeamWork, and the Zone is assigned to another
team member. Ask the team member to make the Zone available
to you.
The Zone you are trying to update cannot be properly adjust,
because it has difficulty in finding all of its edges. Use the Zoom
to Selected Zones button to find the Zone and repeat the update
process.
No.
This column contains the number that has been assigned to the
particular Zone.
Name
This column contains the name of the Zone.
Added m2
This column contains information on how the Zone has changed.
To change the display from the relative change in square meters,
choose a different unit from the pop-up menu in the upper right
portion of the dialog box.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


325
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Load Add-On…
Add-Ons are small pieces of software that add functionality to
ArchiCAD.
- Import/Export Add-Ons are filters that allow you to open and
save ArchiCAD data in different foreign file formats, including
DXF and DWG. Loaded Add-Ons' names appear in the
Open… and Save as… dialog boxes.
- Tools type Add-Ons add editing possibilities. Their names
appear under the Load Add-On… menu command in the
Tools menu.
All Add-Ons placed in the Add-Ons folder located in the same
folder as ArchiCAD will automatically be loaded and available on
starting the program.
With the Load Add-On command, it is possible to make available
to ArchiCAD Add-Ons that are in other folders or that were placed
in the Add-Ons folder while the program was already running.
On choosing the command, a Directory dialog box appears,
allowing you to choose an Add-On to load (if any are available).

After loading the Add-On, ArchiCAD displays information about


the functionality that has been added.

From that moment on, the Add-On will be available to ArchiCAD.


Note: If you quit and start ArchiCAD again, Add-Ons loaded
previously with the Load Add-On… command will not be
available. You will have to load them again, or place them into
the Add-Ons folder before starting ArchiCAD again.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


326
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The Options Menu


The Options menu’s items allow you to:
- control the scale and the grid structure;
- customize the display and output options for element classes;
- define and manage the project’s story and layer structure;
- modify the attributes used in the project, including pen colors,
materials, line and fill types, composites and zone categories;
- set the general preferences used in the program, including the
customization of menu shortcuts.

Floor Plan Scale…


Traditional drawing scale has a direct effect on printouts and plots
only. The size of the display does not change if you rescale your
document. Only the relative size of fixed (or paper) size elements
like text or vector hatch patterns changes, as compared to the
construction elements, which have been defined in world
coordinates.
After setting a scale, what you see will be a preview of the project
if printed or plotted at that scale. To see a REAL preview - not a
zoomed one - choose Display/Actual Size after setting the scale.
Note: If you change the drawing scale, the current view will
change accordingly, and the current magnification will remain
constant. To return to the previous view of the window,
choose Display/Previous View.
To set the scale of your document, activate the Floor Plan Scale...
command and specify a scale in the Scale dialog box that comes
up.

You can select either a standard scale from the pop–up menu or
you can type in a special, nonstandard scale into the text input
window.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


327
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Standard scales are shown according to either metric or US


standards, depending on the unit setting in the Preferences/
Drawing Units dialog box. See description later in this menu.

Note: Clicking the Scale button in the Display Bar also


activates this command.
Section Scale
When choosing the menu item in a Section/Elevation window, its
names changes to Section Scale. You can change the scale
separately for every Section/Elevation window.

Display Options…
The Display Options command opens a dialog box where you can
customize the way the various construction elements are displayed
on the Floor Plan worksheet. The second set of options (under the
separation line) affect not only the elements’ display on the Floor
Plan, but also their behavior on printouts, plots and in exported
file formats.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


328
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Clean Wall Intersections


The same command as Clean Wall Intersections, available directly
from the Options menu (see later).

Roof Pivot Lines


This control allows you to show or hide the pivot line of Roofs.
See also…
The Roof tool in Chapter 4.

Fill Handles
This control allows you to show or hide the handles of vectorial
Fills linked to the Fill Origin.
See also…
The Fill tool in Chapter 4.

Text
Text blocks can be displayed in a variety of ways:
- Simple text (unframed)
- Framed text with handles which make the text blocks easy to
locate and edit, while keeping the text readable.
- Greek text (an illegible text block with uniform gray patterns
substituted for the actual text).
- Greek text with handles.
Notes Text below 5 pt (actual screen size) will be always
greeked. Greek text above 48 pt will be displayed as normal.
See also…
The Text tool in Chapter 4.

Figure Handles
Figures can be displayed with or without handles or as
placeholders only.

Section Depth
Section depth can be displayed or hidden on the Floor Plan
See also…
The Section/Elevation tool in Chapter 4.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


329
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Line Weight
There are two display options for Lines on the Floor Plan.
- True Weight mode, where all pens are displayed, printed and
plotted with their correct weight as set in the Pens & Colors
dialog box.
- Hairlines mode, where all pens are displayed, printed and
plotted as thin lines of one pixel width (or the printer’s
minimal lineweight). This allows for faster screen redraws.

Construction Fills
There are four options available for displaying the fills of
construction elements.
- The Empty option causes construction elements to appear
without fills. Beyond the possible visual aspects, an obvious
benefit is faster redrawing of the screen.
- With the Solid option, construction elements appear with a
solid (100%) fill.
- The Bitmap Pattern option is what you generally use for
construction. In Bitmap Pattern mode, construction elements
will be displayed as bitmap patterns.
- The Vectorial Hatching option puts the vector hatch
equivalent of your bitmap pattern on the screen.

Polygon Fills
Three options are available for displaying polygon fills: solid,
bitmap pattern and vectorial hatching.

Doors and Windows


There are four options available for displaying Doors and
Windows on the Floor Plan.
- Doors and Windows are displayed together with their
dimensions;
- Doors and Windows appear without their dimensions;
- Doors and Windows are hidden;
- Doors and Windows are hidden, the ceiling lines are shown.

Zone Polygons
Three options are available for displaying Zone polygons:

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


330
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

- Zone colors are hidden, only the zone stamp information is


displayed.
Note: If you choose this option, you won’t be able to edit
zone polygons.
- Zone colors are displayed on top of Fills.
- Zone colors are displayed under Fills.

Home View & Grids…


The Home View and Grids… command allows you to define the
Snap and Construction grid configuration as well as establish a
home view of your Project.
The role of the Construction and Snap grids is discussed in
Chapter 2 and in the Grid Snap section below.
Choose the Home View and Grids… command to display the
dialog box.

The uppermost section of the dialog box allows you to choose


whether the Snap function will use the Construction or Snap Grid
nodes when enabling snapping to the grid with the Grid Snap
command.

Construction Grid
Horizontal and vertical spacing can be independently defined for
the construction grid in the Spacing Steps edit box. The
Construction parameters are used as follows:
- Spacing values determine the distance between grid lines.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


331
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

- Steps indicates the number of repetitions for the spacing


pattern.
- The Main Grid Step value is followed by the Auxiliary Grid
Steps then the pattern is repeated. The auxiliary grid spacing
can be used in this way to create periodic or stepped grids as
shown in the following figure.

Snap Grid
The horizontal and vertical spacing of the Snap Grid can be
independently set. Fitting the Snap Grid to existing structures, or
to the Construction Grid, is possible through the Offset setting.
The Offset values shift the Snap Grid by the amount shown in the
edit boxes.
Since the Snap Grid is measured from the current User Origin, it is
recommended that you move the User Origin instead of setting a
numeric offset for the Snap Grid.
Note: The offset value cannot be greater than the current
Spacing value.

Background, Grid Lines & Detail


The Background controls the color of the 2D worksheet itself.
Double–clicking the background color will open the Edit Color
subdialog box. You can select your color graphically or
numerically by mixing the HSL (Hue–Saturation–Lightness) or RGB
(Red–Green–Blue) components.
The Grid lines color control works the same as the Background. A
color for the construction grid can be selected for the grid lines
themselves.
When you click the Set to View button, the present zoom level
and pan position on the worksheet are shown in the grid
demonstration window. If you press OK, the view of the
worksheet becomes the Home View. You can return to that detail

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


332
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

at any moment by choosing Display/Home View or by selecting


Home View in the QuickViews palette.
Note: You can also change the Home View by choosing
Display/Set Home View.
Example: Defining a Grid
To make the settings for a post and beam industrial hall structure
with 2' by 1'–6" posts and 18' by 27' spans:
1) Type the following values into the Home View & Grids dialog
box:

2) The newly defined grid conforming to your values is shown in


the sample grid window below. Click the window to obtain
the latest update.

3) The amount of the floor area shown in the Home View is


determined by the corner coordinate values. Type the values
shown in the previous illustration into the four corresponding
text editing fields around the sample window. The settings
here provide the Home View size.

Grid Snap
The Grid Snap command acts as a toggle between the last grid
type used (Construction or Snap) and no grid snap. When the
command is checked, Grid Snap is active. When the command is
unchecked, Grid Snap is disabled.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


333
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Choosing the Grid Snap command is equivalent to selecting either


of the Snap On icons in the Coordinate Box. When grid snap is
active, it restricts the movement of the cursor to Construction or
Snap Grid nodes. A small dot jumping from grid–point to grid–
point indicates the current cursor position.
See also…
The role of the Construction and Snap Grids is detailed in Chapter
2. Additional information on setting up the grid system is provided
in the discussion of the Home View & Grids… command.

Temporary & Suspended Snap


Two keyboard shortcuts are available to help you quickly enable
or disable the grid snap feature:
- Press the Escape key when grid snap is on to temporarily
suspend the Grid Snap feature.
- Press the Escape key when grid snap is off to temporarily
activate the Grid Snap feature.

Grid Display
When the Grid Display command is checked, the grid lines are
displayed on the screen. When the command is unchecked, the
grid lines are hidden. These grid lines are defined using the Home
View & Grids command.
The grid is not displayed (regardless of the menu) if it would be
too dense on the screen (if the smallest distance between two
adjacent grid lines would be smaller than 3 pixels). To see the grid,
define a larger grid or zoom in. This setting is also effective in the
Home View & Grids dialog box.

Clean Wall Intersections


The Clean Walls Intersections command operates as a toggle.
When the command is checked, the clean intersections feature is
activated. When it is unchecked, the feature is disabled.
Clean Intersections On
When Clean Wall Intersections is On, the floor plan display is
identical to the printed or plotted output of your document. Wall
intersections are accurately and correctly represented, the
reference lines are hidden.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


334
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The cursor is sensitive to both the inner and outer points of wall
intersections, such as the ones at the corners of a room. This
makes area calculations and the dimensioning of wall intersections
easier and more precise.

If walls are not displayed properly (although their reference lines


are correctly connected):
1) Turn the Clean Intersections feature off and then on again.

2) Select the Rebuild command (Display menu).


The wall intersections are recalculated and redrawn .

Clean Intersections Off


When the Clean Wall Intersections command is disabled, the
display takes on a construction draft format.

You can see the reference lines of walls and roofs more distinctly.
A more simplified display of walls (block forms) is provided to

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


335
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

help you sort out complex intersections, and screen redraws are
considerably faster.
Disabling this command can be useful when you are drawing at an
intersection of several construction elements. Having the reference
lines visible helps to accurately select the element desired.

Stories
Choosing the Stories menu item opens a submenu with commands
that allow you to:
- Define the vertical structure of your design, story by story.
- Navigate between stories by determining which story is
currently displayed.
- Move elements and items between them using a special Cut/
Copy and Paste function.
All Story functions are controlled through the Stories submenu.
The Stories and their elevation value defined in the Story
Settings… dialog box are displayed at the bottom of the submenu.
The current Story is shown with a checkmark in the listing and the
name appears in the title bar of the Floor Plan window.
Note: Stories are also listed in and can be accessed from the
QuickViews navigation floating palette. See the palette’s
description in Chapter 2.

Story Settings…
If you choose the Story Settings… command from the Stories
submenu, the Stories dialog box is displayed which allows you to
completely define the vertical structure of your Project. Each of the
controls available in the dialog box is described in the following
sections.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


336
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Adding or Removing Stories


The upper section of the dialog box offers a scrollable list of the
stories in your design. For a new design you have a single story.
You can add a story to the list through the Insert Above or Insert
Below buttons, or delete a story by clicking the Delete button.
The new story appears over or below the selected story
(highlighted in the list). The numbering of stories is automatically
updated. There is no practical limit to the number of possible
stories.
Story Numbering
Depending on the version of ArchiCAD you are using, the ground
floor is the Story number 1 (US) or 0 (International version).
Selecting a Story
To activate a story, select it in the list. When you close the Story
Settings dialog box, the floor plan sheet will show this selected
story.
Defining a Story
Your selected story can be defined in the edit boxes. In addition to
the automatically generated story number, you can name the story
and define its elevation level and height.
Note: Elevation is the vertical distance measured from the
Project Zero level, while Height is the vertical distance to the
story above.

Changes to the story height and elevation are interpreted


differently:
- If you modify the height of a story, this will affect the elevation
of all stories above (if the edited story number is positive) or
below (if the edited story number is negative). In practical
terms, you stretch or shrink the whole building by making the
height of a story larger or smaller. The height of all other
stories remain as they were.
- If you modify the elevation of a story, this will affect the height
of the two stories above and below. In practical terms, you
move the level of a single story while keeping the rest of the
building static. The elevation of all other stories remain as they
were.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


337
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Moving Elements Between Stories


To copy elements from one story to another you can use the
standard Cut, Copy, and Paste functions of the Edit menu when
working on the Floor Plan. This process involves selecting and
copying elements from the source story, displaying the target
story, and using the Paste command to place copies of the
elements on the floor plan.
You can also move all elements in one step using the Cut, Copy,
Paste, and Clear buttons inside the Stories dialog box.

The elements and items to be pasted (placed) are selected using


the Paste Control settings. Mark the checkboxes of the element
and item types you intend to place.
Note: The Paste Control checkboxes will have an effect only
when you press the Paste to Story button. The Cut from Story,
Copy from Story and Clear from Story buttons always take all
element classes from a story.
All the element classes on the selected story are cut or copied from
that story when you click the Cut from Story or Copy from Story
buttons in the dialog box.
Cut from Story removes all elements from the original story while
Copy from Story leaves the originals intact while forwarding
copies to another.
Select the story in the list where you want to move the cut or
copied elements. Upon selecting it, click the Paste button in the
dialog box. All the element classes activated in the Paste Controls
are placed on that story.
If you want to remove all elements from a story first, select that
story and click the Clear button. All elements are removed and you
can now paste in the new ones.
Note: These operations are not actually performed until you
click the OK button and exit the dialog box.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


338
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Event List
To help you keep on track, all the story editing steps you make are
listed in the Event List. When you click OK, a final prompt asks if
you are sure that you want to proceed with the operations.

Go Up a Story/Go Down a Story


The Go Up a Story command activates the next Story above the
current one on the floor plan, while Go Down a Story takes you to
the Story below the current one. If Autosave is On in the
Preferences, this command triggers an Autosave.
If you attempt to go to a story that does not exist, a dialog box is
displayed asking you whether you wish to create a new story.

Go To Story...
This command opens a dialog box allowing you to jump directly
to an existing Story and provides you with a range indicator of
how many Stories currently exist. If you enter a Story index
number outside the existing range, it is ignored when you click
OK and you remain in the current Story.

Note: Another convenient way of moving among stories is


offered by the QuickViews palette.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


339
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The Story List


Each story defined in the Stories dialog box will be displayed in
the Story List at the bottom of the Stories submenu. To display any
of the stories in the list, choose it from the menu.
Note: Each Story is displayed with its Name (or serial Number
if no Name has been defined for it) and its Elevation.

Layers
ArchiCAD layers are used to organize the elements in your
drawing for selective displays and quantity calculations.
Choosing the Layers hierarchical menu item in the Options menu
displays a submenu containing the Layers commands. The current
Layer command is shown with a checkmark.

Each of the Layers commands is discussed in a separate section


below.

Layer Settings…
The Layer Settings… command displays the Layer Settings dialog
box which allows you to define the layer settings for your Project.

The currently defined layers for your Project are displayed in the
scrollable list on the left side of the dialog box. To select a layer,
click it so that it appears highlighted.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


340
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The following operations can be performed on the selected layer


(with the exception of the ArchiCAD layer).
Creating a New Layer
Click the New button to open a subdialog box where you can
specify the name of a new layer. Click OK to create the new layer.
Clearing a Layer
To remove a layer from the list, click the Clear button. All
elements assigned to the cleared layer are deleted. This button
operates on all layers selected in the list.
Note: This operation is not undoable and it also clears the
undo/redo steps queue. To help avoid clearing by mistake,
the program displays a warning prior to clearing the layer.
Renaming Layers
To assign a new name to a layer from the list, click the Rename
button. Any name may be followed by a period, then an
extension. The extension can be used to help categorize layers.
Show & Hide Layers
To show the contents of a layer on the worksheet, click the Show
button. This button operates on all layers selected in the list.
As a shortcut, you can click the eye icon representing the shown/
hidden of a selected layer in the list. ArchiCAD will show or hide
all selected layers.
Click the Hide button to render elements in the selected layer
invisible. The names of hidden layers appear dimmed in the list.
Lock & Unlock Layers
To lock or unlock the selected layer, click the Lock or Unlock
buttons. This will cause the icon preceding the name of the
selected layer to appear as an open or closed lock. This button
operates on all layers selected in the list.
When the lock is open, the layer is active. Its contents are available
for editing and construction elements can be assigned to it in the
tool dialog boxes.
As a shortcut, you can click the lock of a selected layer in the list.
ArchiCAD will lock or unlock all selected ones
When the lock is closed, the contents of the layer appear on the
screen and the cursor is sensitive to these elements facilitating
fittings. However, they are no longer available for editing,

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


341
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

deletions or modifications and no construction element can be


assigned to the locked layer in the tool dialog boxes.
Listing Options
Listing options help to organize and navigate long lists of layers.
- Click this button to compile the list in alphabetical order.
- Click this button to organize the layers by their extensions.
Extension names follow one another in alphabetical order.
- Type the name of the desired extension into the edit box
following the button. Click this button to display only those
layers whose name contains the currently selected extension.
Select All
Click the Select All button to select all the currently defined layers
for editing. Layers which are currently hidden are grayed in the
Layer List. If a layer is locked, a padlock icon is displayed to the
left of the layer name.
- To select a range of layers, click or drag with the Shift key
pressed.
- To select a discontinuous set of layers, click or drag with the
Command (Macintosh) or Control (Windows) key pressed.
Hint: If you want to deselect all the currently selected layers,
click on the black area just 2 or 3 pixels to the right of the
right-most edge of the layer list’s scrollbar (between the two
list items of the dialog box).
Layer Sets
You can define and save layer sets using the controls on the right
side of the Layer Settings dialog box. All existing layer sets are
displayed in the submenu for easy access.

Each layer set is a “snapshot” of the state of all Layers in the


Project and can be called up at any time by selecting its name from
the Layers list.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


342
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Note: If new layers are created, they will not be included in


any existing layer set. For example, choosing a layer set will
have no effect on either the visibility or the locking of them.
By default the layer will appear as visible and unlocked,
regardless of which layer set you choose in the submenu.
It is recommended that after creating new layers, you select each
layer set one after the other in the dialog box, set the new layers’
visibility and locking as desired, and click the Modify button for
each layer set.
To Define a New Layer Set:
1) Configure the Layer Listing in the window on the left side of
the Layer Settings… dialog box.
2) Type a name into the Layer Set name field and click Add.
To Modify an Existing Layer Set:
1) Select the layer set’s name in the Layer Set list box.
2) If desired, select the text of the layer set name to be changed,
and enter new text.
3) Modify the layer configuration in the Layer Listing window,
and click the Modify button.
Hint: To add a new Layer Set based on an existing one:
1) Select the name of the Layer Set in the Layer Set list box.
2) Modify the configuration as desired in the Layer Listing area.
3) Type a new name in the Layer Set name field and click the
Add button.
The ArchiCAD Layer
The first item on the Layer list, the ArchiCAD Layer, cannot be
deleted, hidden or locked. This layer collects all those elements
which have lost their layer definitions.

Show All Layers


The Show All Layers command allows you to quickly make all the
elements in all layers visible.

Layer Set Names


The list of layer names at the bottom of the Layers submenu
displays all the Layer Sets currently defined for your selection (see
the Layer Sets section above). These commands allow you to turn
layer sets on or off quickly and easily.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


343
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The currently active layer set is easily identified by the checkmark


preceding its name in the menu listing.

Pens & Colors…


ArchiCAD pen and color assignments are reviewed and modified
using the Pens & Colors… command. In ArchiCAD, pens are
simulated drawing instruments which have a specific color and
line weight.

- You can assign one or several pens to each ArchiCAD


construction element, depending on the element type. The
pens you choose will determine the color and line weight of
elements drawn with that pen.
- You can change the color or line weight for an element by
assigning a different pen to it or by changing the pen
attributes in the Pens & Colors dialog box.

Pens
There are 99 pens represented in the tablet. Their serial numbers
are indicated by their position in the tablet. The top row contains
pens 1 to 10 from left to right, the row below, pens 11 to 20, and
so on.

Colors
There is a default color assignment for each pen, but you can edit
any color for a specific pen by double-clicking its pen box. In the
appearing Edit Color dialog box, you can select color graphically
or numerically by mixing the HSL (Hue–Saturation–Luminosity) or
RGB (Red–Green–Blue) components.
When you click OK, the new color appears in the box for the
given pen.
After the colors have been redefined, the ArchiCAD construction
elements immediately change to the new colors.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


344
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The color assigned to each pen number on your plotter is


determined by the physical color of the pen you put in the
carousel position belonging to that pen number.

Penweights
There are 99 pens defined in ArchiCAD. Different mappings are
used to translate ArchiCAD’s 99 pens into output on the selected
output device. These mappings are summarized in the table
below.

Output Device Pen Assignment

Printer No pen assignments are made, line weights


and colors are represented on the printer if
possible, according to the settings of the Print
dialog box's Options subdialog box.
Pen Plotter ArchiCAD pens are mapped to the pen slots
on the plotter modulo 8. This means that
ArchiCAD pens 1,9,17,15 etc. will be drawn by
pen number 1 on the plotter. ArchiCAD pens
2,10,18,26… will be drawn with plotter pen
number 2 etc. Line weights and colors on the
final output will depend on the actual plotter
pens and may not match the screen.

Raster Plotter No pen assignments are made, line weights


and colors are represented on the plotter if
possible.

PlotMaker Drawings saved as PlotMaker files retain all


their ArchiCAD pen assignment information.
PlotMaker to ArchiCAD pens are mapped to plotter pens
Pen Plotter either manually, or using one of the
predefined mappings. Line weights and colors
will depend on the actual plotter pens and
may not match the screen.
PlotMaker to No pen assignments are made, line weights
Raster Plotter and colors are represented on the plotter if
possible.

ArchiCAD offers user-defined Penweights associated with each of


the 99 Pencolors defined in the Pens & Colors dialog box.
Penweights are measured in points or millimeters, depending on
the current drawing units set in the pop-up menu next to the

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


345
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Penweight edit field. This makes it possible to create floor plans


with a wide range of thick and thin Penweights for first class
graphic presentations or easily readable working drawings.
- Penweights are displayed when you choose True Weight in
Display Options (see above). If Line Weight is set to hairlines,
all lines are one pixel wide.
- Penweights are accurately printed on high–resolution laser
printers or configured plotters (with corresponding pens).
- Separate Pencolors or Penweights can be assigned to line
arrowheads, various dimensioning components and vectored
fill pattern strokes through the corresponding tool and
attribute dialog boxes.
- Penweights are saved when you export ArchiCAD Projects to
PlotMaker using the Save as… command (File menu).
Note: A Penweight of 0.00 always produces the thinnest
weight possible (i.e., one pixel on the screen or a hairline on a
laser printer).

Line Types…
When you choose the Line Types… command, a dialog box is
displayed allowing you to select, modify or delete the standard
line types (solid, dotted, dashed, etc.). You can also define your
own customized line types.

Creating Custom Lines


You can create new line types by clicking the New button. In the
following dialog box, you can choose between creating dashed or

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


346
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

symbolic lines. You can also simply duplicate the currently


selected line type and then modify this copy.

Dashed Lines
After editing the name of the new line to be created, make sure
that Dashed is selected as the line type and press the OK button.
You will then be presented with a dialog box made up of two
basic parts. In the lower part of the box, right under Edit selected
type:, you will be able to graphically edit the first component of
the line you wish to create. The black and white flags represent
sections of the dashed line. New sections can be added or deleted
as needed by moving the little pyramid shaped marker below the
numerical input boxes.

Each black flag represents the end of a dash in the line, the length
of which can be edited either by dragging the flag in a horizontal
direction, or by editing its value in the Dash edit fields. The little
white flags represent the gap between each dash section, and can
be edited similarly. The values in the numerical input boxes are
given in the respective measurement standards defined under the
Drawing Units... section in Preferences (Options menu). If for
example, your drawing units are given in meters, you will be given
a scale in millimeters. Likewise, if you choose feet and inches as
your drawing unit, you will be able to define these values in
inches.
Symbol Lines
Symbolic lines are created by first drawing the stencil on the Floor
Plan, using Lines, Arcs and Hotspots. Once you have finished
drawing the line type stencil, select all of its components using the
Arrow tool and choose Copy from the Edit menu. Now select Line

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


347
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

types... from the Options menu, and click on the New button.
Select Symbol as your line type from the dialog box, and edit the
name you wish to give to this new line.
You will be presented with a new dialog box:

Press the lower button under the graphic editing section labeled
Paste line component. The previously captured line component
will appear in the graphic editing window. You may edit the scale
of both line component and the gap between each component, by
either dragging the little flags in the window or editing the
numeric values underneath. The line component will be scaled as
a whole. Modifications in size are reflected in real time by the
change of the values in the numerical editing boxes.
Notes: Only Arcs, Lines and Hotspots may be used in the
definition of symbolic lines. If the selection of components
copied from the floor plan includes splines, fills, text or other
elements, these will not be pasted into the Line Types dialog
box.
Regular Copy-Paste operations do not function in this dialog box.
Modifying a Symbol Line
If you wish to change a symbolic line after the original
components have been deleted from the Floor Plan, you must first
choose the line to be edited within the Line types... dialog box,
and press the Copy line components button. By pasting these
components on the Floor Plan, they become editable once more.
See the above for details on how to define this newly revised
group of elements into a line type.

Clearing a Line Type


If you wish to delete a line type from the list of those available,
select the line type to be deleted within the Line Types... dialog
box, and press the Clear button.
Note: Line elements whose type has been deleted will be
named Undefined and displayed as Solid Lines.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


348
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Scaling Line Types


The appearance of the lines on the screen, printer or plotter
depends on the following options:
- With this option selected, the line elements are placed on the
worksheet at the given scale and interpreted like other
construction elements. If the scale of the worksheet is
changed, the lines will grow or shrink proportionally.
- With this option selected, the line elements have the same size
as seen in the dialog box regardless of the actual scale.
In all dialog boxes where line types are listed (e.g. Line Types,
Line Settings, Outline of Remote Elements, etc.) the line types are
displayed at the scale in which they were originally defined.
Note: Avoid editing a scaled line type if the drawing scale of
the project is different than that of the line type, as it will be
distorted in the editing field.

Fill Types...
Fills are geometric patterns that can be used for walls, columns,
slabs, pitched roofs and fill polygons. Each fill has two faces:
bitmapped and vectorial. In a project, all fills are displayed either
as bitmapped or vectorial patterns. You can set this option in
Display Options (Options menu).
Selecting the Fill Types… command displays a dialog box that
enables you to edit bitmapped patterns and vectorial hatches for
the Wall and Fills tools. Both of these fill types can be displayed on
screen and printed, but only vectorial hatches can be plotted.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


349
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Clicking the button of the current fill type, a list appears on the
right side of the dialog box, displaying the graphic representation
of all available fill types.

Creating Custom Fills


To create a custom fill pattern, click the New button. In the
following dialog box, you can either create symbol fills or simply
duplicate the current fill type and then modify this copy to meet
your needs.

To get rid of redundant fill types, select the one you want to
remove and click the Clear button.
If you want to change the name of an existing pattern, select the
desired fill type, click the Rename button and type in the new
name.
You can return to the default patterns at any time by choosing
New and Reset from the File menu.

Bitmap Patterns
The smaller pattern window allows you to monitor and edit the
bitmap pixel by pixel. The new pattern remains associated to the
selected name and vector fill. Bitmapped patterns are displayed
much faster than vectorial patterns. They can be printed, but
cannot be scaled, zoomed, or rotated.
To edit bitmapped patterns, select a pattern from the list, then
click with the arrow in the bitmap pattern window to turn pixels
on or off. An example of the modified pattern will be shown in the
pattern list.

Vectorial Patterns
Vectorial patterns are made up of individual line segments as
opposed to bitmapped fill patterns. They are displayed slower in
ArchiCAD, but they can be plotted, scaled, rotated and zoomed.
The large sample window in the left section of the dialog box
displays the vectorial pattern of the selected fill type. The

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


350
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

displayed sample shows the pattern as it would look on the floor


plan at the current zoom level.

You can stretch, shrink in both directions, as well as rotate the


vectorial hatch by typing values into the three edit boxes on the
right of the dialog box. In addition, you can select the desired
zoom level of the sample window by either choosing a standard
scale with the zoom buttons or enterint a nonstandard scale in the
text input window.
Note: The internal geometry of vectorial patterns cannot be
edited in ArchiCAD.
Scaling of Vectorial Patterns
Vectorial patterns can appear with spacing using the Scaled with
Plan option, or in absolute drawing terms using the Scale
Independent option.
- When the Scaled with Plan mode is active, hatch patterns
will remain proportional to your drawing at whatever scale
you set.
- In Scale Independent mode, hatch patterns remain at a
constant size and will not keep their proportions relative to
other drawing elements when you change the scale of the
document.
Note: The selected scaling option applies to the currently
selected fill type only. It is not a universal setting.
For example, use Scale Independent for the simple diagonal
hatching used traditionally for brick walls. The spacing of the lines
will be the same regardless of the scale.
Use Scaled with Plan for a rectangular floor tile pattern created for
a given tile size, like 12" by 12". The vectorial pattern will

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


351
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

accurately show the real number of tiles at any scale. When


combined with the Link To Fill Origin option available for the Fill
tool, you can accurately simulate floor tiling.
To change the vectorial pattern of a specific fill type:
1) Select the fill you want to modify in the list.
2) Click the Clear button.
3) Select another fill from the list which has the desired vectorial
pattern.
4) Click the New button. This will cause the selected pattern to
take the place of the one which was cleared. All elements
which used the cleared pattern will now contain the new one.
5) Set the scaling, orientation and spacing as desired.
6) Click OK when you are finished.

Symbol Fills
Symbolic fills are created by first drawing the stencil on the Floor
Plan, using Lines, Arcs and Hotspots. After finishing the fill type
stencil, select all of its components using the Arrow tool and chose
Copy from the Edit menu. Select Fill types… from the Options
menu, and click on the New button. Select Symbol Fill as your fill
type from the dialog box and edit the name you wish to give to
this new fill.
A new dialog box will appear:

Press the Paste button above the sample window. The previously
captured fill component will appear in the sample window. You
may edit the horizontal and vertical stroke, scale and motif size as
well as the rotation angle by editing the numeric values.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


352
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Notes: Only Arcs, Lines and Hotspots may be used in the


definition of Symbol Fills. If the selection of components
copied from the floor plan includes splines, fills text or other
elements, these will not be pasted into the line types dialog
box.
Regular Copy-Paste operations do not function in this dialog box.
Modifying a Symbol Fill
If you wish to change a symbol fill after the original components
have been deleted from the Floor Plan, you must first choose the
symbol to be edited within the Fill Types… dialog box, and press
the Copy button. By pasting the symbol fill on the Floor Plan, it
becomes editable once more. See the above for details on how to
define this newly revised group of elements into a symbol fill.

Fill Pattern Availability for Tools


Click the checkboxes representative of those elements for which
you would like the fill pattern to be available.

- Top checkbox: 2D Fills.


- Bottom checkbox: Construction elements.
Note: Only vectorial fills are used in Vectorial Hatches (see
Materials).

Displaying Fills
The setting chosen in Display Options/Construction Fills and
Polygon Fills will decide whether bitmapped patterns or vectorial
hatches are displayed.
The printed output also depends on the Display Options setting,
while the plotted output and the drawing exported to PlotMaker
always use vectorial hatches.
See also…
The Display Options command (Options menu) in Chapter 5.

Plotting Fills
The following is a comprehensive table of the behavior of fills on
screen, printers, raster and pen plotters in both ArchiCAD and
PlotMaker.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


353
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Display Options: VECTORIAL HATCHING


Zero Spacing Dense Spacing Valid Spacing
(≤ 0.1 mm) (>0.1 mm)
Screen, Printer None Solid Fill Vectorial
Raster Plotter None Solid Fill Vectorial
Pen Plotter None Solid Fill Vectorial
Display Options: BITMAPPED PATTERN
100 % 75, 50, 25 & 0 %* Other Patterns
Screen, Printer Solid Fill Gray Pattern** 72 dpi bitmap pattern
Raster Plotter Solid Fill Gray Pattern as in vector mode
Pen Plotter as in vector mode
* Standard bitmapped patterns, included in the default fill palette
of ArchiCAD and PlotMaker.
** May be limited to 72 dpi on non-Apple printers with non-Apple
printer drivers (Macintosh only).

Composites…
Walls, Slabs and Roofs can have composite structures. Columns
have separate fills for their Cores and their Veneers.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


354
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Composite Structure List


You can select a Composite Structure from the scrolling list on the
right. Clicking on a composite structure’s name the components
list will be displayed in the editing box on the left side of the
dialog box.

Above the List, three controls allow you to manage the composite
structure list to suit the needs of your Project:
- Add a new composite structure by clicking the Duplicate
button. The currently selected composite structure will then
be duplicated and “copy” will be appended to its name.
- Rename existing composites by clicking the Rename button.
- Delete the active item of the pop-up menu by clicking the
Clear button.

Defining Skins
On the left side of the dialog box, select a skin by clicking either
its name in the list or its corresponding graphic representation.
You can edit the skins individually by using the controls below the
list.
You can modify the thickness, fill pattern, fill orientation and
pencolors of any structural skin.
Independent pencolors can be for both the outline, fill and fill
background of each skin.
To draw the line between two skins, ArchiCAD checks for and
uses the skin with the heavier outline pencolor. In the case of
equal pen weights, the pencolor of the skin lower in the list will
be prioritized.
The orientation of the vectorial fills of walls can optionally follow
the angle of the wall.
Structural (Core) Skins
All composite structures include structural, load-bearing skins,
which play an important role when connecting Walls and
Columns. By default, the structural skin is the thickest one, but
you can change this setting with the corresponding checkboxes.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


355
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

You can choose more than one skin as part of the core, but the
structural skins must be located next to each other.
Note: Fill patterns enabled for walls in the Fill Types dialog
box are available for composite wall skins as well.
Important: When drawing a trapezoid Wall with a composite
fill, you’ll notice that only the Core skins’ thickness follows the
thickness of the Wall along its length.
Availability
Composites are available for walls, slabs and roofs. You can select
the construction elements you wish to use the selected composite
structure type with.
See also…
The Wall, Slab, Roof and Column tools in Chapter 4.

Materials…
Choosing the Materials… command displays the Materials dialog
box which allows you to determine the characteristics of the
materials used for the materials of the construction elements.
The Tool Settings dialog boxes for each 3D drawing tool allow you
to select materials for ArchiCAD construction elements. Shaded
images in the 3D Window will use material colors only, but when
your plans are rendered using the PhotoRender Projection
command (Image menu), all the characteristics of the materials are
used in the rendering process. The Materials dialog box contains
controls for every aspect of ArchiCAD surface materials.

The pop-up menu at the top of the dialog box displays the current
material set available in the project.

Duplicate, Rename & Clear


Three buttons under the material name pop-up menu allow you to
edit the material list.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


356
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

- Click the Duplicate button to add a new material to the list


and rename the copy in the forthcoming subdialog box.
- Click the Rename button to give another name to the selected
material in the list by typing a new name in a subdialog box.
- Click the Clear button to delete the current material from the
list.
Note: If you need a new material, duplicate one which looks
like the one you want. Then you will need little editing to
create the new material.

Editing Materials
You can edit the characteristics of surface materials using the color
and material type functions described below. By selecting a color
and a basic category, even a non-experienced can create attractive
new materials quickly.
Color
Define a color for a material by double–clicking the Color box.
This opens the Edit Color subdialog box where you can select
your color graphically or numerically by mixing the HSL (Hue–
Saturation–Luminosity) or RGB (Red–Green–Blue) components.
Material Type
Select a material type from the Type pop-up menu where several
characteristic surface options can be found.
Auto Preview
You can check the new material by activating the Auto Preview
checkbox. This will demonstrate the new visual attributes with the
currently set sunlight characteristics in the sample box on the left
side of the dialog box.
If you get a “strange” result, make sure that the sunlight color is set
to white.
Note: The Auto Preview function is not available if the Apply
Data file is not properly installed or has been removed from
the ArchiCAD Folder.

Expert…
Clicking the Expert… button expands the Material dialog box to
include a large number of controls for reflection, transparency and
emission attributes. You can also choose options for 3D Hatching
and Textures associated with either standard or custom Materials.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


357
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Note: The dialog box appears in this expand form until you
click the Novice… button.

Reflection Attributes
Most of the reflection attributes of materials are set as a percentage
of their theoretical limit. You can edit the values both numerically
and with a sliding switch.
The Ambient control sets the percentage of ambient light the
material is able to reflect. This determines how much a material is
subject to brightening effects (as opposed to shades or highlights
caused by directional light).
The Diffuse control describes the surface quality of the material.
Uneven or rough surfaces tend to reflect incident, directional light
in a non–directional, diffuse way (set close to 100 %). Diffuse
reflection carries the color of the material rather than the color of
light.
The Specular setting is the opposite of Diffuse. It is a directional
reflection carrying the color of the incident light rather than that of
the material. An extremely smooth and saturated hard surface will
produce strong specular reflections (set close to 100%), while a
soft and light material will produce hardly any (set close to 0%).
Specular Color is theoretically identical to the color of directional
light, but the program lets you define it independently. Double-

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


358
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

click the sample color here to display the Edit Color subdialog
box, in which you can establish your definitions.
Shininess is the ability of a curved surface to reflect directional
light from a point–like source (i.e. sun, flashlight, spots, etc.), in a
more or less focused fashion. The more focused the reflection, the
more shiny the surface appears. Highlights are confined to a small
area if this control is set close to 100, while a low value results in a
wider highlight area.

Transparency Attributes
The following attributes control how light penetrates a specified
material.
Transmittance indicates the percentage of light that can
penetrate the material. Glass is at the top of the scale and opaque
materials are at the bottom.
Attenuation controls how fast transmittance diminishes as the
object’s surface becomes less perpendicular to the viewing
direction. Any number in a continuous range from zero to 100 can
be set.

Emission Attributes
The following attributes control the fluorescence of materials.
Emission color is set by double-clicking the Color box. In the
appearing Edit Color subdialog box, you can select your color
graphically or numerically by mixing the HSL (Hue–Saturation–
Lightness) or RGB (Red–Green–Blue) components.
Attenuation dictates how sharply the intensity of emitted light
decreases as the viewpoint is moved further and further from the
object.

3D Hatching
It is possible to choose a fill pattern for the material that will be
displayed in the 3D Window when choosing Analytic Shading or
Analytic Hidden Lines and switching on 3D Hatching in 3D
Window Settings. You can choose among Fillpatterns available for
the Fill tool.
Note: 3D Hatching does not affect PhotoRenderings, so its
effect cannot be seen in the sample box.
See also…
Image Menu/3D Window Settings... later in this Chapter.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


359
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Textures
You can associate a Texture to any standard or custom Material.

The name of the selected Texture appears in this area, and it is


also displayed with the Material’s name in the Material pop-up
palettes.
A sample of the Texture is shown above the Texture’s name, and it
is also applied in the Auto Preview area, provided that the Apply
Data file has been correctly installed.
- Clicking Clear in this area will dissociate the Texture from the
Material.
- Clicking the Edit Texture button will access the Texture
Settings dialog box where you can either choose a Texture
from your active Library set if none has been assigned to the
Material, or replace the Texture with another one that has
been assigned previously to a Material.
The Texture Settings dialog box contains a number of options for
editing textures.

The name of the currently active texture file is displayed in the title
of the dialog box. The size in pixels of the image is also shown.
In the left part of the dialog box, a sample box displays the texture
as it would look in a simple square. With the pop-up menu below

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


360
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

the sample box, you can choose a ratio for repeating the same
texture at the given dimensions.
In the middle section of the dialog box, a number of controls
allow you to define the size, angle, origin and proportions of the
texture as it appears on the elements that share the material the
texture is associated to.
- The first two edit fields define the vertical/horizontal
proportion of the texture.
- Checking the Keep Original Proportions checkbox below
these fields will ensure that you see the proportions of the
original texture file on all elements.
- The next edit field allows you to define an angle at which the
texture is applied to elements.
- You can also choose, with a set of radio buttons, the way the
texture sequence is arranged by rotating and mirroring
operations.
- Activating the Random Origin checkbox will choose a
random point where applying the texture starts from. This
option is useful if there are several identical elements in the
model that should look different.
At the right side of the dialog box, options are provided for Alpha
Channel control.
In 32-bit color images, the Alpha Channel is an extra channel in
addition to RGB components that can be edited in painting
applications like Adobe Photoshop. ArchiCAD allows you to take
advantage of the information placed in the Alpha Channel in
several ways, e.g. for masking elements in PhotoRenderings.
Surface: If the alpha value is white, then you get the color of the
texture, while if it is black, then the material’s original color will be
valid in the given pixel of the given surface. If the value is a shade
of grey, than the two colors will be mixed and the result will
appear in the PhotoRendering.
Ambient: The same as above, but applied to the Ambient color
instead of the Surface color.
Specular: Controls to what extent the Specular effect is taken into
account. If the alpha value is white, the Specular effect is entirely
taken into account at the given pixel. If the alpha value is black,
the Specular effect is entirely disregarded at the given pixel. Here
again, intermediary values are allowed.
Diffuse: Controls the effect of diffuse light the same way as
above.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


361
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Bump Mapping: Controls the surface normal at the given pixel,


allowing for a convex effect on the surface. White values represent
bumps, while black values represent holes.
Transparency: If the value is white, then the color of the texture
is visible; if it is black, the texture will be perfectly transparent at
the given pixel. Intermediary values are allowed.
At the bottom of the dialog box, a set of Search buttons are
available for browsing through texture files of the active libraries.
File formats available for textures include PICT, TIFF and GIF on
the Macintosh, BMP, TIFF, GIF and JPEG on Windows. Only BMP
and TIFF files can hold alpha channel information on Windows.
Note: Unlike for Library Parts, only files residing in the Active
Library Set are available for selection. If you save your Project
as an Archive, all associated Textures can be saved with the
Plan by checking in the Linked Textures checkbox. If a
linked texture is missing from the Active Library, its name will
appear in the Missing Library Items list.
See also…
The Save Special/Archive… command’s description (File menu).

Zone Categories
Zones sharing the same function or purpose can be grouped in
categories. ArchiCAD’s Zone Categories enable you to take
optimally advantage of the possibilities offered by the Zone tool.
Zone Categories are defined by the following set of attributes:
- Category Code aids in the fast identification of the categories,
and in some countries this number can be set according to the
local standard. It can also appear in the zone stamp.
- Category Name describes the purpose or functionality of the
category. Please note that the zones have their own names,
which can be different from the category names.
- Category Color helps to identify the zones of the same
category on the Floor Plan.
- A Zone Stamp can be assigned to each zone category. You
can set default values for the parameters of each category.
When you choose the Zone Categories command, a dialog box is
displayed, allowing you to create, modify or delete zone
categories.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


362
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Creating Zone Categories


Predefined zone categories are displayed In the upper left part of
the dialog box. If you want to add a new category, click on the
New button and fill in the Name and Code fields. By double-
clicking the Color box, you can assign any color to the specified
category.
You can select a zone stamp for the new category by clicking the
arrow icons in the zone stamp preview area (bottom left) or by
selecting a new library part by clicking the pop-up menu beside
the name of the zone stamp.

Clearing Zone Categories


You can delete a zone category by selecting the category in the
category list and clicking the Clear button.

Default Parameters of Zone Stamps


The default parameters of the zone stamp can be adjusted in the
parameter list of the stamp assigned to the current category.
Some of these parameters are used in special fields of the Zone
Settings dialog box:
- zone name
- zone number
- zone level
- zone height

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


363
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The default values you enter here will appear in the Zone Settings
dialog box when you select the given zone category.
The parameter list of the stamp contains many more elements than
that of the Zone Settings dialog box.
Some of the parameters are internal variables of the Zone library
part. These variables are assigned values when you define the
zone in the Floor Plan. Depending on the design of the zone
stamp, these variables may also be displayed in it. When the zone
is defined, the default values are automatically overwritten with
real, measured values.
The internal variables of the default parameter list are:
- Measured Area
- Zone Perimeter
- Zone Hole Perimeter
- Walls along Perimeter
- Surrounding Wall Surface
- Total Doors Surface
- Total Doors Width
- Total Windows Surface
- Total Windows Width
- Convex Corners
- Concave Corners
The user-defined variables of the Zone library part appear at the
end of the default parameter list. These parameters also appear in
the parameter list of the Zone Settings dialog box.
See also…
The Zone tool in Chapter 4 and the List Setup and Zone List
commands (Calculate menu) later in this Chapter.

Preferences
When you choose the Preferences hierarchical menu item, a
submenu is displayed containing the seven preference commands,
as well as the Menu Shortcut Keys command allowing you to
customize menu shortcuts.
All of these commands in turn access dialog boxes that control
operational options that streamline your everyday use of
ArchiCAD. The preference command list is also accessible at the
top of each of the seven preference dialog boxes. The sections

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


364
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

which follow describe the individual preference settings and the


use of the ArchiCAD Preferences file.

Drawing Units
The Drawing Units dialog box controls the drawing unit system
used, the fractions or number of decimals to be displayed, the
angle unit system, angle accuracy and the desired decimal display
of text height and rotation angle values in dialog boxes, the
Coordinate Box and the Info Box.

The following five length units and Angle Unit Systems are
available:

Surveyor’s Unit angles are measured from the North direction (set
in the Sun dialog box), in every other case angles are measured
counterclockwise from the horizon.
The accuracy of numeric and angular display, as well as the
decimal displaying of the text height and rotation angle values,
can be set using the corresponding pop-up menus.

Dimensions
Dimension preferences provide a mechanism for customizing and
storing different Dimensioning Standards. This is useful for
working on several Projects with differing levels of accuracy

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


365
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

(construction details versus site plans) or Projects being built in


countries other than those in which they are designed.
Several recognized standards and numeric display options are
offered in the Dimensions dialog box.
You can modify the accuracy of the different dimensioning tools,
apply the usual predefined standards like US Builder or DIN, or
define your own customized settings.

You can independently customize the dimension settings and


define the units for the different dimensioning tools in this dialog
box: Linear, Angular, Radial, Level and Elevation Dimensions,
Window/Door Dimensions, Sill height values and Fill Areas.
You can even independently define the number of decimals you
want to display for each tool.
The Dimensions dialog box also provides options for:
- suppressing zero values: 0.25 meters is displayed as 25 and
1.25 meters is displayed as 1.25;
- forcing the display of zero inch values: 1/2” is displayed as 0
1/2”.
In the bottom of the dialog box, a sample gives you feedback
about the number format for the defined settings.

Mouse Constraints
The Mouse Constraints dialog box provides control over the angle
pairs used for Mouse Constraint with the Shift key.
Note: When using the Relative Construction Methods in the
Control Box to set a reference edge or vector, the value in the
Custom Angle pair field is overwritten with the angle of that
element edge/vector. If you disable the Custom Angle pair

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


366
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

value in this dialog box and then use one of the Relative
Construction Methods, the Custom angle pair is re-enabled
with that angle value.

See also…
Refer to the Mouse Constraints section in Chapter 2 for further
details on Mouse Constraint mechanisms and options.

Remote Elements
The Remote Elements dialog box allows you to define the line
type used for displaying construction lements on stories other than
the one they were created on. You can decide to display Slabs,
Roofs, Meshes and Objects on their own stories only, one story
above and/or below, or on all stories, by using the corresponding
checkboxes of their dialog boxes. The available line types are
those defined by the Line Types command.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


367
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Imaging and Listing


The Imaging and Listing dialog box provides options for
rebuilding the 3D Window, monitoring rendering progress,
creating reports, and dealing with error alerts.

Auto-Rebuild
With Auto-rebuild on, the 3D display of your plan is updated after
each modification to the floor plan as soon as you activate the 3D
Window.
With Auto-rebuild off, the 3D model does not show the
modifications until you choose the Rebuild command (Display
menu). Switching this option off can be useful if you want to keep
an already existing 3D image in the window for a longer period,
and you want to avoid accidental rebuilding of it.
3D Settings Changes...
With this option on, changes to the 3D imaging settings
automatically bring the 3D Window to the foreground and start the
imaging process.
When this option is off, you can modify both the projection and
the imaging method, so that imaging will not be started between
modifications.
You can also work extensively in the 3D Projection Settings dialog
box, so that clicking OK will keep your settings but will not initiate
imaging.
Keep Zoomed Detail...
Selecting this checkbox will keep the zoomed part of the 3D view
in the window even when the 3D Window is rebuilt. When this

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


368
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

option is off, rebuilding the 3D Window will recreate the 3D view


at the original zoom level.
Show Progress Window
With this option on, the progress of 3D and list processing is
indicated by a special timer. This will help you judge when to
cancel lengthy 3D redraws or calculations.
Note: The movement of the indicator is not proportional with
the elapsed time, but with the amount of data processed.
Interrupt with Error Messages
This control will allow error messages to appear on the screen
before the imaging process is completed. If it is off, error messages
will appear in the Report window.
Write Report
The Report is more than just a list of alerts. It can be used to keep
track of, and then compare imaging time of different images. Any
time the 3D Window is rebuilt, the Report window is cleared and
comments are rewritten from the beginning. New projections, 3D
sections or renderings after rebuilding will not clear the report
window, and the new comments are added to the end.

Data Safety
The Data Safety dialog box contains a number of features to
minimize the risk of data loss and file corruption. This is especially
important if your power lines suffer from voltage spikes or
failures, or if your computer is prone to software conflicts.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


369
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Autosave
The Autosave function controls a number of options protecting
you against losing work. If you are forced to restart your computer
for any reason, the next time you launch ArchiCAD, a dialog box
gives you the option of resuming the interrupted work.
When Autosave is triggered, the Bulldozer cursor may appear
momentarily on the screen. Any changes made to the Project since
the last Autosave (or manual Save) are stored in the ArchiCAD
Temporary Folder. Even with large Projects, Autosave should
complete its very efficient cycle within a few seconds.
Autosave is On by default. To turn it on manually, simply open the
Data Safety dialog box and click the Autosave On radio button.
Click the Autosave Off radio button if you’re sure that you will not
need Autosave.
To configure the Autosave method, click either of the Save every…
radio buttons. The two options operate as follows:
- By selecting the interval–based method, you can enter a value
(measured in seconds) for the length of Autosave’s wait cycle
between saves.
- Selecting the action–based method and entering a value
triggers Autosave after you perform that number of undoable
actions in the Project.
As opposed to a manual save, you can still use Undo and Redo
commands (Edit menu) after Autosave performs its operation,
unlike in the case of a manual Save.
There are three limitations to Autosave functions. The following
items must be manually saved:
- Open Library Parts
- Completed PhotoRendering Images
- All types of Calculation Lists
Undo Limit
An edit field below the Autosave options allows you to set the
number of undoable steps. The default value is 20. See Undo and
Redo in the Edit menu.
Backup Copy
Selecting the Backup Copy checkbox will always create a backup
copy of the previously saved version of your work, by appending
the “.bak” extension to its name.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


370
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Permanent Integrity Checking


Activate this checkbox is active to continuously check the integrity
of the data in your Project (not only on opening and saving files).
Should any of the data in your file be corrupted, ArchiCAD will
immediately try to repair it and inform you of the result.

Miscellaneous
The Miscellaneous dialog box contains a number of various
options including the location of the ArchiCAD temporary folder.

Cursor Snap Range


The setting in the Cursor Snap Range edit box controls the range
over which cursor gravity is applied.
Cursor tolerance can be set between 0 and 9 pixels. This range is
the screen distance from which the cursor can grab a hotspot or an
edge. You can go closer to an element without gravitating to it if
you zoom in.
A small tolerance may slow down construction, because you will
have to locate the appropriate points quite closely. At the same
time, this limitation helps considerably when you want to
distinguish elements which are very close to one another. With a
higher tolerance, you may need an extra zoom or two. A higher
tolerance, however, is generally better for quick, rough drawings.
In practice, a value of 1 is better for accuracy, and a value of 3 for
fast, easy working.
Note: The zero value turns off the cursor snap feature.
See also…
Chapter 3 for more information on cursor snap tolerance.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


371
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Line Drawing
The Line drawing options affect all onscreen vector drawing
operations such as drawing walls or dragging an element.
Two drawing methods are provided to suit individual drawing
preferences. The Mac-like (Macintosh) or Standard (Windows)
mode, and the CAD-like (Macintosh) or CAD (Windows) mode.
With the Standard drawing method:
- Click and drag the element you want to move.
- Release the button.
For multistep operations such as drawing arcs, the first vector is
entered by dragging, then the following steps are entered in CAD-
like mode as described below. If you press x, y, r, or a in the
middle of a Standard drawing operation, or if you release the
mouse button on the tool window or in the menubar, CAD-like
control will temporarily be in effect.
With the CAD-like drawing method:
- Click at the starting point.
- Move to the endpoint and click again
Background Appearance
You can choose from using the drawing background, transparent
fills or the fills’ background color for displaying sections of
constructions.
Display Startup Dialog Box
If this option is checked a dialog box appears on the screen when
starting ArchiCAD, which allows you to choose from creating a
new project, opening a project, signing in to a Team Project
(TeamWork only) or opening any existing document.
Auto Plan Redraw
If this option is checked, floor plans are automatically redrawn
after each modification.
Enable Drag-and-Drop
With this option you can control the availability of the Drag and
Drop function. See description in Chapter 2.
Auto ID Increase
Using this checkbox, the ID number will automatically increase
when creating a new element.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


372
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Hide Locked Layers in Pop-up Palettes


If this option is checked, locked layers will not be shown in any of
the layer pop-up palettes. You can of course still see them by
choosing Options/Layers and change their status if needed.
Temporary Folder Location
This option controls which of your computer’s disk volumes will
house the ArchiCAD Temporary Folder. The Volume button is
available if more than one volume is connected to your computer
either directly or across a network. It is grayed out and unavailable
if there are no such volumes.

This option allows you to relocate the ArchiCAD Temporary


Folder to an additional large hard disk volume in order to save
space on the startup volume and allow for the expansion of the
Temporary Folder’s contents.
The ArchiCAD Temporary Folder stores several important files,
including:
- Autosave documents for restoring interrupted work.
- 3D disk buffers which change size during 3D Projections (on
the Macintosh) or PhotoRendering operations according to
image complexity.
On the Macintosh, very large hard disks are recommended for
advanced imaging, because the Temporary Folder can expand to
dozens of megabytes when rendering a very complex project with
shadow casting.
ArchiCAD for Windows keeps this data in the virtual memory. Set
the limitation of the page file to the highest possible value when
rendering complex models with shadow casting.
When using remote network volumes, ArchiCAD’s operations may
be affected by the network performance capabilities. Volumes
connected directly by SCSI (Small Computer Systems Interface)
cables are recommended for best performance, regardless of the
complexity of the work you are doing.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


373
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Note: If your startup volume does not have the recommended


amount of free space when you launch ArchiCAD, you will
have the opportunity (through an alert box) to select another
volume during the startup process.

Menu Shortcut Keys


This command allows you to define your own shortcuts to each
menu command.

Choose a menu name from the pop-up menu, then select a


command from the Commands window.
You can create a shortcut to the selected item by defining a
character combination on the right side of the dialog box.
Confirm the defined shortcut by clicking the Assign button. If you
don’t need the selected shortcut any more, click Detach.

You can define whole Schemes of shortcuts by clicking the Save


as… button. This way, it is possible for different users working on
the same machine have their own favorite settings by just choosing
a Scheme Name in this dialog box.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


374
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The Image Menu


The Image menu contains all the commands related to 3D imaging
and photorealistic rendering.
The Image menu is organized as follows:
- The top three commands control overall imaging concerns
including the Projection Settings feature, the selective image
item filtering capabilities and the basic characteristics of the
3D Window.
- The next two commands control ArchiCAD’s special 3D
section cutting capabilities which can “slice” a Project in
several directions at the same time to provide either standard
architectural sections or special partial views of the Project.
- The four basic Rendering Modes are next. Block mode, the
fastest, is at the top of this group, and Shading, which creates
views where all visible surfaces are rendered according to the
color associated with their material specifications, comes last.
Note that imaging time depends not only on the selected
mode but also on the settings made in the 3D Window
Settings dialog box.
- The PhotoRendering, animation and sunstudy controls come
next. With these menu items, you can create the most
elaborate still and animated images ArchiCAD is capable of,
including special VR (virtual reality) scenes.

3D Projection Settings…
Before you display a 3D view or ask for a photorealistic rendering,
you can choose from a number of view options in the 3D
Projection Settings dialog box.
There are two main dialog boxes for setting up 3D views: Parallel
Projection Settings and Perspective Settings. You can easily switch
from one to the other with the button at the top right corner.

Perspective Settings
ArchiCAD gives you full control over the look of the perspectives
you generate for your project. You can easily set all the relevant
parameters, such as viewpoint location and elevation, target
location and elevation, width of the viewing cone, and sun
position, as described below.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


375
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

To display the resulting view, click the OK button in the lower


right corner.

Projection Preview Area


The preview area on the left side of the dialog box shows your
floor plan as it currently appears in the Floor Plan. To see various
parts of the project, leave the dialog box, set another detail of the
plan with any of the Display operations, and then open it again.
Editing Perspectives
The solid line in the preview area represents the line of vision
between the viewpoint and the target point. You can click and
drag both the target point and the viewpoint independently of one
another. Click anywhere in the preview area and the line of vision
will be rotated around the target point to your click position.
The angle defining the View Cone is displayed in the preview
area and provides reliable information if the line of vision is
horizontal. If the line of vision is looking up or down, the angle
can be used only for estimating the resulting view.
You can also numerically specify the location of the viewpoint
with respect to the target in the Distance and Azimuth edit boxes
on the right side of the dialog box, and their effects will be
displayed graphically in the preview area. (In this case, the
position of the target will remain unchanged.) The elevation of the
viewpoint and the target point, as well as the View Cone and Roll
Angle of the Camera must be set numerically by using the
remaining edit boxes.
Hints
1) For a one point perspective, set the viewpoint and target point
elevation to the same value. Set the viewpoint Azimuth
parallel to the principal axis of the project.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


376
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

2) For a two point perspective, set the viewpoint and target point
elevation to the same value. The other settings can have any
value.
3) For a three point perspective, set the viewpoint and target
point elevation to different values.
4) To get a top view in perspective, set the viewpoint elevation
higher than that of the target point elevation, drag the target to
the desired location on the plan, then set the distance to zero
by dragging the viewpoint until the numeric field displays
zero. (You cannot type zero in the Distance field.)
5) For a fast preview of projections, use the Block 3D modeling
option described below. You can check the general look of
the projections very quickly in the 3D Window this way.
Resetting Viewpoint & Target
After zooms, pans, or numeric distance settings, the viewpoint
and/or target point may occasionally disappear from the preview
area. To retrieve them, simply Shift-click where you want the
viewpoint and Option-click/Alt-click where you want the target
point to be in the window. They will immediately move to the
points where you clicked. (See the Display menu later in this
chapter for information on Zoom and Pan.)
Note: If you need to change the direction only of the
viewpoint, you can do so by simply clicking into the preview
window.
Cameras and Perspectives
You can copy a camera’s settings into the Perspective Settings
dialog box by selecting a single camera on the Floor Plan and
opening 3D Projection Settings. You cannot, however, modify a
camera using this dialog box.
Light Direction Setting (Sun)
In the projection preview area, the dashed line from the center of
the area with a sun icon at its end shows the direction of light for
shaded and rendered representations. The sun icon can be
dragged around the perimeter of the plan, but it cannot be
positioned closer. Its distance is regarded as infinite. Both its
Altitude and Azimuth can be set numerically in the edit boxes
below the viewpoint and target settings.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


377
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

More Sun…
Clicking the More Sun… button gives access to the Sun subdialog
box for a series of more sophisticated sunlight settings (used for
photorenderings).

Note: This dialog box can also be opened from the Camera
Settings dialog box.
Sunlight Parameters
Characteristics of light can be set in the upper part of the Sun
dialog box.
Double-click the color box to go to the Edit Color subdialog box.
The color of directional light (with a color intensity between 0 and
100%) can be set here.
- You can decide how much of the directional light is
represented in nondirectional, ambient light.
- Both the color and intensity of directional light can affect the
ambient light, according to the percentage specified in the
Contribution to Ambient (%) field.
Ambient Light
As opposed to directional light (e.g. the sun), ambient light is
nondirectional and can stand as a substitute for the rich reflected
and inter-reflected light experienced in a real environment. It can
brighten otherwise overshadowed surfaces.
Ambient light may have its own color (in a pink room for instance)
and its intensity may have to vary to obtain special effects in
renderings.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


378
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

- Its color is set through the Edit Color subdialog box. Double-
click the sample color to open it.
- Its intensity can be set between 0 and 100%.
Fog
To further enhance the realism of your renderings, this
atmospheric effect alters light in proportion to the distance from
your viewpoint. You can set the color of the fog by double-
clicking its sample box to access the Edit Color dialog box. You
can also set one of four levels of intensity for the effect with the
radio buttons.
(To achieve a typical misting effect, set the color to white, and this
will fade the more distant objects. To use light decay, set the fog
color to black, and this will darken the more distant objects.)
Note: In order to apply this effect, make sure that Fog is
activated in the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box, described
below.
Apply
Click this button to test the sunlight, ambient light and fog settings
you have made on a neutral white material.
Set City...
Click the Set City… button to specify a geographical location by
latitude and longitude, or by specifying a major city close to your
site from the scrollable list.

Adding a New Location


1) Type the following into the appropriate edit boxes:
– the name of the locale,

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


379
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

– the exact global coordinates, and


– the time zone of the site.
2) Click the Add button.
The new location now appears in its alphabetical position in the
list.
Deleting a Location
1) Select the city name to be deleted by clicking on it in the list.
The name will be highlighted.
2) Click the Clear button.
Setting Date & Time
In the Sun subdialog box, you can specify the date and time of day
(just below the Set City button). The +1 h correction (Summer
Time) checkbox lets you adjust for daylight savings.

As a result of all these specifications, you can get the exact


direction readings of the sun, with an icon indicating if it is day or
night.
Orientation
The orientation of your floor plan is defined by setting the North
direction relative to the floor plan’s orientation on screen. You can
drag the compass needle or type in the angle numerically, relative
to the X axis of your sheet.
If you define the sun position by defining a location with date and
time, its azimuth settings will be calculated with respect to this
orientation (where East is at 0.00 degrees).
Note: When using surveyor’s units (in Preferences/Drawing
Units), the North of the Coordinate Box will be the same as
the one set here.

Parallel Projection Settings


In the Parallel Projection Settings dialog box, the selections of the
projection type pop-up palette offer a wealth of projection
options, while the preview area and viewpoint control let you
easily fine-tune a desired view.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


380
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

You can choose from 12 Projection types to make a view of your


project, including predefined axonometrics, side, top and bottom
views, and your own custom-defined axonometrics.
You can check the view given by the chosen projection type and
any additional settings you have made by referring to the simple
house in the preview window in the left part of the dialog box.
For each Projection type, the edit boxes at the top of the dialog
box show the defining angles and scaling ratios of the x, y and z
coordinate axes.

Customized Axonometrics
You can create your own customized axonometry either by
entering values for the angles and ratios of the three coordinate
axes or by manipulating the house icon in the preview area:
- To rotate an axis about the origin, click on or near it and drag it
to the desired orientation.
- To rescale and rotate an axis, click within the circle at its
endpoint and drag it to the desired position. (If you only want to
rescale, it is easier to enter a value in the edit box.)
The adjustments you make here are continuously reflected both by
the values displayed in the edit boxes, and by the distortion of the
house icon itself.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


381
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Viewpoint and Sun Angles


You can set the direction of your view and the position of the sun
with the controls and edit boxes to the right of the preview area.
Just as for perspective projections, the distance of the sun from the
target is considered to be infinite, and for parallel projections the
viewpoint distance is infinite as well.

Simply click the Sun or Camera icon and drag it to the desired
location. The effect of your changes is shown by the rotation of
the house in the preview area and by the values in the edit boxes
to the right of the control.
To move the camera or the sun in 45° increments, click once near
the desired direction on either of the gray circles.
To move them in 5° increments, drag the camera or sun icon.
To move to any in-between position, type the desired numeric
value into the edit fields.
The Azimuth of the camera and the sun can be set either
graphically or numerically, but the sun Altitude angle can only be
set numerically.
Hint: Unless you are an experienced ArchiCAD user, it is
generally best to begin with a predefined projection from the
palette, then rotate the view with the camera angle control,
and finally make minor adjustments with the rescaling
features.
More Sun...
You can open the More Sun subdialog box from this window. See
its description under Perspective Projections above for detailed
information.
Recording Parallel Projections
The Pre-Sets Button opens a subdialog box where you can store
and retrieve settings. You can also use this sequence of
axonometric views for a future animation. Animations based on
axonometric views are not fly-throughs in the same sense as
perspectives, even though they are created with the same

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


382
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

command. Using in-between frames, you will get an animated


metamorphosis from one projection to the other.

The Add Current Projection button places the current view on


the list. The views on the list will be keyframes in the Fly-Through.
You can also name each keyframe in the dialog box that appears
after pushing this button.
If no projection is selected, New will be added as last. If any
projection is selected, the new projection will be inserted before
that one.
The Set to Current Projection button changes the highlighted
keyframe in the list to the one you set prior to opening the Pre-set
dialog box.
The Clear button clears a keyframe from the list.
Under Options for Fly-Through in the bottom left part of the
dialog box you can also set the number of in-between frames that
ArchiCAD will create by interpolating between every parameter
(e.g. axis scaling ratio, camera angle, etc.) of consecutive
keyframes.
The Open and Close radio buttons control whether the animation
will loop continuously from the last defined keyframe back to the
first keyframe during the Fly-Through.
Wait frames have the same effect as described for the Camera
tool in Chapter 4.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


383
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Select Image Items…


Choosing the Select Image Items… command displays a dialog
box from which you can select the ArchiCAD construction
elements to be imaged in the 3D Window and in the Section/
Elevation Windows. Selecting elements on the floor plan (except
with a selection Marquee) will override any setting in this dialog
box.
You can select parts of the floor plan and get a 3D view or save a
GDL script of these parts only. This feature is very useful for
complex models, where the conversion of a whole floor plan
might take a considerable amount of time to process.
Selective modeling can be accomplished by selecting the desired
items from the floor plan prior to modeling, or by choosing among
the options offered in the Select Image Items dialog box.

Stories to Image
The stories to be modeled can be specified both in a continuous
range, as well as through the All Stories option. This is subject to
selections on the floor plan.

Element Types
The Element Types to Image checkboxes allow you to turn
construction elements on and off. With doors and windows
switched off, openings are interpreted as empty holes. Individual
selections overrule these settings. Selection marquee selections
will observe the settings here.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


384
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Marquee Effect
If you use the Marquee tool to create a selection rectangle prior to
modeling, it can be used directly or inversely through a third set of
options. With inverse use you can exclude internal elements of a
house when you need only external views of the 3D model. The
Marquee can affect multiple stories, not just the current story, as
described in Chapter 4: Marquee tool.
If the Trim Elements to Marquee checkbox is checked, the model
will be clipped at the Marquee’s boundaries. Otherwise the model
will not be clipped, but all those elements will be displayed which
has at least one hotspot inside the Marquee.

3D Window Settings…
Choosing the 3D Window Settings… command displays a dialog
box that allows you to define the characteristics of the image in
the 3D Window.
The settings you can make are categorized as follows:
- Methods, where you can set different parameters of Hidden
Line and Shaded 3D Modes,
- Effects, where you can specify the use of 3D hatching and
shadow-casting, and
- Display, where you can set the size and background of the
3D Window, as well as line weight used in the display.
Each of the 3D Window controls are discussed below.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


385
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Hidden Line Mode


You can choose whether to have a hidden line projection of your
project executed by the Analytic or the Raster method.
Hidden Line views created with the Analytic method offer a more
accurate display.
Making a Hidden Line view using the Raster method is
recommended for fast feedback on screen, when extreme model
complexity makes the Analytic method too slow.
Shaded Mode
In shaded mode you can choose between Analytic and Raster
computational methods, which work as described for Hidden Line
above. Some of the important features of the two methods are
listed below.
Analytic shading:
- accurate surface polygons;
- zoomable image, resolution-independent;
- 3D hatching and 3D shadows can be applied;
- can be saved in several formats including PlotMaker;
- plottable at any size with HP DesignJet raster plotters.
Raster shading:
- bitmapped image;
- no effects are available, cannot be plotted.
You can also choose whether or not you want to see the contours
of the elements in Shaded Mode. The contours are lines showing
the edges of model elements.
- The Draft option produces a fast result, but it doesn’t
eliminate all the lines that the Hidden Line Analytic method
would.
- The Best option produces a perfect result, but it may be rather
slow for large and complex 3D models.
Vertical Raster Strips
With this control you can specify the number of vertical strips used
to model your Raster Hidden Line or Raster Shaded models. More
strips will produce a more realistic image but will take longer to
process.
For fast but clean images, select 3 to 10 vertical strips, depending
on your screen size. Do not go beyond 50 strips, as this will
usually not enhance the image any more, but will take more time

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


386
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

to calculate. Beyond a limit, the only way to get better images is by


using the Analytic Hidden Line, the Analytic Shading or
PhotoRendering methods.
Vectorial 3D Hatching
This effect is available only for Analytic Shaded or Analytic Hidden
Line images. If you have already selected a 3D Hatching in the
Expert Material dialog box for any material you are using in your
Project, you can decide if you want to display this material in the
3D view with or without the hatching. An example of roof tile
material with roof tile 3D Hatching is shown below.

See also…
Choosing materials and hatching patterns is discussed under the
Options menu/Materials... command in this Chapter.
Transparency in Shading
This control allows you to view elements with a transparent
material definition in shaded views and not only in
photorendering. This option is not available when printing to a
PostScript printer.
Vectorial Sun Shadows
In the 3D Window you can enable ArchiCAD’s shadow-casting
capability, as well as specify that shadow contours be shown, if
you wish.
Note: ArchiCAD calculates the shadow of each individual
element in your model. If you choose Contours Off, each
shadow remains an independent entity, but if you choose
Contours On, the individual shadows are merged into each
other where they overlap, resulting in one - or a few - large
shadows. (You would notice this if you saved the 3D image as

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


387
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

a 2D file and selected a shadow area for editing. If the view


was generated with Contours Off, you could select and move
each individual shadow. Otherwise, clicking the shadow area
would select it in its entirety.)

If the displaying of shadows is enabled, you can decide whether


you want to see the shadows on all surfaces or only at a single,
horizontal level. The latter option is useful for shadow studies in
top view.
Window Size in Pixels
This control allows you to define the 3D Window size, measured
in horizontal and vertical pixels.
It is possible to keep its proportions by selecting the checkbox.
Note: You can match the size of the PhotoRendering to that of
the 3D Window in the PhotoRendering Settings/Image Size &
Background dialog box.
Line Weight
This control allows you to choose the line weight used (one or
two pixels wide) in Block, Wireframe and Hidden Line mode as
well as for the contours of Shaded images.
Background
You can select a Single Color background for your 3D Views or
choose the same background as the one set for PhotoRenderings.
The color(s) or picture you set there will appear behind the 3D
model.

3D Cutting Planes…
Choosing the 3D Cutting Planes… command displays the 3D
Section dialog box. By using 3D sections, you can get either
ordinary cross sections or special sections to visualize the project
in new ways. This command is not available if the 3D window is
closed or empty.
Note: While the Section/Elevation tool is best suited for
sectional drawings, 3D Cutaway can be useful for special 3D
visualizations allowing an insight into building spaces.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


388
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The 3D Section dialog box has options for controlling all aspects
of the 3D section process. Each of the controls in the dialog box
are described in the following sections.

Cutting 3D Sections
The three basic orthogonal representations of your building (front,
side and top) are displayed in the 3D Section dialog box.
To create a section, draw a line through any of the views which
represents a cutting plane perpendicular to the given orthogonal
view. The Eyeball cursor appears after you have drawn each line,
prompting you to click on whichever side of the line you would
like removed. The parts of the project views displayed as shaded
will be removed, leaving a sectional view of the model.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


389
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

To create ordinary cross sections, draw a single line and set a view
in the 3D Parallel Projection Settings which is perpendicular to the
section plane.
When drawing the line, you can use the rulers or numeric input
the same way as on the floor plan. If you miss with your first
attempt, double-click the line of the cutting plane with the
Mercedes cursor. The line is removed and you can start another.
If you want to remove all cutting planes, click the Clear All
Cutting Planes button.
When the cutting planes are correct, click the OK button to return
to the 3D model.
Hint: The number of cutting possibilities offered here is much
greater than you generally need in architecture. You can,
however, make good use of them when you are dealing with
non-orthogonal details or when showing material cutaways.
For generating straightforward sections, use the Section/
Elevation tool. (See Chapter 4.)

Highlighting Cut Surfaces & Edges


The Fill Material & Edge Pen of Cuts controls allow you to
highlight the edges and surfaces of elements cut in 3D Sections.
You can create special section cut surfaces with different colored
edges, as well as cut surfaces having custom material definitions.
These attributes are used on all 3D elements which are cut by the
3D Cutting Plane, helping to emphasize the cut surface areas.
To create such highlighting, click the Custom radio button and
choose a material from the pop-up menu and/or a pen from the
palette.
If you click Use Element Attributes, the cut surfaces of Walls, Slabs
and Roofs will have the same colors/materials as the uncut edges
(as defined in their respective settings dialog boxes).
Cut surfaces of library parts will be painted as the material set for
the library part. If the library part has internal material
descriptions, the first one in the script will define the material for
cut surfaces.
Note: The 3D Cutting Planes feature does not show the
various layers of composite walls. To obtain sections showing
these (as required for working drawings, for example) use the
Section/Elevation tool.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


390
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Section Cuts Saved


The 3D section cuts you define are stored within the Project
document and can be recreated after opening the Project in a
future session.

3D Cutaway
3D Cutaway is an imaging mode in ArchiCAD. If it is active, the
cutting places defined in the 3D Cutting Planes dialog box are
applied to the model every time it is rebuilt. To activate 3D
Cutaway, select its menu item. A checkmark placed before the
name of the command indicates that it is active. To deactivate 3D
Cutaway, choose the command again and the checkmark
disappears.
Note: The 3D Window must be open for this command to be
available.

Once the sectional 3D model has been created, you can save it in
a variety of formats for additional work. (See the File menu
commands earlier in this chapter.)

Block
If you choose Block mode, the 3D window will show only the
blocked volume of each element without placing any holes into
them. It uses the Pencolor of each element.
Block is the fastest 3D display format available. It can only be used
for information about the placement of the elements in the project,
but it gives you a quick way to check, for example, whether the
angle of your view is appropriate.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


391
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Note: You can define separate blocks in a 3D GDL description


by using the BODY command. See the GDL Reference
Manual.

Wireframe
Choosing Wireframe mode creates a view showing all the edges
and lines of your Project using the Pencolors of the elements.
This shows much more detail than Block mode but is still quickly
processed. If you have many elements one behind the other, this
type of view can be hard to interpret. For better legibility try the
next mode.

Hidden Line
Choosing Hidden Line mode creates a view like a wireframe but
with those lines which are blocked from view by solid objects
removed. It draws in the Pencolors of the elements.
This type of view is the best choice for easy interpretation, if you
do not want a shaded view. It is also suitable for hard copy output
on a printer.
On pen plotters, Hidden Line views provide the best results,
especially with the Analytic method. Hidden Lines can be saved in
many file formats, either as 2D or 3D files.

Shading
Choosing the Shading method causes your 3D model to appear
with all of its visible surfaces shaded according to the light
direction set in the 3D Projection Settings dialog box. The colors of
the surfaces are determined by the material attributes of the
construction elements (regardless of the color of light set in the
Sun dialog box).
If contours are switched on in the 3D Window Settings... dialog
box, they will appear using the Pencolors of the elements.
Shading is good for:
- Fast on-screen feedback,
- Easy checking of surface colors, and
- In any presentation where photorealistic quality is not a
requirement.
Note: You can trade accuracy for speed in the Hidden Line
and Shading modes by using the Raster rather than the

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


392
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Analytic computation method. See the discussion of 3D


Window Settings above.

The same object in Block, Wireframe, Hidden Lines and Shading


modes

PhotoRendering Settings
The PhotoRendering Settings submenu contains four commands.
These in turn access dialog boxes wherein you can find different
settings for the photorendering process. The four commands are
also available from the top of each of the four dialog boxes. The
following sections describe these dialog boxes.
Note: The speed of PhotoRendering is defined most of all by
image size, while model complexity affects speed if Shadows are
used. The PhotoRendering effects define the final quality or
character of your rendering.

Effects
Choosing Effects displays the following dialog box:

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


393
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

On top of the dialog box, you can choose a photorendering


engine.

Note: The actual contents of this pop-up menu depends on


the rendering engine extensions installed in the Add-Ons
folder.
Method
The Method setting determines how closely the program should
adhere to its ultimate imaging capacity.
With the Best button selected, the program calculates the light
attributes of each pixel. As the choices decrease in quality,
ArchiCAD calculates individual values for every second or third
pixel only. The quality increase will affect curved surfaces more
than others.
Using multiple light sources or picture mapping may require the
Final or Best settings.
The Flat Shading button results in each shape being roughly
approximated by flat surfaces only. Special effects like
Transparency, Smooth Surfaces, Highlights and Light Decay are
unavailable.
The Flat Shading option is faster than all the other options in this
dialog box, but slower than the Shading or Shading with Contour
formats in the original 3D Window.
Antialiasing
The contour quality of your renderings is controlled by the
Antialiasing settings. Jaggedness of the contour is gradually
eliminated as you move from Off to Best.
You may want to use the Best option only for final documents,
since processing time increases as quality increases.
The following series of checkboxes lets you enable a variety of
light and material effects, some of which are initially set in the
Options/Materials dialog box.
Highlights
Specular reflections detailed in the Materials dialog box (Options
menu) are taken into consideration and displayed as highlights in
your PhotoRenderings when this box is checked.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


394
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Note: If Highlights is unchecked, or the Flat Shading method


is used, specular reflections are ignored in the rendering.

Fog
Check this option if you have set fog color and intensity in the 3D
Projection Settings dialog box and wish to use it in your
PhotoRendering.
Note: When the Method control is set to Flat Shading, fog
settings are ignored.

Fog on Fog off


Emission
Check this option if you have chosen, or created, light emitting
materials in the Materials dialog box (Options menu) and want this
quality to be displayed in the renderings.
Note: When the Method control is set to Flat Shading, light
emission from your material is ignored.
Transparency
This option controls whether the transparency of materials will be
taken into account. See the discussion of Options/Materials for
how to set the degree of transparency of various materials.
Note: When the Method control is set to Flat Shading,
Transparency is ignored.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


395
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Smooth Surfaces
Curved surfaces, which are normally approximated by flat planes,
are represented by more lifelike surfaces when this option is on.
The degree of smoothing is set through Method control, with up to
one pixel accuracy.
Note: When Method is set to Flat Shading, no smoothing is
implemented.
Lamp Falloff
If Lamp Falloff is not checked, the angle falloff and distance falloff
values in the GDL Scripts of Lamps will be handled as being zero.
This results in a sharp border between illuminated and dark areas.
If it is checked, the values originally given will be used, resulting
in a smooth transition between illuminated and dark areas.
Note: Lamps must be enabled at the Light Sources checkboxes
for falloff to operate.
Textures
If this box is checked, bitmapped pictures referred to in the GDL
script of some library parts will appear on the corresponding
surfaces.
It also controls whether the textures linked to materials in the
Materials/Expert dialog box are displayed in PhotoRenderings as
described.
Light Sources
You can select which Light Sources (Sun, Lamps or both) you want
to use to illuminate the model during the PhotoRendering process.
You should select at least one of the two choices.
The Lamps checkbox can only be effective if Lamp type library
parts have been placed on the plan. They must be switched on in
their Settings dialog box.
Note: You cannot select Lamps as a light source when the Flat
Shading method is used.
Shadow Casting
Here you can define which of the available light sources you want
to cast shadows in the PhotoRendered picture. Select the High
Accuracy checkbox if you notice incorrect results on your
PhotoRendered picture, especially missing shadows of relatively
small elements. This may occur if you zoom in on a small detail of

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


396
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

an otherwise large project in the 3D Window and make a


photorendering of that detail.
Options…
The Options... button is available only if the ArchiCAD rendering
engine is selected in the PhotoRendering Effects settings dialog
box. By clicking this button you get a new dialog box, where you
can decide about two additional options:

If the Use transparency in shadow calculation checkbox is


checked, ArchiCAD will create different shadows for materials
with different transparency. The color of the transparent material
will also effect the color of the shadow in the final
photorendering. This is also valid for materials with Alpha
channel, where the Alpha channel is used to define the
transparency of the material.
If the 100% antialising checkbox is checked, you will get a much
better, however slower result in the final photorendering. This
rendering gives better antialising result than if the “Best” radio
button is pushed in the Antialising part of the Effects dialog.

Image Size & Background


In this dialog box you can set the attributes of the background for
your rendered 3D model.
Colors
If the Colors radio button is on, you can set the color of the sky
and the ground in the Edit Color subdialog box after clicking the
Sky Color or Ground Color button. During the photorendering
process ArchiCAD will automatically locate the horizon line of the
background to correspond with the horizon of the picture.
In parallel projections, if the bottom of the elements is visible, sky
color is used; if not, ground color is used. The 3D Window can
also use the colors specified here.
If you just need a plain, single color background, click the chain
icon next to the preview window and set either the Sky or the
Ground Color by pushing their button.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


397
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Picture
ArchiCAD PhotoRendering supports precise horizontal & vertical
pixel size and dots per inch resolution. This makes it possible to
merge background bitmap images of known proportions and
resolutions with PhotoRendering images.
You can make a powerful graphic statement by placing a rendered
model against an existing picture as the background. Just turn on
the Picture radio button and search for the appropriate picture
from the Directory dialog box.

If you want a different picture for the background, click the Open
Picture button and select another picture.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


398
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Your rendered model will be merged into the background picture


in an intelligent manner, masking it when necessary as shown
below.

Note: You can save the background picture together with


your Project by using the Save Archive command (see the
discussion of the File menu).
The background picture you selected is fitted into the preview
window of the dialog box, and you can rescale it with the
Resolution and Magnification settings.
The size of the picture will change in the preview window, and
you can check its real size with the values written above the
horizontal line on the right side of the dialog box. (You can also
get a sense of how its size is changing by comparing it to the
image frame - discussed below - which grows and shrinks as you
change these settings.)
Show Image or Picture
If the radio button is set to Picture, the preview window will show
you the whole opened picture, and a bold frame inside it
represents the dimensions of your rendered image. You can drag
this by clicking inside the frame.
If the bold frame is not visible, it is too large. Just click in the
picture and you will see the bold frame. In this case change either
the magnification, the resolution or the image size values to bring
the ratio of the incoming and outgoing image sizes closer. Ideally
the frame is smaller than the background picture so that you can
choose the best detail.
If the radio button is set to Image, you will see only the framed
part of the background in the preview window. You can select
another part of the background picture here by clicking the
preview window and dragging the frame on top of the
background picture.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


399
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Use Alpha Channel


This checkbox will allow you to use the Alpha Channel
information of the opened background picture if it has any. White
color of the Alpha Channel will make the background picture
dominant, while black color of the Alpha Channel will make the
photorendered image of ArchiCAD dominant over the
background.
See also…
The Options/Materials/Textures part of this chapter contains more
detailed information on using Alpha Channel.
Resulting Size
The size of the resulting photorendered image can be set
numerically, or you can adjust it to the size of the currently used
3D Window by clicking the Size to 3D Window button. The
proportion of the height and width of the resulting image will be
indicated by the image frame in the preview window.
Keep Proportions
If you check the Keep Proportions checkbox, the height and width
ratio of the resulting image will keep its current proportions. If you
change either the horizontal or vertical values, the other value will
be updated accordingly.
Size to 3D Window
Click this button to match the size of future PhotoRenderings to
the current size of the 3D Window.
If the proportions are different, you get stripes of the background
color at the top and bottom and on the left and right sides of the
PhotoRendered image. This will be apparent with internal
perspectives or with external perspectives where the view does
not enclose the entire project and it is clipped by the image
boundaries.

Brightness & Partial Imaging


This dialog box gives you choices regarding exposure and
provides you with the option of making partial PhotoRenderings.
Image Brightness
Use the dimmer switch to set the desired brightness from dark to
bright.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


400
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Overexposure Correction
You have three options for correcting possible Overexposures.
(Overexposure occurs when the computational method leads to
the need of brighter color than the brightest white on the monitor.)

1) ArchiCAD can make all surfaces darker than their computed


color and make the brightest color white. This keeps the
contrast between bright and dark parts of the image, but
details in darker areas may be lost.
2) You can choose to darken only the overexposured surfaces.
This way, dark areas will not be extremely dark, but the
contrast between shades in bright areas will be smaller.
3) Paint the overexposured surfaces with the selected color to
show their place in the picture. This is an editing tool which
helps you fine-tune the lighting of your renderings by
changing elements of the model (e.g. relocating or dimming
individual lamps) rather than applying one of the overall
corrections described above.
Apply Settings to Latest Image
When you click the Apply button ArchiCAD will create a new
image for you from the latest PhotoRendered image using the
brightness and overexposure correction settings in the dialog box.
Creating this new image will take much less time.
Partial PhotoRendering
These settings allow you to specify a range of lines and columns to
be rendered for your image. This is useful when you do not want
to waste time rendering the entire image.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


401
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

This method can also be useful for comparing different material or


light conditions within a single image. Additionally, it can be used
for continuing images which were stopped when being processed.
(You must save the half–made image and open it as a background
picture).
Use this method if you made a modification in the model that
affects only the unrendered part of the entire image. This allows
you to re-render a part of it.

Memory

In the Memory dialog box you can see information about the size
of the available memory. ArchiCAD can also make an estimate of
the amount of memory that is needed for your PhotoRendered
image, if you click the Estimate Complexity button.

PhotoRender Projection
This command instructs ArchiCAD to make a photorealistic picture
of the current projection according to the settings described
above. This will appear in a new window which is not editable.
You can have several Model Picture windows on your screen at
once to compare different settings. You can also save them as
bitmap files for processing or for use with other programs.
You can use the Marquee tool to select and copy parts of Model
Pictures.
Important: PhotoRendered Model Pictures are not saved with
your project. If you wish to keep them, you have to save them

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


402
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

manually. Closing a Model Picture window that you haven’t


saved means you won’t be able to access this image again.

Create…
The name of this command changes according to the type of
camera currently selected in the Camera/VR Settings dialog box
(Camera, VR Object, VR Scene).
Note: In order to use the second and third options, the
necessary add-ons must be properly installed.
See also…
The Camera tool in Chapter 4.

Create Fly-Through…
If the simple Camera is selected in the Camera Settings dialog box,
“Fly-Through” is added to the name of the command.
The Create Fly-Through command creates a series of normal or
photorendered 3D pictures defined by the parallel projection set
or the current camera path. You can either have the resulting
animation shown immediately on screen, or save these pictures in
the desired file format and show them in the future using the
PlayBack utility provided with ArchiCAD. This utility makes it
possible to view a movie of your Project without having ArchiCAD
installed or running.
In order to issue the Create Fly-Through command you must have
at least one Pre-set Parallel Projection or an animation path with at
least two cameras.
The two main parts of the appearing dialog box allow you to set
the source and results of the Fly-Through.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


403
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Source
You can choose whether you want to use ordinary 3D views of
your project with settings from the 3D Window Settings dialog box
and the mode (Wireframe, etc.) selected in the Image menu, or to
create PhotoRendered images for the Fly-Through.
You can define the route of the Fly-Through either from the Pre-
set Parallel Projections or from the current Camera Path.
By checking the Rebuild Model for each frame option you can
create additional animation effects, provided that you have placed
in your project any Library Parts whose appearance changes with
every frame. You can learn how to achieve this by using the
appropriate GDL Global variable (see GDL Reference Manual).
See also…
Pre-sets... under 3D Projection Settings earlier in this chapter.
In the lower part of the Source section, you can decide whether
you want to use only the keyframes of the chosen projection set,
or the in-between frames as well, and specify whether the Fly-
Through should contain all frames from the set, or only some of
them.
Result
With the pull-down menus you can define the format and the
number of colors for the saved pictures.
Output formats include:
- series of PICT (Macintosh)/BMP (Windows) stills
- PICS (Macintosh)/BMS (Windows) files
- Scrapbook (Macintosh only)
- QuickTime movies
- AutoDesk’s Animation Pro FLC files (Windows only)
- Video for Windows (AVI) movie files (Windows only)
- 2D Elements
- PlotMaker drawings
- topCAD drawings (Macintosh only)
Also available are some extensions (depending on what you have
in the Add-Ons folder) supporting multiple camera settings, like
RenderMan and Camera.
Checkboxes let you choose to do the following:
- Remove redundant lines from Parallel Projections.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


404
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

- Compress the output files.


- Refine the views’ appearance using Dithering.
Compression
On the Macintosh: Using one of the well-known QuickTime
compression methods by checking Image Compression will make
the movie file’s size smaller. Apple Animation is recommended.
Compression is available only if you have QuickTime installed on
your computer.
The first four output formats support image compression. Define
how this will be done in the dialog box opened when you click
the Set... button.

Specify the compression method and colors with the pull-down


menus at the top of the dialog box. For some methods the color
choices will only be Color or Grayscale.
You can rescale the compressed images according to settings you
make in the dialog opened when you click the Rescale button.

For Windows: FLC files are automatically compressed.


Viewing on Screen
Click the Show button to have the Fly-Through processed and
immediately displayed on your screen. You can save the resulting
animation afterwards as described above.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


405
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Create VR Object Movie


If the VR Object option is selected in the Camera Settings dialog
box, “VR Object Movie” is added to the Create… command name.
You must have the appropriate QuickTime VR extensions properly
installed on your computer in order to take advantage of this
option.
Choosing the command will open a dialog box where you can set
a few options for creating a navigable object that you can then
view with Apple’s QTVR Player.

For a detailed description of the Source and Result options, see the
Create Fly-Through command above.
Note: Apple and Graphisoft recommend using the Cinepack
compression method.
Clicking Save… in the dialog box will prompt you to name your
navigable object file.
All the 3D data you need will be exported into this new format.
You can view the result by launching QTVR Player.

Create VR Scene
If the VR Scene option is selected in the Camera Settings dialog
box, “VR Scene” is added to the Create… command name.
You must have the appropriate VR extensions (QuickTime VR or
RealVR) properly installed on your computer in order to take
advantage of this option.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


406
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Choosing the command will open a dialog box where you can set
a few options for creating panoramas or pictures that you can then
view in the appropriate player applications.

With the View Cone, you can define the camera’s viewing angle,
within which you can create an initial zoom factor as the default
setting for the panoramic view. This initial zoom factor cannot be
greater than the View Cone.
Three options are available for creating VR panoramic scenes.
Choosing Scene (default) will allow you to save all the panoramas
defined on the Floor Plan, together with a control file containing
the navigation data. To properly view the scene in QTVR Player,
you need to open this control file.
Choosing Panoramas will allow you to save the panoramas
defined on the Floor Plan without a control file. You can view any
of the panoramas in QTVR Player individually, but you will not be
able to navigate between them.
Choosing Pictures will allow you to save pictures of your
panoramas that you can then edit as bitmap images. These files
cannot be viewed in QTVR Player. After editing the files
(modifying the background, adding extra elements), you must use
Apple’s QTVR tools in order to manually create a file viewable in
QTVR Player.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


407
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The Create QTVR Scene dialog box contains a number of options.


You can set the image height and length as well as the window
size in QTVR Player (all measured in pixels).
Selecting in the Keep proportions checkbox will ensure that your
image is not distorted.

Create Sun Study…


The Create Sun Study ... command generates a series of normal or
photorendered 3D pictures defined by the current 3D Projection
Settings, the current 3D Window or Photorendering Settings,
respectively and the Sun position settings defined in the Create
Sun Study dialog box, similarly to the Create Fly-Through
command. You can either have the resulting animation shown
immediately on the screen, or save these pictures in the desired
file format and show them in the future using the PlayBack utility
provided with ArchiCAD.
The Create Sun Study dialog box is partly identical to the Create
Fly-Through dialog box discussed earlier in this chapter. In this
section we will describe only the features that are unique to the
Create Sun Study dialog box.
For more information on Source and Result, see the Create Fly-
Through section above.

All the projections in a Sun Study will be generated in accordance


with the current parallel projection or perspective view defined in
the 3D Projection Settings dialog box. Geographical data for the
location of the model and Sun parameters can be set in the Sun
Options dialog box.
For more information on geographical location and Sun Options,
see the 3D Projection Settings ... section earlier in this chapter.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


408
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Set Date
You can define a particular day of the year for the previously set
geographical location in the upper left part of the dialog box. Use
the pop-up menu to select the month and type the day in the edit
box or use the arrows to advance up or down.
Use the radio buttons in the middle left section of the dialog box
to define a full Sun Study from sunrise to sunset for the selected
day or specify a part of the day for the Sun Study.
Type a number in the Interval edit box or use the arrows to define
the time between two frames in minute intervals.

Viewing on Screen and Saving the Sun Study


Click the Show button to have the Sun Study processed and
immediately displayed on your screen.
Click the Save button to save the Sun Study in the selected file
format.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


409
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The Calculate Menu


The Calculate menu's commands allow you to perform various
calculations. Complete Bills of Materials, Window Schedules, Key
notes, etc. can be generated automatically.
See also…
Property data structure and an overview about setting up a listing
are detailed in Chapter 6.

New Properties
Properties are logical definitions created in ArchiCAD as Library
Part types called Property Objects.
Property Objects can be linked to elements in two ways: either
automatically by matching criteria as set in the Criteria dialog box
(see later), or individually from the Settings dialog boxes of the
different elements (Walls, Slabs, Roofs, etc.) by clicking the Assign
Properties button and selecting a Property file. It is also possible
to combine the two methods.
Choosing the New Property command opens a new, empty
Property Object that you will be able to edit.

Edit Properties…
Choosing this command allows you to select an existing Property
Object and edit it in its Master window.
Note: If you choose this command when any construction
element(s) are selected in the Project, it will automatically
open all directly assigned Property Objects

Parameters
In this section of the dialog box you can set default values, types
and names for the variables that define the attributes of Property
type Library Parts. These parameters can help you check whether
the components have been defined correctly.
Note: Parameters will not appear in the calculation lists. You
can only set their default values as you would for any other
Library Part type and use them in scripts.
See also…
Parameters in the Library Part definition section of Chapter 6.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


410
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Local Components
By clicking the New button, you can create a new local
component line, that is, a component that will only be applied to
the Library Part in which it has been defined.
You can edit the code, name and quantity of the local component
whose Keycode you selected from the corresponding pop-up
menu. Units can also be changed through the Unit pop-up menu
and by typing an expression in the Proportional with editable
field. This can be any GDL expression using global and local
variables. For example, if you wish to calculate only the wood
cover surface of a roof-edge, enter the expression
"ROOF_EDGE_SURF".
See also…
Global variables are listed in the GDL Reference Manual.

Local Descriptors
By clicking the New button, you can create a new local descriptor
line, that is, a descriptor that will only be applied to the Library
Part in which it has been defined..
You can edit the code and the text of the local descriptor whose
Keycode you selected from the corresponding pop-up menu.
Clicking the Full Text button will give you a longer description of
the element or structure. This description may include technical
parameters that are independent from the ones preset in ArchiCAD
or other useful assembling or safety instructions.
Components and Descriptors Linked to Central
Databases
Clicking the Link to Database checkbox (enabled when either
the Components or Descriptors button is active) allows you to
link an existing local Component or Descriptor to a central
database, provided that the reference has been established. You
can replace this reference with another one from the same
database by clicking the Set button.
You can also break the link by deselecting the Link to Database
checkbox. In this case, you will get a local copy of the record.
See also…
Components and Descriptors are described later in this chapter.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


411
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Criteria…
This command opens a window that allows you to define listing
criteria. Criteria can be a combination of the following parameters:
Element Type, Pen Color, Fill Pen, Fill Type, Layer, Line Type, up
to three different Materials, Name, ID and Properties.
Existing Criteria appear in a list in the bottom portion of the dialog
box. Only one criterion can be selected at a time, and may be
edited as described below.
Each of the criteria can be assigned to a Property Object. Elements
that match one of the criteria will be listed using the properties of
the appropriate Property Object.

The values of the parameters used as a condition for a given


criterion appear in the list, while the ones that will be ignored are
marked with a "-" sign.
The condition values can be set in two tab pages in the upper part
of the dialog box, which you can toggle between by using the two
radio buttons in the top part of the dialog box.
Clicking the left button gives you access to the Element Type, Pen
Color, Fill Pen, Fill Type, Layer and Line Type options. All of these
can be set by using the appropriate pop-up menus.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


412
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Clicking the button on the right activates a second set of options,


including Materials for all three surfaces, Name (in case of Library
Parts) and ID Number.

Assign Properties
To assign properties to a criterion, select it from the list and click
the Assign Properties button. A dialog box appears, the same
one that can be accessed from the Settings dialog boxes of the
individual elements.
In this dialog box, you will be able to select a Property Object
from the loaded Libraries. The components or descriptors of the
selected Property type Library Part are displayed to help you make
your choice.
On returning to the Criteria dialog box, the name of the selected
Property Object will appear in the selected criterion line.
Important: If you click OK in the dialog box, ArchiCAD will
overwrite the existing listcrit.txt file or create a new one if
there is not one present.
Note: If an assigned Property Object is missing from the active
Libraries, all criteria lines assigned to it will appear in grey. If
there aren't any Property Objects in the loaded Libraries, you
cannot create new Criteria at all.

Components…
Databases referred to by the Property type Library Parts can be
edited by using this command. Database records are identified by
Keycode and Code.
Choosing this command opens the component database
(compdata.txt) with its editor.
Click the New button to insert a new component into the
component list under the current key.
Note: New Components can only be created if there is a Key
Database (listkey.txt) file available in one of the active
Libraries.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


413
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

- If the Key radio button is disabled, the Key pop-up menu


works as a filter for the contents of the list, meaning that you
will be able to set the current Key. Only components
belonging to this Key will appear.
- If the Key radio button is enabled, in addition to working as a
filter, the Key pop-up menu becomes active, allowing you to
change the key for the selected component.

You can edit the Code, the Name and the Quantity in the text field
above. These parameters can only be edited when the
corresponding radio button is active. Units and References can be
chosen from pop-up menus.
Note: The Reference works as a default setting for element
quantity calculations and can be overwritten from the
Proportional with field if a component is referred to from a
Property Object.
To remove an existing component, highlight its name and click the
Delete button.
Important: If you click OK, ArchiCAD will overwrite the
existing compdata.txt file in the Library.

Descriptors…
Databases referred to by the Property type Library Parts can be
edited by using this command. Database records are identified by
Keycode and Code.
Choosing this command opens the descriptor database
(descdata.txt).
Click the New button to insert a new descriptor into the descriptor
list under the current key.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


414
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Note: New Descriptors can only be created if there is a Key


Database (listkey.txt) file available in one of the active
Libraries.
- If the Key radio button is disabled, the Key pop-up menu
works as a filter for the contents of the list, meaning that you
will be able to set the current Key. Only descriptors belonging
to this Key will appear.
- If the Key radio button is enabled, in addition to working as a
filter, the Key pop-up menu becomes active, allowing you to
change the key for the selected descriptor.

You can edit the Code and the Short Text in the text field above.
These parameters can only be edited when the corresponding
radio button is active.
Clicking the Full Text button opens the Full Text editor, where
you can enter a longer description of the element or structure,
including technical details such as assembling or safety
instructions.
Note: The Short Text is always the first line of the Full Text
and can be edited without opening the Full Text editor.
To remove an existing descriptor, select it and click the Delete
button.
Important: If you click OK, ArchiCAD will overwrite the
existing descdata.txt database file.

Keys…
Keys are categories that can help you to logically group
components and descriptors, for instance by subcontractor, by
profession or by cost.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


415
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Choosing the Keys… command opens the Keys database


(listkey.txt), in which you can edit the Keycode and Name of the
selected Key.

Clicking the New button inserts a new key into the list, while
clicking the Delete button will remove the highlighted key from
the list.
Important: If you click OK, ArchiCAD will overwrite the
existing listkey.txt database file.

Units…
This command opens the Unit database, where you can set up
quantity units that can be referred to from the Components
database. All units have a Code that must be unique for
identification purposes.

To define a new unit, click the New button. Options available for
defining the unit are:

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


416
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

- Code: clicking this button enables editing the unit.

- Unit: when this button is active, you can define any name for
the quantity unit. On the right hand side of the dialog box, the
Conversion button is also activated, allowing you to choose
a conversion unit. ArchiCAD uses conversion units for internal
conversion.

- Options: when this button is active, five further options are


available for displaying the unit. Active options are indicated
by a "+" sign in the unit list, while disabled ones appear with a
"-" sign.

Digits: clicking this button allows you to change the number of


digits and decimals displayed when using the selected unit.

Common Database Rules


Identification
Key and Unit databases are single databases. Records are
identified by Code, therefore codes must be unique.
Component and Descriptor databases are compartmentalized
under Keys. The record identifier is the Keycode and the Code.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


417
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

This means that unique Codes are required under a given Key, but
the same Code can exist under several Keys at the same time.
Error Handling
A database record is invalid if its Code is missing or its identifier is
not unique. When editing a record, validity is checked
continuously. If an invalid record is detected, the program beeps
and the record’s text style changes to italic.
In this case you need to fix the Code before clicking any controls
other than the Code editor field, otherwise the invalid record will
be purged immediately. Once the Code is fixed and the record
becomes valid, its style is changed back to plain.
In the Criteria database, a record is considered to be invalid if all
conditions are disabled or there are identical records found (i.e.,
all conditions and even the assigned Property Object are the
same).
Invalid records are not checked when opening a database with its
editor in ArchiCAD.
When you click OK, the program will check invalid records and
you will be warned that all of these will be missing from the saved
file.
Note: Component and Descriptor records with missing
Keycodes are not considered invalid, which means that they
can be saved and referred to from Property Objects (the
Keycode part of the identifier will be empty). All such records
appear in the editor when Missing is chosen from the Key
pop-up palette.
New records have to be created under existing Keys. Therefore the
New button is grey when Missing Key has been chosen.
Criteria records are displayed in grey if the Property Object
assigned to them is not found in loaded libraries.

List Setup…
Detailed calculations can be produced from your Project based on
the properties of the Walls, Slabs, and other construction elements
used in the Project. The List Setup command is used to define
which elements, components or zones will be calculated to
produce the report, as well as the complexity and the format of the
output.
Choosing the List Setup… command displays the following dialog
box.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


418
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

In the List pop-up menu, you can choose the type of list created
(Element, Component or Zone). The contents of the window will
change according to the choice you make here. Lists can be stored
under different names and only the names of the sets belonging to
the type chosen will appear in the List Set pop-up menu.

List sets can be duplicated, renamed and removed by clicking the


appropriate buttons. Only the list set whose name is shown in the
List Set pop-up menu can be edited. All the stored list sets will be
available in the hierarchical menus of the Create Element List,
Create Component List and Create Zone List commands (see
later).
The four radio buttons below the main controls of the dialog box
allow you to refine the various Lists according to various Filters,
in a customizable Complexity, in a wide range of Formats and,
in the case of Zones, with several options available for Related
Constructions.

The contents of the dialog box changes according to the type of


List chosen and to the radio button selected for setting options.
Important: Clicking OK in the List Setup dialog box will
overwrite all changed list sets which are stored in the
Preferences file of the Project and in the listset.txt database file

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


419
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

placed in the Library. This allows you to use the same settings
for different projects.
- When starting ArchiCAD without opening a project file, list
sets are loaded from the Preferences files (listset.txt will not
be loaded from any of the loaded libraries;
- When opening a Project file, list sets stored in the project will
be loaded (listset.txt will not be loaded from any of the
project's libraries;
- When choosing File/Load Libraries, the first listset.txt file
found in any of the selected libraries will be loaded.

Element Lists
The first choice in the List type menu is the Element List. The
Element List provides information about construction elements
that you select to include in this dialog box.
Filters
Filters determine the elements to be listed. You can further refine
the Element List through additional checkboxes and other controls
in order to include or exclude elements meeting particular criteria.

In the Element Types section of the dialog box, enabling a button


representing a type of construction element adds it to the report,
while disabling it removes that type from the report calculations.
Clicking the Properties button opens a dialog box in which you
can choose the desired Property Objects in the active Libraries.
Only elements that are assigned to the chosen Property Object
(either by criteria or directly in the element's own Settings dialog
box) will be listed. You can choose to include all Properties by
activating the All checkbox.
You can exclude from the Element List any element that doesn't
have a label or an ID number by enabling the corresponding
checkbox.
The Minimum Opening to Reduce Wall option determines
whether openings under a certain size are taken into consideration
when calculating wall surfaces and volumes. The size limit is set in
the field beside the icon. This option is useful for determining

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


420
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

averages of materials, since small openings do not affect the


overall amount of material needed for a job.
At the bottom of the dialog box, the Layer and Story lists allow you
to include or exclude from the Element List all elements placed on
given layers or stories.

Complexity
The controls of this part of the dialog box determine the amount
of information included for each element in the report. The
individual characteristics of each element are added to the report
for greater detail, or removed for brevity.
On the left, properties of elements can be controlled, while on the
right, parameters can be selected.

In the Keys list, you can select the desired Keys for filtering the
components and descriptors to be listed. By activating the All
checkbox, all properties under all Keys will be included.
Below Keys, a number of buttons help you define a combination
of components and descriptors. When clicking the Select...
button, a further dialog box opens for selecting Components or
Descriptors to be listed directly from these databases.
Note: Only Components and Descriptors under selected Keys
are available here.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


421
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

In the Global Element Parameters list you can choose any of


the common parameters of all element types, such as surface,
volume, height, thickness, user ID, etc. Here again you can select
one or several items, or check in the All checkbox to include all of
them in the report.
Under Global Parameters, Parameters of Selected Element
Types are listed according to the selection made on the previous
tab page (Filters).
Bottom left, additional parameters of placed library parts can be
chosen for listing. Alternately, you can set a selection of
parameters to be listed in the Select Library Parts dialog box by
clicking the as in Library Parts button.
Format
Clicking the Format button adds controls to the List Setup window
for setting the logical order of properties and parameters
according to the Filters and Complexity options chosen. The
overall layout of the report can be defined here.
Two choices are offered: either you can list raw data by acivating
the Plain radio button or select a previously defined template file
by enabling the Formatted radio button.
When choosing the Formatted option, click the Template button
to select a template file from your library. Templates are
predefined according to local standards and may offer further
sophisticated options for the listing of components and
parameters.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


422
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Choosing the Plain option lists raw data in an editable text format.
Some basic alternatives are available even in this simple format.

- Activating the Title Row checkbox will create a header at the


top of the record sheet.
- The Each Item in Separate Row option creates an item by
item list even for identical items, while Group and Count
Items adds up identical elements and groups them in the list.
- The Unfold Components option lists all the parameters of
the components such their Keys, Codes, etc. Choosing
Quantities Only will display quantities without units.
- Unfold Descriptors vs. First Lines Only determines
whether all the parameters of the descriptors will be listed,
including Keys, Codes and the Long Text, or only the Short
Text, that is, the first line of the Long Text will appear in
calculations.
Note: If the Plain format option is active, the Parameters
option is disabled.

Component Lists
The second choice in the List type menu is the Component List.
This list provides information about construction elements'
components that you previously select to include in this dialog
box.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


423
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Filters
In the Keys list, you can select the keys for filtering the
components and descriptors to be listed. Activating the All
checkbox will enable all components and all descriptors under
any keys.

The other options are the same as for the Element Lists.
You can further filter Properties to be listed by choosing
components and descriptors directly from the databases and by
enabling or disabling local properties.
Global parameters of elements that Properties are extracted from
can be chosen from the corresponding list.
Complexity
Global Element Parameters and Properties can be selected as
described in the Element Lists section.

The Optional Components buttons determine which parts of the


component will be listed (the name and the quantity always
appear).
The Optional Descriptors buttons determine which parts of the
descriptor will be listed (the short text is always present).
Format
The same options are available as for Element Lists, with a few
differences.
Plain Component Lists lack the Unfold Components and Unfold
Descriptors options, since list items are Components and
Descriptors themselves.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


424
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

In the parameter list below, global element parameters and


selected parts of Components and Descriptors will appear
according to the selection made on the Complexity tab page.

Zone Lists
Filters
There are controls specific to Zones in this window.

You can either use all zone categories from the Project by marking
the All checkbox or select by clicking the zones to include in the
report.
Zones can also be filtered by defining conditions for their Zone
Number with a pop-up menu and a text field.
The Skip Zones without Zone Numbers checkbox allows you
to omit from the report zones without a number, while if the Skip
Zones without an ID checkbox is active, zones without an ID
number will be ignored.
Complexity
Controls specific to Zone Lists include the following:
- The Keys list allows you to filter components and descriptors
to be listed.
- The All checkbox, if active, causes all additional parameters of
placed Zone type Library Parts assigned to Zone Categories to
appear on the list.
- The As in Library Parts button allows you to select Zone
type Library Parts from loaded Libraries in the Select Library
Parts dialog box. In this case, only additional parameters that
are identical to those included in the selected Library Parts will
be included in the list. Parameters found in selected Library
Parts can be further filtered for selected parameter types.
- The Related Constructions option helps you select the
elements and constructions related to the chosen zone (see
below).

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


425
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Related Constructions
This button is only available for Zone Lists, not for Element or
Component Lists.
Zone definition is not restricted to geometrical information. It also
contains the construction elements related to the zones,
specifically the walls around the perimeter of the zones, the doors
and windows of the surrounding walls and the objects inside the
zone.
In this tab page, you can set the keys, components, descriptors,
additional parameters, global element parameters and parameters
of selected element types of the related constructions selected in
the Complexity tab page.

Format
On the Format tab page of Zone Lists, Zone parameters
(properties) and Related Constructions parameters (properties) are
separated. This means that Zone parameters always appear in the
first section and Related Construction parameters in the bottom
part of the list. However, you can arrange both Zone and Related
Construction parameters in the order you wish.

Create Element, Component, Zone


List
These commands create lists based on the conditions set in the
lists defined in the List Setup dialog box. The defined list sets
appear in a hierarchical menu opened by the corresponding
command name.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


426
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

- If a list was defined with a Plain format, it will appear in an


editable text type window.
- If a list was defined with the Formatted option using a
template file, it will appear in a drawing window that cannot
be edited.
The first command in each of the hierarchical menus is Basic
which generates a plain list with only a few parameters.

Listing Attributes By
All available listing engines placed in the Add-Ons folder next to
ArchiCAD appear in a hierarchical menu. By default, the ArchiCAD
Listing Engine will be active.
The listing engine chosen from the hierarchical menu will open its
own dialog box in which listing attributes (Property Objects in the
case of the ArchiCAD Listing Engine) can be assigned to project
elements. This dialog box can also be accessed from the Listing
Attributes tab page of the individual tools' settings dialog boxes
through the Assign Properties… button.
Note: External listing Add-Ons may also work with drafting
elements such as lines, arcs and splines, but ArchiCAD's own
built-in engine only works on 3D construction elements and
fills.
If any listing engine has more than one command, they will
appear in a submenu under the corresponding listing engine's
name.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


427
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The Display Menu


The commands on the Display menu affect the view in the current
ArchiCAD window.
The first set of commands allow you to refresh, clean up the
screen in Floor Plan, Section/Elevation or 3D View and unlink or
renew Sections/Elevations.
The following set of commands give you complete control over
your views: you can enlarge and reduce them, move around freely
in your windows or go to previous or predefined views.
Note: Most of these commands are also available in the form
of shortcuts from the Display bar icons on the horizontal scroll
bar, as presented in Chapter 1: The ArchiCAD Workplace.

Redraw
Operations such as transformations and deletions may leave your
screen strewn with unwanted artifacts. This is just a temporary
screen display problem (your prints and plots will be fine) and can
be corrected by choosing the Redraw command, which cleans up
your screen.

Rebuild
By choosing the Rebuild command, you get a more thorough
refreshment of your windows than the Redraw command can
achieve.
When Clean Wall Intersections is active, some intersections are not
cleaned up properly at the time of the construction. The Rebuild
command ensures that they are correctly cleaned up even in the
most complex cases.

Rebuilding the 3D Window


If Auto-rebuild 3D Window is switched off in the Preferences/
Imaging and Listing dialog box, your last 3D display will remain in
the 3D Window regardless of subsequent modifications on the
floor plan.
When you activate the Rebuild command, the program will
replace your outdated 3D view with an updated one. With large or
complex models, this updating can last quite some time.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


428
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Rebuild Model
When working on a dynamic section, the name of the Rebuild
command changes to Rebuild Model .
If you modify elements in the Model window, some complex
changes (e.g. modifying a library part) do not appear automatically
in this window and you have to use the Rebuild Model command
to see them properly.

Rebuild Drawing
When working on a static section composed of 2D drawing
elements only, the name of the Rebuild command changes to
Rebuild Drawing.
Choosing the Rebuild Drawing command will refresh the screen,
but it will not renew the Section window with any elements that
have been created or modified on the Floor Plan after the creation
of the Drawing window. To achieve this, use the Renew Section/
Elevation command below.

Unlink Section/Elevation
This command is only available when a dynamic Section/Elevation
window is in front.
If you unlink a Model type Section/Elevation, the construction
elements it contains are converted to 2D drawing elements (lines,
arcs and fills).
Warning: This command is not undoable.

Renew Section/Elevation
Once a dynamic Section/Elevation has been unlinked from the
Floor Plan, the name of the Unlink Section/Elevation command
changes to Renew Section/Elevation. This command is only
available for static, Drawing type Sections/Elevations.
This command updates the Section/Elevation window to conform
with the modified Floor Plan. ArchiCAD recreates the view without
removing the elements that you added to it in the Section/
Elevation window with the tools that are available there.
See also…
The Section/Elevation Window in Chapter 1 and the Section/
Elevation tool in Chapter 4.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


429
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Rebuild All Models/Renew All


Drawings
With this command, you can reconstruct all Section/Elevation
windows at the same time.

Zoom In
You can enlarge details of your drawings and 3D views as follows:
1) Choose the Zoom In command.
2) Draw a rectangle around the detail you intend to enlarge with
the Zoom In cursor. You can draw the rectangle regardless of
which tool is currently active.
The area surrounded by the rectangle is enlarged to the size of the
current ArchiCAD worksheet.

Note: Clicking the Zoom In button on the Display Bar also


activates this command.

Zoom Out
The Zoom Out command has the opposite effect as the Zoom In
command. The whole on-screen worksheet is squeezed into the
rectangle you have defined with the Zoom Out cursor. Squeezing
(like enlarging) is optimized, so no distortion results.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


430
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Note: Clicking the Zoom Out button in the Display Bar also
activates this command.

Pan
Choosing the Pan command allows you to move over the entire
virtual worksheet in increments you define by the Pan vector. The
zoom level is always maintained.
To pan around a worksheet, activate the Pan command and draw
a line with the Hand cursor. The whole on–screen area will move
by the distance and direction defined by that line. You can even
use rulers or numeric input to approach currently invisible, distant
parts of your worksheet.

Notes: The Pan command can be used with the Drafting


Modifiers and Mouse Constraints to pan in specific directions
relative to element or Project geometry. Clicking the Pan
button in the Display Bar also activates this command.

Zoom to Selection
Choosing this command when you have made a selection will
zoom the view to show the selected elements only.

Fit in Window
The Fit in Window command sizes your Project to accommodate
all the construction elements in the visible layers of your drawing.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


431
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

This provides a good way of checking to see if you have placed


something in the far corners of your drawing by mistake during
numeric input or a multiply operation.
Note: Clicking the Fit in Window button in the Display bar
also activates this command.

Actual Size
By choosing the Actual Size command you get a zoom level where
your drawing elements appear at the same size they would assume
on paper if represented at the actual scale (the one set in Set
Drawing Scale…).
This feature can effectively be used with large displays, where the
screen size is comparable to the output paper size.
Hint: Use this command prior to pasting a scanned site plan
or anything else that should appear in real paper size on the
worksheet.
Note: Clicking the Zoom Level button in the Display Bar also
activates this command, changing its text to 100%.

Full Screen
This command is available for Windows only. It will hide the
StatusBar and the Toolbar, maximize the main window and show a
Menubar that is only one pixel high.
A floating window will appear as an icon in the top left corner.
Clicking it will return you to the normal screen size.
Hitting the F12 key works as a toggle for this command.

Home View
The Home View command returns you to the current home view
defined in the Home View and Grids dialog box (Options menu)
or by the previous command (Save Current as Home View).
To change this original state, go back to the Home View and Grids
dialog box and change the corner values of the preview area or
click the Current View button. You can also choose a view with
the Display menu items and the scroll bars and choose Save
Current as Home View (see above).
If you quit ArchiCAD, the current setting will be saved in the
ArchiCAD Preferences file.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


432
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Hint: Set Home View to include the most frequently edited


part of your project so you can return here easily.
Note: You can also return to the Home View by choosing its
name in the QuickViews palette.

Set Home View


In addition to the numeric definition options offered by the Home
View and Grids dialog box (Options menu), you can also decide at
any moment to save the current view as the Home View. You will
then be able to return to this view at any moment by choosing the
Home View command.

Previous View
The Previous View command moves you one step back from your
previous Zoom In, Zoom Out, Pan, Home View or Fit in Window
operations.
This command can be repeated up to the last 19 steps.
Clicking the Previous View button in the Display Bar also activates
this command.
Note: You can also return to any previously defined and
named view by choosing its name in the QuickViews palette.

Next View
This command is the inverse of the previous one. When you have
gone back several steps behind, you can return forward (until the
very last generated view) by choosing Next View.
Clicking the Next View button in the Display bar also activates this
command.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


433
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

The Window Menu


This menu allows you to manage the numerous display windows
provided by ArchiCAD. The menu is organized to provide a single
hierarchical menu item (Floating Palettes), and a list of the
currently open windows.

Floating Palettes
The Floating Palettes menu item allows you to control the shape
and display of the Toolbox, Coordinate Box, Control Box, Info
Box and QuickViews palette. When you choose the Floating
Palettes command from the Windows menu, a submenu will
appear as shown to the left.

With this submenu you can open and close any of the Palettes and
control their size and shape.

Palette Shapes
The Palette Shapes… command in the Floating Palettes pop-up
menu opens the Floating Palette Shapes dialog box where you can
choose between different on–screen representations of the
particular floating windows.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


434
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

Magnified, Compact/Extended
The Magnified option displays an enlarged version of the floating
palette, while the radio buttons determine whether extended or
compact versions of the palettes are displayed.

Show & Hide Palettes


Below the Floating Palette Shapes command are options that
control the display of each individual palette. Using these toggles,
you can control which palettes are visible at any given time. If you
close one of the windows, Hide will change to Show… and vice
versa.

Window List
The Window List is displayed below the Floating Palettes
command. When you first start ArchiCAD, the window list will
show the basic display windows. As you open other display
windows, their names are added to the Window List.
Selecting a window brings it to the front and makes it active. The
active window is marked on the list by a checkmark.
The 3D Window, the calculation windows and the Project Notes
are available even if they are closed for the moment. The closed
windows of open library parts can also be opened and brought to
the front in a single step.
A detailed description of each window type can be found in
Chapter 1.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


435
Chapter 5: The Menu Commands

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


436
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

Chapter 6
The ArchiCAD Library
This chapter introduces element types stor ed in outside files,
including Doors, Windows, Lamps, general Objects and
calculation database components such as Zone stamps and
Property Objects.

Libraries in ArchiCAD
Whenever you need either a complex element that exceeds the
capabilities of the basic set offered by ArchiCAD or a type of
element with a specific role and behavior, you can rely on pre-
defined, fully parametric objects stored in a folder or set of folders
called the Library(ies).
This folder or set of folders can be specified in the File/Load
Libraries dialog box and is loaded on startup.

Library Handling
ArchiCAD libraries contain many types of prefabricated elements.
Normally, these items are arranged hierarchically within the main
Library folder/directory.
You can use specialized libraries for different applications (e.g.,
residential projects and industrial building design) to avoid the
need for extremely large libraries. There are also different libraries
corresponding to different national standards.

Moving Library Parts


Individual items from libraries other than the ones in the active
Library set can be used in your projects via the Choose Other

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


437
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

Object/Window/Door/Lamp commands in the corresponding Tool


Settings dialog boxes (Edit menu). Placing objects into your
Project this way does not result in the items being added to the
active Library.
To add a new object to an active Library, go to the Finder
(Macintosh) or to the Desktop (Windows) to place it into that
Library’s folder/directory. This will allow the new object to be
accessed directly by your Project.

Startup Library
When you start ArchiCAD for the very first time, it searches for a
Library under the name “ArchiCAD Library”.
If ArchiCAD’s default Library is found on the hard disk in the same
folder/directory as ArchiCAD, it is opened and used as the active
Library. Otherwise, the Load Libraries dialog box appears,
prompting you to choose a folder/directory to be the startup
Library.
- If you have already used ArchiCAD and start the program by
double-clicking its program icon, the Library set used in the
previous session will be active.
- If you have modified the name of a folder/directory in the
active Library set, or changed its location in the file hierarchy,
it will not be found and the Load Libraries dialog box will be
displayed.
- When you open a Project from within ArchiCAD (with the
Open... command), or by double-clicking a Project file in the
Finder/Desktop, it is opened with the Library set it was
originally created with.
If you have modified the name of a folder/directory in the active
Library set, or changed its location in the file hierarchy, the Project
opens using one of the following protocols:
- If the currently active Library set includes folders with the
same names as the original ones, the Project is opened using
this current Library set.
- If the original Library set included folders with names different
from those in the current one, ArchiCAD will try to find
Libraries with the same names in the folder/directory of the
Project. If there are folders with those names, the Project is
opened with them.
- If there are no folders bearing the original names, the
following dialog box is displayed. You can either specify a

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


438
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

Library set to be used with the Project, choose to accept the


current Library set, or cancel reading altogether.

Note: In this case, if you click Done, the Project is opened


without a Library. All Library Parts placed in the file will then
be missing.

Libraries & the Archive File Format


When you open an Archive Project, a special Library is created
comprising all the Library parts and properties used with that
Project. Whenever you open this document type, a dialog box is
displayed requesting that you provide a name for this special
Library. This Library then becomes the active Library.
Note: If any Library Parts were missing from the current
Library when you saved the Archive document, those Library
Parts will be missing from the Archive, too, even if the
reference names of these items are included.
See also…
The Save Special/Archive command in the File menu (Chapter 5).

Missing Library Parts


If you open a Project with a Library set which does not contain all
the required parts, an alert box will appear. Click OK. The Project
will be loaded without the missing library parts.
If you wish to see which items are missing, activate the Missing
Library Parts window from the Window menu. The list of doors,
windows and objects that are missing is displayed in a text
window. You can save or print the list for future reference.
To include the missing parts, you can choose them individually
from the appropriate Window, Door, Object and Lamp Settings
and Zone Categories dialog boxes using the Choose Other…

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


439
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

controls. Once you have chosen the parts, they will appear on the
Project.
You can then return to the Finder (Macintosh) or the File Manager/
Windows Explorer (Windows), put the missing parts into one of
the folders of the current Library set, and refresh the Library set by
opening the Load Libraries dialog box and simply clicking Done.
Alternately, you can add the folders where the missing parts are
located to the Active Libraries list in the Activate Libraries dialog
box. In both cases, all your parts will automatically appear in the
Project.

Placing Library Parts


ArchiCAD Library Parts can be placed into the Floor Plan with the
tool corresponding to their type: Door/Window, Object, Lamp,
Zone. These parts can be used several times on the same project,
or even simultaneously by multiple projects, from multiple
computers.
There are several browsing options available in the corresponding
tools’ Settings dialog box:

The simplest navigation tools are the arrow icons located in the
corner of the Preview area. They allow you to browse your active
libraries. Only windows will appear in the window dialog box,
and only doors will appear in the door dialog box.
The pop-up arrow next to the Library Part’s name opens a
hierarchical menu:
- The Choose Other Window/Door/Object command will
open a simple Directory library box allowing you to freely
navigate in the file system, both inside and outside your active
libraries.
- The list of Windows/Doors residing in the currently active
folder are shown underneath the Empty Hole option and the
name of the folder. To select a new folder, use the Choose
Other Window/Door command.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


440
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

Note: Under Windows, this list contains the Library Parts’


documents names. To see their filenames, click the pop-up
arrow with the Alt key held down. See the Getting Started
manual for more information about filenames and document
names.
- Choosing the Select Library Browser… command allows you
to select another browser application.
Creating Library Parts
If the set of library parts available in the ArchiCAD Library does
not contain the specific object you need, you can create your own
thanks to ArchiCAD’s built-in GDL (Geometric Description
Language) programming language. You can learn how to create
both simple and highly sophisticated elements by reading the GDL
Reference Manual supplied with ArchiCAD.
It is also possible to construct elements in the Floor Plan and then
save the result in ArchiCAD Library Part format. See the
description of the Save Special/ArchiCAD Library Part command in
the File menu section of Chapter 5.
New Library Parts can be created from scratch by choosing File/
New Library Part. Information on different types of Library Parts
follows.

Library Part Types


Doors, Windows, Objects, Lamps and Zones are special 2D and
3D items that can be placed on the Project and stored in Libraries
as ready-made items.

Beyond the diverse range of ready-made items found in the


ArchiCAD Library, you can create customized items and place
them in existing or new libraries.
Most Library Parts are defined by a 2D symbol which will appear
in Projects, a 2D description which defines this symbol, and a 3D
description which defines the 3D model of the item. There are
some exceptions: Textures, General Properties Script (GPS) files

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


441
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

and Listing Template files, although placed in the library, do not


contain any geometrical information. However, they can be
attached to geometrical library parts in order to provide added
realism in rendered views or parametric properties that will be
processed when a listing command is performed.
Choosing the Open Library Part... command displays a Directory
dialog box, which includes two pop-up menus listing the available
file formats and opening options.
By default, ArchiCAD interprets the files in their corresponding
format for editing (Object as Object, Window as Window, Door as
Door, Lamp as Lamp, Zone as Zone). If you choose the GDL file
format, the as Script item will be active in the Open As… pop-up
menu. Through this option you can open and edit, or create GDL
files as pure text files, without any 2D symbol or property
implications. This kind of GDL can be pasted into the GDL
window of other items, or referred to directly from other GDL
scripts as internal macros. GPS files can only be opened in their
own format.
Library Parts created by external editors (e.g. StairMaker,
ArchiSITE, etc.) are opened by default in the Library Part format
that has been defined by that application.
You can also import Library Parts that are in different file formats,
for instance DXF, DWG, Zoom, or Wavefront. These are opened as
Objects by default.
Notes: The above file formats are only available if you have
correctly installed the appropriate extensions in the Add-Ons
folder.

The Library Part Master Window


When you open an existing Library Part, or create a new item, the
master window of the Library Part is displayed. This is where you
set the basic dimensions and other parameters of the item and edit
or create its GDL descriptions. The exact appearance and contents
of this dialog box will depend on whether you have chosen to
open an object, window, door or lamp.
A Library Part’s master window has five main features:
- command buttons and window selecting menus where you
can reach different commands and open windows of the
library element;
- special Attributes in which commonly varied features specific
to the Library Part are defined;

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


442
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

- parameters that are used in the GDL description;


- Components defining the composition of the Library Part, for
use in listing and calculation features;
- Descriptors which accurately describe the Library Part.

The command buttons and menus are described in the following


paragraphs.
Size to 2D Drawing
This button is available only for Objects, Lamps and Zones. It
inserts the current size of the 2D symbol bounding box on the
symbol editing worksheet into this dialog box, making these sizes
the default values for the object.
Activate Window
From this menu, you can choose which of the ten windows that
belong to the library part to make active.
The Library Part windows are either text (script) or graphic type.
At the bottom of the script windows, some of the most commonly
used features are available in the form of buttons.

- Clicking the first button transforms selected lines into


comments, that is, lines that will not be executed in the script.
(Comments are identified by an exclamation mark at the
beginning of the line.) This is the equivalent of the Edit/
Comment command.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


443
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

- The second button has the opposite effect: clicking it will


transform any selected comments into executable lines. This is
the equivalent of the Edit/Uncomment command.
- Clicking the third or fourth button will format the script
window by tabulating selected paragraphs left or right. This is
the equivalent of the Edit/Increase Indent or Decrease Indent
command.
- Finally, the fifth button checks the GDL Script of the active
window.
Master Script
The Master script will be executed each time any of the other
scripts are executed. The primary benefit of this script is that you
can globally define variables or operations, or access external data
before executing other Scripts.
2D Symbol
Each Library part you place in your project is shown on the plan
by a 2D Symbol. You can edit an existing symbol or create a new
one with the standard ArchiCAD selection and 2D tools: Arrow,
Marquee, Text, Fill, Line, Arc/Circle, Spline and Hotspot. You can
also paste elements from the 3D Window here. An example is
shown below:

The final symbol that appears on the floor plan will be created
from the elements of this window and the 2D Script, if one exists.
The 2D Symbol Fragments switchboard described later aids you in
working with the 2D Symbol window.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


444
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

2D Script
In this script window, you can create a parametric 2D symbol
using the transformations and elements available for the two-
dimensional space in GDL.
2D Full View
The 2D Full View window allows you to check the symbol that
will be shown on the Floor Plan.
If there is a 2D Script defined, the 2D Full View will be calculated
according to the script, even if the 2D Symbol window contains
drawing elements. However, the 2D Script can refer to 2D Symbol
Fragments.
To exit 2D symbol editing, close the symbol editing worksheet
window or choose a different window either from the Activate
Window menu of the master dialog box, or from the Window
menu.
3D Script
In this script window you can find and edit the GDL description of
the Library Part (door, window, object or lamp).

When you have finished with the description, you can exit the
editing window by clicking on another window or the editing
window’s close box.
Note: This window is not available for Zones or Property Objects.
3D View
In this window you can see the 3D view of the Library Part
converted from your GDL Script. The viewpoint and other aspects
are controlled using the 3D Projection Settings dialog box (Image
menu) or the 3D Navigation floating palette. This will not interfere
with your settings for the Project 3D Window, since these settings
are stored separately for Project 3D and Library Part 3D.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


445
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

Note: This window is not available for Zones or Property


Objects.
Matching 2D & 3D Descriptions
The 2D symbol and the 3D description are automatically linked to
each other and appear as one Object file in the Object Library.
There are no built-in safeguards against geometric
incompatibilities between the two components. The most
common incompatibility error occurs when the 2D symbol and the
3D shape have different positions or orientations with respect to
the origin.
To avoid this problem, follow these steps:
1) Click on the Library Part window to make it active.
2) Choose the Top View in the 3D Projections Settings, and set
the angle to 270˚.
3) Choose Edit/Select All, then Edit/Copy. Activate the 2D
Symbol Window and choose Edit/Paste. This will place the
top view of the object (as a wireframe or hidden line) into the
symbol window. It should match the dimensions and position
of the 2D symbol
4) Choose Undo once you have verified that the symbol matches
the 3D view. This will remove the 3D lines.
You can use this feature to have ArchiCAD create the 2D symbol
for you. You will only need to add additional hotspots, line types,
etc.
The procedure is the same for Doors and Windows, with the
following modifications:
- Choose Side View instead of Top View (the angle should still
be 270˚).
- A mirrored view will be placed. Select the placed lines and
mirror them across the reference line of the wall.
Note: When you place a wireframe view, redundant lines are
removed. Using Hidden Lines (analytic) will give you an
accurate view, but underlying lines will be hidden.
You can also ensure compatibility between the 2D plan symbol
and the 3D model of a library part by writing a parametric
description in GDL for the symbol. (See 2D Script above.)
Below the Activate Window pop-up, there are additional controls
to help you work with the 2D symbol of the Library Part:

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


446
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

2D Symbol Fragments
This switchboard lets you show and hide the Fragments of the 2D
Symbol while you are editing it. Fragments work like layers, and
they are useful for organizing the various graphic elements (lines,
arcs, text, etc.) which compose the plan symbol of the Library Part
(see the discussion of the 2D Symbol and 2D Script windows
above.) There are 16 Fragments available for use with each Library
Part.
Fragments are especially useful for letting you easily replicate
parts of the Symbol. You can draw a figure in the 2D Symbol
window with the various graphic tools, and refer to it by its
Fragment number in a GDL 2D Script that incorporates the figure
in the final symbol in a variety of rotated and translated positions.
(See the GDL Reference Manual for more detailed information on
the 2D Script.)
To set which Fragment you are drawing in when editing the 2D
Symbol window, choose a number in the settings dialog box of
the tool you are using.
The switchboard buttons have the following features:
- Show All displays all Fragments of the symbol superimposed
on one another.
- Hide All clears the 2D Symbol window of all Fragments.
- The list of numerals from 1 to 16 lets you display one or more
Fragments for editing. You can show or hide a Fragment by
clicking the corresponding button on the switchboard.

Note: Fragments that are hidden are not available for storing
new graphic elements. If you select a hidden Fragment in the
dialog box of the tool you are using for editing the symbol,
you will get a warning asking you to change your selection or
Show the selected Fragment.

Components
A series of Components can be assigned to each Library Part,
defining the composition of the Library Part for use in listing and
calculation features. When you press the Components button in
the Library part dialog box, the lower part of the dialog box
changes.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


447
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

You can link a Component with an external database residing in


one of the loaded libraries using the Link Button.
While a Component is linked to the database, it cannot be edited,
hence the respective fields are greyed out in the title bar. If you
wish to modify it, you can unlink the Component from the
database by clicking the Link Button again.

A Component consists of the following fields: Keycode, Code,


Name, Quantity, Unit and Proportional With.
Keycode
The Keycode refers to a group of attributes - grouped by name,
manufacturer or any optional criterion you might have set up - and
is referred to by a common number such as 09 for Finishes.The
Keycode pop-up menu contains the full list of defined Keycodes.
Code
The Code defines the reference number of the given Component
within the Keycode group.
Name
This is the field that contains the Name that describes the
component, e.g., “wood shingles”.
Quantity
This field is numeric in nature, and defines the number of Units
that should be listed with the Component in the Bill of Materials.
Unit
Clicking this field brings up a pop-up menu where you can chose
from the pre-defined Units that are set up under Units (Calculate
menu).
Proportional With
This is an optional field. If empty, ArchiCAD will assume a linear
relationship between Quantity and the attribute (e.g., Surface,
Volume) that is given in the definition of the specified Unit. On the
other hand, you can specify any GDL relationship in this field,

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


448
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

using parameters defined in the Parameters Section or any


obligatory parameter associated with the Object.

Editing Components
You can create new components by pressing the New button in
the dialog box. The new Component will be activated, and you
can immediately assign values to it in the Title Bar by clicking on
the field you wish to edit, and then typing the value or choosing
one from the pop-up menu.
The Set button only becomes active if the selected Component has
a live database connection. By pressing this button, you can assign
a different value to the component from the database.
You can delete a component at any time, simply by selecting it
from the list and pressing the Delete button.

Descriptors
A series of Descriptors can be assigned to each Library Part to
describe the Library Part for use in listing and calculation features.
Descriptors behave the same way as Components.

A Descriptor consists of the following fields: Keycode, Code and


Short Text. For the description of the Keycode and Code fields,
see above the description of Components.
Short Text
The first line of text of the selected Descriptor is visible in this
field. In case of short descriptions, you can use this field to input
one line of text.

By clicking the Text… button, a new dialog box will be opened,


containing a larger text field where multiple lines of text can be
input and stored. The Keycode of the descriptor and its name are
also displayed.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


449
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

Properties Script
Opening the Properties Script window enables you to attach
descriptions and technical data to a Library part using the Library
Part's variables and the related commands and expressions of GDL
(Geometric Description Language). The worksheet is a normal text
window similar to the 2D and 3D Script windows.

Component quantities (weight, price, paint, etc.) can be calculated


according to the expressions in the Properties Script and included
in the lists.
Note: When there is a Properties script defined, the lists will
be calculated according to the script, even if you previously
created Components and Descriptors in the corresponding
sections of the dialog box.
Value List Script
Using the Value List Script, you can define the choices available as
a value of a given material. An example would be to restrict the
choice of the material of a table top to wooden materials, or to
define the different panel styles of a given door by their name. The
worksheet is a text window, similar to the 2D and 3D Script
windows

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


450
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

Comment
The Comment text type window, similar to the 2D, 3D and
Properties Script windows, makes it possible for you to attach
notes or messages to a Library part. The script in the Comment
window does not affect the Library part’s behavior or appearance
in any way. The script can be displayed in the Object, Door,
Window, Lamp Settings dialog boxes via the pop-up menu next to
the Preview Area in the upper left part of these dialog boxes.
See also…
For more information about the Preview Area, refer to the
corresponding sections in Chapter 4.
Preview Picture
Opening the Preview Picture window enables you to attach
characteristic graphical information to a Library part. The graphic
in the Preview Picture window does not affect the Library part’s
behavior or appearance in any way.
The Preview Picture is displayed as the default representation of
your library part in the Object/Door/Window/Lamp Settings dialog
boxes.
The Preview Picture window is a PICT (Macintosh) or BMP
(Windows) type window and cannot be fully edited. You can
paste the contents of the clipboard into the window as well as
select, cut, clear and copy either an individual part or the whole of
the window’s contents.
Accessing Library Part windows
The windows described above can also be accessed through the
Window menu, where all the available Library Part windows
appear in submenus next to the name of the previously opened
Library Part.
Hotspot Checkbox
Where applicable, the Hotspot on bounding box checkbox will
appear in the Library Part dialog box.
If you mark this checkbox, ArchiCAD will associate five hotspots
with the 2D symbol of the Library Part which are independent of
hotspots defined in the part’s GDL script. These five hotspots will
be located at the four corners and at the center of the symbol’s
bounding box (the imaginary rectangle which circumscribes the
symbol).

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


451
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

Default Hotspot of 2D Symbol


If you check Hotspots on Bounding Box, the default hotspot used
for placement of the object on your project will be the lower left
one of the five. (This is indicated by a heavy square highlighting
the hotspots on the 2D symbol in the Tool Settings dialog for the
Library Part, where you can change the active hotspot.) This will
happen regardless of whether or not you have explicitly defined
hotspots in the Library Part’s GDL script.
If you do not wish for the lower left corner of the bounding box to
be the default hotspot, you should leave the checkbox unmarked
and write the required hotspot(s) into the GDL script. (In this case,
the default will be the first hotspot encountered in the script. See
the GDL Reference Manual for further information.)
If neither bounding box nor GDL hotspots are specified, ArchiCAD
will place a single hotspot at the origin of the Library Part and use
this as the default. (This origin is at the midpoint of a window or
door and at the arbitrarily located coordinate origin of a lamp or
object.)

Special Attributes
Icons and edit boxes are displayed for special attributes of items in
the middle section of the Library Part dialog box. Special attributes
are those parameters of a Library Part which are the minimum
required to define an item of that type. (These are usually the most
frequently changed parameters of an item.) The exact number and
kind of special attributes varies with the type of Library Part.
For Windows:

For Doors:

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


452
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

Contour Option Buttons (Framing in 3D)


The following figure shows the appearance of some openings with
the Contour option chosen. The outline of the rectangular opening
created by ArchiCAD is visible, and the shape of the
complementary pieces used in the Library Part to create the
modified opening is apparent.

With the Nocontour option active, these complementary pieces are


integrated into the body of the wall, as shown in the following
figure.

The Framing on Plan buttons and the edit fields work just as they
do in the Door/Window Settings dialog boxes. See Chapter 4 for
their description.
Nominal Frame Thickness & Opening Oversizing
In the Nominal Frame Thickness & Opening Oversizing edit fields
you can enter real numbers or parametric GDL expressions to
define the geometric relationship between the wall opening and
the door or window library part.
See also…
For detailed information about GDL editing, refer to the GDL
Reference Manual supplied with ArchiCAD.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


453
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

Parameters

By default, the Parameters button is active. In the lower part of the


dialog box, you can add and edit parameters for the Library Part’s
GDL Scripts. You assign values to these variables in order to define
the attributes of a particular Library Part. The values assigned here
will be the default values found in the Settings dialog box when
you choose a tool that uses Library Parts.

Obligatory Parameters
A horizontal line separates obligatory parameters from additional
parameters. Obligatory parameters are:
- x and z dimensions for Windows and Doors;
- x and y dimensions for Objects;
- x and y dimensions, on/off selection, color components and
intensity for Lamps;
- for the obligatory parameters of Zones, see the Zone
Categories command in the Options menu section.
The obligatory parameters are those ascribing the minimum
attributes required to define a Library Part of a given type. They
are automatically placed at the top of the parameter list when you
create a new Library Part, although values are not yet assigned to
them. The GDL description of a given type of part will always use
these parameters (A and B for Objects, Doors and Windows, and A
through G for Lamps) to define these obligatory attributes. These
parameters are also represented by icons in the upper section of
the Library Part’s dialog box, and you can change them either with
those controls or by entering values directly into the list. (See
Special Attributes above and Editing Parameters below.)
Note that there are two kinds of obligatory parameters for a Lamp:
- physical characteristics (x and y dimensions, described by
parameters A and B);
- illumination characteristics (on/off, color and intensity,
described by C through G).

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


454
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

For Zones, the number of obligatory parameters is much larger


than for the other Library part types. The majority of these
parameters are not referred to as single letters, but rather as
character strings, in order to make it easier to identify parameters
by their names.

Additional Parameters
Under the line in the parameter list is an editable list of additional
parameters. The parameters named here are optionally available
for use in the GDL description of the Library Part and are referred
to as C, D, E, etc. (H, I, J, etc. in the case of a Lamp) or as character
strings. The values specified for them will become the default
additional values displayed when you open the appropriate
Settings dialog box from the Toolbox.
The optional parameters are typically used to define such things as
the number of windowpanes or door panels, the usual materials of
a part, etc.
Each line of the editable parameter list consists of an icon
(required), the parameter letter or a string variable (given), a
descriptive text (optional, but recommended) and a numerical
value. The icons control how the values are interpreted by

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


455
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

ArchiCAD. Clicking an icon displays a dialog box where you can


redefine the parameter’s type by choosing another icon. (See
Editing Parameters below.)
Proper parameter type specifications are especially important
when, for example, you are working with feet and inches, which
only the Length type parameter will accept. Incorrect use of a
specification can also result in misinterpretation of non-
dimensional parameters (i.e. angles or number of pieces).
Note: Depending on how you write your GDL descriptions,
the parameters you use can affect both the 2D and 3D aspects
of the Library Part.
Link to Value List Script / Define Array
Only one, or none of these two switches may be active at one
time. The buttons originate from the Parameters, Components,
Descriptors buttons if Parameters is active.
Using the Link to Value List Script button, the choice of values
of the given Parameter will be restricted to those defined in the
Value List Script.
If you press the Define Array button, a new dialog box will be
opened, where you can set up an array for that parameter, which
will be addressable from the 2D, 3D, Properties or Value List Script
of the element.

You can edit the fields of the array by clicking on them; the field
can be edited in the right side of the dialog box. Where variable
types allow, you can choose values from a pop-up menu.
You can insert rows into the array by selecting the button with the
row number of the array on the left of the dialog box, and pressing
the Insert button. Deletion is performed similarly.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


456
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

You can insert columns into the array by selecting the button with
the row number of the array on top of the dialog, and pressing the
Insert button. Deletion is performed similarly.

For more information on the Value List Script and arrays, please
refer to the appropriate section of the GDL Reference Manual
supplied with ArchiCAD.
Editing Parameters
You can change the contents of the parameter list by clicking the
line you wish to edit. For obligatory parameters, only the
numerical value after the “=” sign is editable. For optional
parameters you can edit the type icon, the descriptive text and the
numerical value.
Highlight the row you wish to edit by clicking it with the cursor.
The Variable, Type, Name and Value fields become editable in the
title bar.
The parameter types (identical for obligatory and optional
parameters) are the following:
Length: specifies physical dimensions of the Library Part (and
makes conversions to whatever units you are using.)
Angle: specifies angular values in decimal degrees for such
GDL operations as rotation transformations and defining arcs.
Real Number: specifies decimal non-dimensional values for
uses like including a magnification factor in a GDL calculation.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


457
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

Integer: specifies whole numbers, dimensionless values for


uses like defining the number of identical components in a GDL
description or the number of times to loop through a part of the
GDL script.
Boolean: the value of a Boolean parameter can only be 1 or 0
for uses like activating or deactivating an action or an item in a
Library Part. These values can either be typed directly into the
value box, or set by clicking the checkbox at the right end of the
parameter line.
Text: specifies character strings up to 255 characters for uses
like defining changes in the Library Part or typing plain words
instead of numbers in the parameter's value box.
Material: Specifies a material as a GDL parameter. You can
choose any of the materials available in ArchiCAD by clicking the
material edit box. See Materials in the Common Tool Settings
section of Chapter 4 and the Materials command (Options menu)
in Chapter 5.
Line Type: specifies a line type as a GDL parameter. You can
choose any of the line types available in ArchiCAD by highlighting
the desired line type in the scrollable list. See the Line Types
command (Options menu) later in Chapter 5.
Fillpattern: specifies a fill pattern as a GDL parameter. You
can choose any of the fill patterns available in ArchiCAD by
clicking the sample box and selecting the desired pattern in the
palette. See the Fill Types command (Options menu) in Chapter 5.
Pencolor: specifies a pencolor as a GDL parameter. You can
use any of the pencolors available in ArchiCAD by clicking the
sample box and selecting the desired color from the palette, or by
typing the number of the desired pen color in the edit field.
Note: If any of the Material, Line, Fillpattern or Pencolor
parameter types is selected, a button appears at the right end
of the parameter line where you can bring up a pop-up list of
corresponding settings.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


458
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

See also…
The GDL Reference Manual gives you detailed instructions on how
to create or modify a GDL script and how to incorporate
parameters into it.
Source Debugging for GDL Script Windows
When viewing the 3D or 2D Script window of a Library Part,
choosing the last command of the Edit menu allows you to debug
the script.

The set of buttons marked with arrow icons perform the following
actions:
The debugging process starts when the first button from the left
(Run) is pressed.
The second button from the left (Step) allows you to execute the
highlighted instruction and update the 3D model (or the 2D
drawing). If the instruction is a macro call, the debugger will
execute it without stepping inside the macro.
When clicking the third button from the left (Step In) on top of a
highlighted macro call instruction, the debugger will step into the
macro and the debugging process will continue inside the macro.
When pressed on top of any other instruction, the effect is the
same as for the previous button.
If you press the fourth button from the left (Step Out), the
debugger will leave the macro and continue the process at higher
level, with the first instruction following that macro call. When
pressed inside the main macro, its effect will be to execute the
whole macro.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


459
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

Finally, the button with the cross (Kill) stops the debugging
process.
The debugging process can also be controlled from within the
script by using the special GDL command, BREAKPOINT. The
debugger will stop at a BREAKPOINT if its parameter is true.
Breakpoints can be enabled or disabled in the pop-up menu
located in the top right corner of the Debugger window.
During the debugging process, the global variables, parameters
and variables of the macro can be examined by adding them to the
list, using the New... (adds one) or Add All (adds all the
parameters and variables to the list) buttons. Their value can be
modified without interrupting the process by typing the new value
in the box and pressing the Modify button. Any item can be
removed from the list when highlighted by clicking the Remove
button. The type of the variable or parameter is indicated in the list
with the signs: -∞ ...∞ for numeric variables and “...” for string
variables.

Saving Library Parts


When closing the Library Part window, a prompt warns you to
save changes. Choosing Yes will save all the components (2D
symbol and script, 3D script properties script, comments and
preview picture) of your item.
Instead of closing the Library Part window you can also save your
item by directly choosing the Save or Save as... commands from
any of the Library part windows. After saving, you can choose the
Rebuild command (Display menu) for the Floor Plan or 3D
window to view the modified library part.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


460
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

Performing Calculations
All construction elements created in ArchiCAD contain information
about their size, geometry and quantity. With the help of
additionally linked properties, various calculations can be
performed whose results can be listed on screen in separate
windows, printed or exported in a variety of formats for post-
processing.
Calculation lists contain numeric data, descriptive text and even
graphical information about your project. Lists are created by
choosing Calculate menu commands.
The following paragraphs discuss the way property data is
organized in ArchiCAD and how the contents and the layout of the
different list types can be defined.
See also…
For detailed explanation of the Calculate menu commands, see
Chapter 5.

Property Data Structure


In ArchiCAD, the property data structure consists of Property
Objects, Component and Descriptor databases and the Properties
of construction elements.

Property Objects
At the core of the property data structure is the Property Object
that can store such details as manufacturer data, prices, schedule
symbols, and other properties. These Objects have special
relations:
- Access to simple databases containing essential numeric and
descriptive data called Components and Descriptors.
- Links to construction elements (walls, slabs, windows, etc.)
whose parameters they can be linked to for calculations.
See also…
Calculate/New Properties and Edit Properties are detailed in
Chapter 5, and the ArchiCAD Library is described earlier in this
chapter.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


461
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

Component and Descriptor Data


Basic numeric (Component) and descriptive (Descriptor) data is
stored in a single text type databases whose records can be
referred to from within any Library Part and in certain Property
Objects. This helps you avoid redundancy and makes it possible to
easily fit local building specifications to ArchiCAD.
Both of these databases are compartmentalized under Keys. Keys
can be different trades or professions, cost or construction classes,
etc., customizable by the user or according to local standards.
There are also Units used for Components stored in similar simple
databases related to the previous ones.

Properties of Construction Elements


Construction elements can be listed with properties predefined in
linked Property Objects. There are two ways to create a link
between construction elements and Property Objects.
- Dynamic links are defined using different Criteria. Criteria
are stored in a simple and editable database. Any particular
criterion can accommodate several element attributes as
conditions, as well as an assignment to a Property Object.
Whenever an element matches a criterion, the link is
established. Any construction element can match more than
one criterion at the same time. If that is the case, identical or
included criteria will be purged. Otherwise, Properties of all
linked Property Objects will be merged for listing.
- Fixed links can be set from within the elements’ own Tool
Settings dialog boxes in the Listing Attributes tab page.

Calculation List Setup


There are three types of lists that determine the structure of data to
be calculated: list items can be construction elements,
components (descriptors) or zones. For the different list types,
slightly different controls are available for defining both the
content and the layout.
Defined setups can be stored by name. Stored lists can be edited
in the Calculate/List Setup dialog box. Choosing the name of such
a stored list in the appropriate hierarchical menu will perform the
calculation and produce a list.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


462
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

There is also a basic list setup included in the program for each list
type. These simple lists lack the rich environment of format
templates.

Note: Once a list has been generated, it will automatically be


updated whenever you bring it to the front.

List Content
For each list type you can filter the items to list as well as define
how complex the description of single items should be in the
report. Additionally, in the case of zone lists, related constructions
can also be added with all of their details.
See also…
Filters, Complexity and Related Constructions are described in the
List Setup section of the Calculate menu (Chapter 5).

List Layout
Output lists can either be raw data sheets in a simple text window
or formatted layouts with graphical content.
In both cases, powerful sorting techniques are available and
default parameter denominations can be replaced by custom
names.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


463
Chapter 6: The ArchiCAD Library

Although the Plain option is mainly used for data export in


tabulated text or spreadsheet format, it still has some options that
affect the number of records and fields: for instance, identical
items can be grouped and calculated together. This type of output
can also be post-processed as text from within ArchiCAD.

Formatted lists can be created through the use of templates that


feature page definition, header and footer with additional data
such as a company logo, project information, the current date,
page numbers, etc., as well as placeholders for parameters to be
listed. Parameter names and values as well as sums of components
can be referred to by placeholders.

Exporting Calculations
Unformatted lists can be exported in both tabulated text and
spreadsheet format. Formatted lists can be saved as 2D ArchiCAD
or PlotMaker drawings as well as RTF (Rich Text Format) files.
See also…
Saving calculations is described in Chapter 5 (File menu).

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


464
Appendix

Appendix
Cursor Forms
Standard cursors in the worksheet:

Arrow - empty area on the worksheet (Arrow tool)

Crosshair - empty area on the worksheet (other tools)

Arrow with Checkmark - snapping to nodes and


hotspots (Arrow tool)

Checkmark - snapping to nodes and hotspots (other


tools)

Arrow w. Mercedes - snapping to edges (Arrow tool)

Mercedes - snapping to edges (other tools)

Arrow w. Intersection - snapping to an intersection of


edges (Arrow tool)

Intersection - snapping to an intersection of edges (other


tools)

Arrow w. Perpendicular sign - snapping


perpendicularly to an edge or arc while dragging an
element

Arrow w. Tangent sign - snapping tangentially to an arc


while dragging an element

Cursors used only while drafting and editing:

Empty pencil - empty area on the worksheet

Filled pencil - snapping to nodes and hotspots

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


465
Appendix

Striped pencil - snapping to edges

Pencil point w. intersection - snapping to a crosspoint


of edges

Pencil point w. perpendicular sign - snapping


perpendicularly to an edge

Pencil point w. tangent sign - snapping tangentially to


an edge

Magic Wand - tracing the contours of existing elements


for creating new elements with the active tool

Tool-specific cursors:

Eyeball - defines the direction of Roofs’ slope, the side


that remains selected when splitting elements, the depth
of Limited Sections and the orientation of Doors/Windows

Double Eyeball - locates position of edge-placed Door/


Window

Hammer - places Dimension chains, Angular Dimensions,


the Elevation Dimension array and Fill areas

Trident - moves Marquee area or the Clipboard contents


after pasting

Cursors used when changing the display:

Zoom In - zooming in

Zoom Out - zooming out

Hand - panning

Small Hand - moving the view frame in QuickViews

Cursors appearing while ArchiCAD is busy:

Bulldozer - during Autosave

Beachball - during calculations (Macintosh)

Wristwatch - during calculations (Macintosh)

Hourglass - during calculations (Windows)

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


466
Appendix

External Library Part


Editors
Third Party Library Part editing applications can be purchased with
ArchiCAD. These applications can be accessed either as stand-
alone programs or as add-ons from within ArchiCAD.
To function properly from within ArchiCAD, the applications must
be stored in special locations:
- For the Macintosh, in the Add-Ons subfolder of the Graphisoft
Folder placed either in the System Folder of your startup disk,
or in the same folder as ArchiCAD;
- For Windows, in the Add-Ons folder inside the Graphisoft
Shared Folder either in the same folder as ArchiCAD or the
location pointed to by the “Graphisoft Shared Folder”
Windows Registry item.
If the third party application has been properly installed, its icon
will appear in the ArchiCAD Toolbox.
Library parts created by third party editors are opened through
their own dialog boxes by double-clicking the editor’s icon in the
Toolbox or by choosing the last command on the Options menu
(Door, Window, Object or Lamp Settings).
The example shown here is for ArchiSITE, a terrain modeling
application developed by PracSYS. Since Terrains are most closely
related to Objects, the Terrain Settings dialog box is very similar to
the standard Object Settings dialog box.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


467
Appendix

“Terrain” is the generic name used to describe Library Parts created


by ArchiSITE. Other applications use other generic names.
Next to the name of the element selected either on the Floor Plan
or by default, the pop-up menu is slightly different from the one
used for standard ArchiCAD Objects.
In addition to the usual options of this submenu, you can choose
either to edit the selected element, or to create a brand new one.
Both of these commands will launch the application that has
created the selected element.
If you choose the Edit “library part name” command, and several
instances of the selected element have been placed on the Floor
Plan, ArchiCAD will ask you whether you wish to modify only the
selected library part or all library parts bearing the same name.

In the first case, a duplicate of the library part will be created and
you will be prompted to rename it.

In the second case, you will work on the original file, which
means that all library parts bearing the same name will be
modified in the Floor Plan; moreover, any further instances you
wish to place will also include the changes you made.
Note: If the third party editor is not available, its icon does not
appear in the Toolbox, and any library part created by it can be
opened through the standard ArchiCAD Door, Window, Object or
Lamp Settings command. If you modify and save library parts
created by external editors when the editor is not available, they
will become standard ArchiCAD library parts that can no longer be
opened by the original application.

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


468
Index

Index

Symbols
2D Elements
fly-through pictures saved as ~ 404
saving in ~ format 267
saving the 3D window in ~ format 264
2D Full View 445
2D Script 441, 445
2D Symbol
~ of Library Parts 441, 444
Fragments 447
tools available in ~ window 100
3D Cutaway
~ command (Image menu) 391
3D Cutting Planes
~ command (Image menu) 388, 391
3D Display formats 391
3D Hatching 359
~ assigned to Material 111
3D Imaging
~ Progress 369
Selecting elements to use in ~ 384
3D Navigation Palette 19, 93
editing controls 84
Editing Mode button 84
Editing-Motion controls 93
Intelligent Cursor Switch 85
Look to 96
Pointer Lines Switch 85
3D Projection Settings
~ command (Image menu) 375, 445
3D Report 369
3D Script 441, 445
3D Section
~ dialog box 388
saving ~ cuts 391
3D View
~ window of Library Parts 445

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


469
Index

Copying a ~ 123 ~ options for Materials 358


3D Window 10 Analytic shading 386
~ and Edit menu commands 92 Angle
Auto-rebuild ~ 368 ~ type parameters of Library Parts 457
background of ~ 388 Angle Bisector Constraint 57
constructing elements in ~ 88 Angle Constraint
copying/pasting the ~ to the Floor Plan 123 terminating ~ 56
creating elements in ~ 90
Angle Dimension Settings 205
Cursor Snapping 85
defining the size of the ~ 388 Angle Dimension Tool 203
editing elements in the ~ 10, 91 Angle Pairs 66, 366
editing with Arrow tool 91 ~ & Coordinate Constraints 70
elements imaged in the ~ 384 primary angle 68
formats for saving the ~ 264 proximity 70
navigation basics 94 secondary angle 68
Selection 85 Animation 382
tools available in ~ 83, 101 ~ Controls 97
User Origin 84 Compressing ~ files 405
working in the ~ 83 Antialiasing 394
3D Window Settings… Apple’s QTVR tools 407
~ command (Image menu) 385 AppleTalk Printer Tool 279
Applying Camera Settings 247
A Arc
changing an ~'s length 232
Absolute coordinates 27 Closing an ~ 232
Accessing Library Part windows 451 creating a polygon from ~ 72
Activate Window Arc/Circle Settings 231
~ submenu (File/Open Library Part) 443 Arc/Circle tool 226
Activating Tools 101 Construction Methods 231
Actual Size Editing options 232
~ command (Display menu) 16, 24, 432 Geometry Methods 226
Acute Geometry Method radius 232
~ for Angle Dimensions 204 techniques 232
Add Current Projection 383 ArchiCAD Layer 343
Add New Path ArchiCAD Library 147, 437
~ dialog box for Fly-Throughs 244 ArchiCAD Object
Add-Ons folder 249, 258, 326, 404, 442, 467 ~ command (File/Save Special) 270
Additional Parameters ArchiCAD Temporary Folder 373
~ of Doors/Windows 153 ArchiSITE 442, 467
~ of Library Parts 455 Archive
Adjust ~ command (File/Save Special) 268
~ command (Edit menu) 298 ~ file type 257
Adjusting Section Depth 240 ~ files & Textures 362
Adjusting Section Lines 240 Area measurement 220
Adjusting Walls 137 Arrow tool 114
Adobe Type Manager 282 ~ in 3D 91
Aligned Elements ~ techniques 114
constructing ~ 71 Shortcut to toggle with last-used tool 117
Alpha Channel Arrowheads
~ control options 361 ~ & Scaling 24
~ in background pictures 400 Arcs/Circles 231
Lines 225
Ambient Light 378

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


470
Index

Assign Properties 413 Block


~ button in Tool Settings 113 ~ command (Image menu) 391
Assigning Components BMP
~ to Library Parts 447 ~ format for Textures 362
Assigning Descriptors fly-throughs saved as ~ files 404
~ to Library Parts 449 opening ~ files 259
Attenuation saving a project in ~ format 264
~ options for Materials 359 saving files in ~ format 267
Attributes saving Section/Elevation in ~ format 265
~ of Tools 113 saving the 3D window in ~ format 264
Sets of ~ 113 BMS
Auto ID Increase 112 fly-throughs saved as ~ files 404
Auto Plan Redraw Boolean
~ option (Options/Preferences) 372 ~ type parameters of Library Parts 458
Auto-Labels 211 Bottom view 381
orientation of ~ 323 Breaking Text Block
Autogroup creating a ~ 206
~ command (Tools menu) 317 Breakpoints
Automatic Labeling ~ in GDL Scripts 460
~ command (Tools/Labels) 211, 323 Brightness & Partial Imaging
Automatic Zone Recognition 217 ~ command (Image/PhotoRendering Set-
tings) 400
Autosave 339, 370
Bring Forward
Auxiliary Grid 31
~ command (Tools menu) 48, 317
Auxiliary Windows 14
Bring to Front
Axonometric Views 381 ~ command (Tools menu) 48, 317
Motion Modes 97
Motion Tool 97
navigation in ~ 97
C
Calculate Menu 410
B Calculation List Setup 462
Background 332 Calculation Windows 13
~ colors in PhotoRendering 397 Calculations
~ of 3D Window 388 performing ~ 461
~ picture in PhotoRendering 398 Camera
Backup Copy ~ types 241
creating a ~ 370 Camera Settings 243
Barrel Vaulted Roof Camera tool 241, 403
drawing ~ 168 ~ and Perspectives 377
Geometry Method 165 Checking the View in 3D 247
restrictions 169 display options 247
Base-Line Construction Method parameters 245
~ for Dimensions 184 placing options 242
Basic Concepts 21 Target 245
techniques 248
Bézier path
viewpoint 245
~ for Fly-Through 246
Cartesian coordinates 27
Bézier Splines 233
Centerpoint Geometry Method
Binary 3D description 268
~ for Arcs/Circles 227
Bitmap Fills 350
Central Databases 411
plotting ~ 354
Chain icon 111, 160
Bitmap fonts 282
plotting ~ 282

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


471
Index

Chamfer Common Database Rules


~ command (Tools/Line Extras) 226, 322 ~ for Calculations 417
Check Script Communication Settings
~ command (Edit menu) 315 Plotter 279
Choose Other Window Complex Roofs
~ command (Window Settings) 440 drawing ~ 166
Cinepack levels 167
~ compression method for QTVR Objects 406 Component List 423, 442
Circle ~ window 13
opening a ~’s Circumference 232 Complexity 424
Clean Wall Intersections Filters 424
~ command (Options Format 424
menu) 131, 134, 148, 334, 428 formats for saving the ~ 265
~ in Display Options 329 Components 411, 447
Clear ~ command (Calculate menu) 413
~ command (Edit menu) 79, 105, 293 creating new ~ 413
Clear All Cutting Planes 390 defined 413, 462
deleting ~ 414
Clear from Story 338
Composite Roofs 170
Clearing Elements in Section/Elevation Win-
Composite Slabs 163
dows 81, 293
Composite Structure List 355
Clearing Zone Categories 363
Composite Walls 130, 151
Click to Trim
~ & Columns 143
~ command (Edit menu) 299
predefined ~ 131
Click Wall to Split smart T connection of ~ 136
~ command (Edit menu) 137, 299 using multicolor definitions 131
Clipboard 289, 290 Composites…
saving in ~ format 266 ~ command (Options menu) 354
saving Section/Elevation in ~ format 264
Connecting Walls with different Fill pat-
Close
terns 135
~ command (File menu) 262
Connection Options
Closed Splines 235
~ for plotters (Macintosh) 279
Code ~ for plotters (Windows) 279
~ for calculations defined 448
Connection Port
Colors of Elements 344 Digitizer 275
~ in Sections/Elevations 240
Constructing Aligned Elements 71
Column Settings
Constructing New Elements in 3D 88
~ dialog box 141
Construction Elements
Column tool 140
~ linked to Property Objects 462
~ & Composite Walls 143
~ & Walls 143 Construction Fills
3D views 144 ~ in Display Options 330
creation in 3D 90 Construction Grid 30, 31, 331
dimensioning options 188 snapping to ~ 334
drawing options 140 Construction Methods 52
fill patterns 110 ~ in Tool Settings 106
Floor Plan and Section Attributes 142 Arcs/Circles 231
General Settings 142 Cameras 242
Roof trimming 301 Columns 141
Comment Dimensions 184
~ command (Edit menu) 314 Lines 225
~ in GDL Script 443 Mesh 176
Radial Dimensions 195

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


472
Index

Construction Techniques 51 Create Zone List


Construction windows 8 ~ command (Calculate menu) 426
Control Box 17, 51, 54 Creating Curved Walls 139
~ shape and size 434 Creating Custom Lines 346
Cursor Snap Variants 54 Creating Elements in 3D 90
Magic Wand 54 Creating Holes in Walls 138
Prompt Box 54 Creating Library Parts 441
Relative Construction Methods 54
Creating multiple copies of elements 308
Snap On icon 334
Special Snap Points 54 Creating Tapered Walls 139
Suspend Groups switch 54 Creating Zone Categories 363
Control File Criteria
~ for QTVR Scenes 407 ~ button in Tool Settings 113
Coordinate Box 17, 22, 27 ~ command (Calculate menu) 412
~ shape and size 434 ~ for calculations 462
controls 25 Assign Properties 413
Elevation Values 34 assigning ~ 412
Grid Controls 33 Criteria & Assignment
Coordinate Constraints 65 ~ button in Tool Settings 113
~ & Angle Pairs 71 CTB connection tool 279
Coordinate System 25 Cumulative Construction Method
origin 25 ~ for Dimensions 184
Coordinate Value Fields 27 Current View
Coordinates ~ in QuickViews 38
Entering ~ 27 Cursor Forms 79, 465
Copy Cursor Snap Range 51, 63
~ command (Edit menu) 105, 290 Cursor Snap Variants 59
Copy from Story 338 Cursor Snapping
Copying a 3D View 123, 290 ~ in 3D 85
Copying from Section/Elevation Windows 290 Curved Walls
Core drawing ~ 126
~ symbol of Columns 142 stretching ~ with the Marquee 122
Correcting Mistakes 79 Custom Angle Pair 67
Cancel Button 79 Custom Labels 212
Clear 79 Custom Orientation Method
Other Methods 79 ~ for Labels 214
Undo 79 Customized Axonometrics 381
Create Component List Cut
~ command (Calculate menu) 426 ~ command (Edit menu) 105, 289
Create Element List Cut from Story 338
~ command (Calculate menu) 426 Cutting Elements from Section/Elevation
Create Fly-Through Windows 289
~ command (Image menu) 403
Create Patch… D
~ command (Tools menu) 318
Create Sun Study… Dashed Lines 347
~ command (Image menu) 408 ~ & Scaling 24
Create VR Object Movie Data Safety
~ command (Image menu) 249, 406 ~ dialog box (Options/Preferences) 289, 369
Create VR Scene Database Rules
~ command (Image menu) 252, 406 common ~ for Calculations 417

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


473
Index

Date Geometry Methods 183


~ for Sun Studies 409 Inserting chain elements 191
Decrease Indent Markers 186
~ command (Edit menu) 315 Merging chain elements 193
Default Hotspot of 2D Symbol 452 mirroring 190
Number Formats 185
Default Parameters of Zone Stamps 363
Number Style 186
Default values 102 options 187
Define Array 456 orientation of the chain 183
Defining a Story 337 Overlapping Points 189
Defining a VR Object 249 Pens 185
Defining a VR Scene 252 reference points 181, 184
Defining Skins for Composite Structures 355 rotation 190
Defining Zone Categories 362 scaling 24
Setting the Witness Line Length Manually 193
Delete View
techniques 188
~ command (QuickViews) 40
units 181
Deleting a Fly-Through Path 244 values 182
Deleting unwanted elements 79 Wall Thickness 188
Descriptors 411, 449 Dimensioning Standards 365
~ command (Calculate menu) 414 Dimensions
creating new ~ 414 dialog box (Options/Preferences) 185, 365
defined 414, 462
DIN
Deselection 121 dimension standard 366
Arrow tool 115
DIP switches 275
Detach
Dislocated Openings 148
~ button in Tool Settings 113
Display bar 16, 22, 428
Diagonal Geometry Method
~ for Objects 158 Display Menu 428
Diffuse Display Options
~ light options for Materials 358 ~ command (Options menu) 165, 328, 353
saving ~ in QuickViews 39
Digitizer
Configure ~ 275 Display windows 8
Digitizer Setup Displaying Doors and Windows 154
~ command (File menu) 273 Displaying the Construction Grid 31
Digitware folder 273 Division points of an edge 62
Dimension and Position Parameters Dome Roof
~ for Object and Lamp tool 160 drawing a ~ 167
Dimension Settings Geometry Method 165
~ dialog box 185 strips and segments 168
Dimension Text Settings Dome Roof Settings
~ dialog box 188 ~ dialog box 167
Dimension tool 181 Door Settings
associativity 182 dialog box 150
Automatic Wall Thickness Dimensioning 193 Door tool 146, 441
Canceling and confirming 184 3D display 146
chain components 181 creating in 3D 90
Deleting chain elements 192 definition 146
dimension points 181 Floor Plan and Section Attributes 153
dragging 190 General Settings 150
Editing a chain 189 Geometry Methods 148
features 181 Model Attributes 154
Fonts 151 orientation 150
Parameters 152

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


474
Index

Door/Window Settings Drawing Meshes 176


~ dialog box 453 Drawing Order of Elements 47
Door/Window tools Drawing Radial Dimensions 195
2D Wall Framing 154 Drawing Repetitive Parallels or Perpendicu-
Construction Methods 149 lars 56
Contour Option 453
Drawing Units 23
creating and modifying options 155
dialog box (Options/Preferences) 328, 365
Dimensioning Options 151
Empty Holes 146 Drawing Walls 125
head depth 151 Drawing Without the Grid System 33
jamb depth 151 DWG
mirroring and rotating ~ 156 ~ files 258
Nominal Dimensions 153 exporting to ~ 23
reveal depth 151 saving Section/Elevation in ~ format 265
sill width 151 DXF
sill/threshold depth 151 ~ files 258, 442
Techniques 155 exporting to ~ 23
Doors/Windows saving Section/Elevation in ~ format 265
Library parts 147
locations of ~ 148 E
showing/hiding ~ on the Floor Plan 330
Double Arrow Construction Method Edge Construction Method
~ for Arcs 232 ~ for Doors/Windows 149
~ for Lines 226 Edit Menu 288
Draft ~ in Text windows 313
~ Archive (TeamWork) 258 Edit mode
~ of the Project (TeamWork) 258 ~ in 3D Navigation palette 93
Saving a ~ copy (TeamWork) 264 Edit Origin 68
Drag Edit Properties…
~ command (Edit menu) 302 ~ command (Calculate menu) 410
~ elements 302 Edit Selection Set…
~ in 3D 91 ~ command (Edit menu) 311
Doors/Windows 155 Editing a Linear Element 70
Limitations 303
Editing a Polygonal Element 70
Radial Dimensions 197
Splines 235 Editing Components 449
Drag & Drop 41 Editing Existing Elements
~ floor plan elements 42 ~ in the 3D Window 91
~ library part files 42 Editing Mode
~ pictures 41 ~ in the 3D Window 84
~ text 41 Editing Parameters
Drag a Copy ~ of Library Parts 457
~ command (Edit menu) 306 Editing Perspectives 376
Drawing Editing Polygons 72
~ type Section/Elevation 11 Editing Splines 235
copy/save as ~ 290 Editing the 3D Window
Drawing Angular Dimensions 203 basics 83
Drawing Dimensions 182 Effects
Drawing Doors/Windows 146 ~ command (Image/PhotoRendering Set-
Drawing eXchange Format 258 tings) 393
Drawing Hotspots 236 Element List 13, 420
Drawing Level Dimensions 197 Element List Setup
Drawing Marquees 118 Complexity 421

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


475
Index

Filters 420 ~ layer 124


Format 422 copying ~ from the Model Picture window 12
Element transformation 61 manipulating ~ 124
Elevate selecting ~ 124, 293
~ command (Edit menu) 307 show/hide handles 329
~ in 3D 91 working with ~ 124
Elevation File formats available for textures 362
~ and Stories 89 File Menu 255
~ and the 3D Window 88 File Types Recognized by ArchiCAD 256
~ field in Coordinate Box 25 Fill Handles
~ pop-up menu in Coordinate Box 25 ~ in Display Options 329
Defining ~ 106 Fill List 350
Elevation Dimension Settings 200 Fill patterns 222
Elevation Dimension tool 199 ~ for Columns 142
~ and the 3D Window 201 ~ in GDL scripts 458
definition 199 ~ in Tool Settings 110
Editing options 201 ~ of Materials in 3D 359
Geometry Methods 200 ~ of Roofs 170
Markers 200 ~ of Slabs 163
techniques 201 ~ type parameters of Library Parts 458
Elevation Values 34 Link ~ to Fill Origin 223
~ in the Coordinate Box 34 Link ~ to Project Origin 223
~ in the Info Box 34 Fill Settings 221
EMF Fill tool 72, 220
merging ~ files 261 adding Area Text 221
saving the 3D window in ~ format 264 bitmap patterns 222
Emission bitmapped patterns 349
~ in PhotoRendering 395 blank fills 223
~ options for Materials 359 display options 353
End Arrow Construction Method framing options 223
~ for Arcs 232 Geometry Methods 220
~ for Lines 226 orientation 223
Error checking 105 plotting options 353
Estimate Complexity show/hide handles 329
~ of PhotoRendering 402 techniques 223
vectorial hatches 222, 349
Expert Material Definition
~ dialog box 387 Fill Types
~ command (Options menu) 24, 349
Explode
~ command (Tools menu) 320 Fillet
~ a polygon vertex 78
Exporting Calculations 464
~ command (Edit/Line Extras) 226
Exporting files ~ command (Tools/Line Extras) 321
~ in DWG/DXF format 23
Find & Replace
External Library Part Editors 467 ~ command (Edit menu) 314
Find & Select
F ~ command (Edit menu) 43, 294
Find Again
Factory settings 103, 256
~ command (Edit menu) 314
Figure Handles
Find Selection
~ in Display Options 329
~ command (Edit menu) 314
Figure Settings
Fit in Window
~ command (Options menu) 124
~ command (Display menu) 16, 22, 431
Figures 290, 293
Fit Objects to specific positions 157

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


476
Index

Fixed Angle Pair 67 Geographical location


Fixed Size Elements 24 determining a ~ 379
Flat Shading 394 Geometric Description Language (GDL) 267
FLC Geometry Methods 53
fly-throughs saved as ~ files 404 Angle Dimensions 204
Floating Palettes 17 Arcs/Circles 226
~ command (Display menu) 434 Columns 140
Floor Plan Dimensions 183
~ window 9 Doors & Windows 148
tools available in ~ 100 Elevation Dimensions 200
Fills 220
Floor Plan and Section Attributes
Lines 224
~ for Columns 142
Meshes 175
~ for Doors/Windows 153
Objects and Lamps 158
~ for Meshes 179
Roofs 164
~ for Roofs 170
Slabs 162
~ for Slabs 163
Splines 233
~ in Tool Settings 109
Walls 125
Floor Plan Attributes
GIF
~ for Walls 130
~ format for Textures 362
Floor Plan Construction Techniques 51 opening ~ files 259
Floor Plan Scale saving in ~ format 267
~ command (Options menu) 16, 23, 327 saving the 3D window in ~ format 264
Fly-Throughs 242 Go
defining ~ 242 ~ button in QuickViews 36
output formats 404 Go Down a Story
path 241 ~ command (Options/Stories) 339
Viewing ~ on Screen 405
Go To Line
Fog 379 ~ command (Edit menu) 314
~ in PhotoRendering 395
Go To Story...
Font ~ command (Options/Stories) 339
setting the ~ in Text windows 313
Go Up a Story
Fragments ~ command (Options/Stories) 339
2D Symbol ~ 447
Graphisoft Folder 467
Framed text
Graphisoft Shared Folder 467
displaying ~ 329
Gravity 34
Full Screen
~ and the 3D Window 88
~ command (Display menu) 432
~ buttons 25
~ in Tool Settings 106
G ~ Walls 129
enabling ~ 34
GDL 441 placing element on 0 level 34
~ text 268 placing elements on a Roof 34
saving a project in ~ format 264, 267 placing elements on a Slab 34
GENERAL Greek text 209
Material 111 displaying ~ 329
General Settings Grid
~ for Columns 142 ~ System 22, 30
~ for Doors/Windows 150 Controlling the ~ 33
~ for Meshes 179 Defining the ~ 30
~ for Roofs 169 Disabling the ~ 33
~ for Walls 129 skewed ~ 32
~ of Slabs 163

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


477
Index

Suspending ~ 33 ID Numbers
Grid Display internal unique ~ 112
~ command (Options menu) 31, 334 Image Brightness 400
Grid Snap 30 Image Menu 375
~ command (Options menu) 33, 333 Image Size & Background
Grid Switch ~ command (Image/PhotoRendering Set-
~ buttons 25, 32 tings) 397
Ground Color 397 Imaging and Listing
Group dialog box (Options/Preferences) 428
~ command (Tools menu) 316 Including a Background Picture 399
Groups 45 Increase Indent
~ and Layers 46 ~ command (Edit menu) 315
~ and Workspace Reservations 46 Info Box 18, 51, 81, 102, 115
Group Hierarchy 46 ~ functions 52
~ shape and size 434
H Construction Methods 52
Elevation values 34
Hairlines Geometry Methods 52
Line display option 330 Integer
Height ~ type parameters of Library Parts 458
~ of a Dome Roof 168 Integrating Slabs with Walls 164
Hidden Line Intersect
~ command (Image menu) 386, 392 ~ command (Tools/Line Extras) 322
Hidden Nodes in 3D 86 Intersections of Walls with a Vertical
Highlights Displacemen 136
~ in PhotoRendering 394 Invalid values 105
Holes
~ in Polygons 73 J
moving ~ 74
Home View 38 Jamb depth 151
~ command (Display menu) 432 Joining Walls Together 134
Home View & Grids… JPEG
~ command (Options menu) 30, 33, 331 ~ format for Textures 362
Horizontal Geometry Method merging ~ files 261
~ for Dimensions 183 opening ~ files 259
Horizontal Orientation Method saving in ~ format 267
~ for Labels 214
Horizontal/Vertical Angle Pair 67 K
Hot Links…
command (File/Save Special) 270 Keeping the zoomed part of the 3D view
Hotspot Settings 236 ~ when recreating the 3D window 368
Hotspot tool 236 Keycode
Hotspots 64 defined 448
Library Part ~ 451 Keys
HP DesignJet ~ command (Calculate menu) 415
~ plotter 278, 386 creating new ~ 416
defined 415
I
L
ID Fields
~ in Tool Settings 112 Label selected elements
~ command (Tools/Labels) 323

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


478
Index

Label Settings 212 placing options on a Slab or Roof 197


Label tool 211, 323 techniques 199
Auto-Label Orientation 214 Level Dimensions Settings 198
definition 211 Libraries in ArchiCAD 437
linked to elements 211 Library
Markers 213 ~ & Archive files 439
placing options 211 ~ handling 437
techniques 215 Library Part
text 215 saving the 3D window in ~ format 264, 268
Text Direction 213 Library Parts
types 213 ~ missing from Active Library 439
Labels 2D Symbol Window 13
~ submenu (Tools menu) 211, 323 3D View 445
Lamp Falloff Comments 451
~ in PhotoRendering 396 creating ~ 441
Lamp tool 157, 441 definition 441
brightness 160 drag & drop 42
color 160 Master Script 444
creating options in 3D 90 Master Window 442
Geometry Methods 158 Matching 2D & 3D Descriptions 446
obligatory parameters 454 moving ~ 437
outline on other stories 107 parameters 454
Parameters 160 placing ~ 440
parameters 160 Preview Picture 451
Layer Sets 342, 343 Properties Script 450
Defining New ~ 343 trimming ~ to Roofs 301
Modifying ~ 343 types 441
Layer Settings… Value List Script 450
command 340 Light Direction Setting 377
Layers 108 Light Sources
~ & Selection 44 ~ in PhotoRendering 396
~ command (Options menu) 340 Line Drawing
~ in Tool Settings 108 ~ options 372
clearing ~ 341 Line Extras
creating new ~ 341 ~ submenu (Tools menu) 321
defined 35 Line Settings 224
definition 340 Line tool 224
hidden ~ 108 arrowheads 225
invisible ~ 108 Construction Methods 225
listing options 342 Geometry Methods 224
locked ~ 108 techniques 226
locking/unlocking ~ 341
Line Types
renaming ~ 341
~ command (Options menu) 24, 346
saving ~ in QuickViews 39
~ for Doors/Windows 153
selecting all ~ 342
~ in GDL scripts 458
Showing/hiding ~ 341
~ in Tool Settings 110
Length ~ of Meshes 179
~ type parameters of Library Parts 457 ~ type parameters of Library Parts 458
Level Dimension tool 197 Line Weight
associativity of ~ 198 ~ in Display Options 330
definition 197
Linear Construction Method
editing text 199
~ for Dimensions 184
Markers 198
Lines

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


479
Index

creating polygons from ~ 72 Trying out (Applying) ~ 357


finding midpoint of ~ 226 type parameters of Library Parts 458
Intersections 226 Measurement units
line weight on floor plan 330 ~ & Coordinate box 23
Linked values 105 Measuring Distances 27
List Setup… Memory
~ command (Calculate menu) 418 ~ command (Image/PhotoRendering Set-
List Zones tings) 402
~ command (Calculate menu) 216 Menu commands 255
Listing Attributes 112 Menubar 16
Listing Attributes By Merge
~ command (Calculate menu) 427 ~ command (File menu) 260
Load Add-On… dimension chains 192
~ command (Tools menu) 326 Module files 260
Load Libraries… Picture files 261
~ command (File menu) 272 Project files 260
Lock Mesh Point Height
~ command (Tools menu) 317 ~ dialog box 177
Locked Elements 44 Mesh Settings
~ dialog box 178
M Mesh tool 175
basis plane and ridges 178
Magic Wand 61 Construction Methods 176
~ options for creating Roofs 166 Floor Plan and Section Attributes 179
3D limitations 62 General Settings 179
Magic Wand Settings Geometry Methods 175
~ command (Tools menu) 319 Line Types 179
Marker size 187 Model Attributes 179
Pen Colors 179
Marking Curved Elements' Centerpoints 196
techniques 180
Marquee tool 117
Meshes 72
~ and 3D imaging 385
creating ~ in 3D 91
~ techniques 121
cursor snapping in 3D 86
Construction Methods 117
Elevation 179
Geometry Methods 118
outline on other stories 107
polygons 78
User Defined Ridges 178
Selection Criteria 120
using the ~ in 3D 88 Metafile
opening ~ type files 259
Matching 2D & 3D Descriptions
~ of Library Parts 446 Midpoint of an edge 62
Materials Mirror
~ command (Options menu) 356 ~ command (Edit menu) 305
~ in ArchiCAD 356 Mirror a Copy
~ in GDL scripts 458 ~ command (Edit menu) 307
~ in Tool Settings 111 Mirroring
adding ~ 357 ~ Doors/Windows 156, 306
creating/deleting ~ 357 ~ elements 305
editing ~ 357 ~ Objects 160
Emission 359 Miscellaneous
Expert option 357 dialog box (Options/Preferences) 63, 371
fill patterns in 3D 359 Missing Library Items
linking ~ definition to different surfaces 111 ~ command (Window menu) 257
Reflection 358 Missing Library Parts
Transparency 359 ~ window 15

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


480
Index

Model ~ command (Calculate menu) 410


~ type Section/Elevation 11 New View…
Model Attributes ~ command (QuickViews) 39
~ for Meshes 179 Next View 16
~ for Walls 132 ~ command (Display menu) 433
~ in Tool Settings 111 No Arrows Construction Method
~ of Doors/Windows 154 ~ for Arcs 232
Model Pictures ~ for Lines 226
~ windows 12 Nodes 70
copying from the ~ window 12 Nominal Frame Thickness 453
copying/pasting ~ to the Floor Plan 123 Non-Breaking Text Block
saving ~ 12, 265 creating a ~ 206
Modifying Attributes 113 Numeric Coordinates 27
Modifying Elements through the Info Box 52 cancelling ~ input 29
Modules 260 Completing ~ input 28
saving a project in ~ format 264 inputting ~ 33
More Sun Previewing ~ input 28
~ dialog box (Image/3D Projection Set-
tings) 378, 382 O
Motion Controls
~ for Fly-Throughs 245 Object Settings 159
Motion Resolution Object tool 157, 441
~ for Fly-Throughs 247 creation in 3D 90
Motion tools cursor snapping in 3D 86
~ in 3D Navigation palette 93 Geometry Methods 158
Mouse Constraints 33, 51, 65 hotspots 157
Angle Pairs 65 length & width 160
Angle Pairs vs. Coordinate Constraint 70 linking horizontal and vertical values 160
Coordinate Constraints 65 outline on other stories 107
dialog box (Options/Preferences) 366 Parameters 160
Moving Elements 302 positioning handle 158
Arrow tool 116 primary hotspot 158
scaling 24
Moving Holes in Polygons 74
stretching 116, 161
Moving the drawing in the worksheet 431 techniques 161
Multiply Obligatory parameters
~ command (Edit menu) 308 ~ of Library Parts 454
~ Doors/Windows 156
Obtuse Geometry Method
~ openings 156
~ for Angle Dimensions 204
Options 309
Vertical Displacement 310 Offset polygons 57
One point perspective 376
N Open As
~ option for Library Parts 442
Natural Splines 233 Open Debugger
New ~ command (Edit menu) 315
~ command (File menu) 255 Open Library Part…
New and Reset ~ command (File menu) 272
~ command (File menu) 103, 256 Open Splines 235
New Library Part Open Transport 279
~ command (File menu) 272 Open…
New Properties ~ command (File menu) 256
Opening a Plan 257

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


481
Index

Opening an Archive 257 ments 292


Opening Dialog Boxes 102 Patch
Opening Files through a Network 259 creating a ~ 318
Options for Fly-Through 383 Path Options
Options Menu 327 ~ for Fly-Throughs 245
Orienting Doors/Windows 149 PCI Settings 277
Origin 25 Pen Colors
~ in 3D 84 ~ cut wall edges in Section 133
~ indicator 26 ~ for Columns 142
Edit ~ 26 ~ for Dimensions 185
Project ~ 25 ~ for Doors/Windows 153
User ~ 25 ~ for Meshes 179
Orthogonal Object Geometry Method 158 ~ for Roofs 170
~ for Slabs 163
Outland TCP 279
~ in GDL scripts 458
Overexposure Correction 401 ~ in Tool Settings 109
Overlapping Elements 104 ~ type parameters of Library Parts 458
~ wall contours 131
P ~ wall fill backgrounds 131
~ wall fill patterns 131
Page Setup… Pen Weight 345
~ command (File menu) 285 approximative ~ in Tool Settings 109
Painting screenshot Pens
copy/save as ~ 290 ~ in ArchiCAD 344
Palette Shapes Pens & Colors
~ command (Display/Floating Palettes) 434 ~ command (Options menu) 344
Pan 16 Performing Calculations 461
~ button 22 Permanent Integrity Checking 371
~ command (Display menu) 9, 431
Perpendicular Constraint 55
Parallel constraint 55
Perpendicular Projection Points 64
Parallel Orientation Method
Perspective Settings
~ for Labels 214
~ dialog box (Image/3D Projection Settings) 375
Parallel Projection Points 64
Perspective Views 241, 242
Parallel Projection Settings Motion Modes 95
~ dialog box (Image/3D Projection Settings) 380 Motion Tools 95
Parallel projections 243, 390 navigation in ~ 95
Parameter Transfer 104 PhotoRender Projection
Parameter type ~ command (Image menu) 402
~ dialog box 456 PhotoRendering
Parameters ~ engines 394
~ in Tool Settings 109 ~ methods 394
~ of Doors/Windows 152 ~ options 397
~ of Library Parts 454 partial ~ 401
~ of Materials 111 PhotoRendering Settings
~ of Objects/Lamps 160 ~ command (Image menu) 393
Paste PICS
~ command (Edit menu) 105, 123, 291 fly-throughs saved as ~ files 404
~ drawings from other applications 292 PICT
Paste Control checkboxes 338 ~ format for Textures 362
Pasting Floor Plan Elements 292 fly-through saved as ~ files 404
Pasting from Other Applications 292 merging ~ files 261
Pasting Section/Elevation Window Ele- opening ~ files 259

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


482
Index

saving a project in ~ format 264 ~ for Fills 220


saving in ~ format 267 ~ for Marquees 118
saving Section/Elevation in ~ format 265 ~ for Mesh tool 175
saving the 3D window in ~ format 264 ~ for Roofs 164
Picture file ~ for Slabs 162
merging a ~ 261 ~ for Walls 127
opening a ~ 258 Polygon paths
saving in ~ format 267 ~ for Fly-Throughs 246
Pictures Polygons 72
saving ~ 265 ~ & Marquee areas 78
Pivot Line bending straigth segments of ~ 75
~ of Roofs 165 copying/saving ~ from 3D view 291
Placing a Panoramic Camera 251 drafting contours of ~ 72
Placing Door/Window Library Parts 147 editing ~ in 3D 93
editing the edges of ~ 75
Placing Library Parts 440
editing the nodes of ~ 77
Plain Construction Method extending ~ 76
~ for Columns 141 filleting nodes 78
Plan File 265 holes in ~ 73
PlanDump inserting new nodes to ~ 75
~ command (File/Save Special) 271 modifying the contours of ~ 75
PlayBack 403, 408 repositioning nodes 77
Plot resizing ~ 76, 78
~ command (File menu) 283 stretching/shrinking ~ with the Marquee 121
Plot Setup substracting from ~ 77
~ command (File menu) 276 tracing ~ contours 73
PlotFlow 284 PolyLine Geometry Method
PlotMaker 284 ~ for Lines 224
fly-throughs saved as ~ files 404 ~ for Zones 216
retouching intersections in ~ 135 Polyroof Geometry Method
saving a project in ~ format 264 ~ for Roofs 165
saving in ~ format 266 Polyroof Settings
saving Section/Elevation in ~ format 265 ~ dialog box 166
saving the 3D window in ~ format 264 PolyWall Geometry Method 125
Plotter Positioning Objects 157, 158
~ Model List 277 PostScript fonts 282
Configuring the ~ 278 plotting ~ 282
Font usage 281 Pre-Sets
Selecting a ~ 276 projection ~ 382
Plotter type Predefined Wall surface materials 132
~ pop-up menu/combo box 276 Preferences
Plotting Fills 353 ~ command (Options menu) 364
Plotting through a Spool Folder 284 Preview Area
Plotware folder 277 ~ for Library Parts 107
Point Geometry Method ~ of perspectives 376
for Elevation Dimensions 200 Preview Picture
Polar coordinates 27 ~ of a Library Part 451
PolyArc Geometry Method Previous View 16
~ for Arcs 229 ~ command (Display menu) 433
Polygon Fills Print
~ in Display Options 330 ~ command (File menu) 285
Polygon Geometry Method Print View & Grids 286
Printing

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


483
Index

~ the Grid 31 Pin button 40


Text Size 286 previous views in ~ 433
Project Info… QuickViews 38
~ command (File menu) 271 Sections/Elevations 37
Project Notes shape control 38
~ window 14 Stories 36
Project orientation 380 using the ~ 40
view list menu 39
Project Origin 26
resetting the ~ 27 Quit
~ command (File menu) 287
Project Preview
~ in Open dialog box 256
~ Window 14 R
Projection Points
Radial Dimension Settings 196
parallel and perpendicular ~ 64
Radial Dimension tool 195
Projection types 381
Label Orientation 196
Project's Actual Size 24 techniques 196
Prompt Box 54, 63 Real Number
Properties ~ type parameters of Library Parts 457
~ in Tool Settings 112 RealVR 406
~ of construction elements 462
Rebuild
assigning ~ 410
~ command (Display menu) 368, 428
defined 410
Local Components 411 Rebuild All Models
Local Descriptors 411 ~ command (Display menu) 430
Parameters 410 Rebuild Drawing
Properties by Assignment ~ command (Display menu) 429
~ button in Tool Settings 113 Rebuild Model
Properties Script ~ command (Display menu) 81, 429
~ of Library Parts 450 Rebuilding the 3D Window 428
Property Data Structure 461 Recent Documents
Property Objects 461 ~ command (File menu) 287
assigning Criteria to ~ 412 Recording Parallel Projections 382
defined 410 Rectangle Geometry Method
~ for Fills 220
Q ~ for Lines 224
~ for Marquees 119
QTVR Player ~ for Roofs 164
~ application by Apple 248, 406 ~ for Slabs 162
QuickTime ~ for Walls 126
compression methods 405 Redo
fly-throughs saved as ~ movies 404 ~ command (Edit menu) 79, 288
QuickTime VR 406 Redraw
QuickViews ~ command (Display menu) 428
~ button 16, 40 Redraw All Overviews
defined 38 ~ in QuickViews 38, 40
defining ~ 36 Reference Line
saving ~ 40 ~ of Walls 52, 127, 134, 148
QuickViews palette 16, 19, 36 Refreshing the screen 428
~ shape and size 434 Regular Sloped Geometry Method
choosing Home in ~ 433 ~ for Mesh tool 175
Go button 36 Relative Construction Methods 33, 54
Relative coordinate values 27

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


484
Index

Remote Elements displaying Pivot Lines 329


line type on other stories 108 elevation 169
Remote Intersections fill patterns 110, 170
Section points on ~ 64 Floor Plan and Section Attributes 170
Remote Roofs General Settings 169
Trimming Walls with ~ 175, 302 Geometry Methods 164
multiple colors for ~ 170
Remote Tangential Points 64
outline on other stories 107
Removing Redundant Lines 268 Pen Colors 170
Rendering Engines 394 Pivot Line 165
RenderMan Roof Pitch 170
fly-through output format 404 Selection 171
Renew All Drawings Show Pivot Lines 165
~ command (Display menu) 430 techniques 171
Renew Section/Elevation thickness 170
~ command (Display menu) 429 Trimming elements 299
Repeat (Last Command Name) Roof Trimming
~ command (Edit menu) 289 ~ in Tool Settings 111
Replace Again Roofs
~ command (Edit menu) 314 transforming other elements into ~ 61
Report Window 15 trimming construction elements to ~ 174
Reset Rotate
~ in 3D Navigation palette 96 ~ command (Edit menu) 304
Reset Default Order ~ Doors/Windows 304
~ command (Tools menu) 48, 317 ~ elements 304
Resize Rotate a Copy
~ command (Edit menu) 296 ~ command (Edit menu) 306
Restoring a Wall/Column after Trimming 302 Rotated Diagonal Geometry Method
~ for Objects 158
Reveal
Door/Window ~ 151 Rotated Geometry Method
~ for Columns 140
Reveal Construction Method
~ for Mesh tool 175
~ for Doors/Windows 149
~ for Objects 158
Reveal Setup
Rotated Rectangle Geometry Method
~ dialog box 151
~ for Fills 220
Reverting to a previous step 288 ~ for Lines 224
Ridges ~ for Marquees 119
~ of meshes 178 ~ for Mesh tool 175
Right-Angle Geometry Method ~ for Roofs 165
~ for Columns 140 ~ for Walls 126
Roof Edge Angle 170 Rubberband line
Roof Edges ~ & Grid Snap 30
trimming ~ 168
Roof Level Lines S
~ command (Tools/Line Extras) 322
Roof Pivot Lines Save
~ in Display Options 329 ~ command (File menu) 263
Roof Settings 169 Save as…
Roof tool 72, 164 ~ command (File menu) 263
~ and the 3D Window 90 File Format for Calculations 265
3D Roof Intersections 172 File Formats for Sections/Elevations 264
cursor snapping in 3D 86 File Formats for the 3D window 264
determing roof elevations 171 Save Special

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


485
Index

~ command (File menu) 268, 399 ~ command (Edit menu) 43, 124, 293, 315
Saving Library Parts 460 Select Image Items…
Saving Model Pictures 265 ~ command (Image menu) 384
Saving Sections/Elevations 82 Select Library Browser
Saving the Sun Study 409 ~ command (Window Settings) 441
Scale Selection
~ & output 23 ~ area 118
~ & vectorial Fill patterns 351 ~ by surface 86
~ button 16, 23, 328 ~ criteria for the Marquee tool 120
architectural ~ 21 ~ in 3D 85
Changing ~ 24 ~ in the Section/Elevation window 81
Digitizer 274 ~ methods 43
Drawing ~ 21, 23 ~ methods in 3D 86
Lines Types & Scaling 349 Arrow tool 43, 114
Output ~ 23 Element Types for 3D Imaging 384
Plotting ~ 284 Hotspots 44
Printing ~ 286 Layers 44
saving ~ in QuickViews 39 locked elements 44
setting the drawing ~ 327 Marquee 43
Scaled Elements 24 Shift-clicking 43
Stories for 3D Imaging 384
Schedule Marker 152
Send Backward
Scrapbook
~ command (Tools menu) 317
fly-through saved as ~ 404
Send Backward:
Scroll bars
~ command (Tools menu) 48
~ in Floor Plan window 22
Send to Back
Section Depth
~ command (Tools menu) 48, 317
~ in Display Options 329
Series Geometry Method
Section Lines
for Elevation Dimensions 200
placing ~ 237
Set City
Section Points
dialog box (Image/3D Projection Settings) 379
~ on remote intersections 64
Set Date
Section/Elevation Settings 238
~ for Sun Studies 409
Section/Elevation tool 11, 19, 110, 237, 390
Set Home View
Arrowheads 239
~ command (Display menu) 433
displaying Section Depth 329
Font & size 239 Set to Current Projection 383
Line types 238 Setting Up a Skewed Grid 32
Section Pens 240 Shading
selection 240 ~ command (Image menu) 392
techniques 240 ~ mode 386
Vertical Range 239 Shadow Casting
Section/Elevation windows 11, 241 ~ in 3D 387
~ in QuickViews palette 37 ~ in PhotoRendering 396
copying/pasting ~ contents to the Floor Plan 123 Shininess
Drawing type 80, 81 ~ options for Materials 359
elements appearing in the ~ 384 Show All Layers
file formats for saving ~ 264 ~ command (Options/Layers) 343
Model type 80 Show QuickViews
naming ~ 239 ~ command 40
tools available in ~ 100 Shrinking
types 11 ~ Doors/Windows 155
working in ~ 80 ~ Elements 115, 295
Select All

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


486
Index

Side views 381 Special Attributes


Sill 151 ~ of Library Parts 452
Sill Construction Method Special Point Constraint 59
~ for Doors/Windows 149 Special Snap Points 62
Simple Openings 147 Specular Color
Simple Roofs ~ options for Materials 358
drawing ~ 165 Specular Light
Single Line Geometry Method 224 ~ options for Materials 358
Single Wall Geometry Method 125 Spline Settings 234
Size Spline Techniques 235
setting the ~ of fonts in Text windows 313 Spline tool 232
Size to 2D Drawing Construction Methods 234
~ button 443 creating polygons from splines 72
Size to 3D Window Geometry Methods 233
option for photorenderings 400 transforming splines into roofs 168
Skew Geometry Method Split
~ for Dimensions 184 ~ a polygon 79
Skewed Grid ~ a wall 137
~ button 25 ~ command (Edit menu) 297
setting up a ~ 32 Spool Folder 281
Sky Color 397 StairMaker 442
Slab Settings 162 Start Arrow Construction Method
Slab tool 72, 162 ~ for Arcs 232
3D creation 90 ~ for Lines 226
Composite structures for ~ 354 Startup Dialog Box 8
cursor snapping in 3D 86 Startup Library 438
fill patterns 110, 163 Static Dimensions 186
Floor Plan and Section Attributes 163 Stop drawing operations 79
General Settings 163 Stories
Geometry Methods 162 ~ command (Options menu) 336
multiple colors for ~ 163 ~ in QuickViews palette 36
outline on other stories 107 Adding ~ 337
Pen Colors 163 defined 35
scaling 24 List of ~ 340
techniques 164 Moving elements between ~ 338
thickness and height of ~ 163 Numbering 337
trim to Roof 301 Removing ~ 337
Smooth Path at Cameras 244 Selection 337
Smooth Surfaces Story Settings…
~ in PhotoRendering 396 ~ command (Options/Stories) 336
Snap Grid 30, 31, 332 Straight Walls
~ offset from origin 32 drawing ~ 125
Snap On/Snap Off 33 Stretch
Snapping to grid ~ command (Edit menu) 138, 295
Enabling ~ 333 ~ Doors/Windows 155, 295
Suspending ~ 334 ~ elements 295
Solo Project 257 ~ elements with Arrow 115
Saving ~ 264 ~ Objects 161
Source ~ with Marquee 296
~ for creating Fly-Throughs 404 horizontal ~ in 3D 91
Source Debugging for GDL Script Win- Limitations 296
vertical ~ in 3D 92
dows 459

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


487
Index

Sun 378, 382 angle 208


~ light parameters 378 direction 208
Sun Moves with Viewer Font, Style & Size 207
~ for QTVR Objects 250 Justification & Anchor Point 208
Sun Options Leading 208
~ for Fly-Throughs 247 scaling 24
slant 208
Sun Study
techniques 209
viewing in saving the ~ 409
Text Window Find
Suppressing Groups 45
~ dialog box 314
Surface Materials
Text Windows
~ of Doors and Windows 154
Edit menu commands in ~ 313
GDL description 154
Texture Settings
Surveyor’s unit 365, 380
~ dialog box 360
Suspend Groups
Textures
~ command (Tools menu) 45, 316
~ & Libraries 362
Switching tools 101 ~ & the Archive format 362
Symbol Colors 153 ~ assigned to Materials 111
Symbol Fills ~ in GDL script 396
~ & Scaling 24 associating ~ to Materials 360
Symbol Lines 347 Three point perspective 377
~ & Scaling 24 Three-Point Geometry Method
~ for Arcs/Circles 227
T Threshold 151
TIFF
Tabulations ~ format for Textures 362
~ in Text windows 313 merging ~ files 261
Tangent Point Geometry Method opening ~ files 259
~ for Circles 227 saving in ~ format 267
Tapered Walls 139 saving linked pictures in ~ format 269
Target point 377 saving the 3D window in ~ format 264
TCP/IP CTB tools 279 Tool Settings
TCPack 279 ~ command (Edit menu) 312
Team Project ~ dialog boxes 101
Saving the ~ 263 ~ of a single element 103
Terrain Settings ~ of dissimilar elements 103
~ dialog box 467 ~ of existing elements 103
~ of multiple elements 103
Text
applying modified settings 103
~ type parameters of Library Parts 458
Attributes 105
Display Options 209
Cancel button 109
Text Blocks common elements of ~ 105
~ in Display Options 329 Construction Methods 106
creating breaking ~ 206 default settings 102
creating non-breaking ~ 206 editable fields of ~ 105
editing ~ 210 Fill pattern 110
placing ~ 206 Floor Plan and Section Attributes 109
selecting ~ 209 General Controls 105
stretching ~ 209 Gravity 106
Text Settings ID Field 112
~ dialog box 207 layer selection field 108
Text Style Line Type 110
~ command (Edit menu) 313 Listing Attributes 112
Text tool 206 Materials 111

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


488
Index

Model Attributes 111 U


OK button 109
Outlines on Other Stories 107 Uncomment
Parameters 109 ~ command (Edit menu) 314
Pencolor palette 109
Undo
Preview Area 107
~ command (Edit menu) 79, 288, 293
Properties 112
number of steps stored 370
Roof Trimming 111
Vertical Elevation 106 Ungroup
~ command (Tools menu) 316
Toolbar 16
Units
Toolbox 17, 99
~ command (Calculate menu) 416
~ and the 3D Window 83
calculation ~ defined 416
~ shape and size 434
default shape 99 Unlabel selected elements
third party application's icon in ~ 467 ~ command (Tools/Labels) 323
Tools 99, 100 Unlink Section/Elevation
~ available in different windows 100 ~ command (Display menu) 81, 429
attributes 113 Unlock
Tools Menu 316 ~ command (Tools menu) 318
Top view 381 Unlock All Elements
~ in perspective 377 ~ command (Tools menu) 318
topCAD Unwrapped Columns 143
fly-throughs saved as ~ files 404 Update Zones…
saving in ~ format 267 ~ command (Tools menu) 324
saving Section/Elevation in ~ format 265 US Builder
saving the 3D window in ~ format 264 dimension standard 366
Tracing Construction Elements with Walls 139 User Origin
Tracing Method ~ button 25, 26
~ for transforming curved elements 320 ~ in 3D 84
Transform Arc into Circle 232 Creating a ~ 26
Transform Circle into Arc 232 Using the Angle Pair Mechanism 66
Transforming an Outline into Pitched Roof 166
Transforming curved elements into poly-
V
gons 319 Value List Script
Transforming curved elements into Walls 319 ~ of Library Parts 450
Transmittance Vector Fonts folder 282
~ options for Materials 359 Vectorial 3D Hatching 387
Transparency Vectorial Hatches 350
~ in PhotoRendering 395 ~ & scaling 24
~ in Shading 387 plotting ~ 354
Trapezoid Geometry Method Veneer
~ for Walls 126 Column ~ thickness 142
Trim to Roof 174 Vertical displacement of elements 307
~ command (Edit menu) 139, 174, 299
Vertical Elevation
Walls 301
~ in Tool Settings 106
Trimmed Model Views 87
Vertical Geometry Method
Trimming Roof Edges 168 ~ for Dimensions 183
TrueType fonts 282 Vertical Orientation Method
plotting ~ 282 ~ for Labels 214
Turn Digitizer On/Off Vertical structure
~ command (File menu) 276 Defining the ~ of a Project 106
Two point perspective 377

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


489
Index

Video for Windows Pen Colors 131


fly-through saved as ~ files 404 polygon type walls 72
View Cone 376 scaling 24
~ for QTVR Scenes 407 splitting 137
Viewing on Screen the Sun Study 409 stretching 137
stretching with Marquee 122
Viewpoint 377
Surface Materials 132
~ for Parallel Projections 382
techniques 134
Virtual Reality 241 thickness 129
VR Object Settings trim to Roof 301
~ dialog box 249 Wavefront
VR Objects 241, 248, 406 ~ files 258, 442
Parameters 250 What's Saved in the Different File Formats? 265
techniques 250
Window List 435
View Direction 250
Window Menu 434
VR Scene Settings
~ dialog box 253 Window Settings
dialog box 150
VR Scenes 241, 251
opening ~ in QTVR Player 407 Window tool 146
panoramas 407 3D creation 90
parameters 253 3D display 146
saving ~ as pictures 407 definition 146
techniques 253 Floor Plan and Section Attributes 153
General Settings 150
Geometry Methods 148
W Model Attributes 154
Parameters 152
Wall Settings
~ dialog box 128 Windows 441
Wall tool 125 Wireframe
~ & Columns 143 ~ command (Image menu) 392
~ & Doors/Windows 125 With Centerpoint Construction Method
~ & Roofs 125 ~ for Radial Dimensions 195
~ & Slabs 125 Without Centerpoint Construction Method
3D creation 90 ~ for Radial Dimensions 195
axial walls 130 Witness Line 187
Composite structures for ~ 354 ~ formats 186
connected walls 127 Dynamic ~ option 186
Construction Methods 128 Elevation Dimensions 200
creating polygons from walls 72 WMF
cursor snapping in 3D 85 merging ~ files 261
definition 125 saving the 3D window in ~ format 264
elevation 129 Working in the 3D Window 83
extending walls 137 Working in the Section/Elevation Windows 80
fill patterns 110
Workplace
Floor Plan Attributes 130
components of the ArchiCAD ~ 7
General Settings 129
Geometry Methods 125 Wrapped Columns 143
height 129 Wrapped Construction Method
holes 138 ~ for Columns 141
Inserting Doors and Windows 127 Write Report
intersections 135, 136 ~ option in Preferences 15
Model Attributes 132
offset 130
orientation icons 128

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


490
Index

Z
Zone Categories 216
~ command (Options menu) 362
creating ~ 363
Zone Fill 215
Zone List 425
~ window 13, 216
Complexity 425
Filters 425
Format 426
formats for saving the ~ 265
Related Constructions 426
Zone Polygons
~ in Display Options 330
Zone Settings 217
Zone Stamp 215
default parameters 363
Zone tool 72, 215, 441
~ and Drawing Order 50
Categories 218
Category Code 362
Category Color 362
Category Name 362
Definition Methods 216
height and elevation 219
moving holes 75
name and number 218
Parameters 219
Stamp Preview 218
techniques 219
updating zones 324
Zone Stamp 362
Zone Stamp Text Size 218
ZOOM
~ files 442
opening ~ files 258
Zoom In
~ button 22, 430
~ command (Display menu) 16, 430
Zoom Level
~ button 16, 24, 432
saving ~ in QuickViews 39
Zoom Out
~ button 22, 431
~ command (Display menu) 16, 430
Zoom to Selection
~ command (Display menu) 431

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


491
Index

ArchiCAD 6.0 Reference Guide


492

You might also like